BEAMPlus New Buildings v2 0 (2021edition)

(05.
2021)
BEAM Plus New Buildings Version 2.0 Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1. Introduction 1
1.1 Overview 1
1.2 Framework 5
1.3 Summary of Credits 8
2. Integrated Design and Construction Management (IDCM) 34
IDCM P1 Sustainability Champions – Project 36
IDCM P2 Environmental Management Plan 39
IDCM P3 Timber Used for Temporary Works 42
IDCM 1 Sustainability Champions - Design 46
IDCM 2 Complimentary Certification 49
IDCM 3 Integrated Design Process 52
IDCM 4 Life Cycle Costing 60
IDCM 5 Commissioning 62
IDCM 6 Sustainability Champions – Construction 66
IDCM 7 Measures to Reduce Site Emissions 69
IDCM 8 Construction and Demolition Waste Recycling 79
IDCM 9 Construction IAQ Management 84
IDCM 10 Considerate Construction 87
IDCM 11 Building Management Manuals 90
IDCM 12 Operator Training plus Chemical Storage and Mixing Room 94
IDCM 13 Digital Facility Management Interface 99
IDCM 14 Occupant Engagement Platform 102
IDCM 15 Document Management System 104
IDCM 16 BIM Integration 107
IDCM 17 Design for Engagement and Education on Green Buildings 111
Copyright © 2021 BEAM Society Limited. All rights reserved.

3. Sustainable Site (SS) 113
SS P1 Minimum Landscaping Requirements 116
SS 1 Pedestrian-oriented and Low Carbon Transport 119
SS 2 Neighbourhood Amenities 128
SS 3 Building Design for Sustainable Urbanism 133
SS 4 Neighbourhood Daylight Access 138
SS 5 Noise Control for Building Equipment 141
SS 6 Light Pollution Control 143
SS 7 Biodiversity Enhancement 147
SS 8 Urban Heat Island Mitigation 153
SS 9 Immediate Neighbourhood Wind Environment 165
SS 10 Outdoor Thermal Comfort 168
SS 11 Stormwater Management 172
SS 12 Design for Climate Change Adaptation 175
4. Materials and Waste (MW) 177
MW P1 Minimum Waste Handling Facilities 178
MW 1 Building Re-use 182
MW 2 Modular and Standardised Design 185
MW 3 Prefabrication 187
MW 4 Design for Durability and Resilience 190
MW 5 Sustainable Forest Products 194
MW 6 Recycled Materials 198
MW 7 Ozone Depleting Substances 201
MW 8 Regional Materials 205
MW 9 Use of Green Products 207
MW 10 Life Cycle Assessment 213
MW 11 Adaptability and Deconstruction 215
MW 12 Enhanced Waste Handling Facilities 220

5. Energy Use (EU) 225
EU P1 Minimum Energy Performance 227
EU 1 Low Carbon Passive Design 231
EU 2 Reduction of CO2 Emissions 240
EU 3 Peak Electricity Demand Reduction 251
EU 4 Metering and Monitoring 255
EU 5 Renewable and Alternative Energy Systems 262
EU 6 Air-Conditioning Units 267
EU 7 Clothes Drying Facilities 271
EU 8 Energy Efficient Appliances 274
6. Water Use (WU) 276
WU P1 Minimum Water Saving Performance 278
WU 1 Annual Water Use 282
WU 2 Water Efficient Irrigation 284
WU 3 Water Efficient Appliances 288
WU 4 Water Leakage Detection 290
WU 5 Twin Tank System 292
WU 6 Cooling Tower Water 294
WU 7 Effluent Discharge to Foul Sewers 296
WU 8 Water Harvesting and Recycling 299
7. Health and Wellbeing (HWB) 308
HWB P1 Minimum Ventilation Performance 310
HWB 1 Healthy and Active Living 317
HWB 2 Biophilic Design 319
HWB 3 Inclusive Design 324
HWB 4 Enhanced Ventilation 327
HWB 5 Waste Odour Control 334

HWB 6 Acoustics and Noise 336
HWB 7 Indoor Vibration 344
HWB 8 Indoor Air Quality 346
HWB 9 Thermal Comfort 352
HWB 10 Artificial Lighting 358
HWB 11 Daylight 362
HWB 12 Biological Contamination 364
8. Innovations and Additions (IA) 366
IA 1 Innovations and Additions 367
9. Appendix 369
Appendix 9.1 – Glossary 369
Appendix 9.2 – EU 2 Path 1 (Performance Approach) 378
Appendix 9.3 – EU 2 Path 2 (Prescriptive Approach) 399
Appendix 9.4 – Space Type 403
Appendix 9.5 – Stormwater Detention Systems O&M Checklist 405
Note:
The proponent is cautioned that the supporting information for credit claim has to be
taken at the material time, which needs to be captured during the process and cannot
be done retrospectively.
First issue September 2019

This edition May 2021

BEAM Plus New Buildings Version 2.0 Introduction
1. Introduction
1.1 Overview
BEAM Building Environmental Assessment Method (BEAM) Plus is a

comprehensive environmental assessment tool for buildings which is carried
out on a voluntary basis. It defines the best practice criteria for a range of
sustainability issues across the whole life-cycle of buildings and projects,
such as how buildings should be designed, constructed and operated, etc.
Recognised as one of the world’s leading green building assessment tools,
it provides a comprehensive set of performance standards that can be
pursued by developers and owners.
Owned and operated by the BEAM Society Limited (BSL), BEAM Plus New
Buildings is one of the BEAM Plus rating tools that cover the design and
construction of new buildings.
Based on the credit achievement where the standard or defined

performance criteria are satisfied, the project will be graded Platinum, Gold,
Silver or Bronze, to reflect the overall performance.
BEAM Plus The upgraded BEAM Plus New Buildings Version 2.0 (NB v2.0) aims to be
New Buildings practical, clear and standardised in defining the key elements of green
Version 2.0 buildings including health and wellbeing, hygiene, site impacts, use of
(NB v2.0) materials, water quality, energy efficiency, indoor environmental quality, etc.
During the upgrade process, the following fundamentals were established:
Above Statutory Requirements – Requirements for prerequisites and credits

should be set above the statutory requirements.
Adaptability – Routes for standard and bespoke building types should be

established. Requirements for standard building types should be better
defined with more assurance of the applicability of the criteria.
Certainty – Requirements should be clearly defined to reduce ambiguity and

promote better certainty in the assessment process. Submittal requirements
should be standardised as far as practicable.
Practicality – Standards should be achievable with respect to state-of-the-

art of the building industry to promote wider adoption of green building
practices yet pose reasonable challenges for better quality, performance
and cost-effectiveness. Submittal requirements at Provisional Assessment
Stage should be practicable with respect to normally available design
information at the design stage in a typical project timeframe.
It is envisaged that these fundamentals form the basis of the holistic green
building performance indicators which suitably integrate different green
features into a user-friendly assessment tool.
BEAM Society BEAM is owned and operated by BSL, an independent non-profit public
Limited body whose membership is drawn from many professional and interest
(BSL) groups in Hong Kong’s building construction and real estate sectors. BSL
is committed to developing and implementing the BEAM assessment tools,
assessing green buildings and training professionals.
Hong Kong Green HKGBC was established in 2009 as Hong Kong’s industry body that
Building Council coordinates efforts towards green building. HKGBC certifies BEAM Plus
(HKGBC) projects, accredits BEAM Professional (BEAM Pro), BEAM Affiliate (BA) and
BEAM Assessors (BAS).
Copyright © 2021 BEAM Society Limited. All rights reserved. 1

Development of The development of BEAM Plus NB v2.0 was led by a BSL Steering
BEAM Plus NB Committee comprising industry practitioners and experts. Industry
Version 2.0 stakeholders have been consulted via engagement workshops for feedback
and opinion on areas including but not limited to the overall framework,
performance categories and their relative emphasis, assessment criteria,
submission requirement and grading methodology. The Steering
Committee comprises:
Convener – Sr Kenneth Chan
Members – Prof CS Poon; Ir CS Wong; Mr John Herbert; Mr KM So; Ms

Susan Leung; Dr TT Chow; Mr Benny Au; Mr Alex Leung; Mr Justin Li; Mr
Joel Chan Cho-sing; Ir Kim Tang Cheuk; Sr Kenneth Yun Ying Kit; Mr Tak
Yip Wong; Dr Ivan Fung; Prof Jack Cheng; Dr Ren Chao; Ir Clarence Tze
Ka-yan; Mr Dominic Lam; Mr Keith YUE; Mr Kevin Ng; Ir CF Leung; Prof
Daniel WT Chan; Ir Dr Raymond Yau; Mr Ryan Lee; Dr Benny Chow; Mr
Martin Wan; Ir Victor Cheung
Advisors – Ms Alice LF Yeung; Ms Karen Cheung; Mr Patrick Chan; Mr K.C.

Lo; Dr Lau Kwok Keung; Mr Stephen Yim Yu-chau; Ms Irene Tong
Disclaimer BEAM Plus has been prepared with the assistance and participation of
many individuals and representatives from various organisations. The
outcome represents a general consensus, but unanimous support from
each and every organisation and individual consulted is not implied. The
BEAM Plus documentation shall be revised on a regular basis and as
frequently as necessary. BSL reserves the right to amend, update and
change this Manual from time to time without prior notice. Where changes
in regulations necessitate changes to the assessment criteria, they will be
issued to all parties involved in an assessment and will be announced in
the BSL’s website. An appropriate transitional period shall be allowed for
projects undergoing assessment process.
It should be noted that none of the parties involved in the funding of BEAM,
including BSL and its members, provide any warranties or assume any
liability or responsibility to the users of BEAM, or any third parties for the
accuracy, completeness or use of, or reliance on, any information contained
in BEAM, or from any injuries, losses, or damages arising out of such use
or reliance.
As a condition of use, users covenant not to sue, and agree to waive and
release BSL and its members from any and all claims, demands and causes
of actions for any injuries, losses and damages that users may now or
hereafter have a right to assert against such parties as a result of the use
of, or reliance of BEAM.
Limitations BSL does not endorse any self-assessed grading awarded by the use of
BEAM Plus for New Buildings.
HKGBC offers a formal certification process of grading, this service

provides independent third-party review of credits claimed to ensure all
credits can be demonstrated to be achieved by the provision of the
necessary documentary evidence. The use of BEAM Plus for New Buildings
without formal certification does not entitle the user or any other party to
promote any grading awarded.
Application and BEAM Plus NB v2.0 covers the design, construction and associated testing
Eligibility and commissioning of all types of new buildings, from small single building
to large buildings, including but not limited to commercial, educational,

government, industrial, office and residential buildings, hotels and shopping

centres, etc.
The assessment needs to cover various types of premises contained within

the development and may involve premises that are only a ‘shell’ or are
fitted-out. Whatever the circumstances, assessment focuses on what the
designer, builder and commissioning agent achieve. Assessment of some
aspects of performance may be type dependent, or not feasible for various
reasons, so the number of applicable credits and their aggregation will vary.
BEAM Plus does not assess any unauthorised or any unauthorised portions
of any buildings, i.e. any buildings or building works not complying with the
Buildings Ordinance. In case any non-compliance works or unauthorised
portions in a building are reported, both HKGBC and BSL reserve the right
to deprive the awarded rating from the Applicant.
Assessment The Applicant shall define the project boundary to undergo the BEAM Plus
Boundaries assessment. The project boundary needs not necessarily follow the site
boundary of the development, which however, should be consistent
throughout the project assessment.
Certification Assessment under BEAM Plus for New Buildings covers the demolition,
Framework planning, design, construction and commissioning of a building and should
be initiated in the early stages of project development. BEAM Plus for New
Buildings aims to reduce the environmental impacts of new buildings while
improving the quality and user satisfaction, by the adoption of the best
techniques available within reasonable cost.
A notable attribute of BEAM Plus for New Buildings, as compared with other
mostly used schemes elsewhere, is that an assessment for new buildings is
not finalised until a building is completed, ensuring that ‘green’ and
‘sustainable’ design features are actually implemented, and construction
practice meets the required performance standards. Besides being in the
interests of the Client and tenant in certifying the actual performance of the
finished product, this approach also serves to ‘dovetail’ assessment with
BEAM Plus Existing Buildings and Interiors. It would be expected that a
building graded under BEAM Plus for New Buildings and suitably operated,
maintained and renovated would achieve a similar grade under other BEAM
Plus certification schemes.
Certification Process Independent BEAM Assessors (BAS) or BSL inhouse BAS would be
assigned to each project to undertake the assessment works. The
Technical Review Committee (TRC) of BSL will review the assessment
reports done by the BAS and endorse the assessment results, followed by
the issuance of certification by the HKGBC. Detail assessment procedures
can be found in the BEAM Plus Project Assessment Procedures Manual
which is available in HKGBC and BSL websites.
BEAM Professional/ BEAM Professional (BEAM Pro)/ Affiliate mentioned in this manual should
Affiliate process the valid credential for BEAM Plus New Buildings version 2.0 for
facilitating the certification process and to ensure the compliance of relevant
credit requirements.
Site Audit BSL shall, in due course after consultation with stakeholders, institute a
random site audit mechanism as part of the verification processes. Details
will be given in an Audit Manual yet to be issued. Audit will be conducted
only after the official publication of the Audit Manual and formal
implementation of the audit mechanism.

Documentation The Applicant has the obligation to provide evidence to demonstrate credit
compliance. In NB v2.0, only sufficient amount of material (by way of
example) is required to be submitted. However, the Applicant must make
sure all supporting information is timely collected and properly documented.
Just in case when the BEAM assessor considers it necessary to demand
additional material of the same sort for clarification, the Applicant is
obligated to produce such material upon request.
Certification Fee BEAM Plus certification fee comprises 2 parts, namely Registration Fee and
Assessment Fee which are payable to HKGBC and BSL respectively.
Details on the fee structure can be found in the HKGBC and BSL websites.
Credit CIR is designed to allow project teams to obtain specific guidance on

Interpretation whether certain BEAM Plus credits can be fulfilled pertaining to the special
Request design of a project. Details on CIR can be found in HKGBC and BSL
(CIR) websites
Appeal The Applicants may submit an appeal on an individual credit if they disagree
to and/ or do not accept the decision made by the BSL. More details can be
found in the HKGBC and BSL websites.

BEAM Plus New Buildings Version 2.0 Framework
1.2 Framework
Credit Performance Different assessment methods assign their credits under different categories
Categories according to the preferences of the tool developer. In BEAM Plus NB v2.0, credits
are grouped into the following categories:
i. Integrated Design and Construction Management (IDCM);

ii. Sustainable Sites (SS);
iii. Materials and Waste (MW);
iv. Energy Use (EU);
v. Water Use (WU);
vi. Health and Wellbeing (HWB); and
vii. Innovations and Additions (IA).
While BEAM Plus NB v2.0 adopts similar categories in other BEAM Plus tools, the
number and nature of credits within each category are specific to the context of
Hong Kong and new building projects.
Integrated Design IDCM focuses on the integration between design and operation, integrated design
and Construction between design team members and client, and integration throughout the
Management development process from design to construction. The core objectives of IDCM
(IDCM) are as follows:
i. Integrated Design Process;

ii. Green Construction Practices; and
iii. Smart Design and Technologies.
iv. Design for Engagement and Education on Green Buildings
Sustainable Sites SS focuses on the design and planning issues, and the integration of
(SS) neighbourhood and site location. The core objectives of SS are as follows:
i. Neighbourhood Integration;
ii. Biodiversity Enhancement;
iii. Bioclimatic Design; and
iv. Climate Resilience and Adaptability.
Materials and Waste MW focuses on the minimisation of operational materials and waste. The core
(MW) objectives of MW are as follows:
i. Efficient Use of Materials;

ii. Selection of Materials; and
iii. Waste Reduction.
Energy Use EU focuses on the reduction of building operation energy consumption. It is energy
(EU) performance based and seeks to encourage quality passive design. The core
objectives of EU are as follows:
i. Energy Use Reduction and Control;

ii. Renewable and Alternative Energy Systems; and
iii. Energy Efficient Equipment.

Water Use WU focuses on the reduction of water consumption. The core objectives of WU
(WU) are as follows:
i. Water Conservation;
ii. Effluent; and
iii. Water Harvesting and Recycling.
Health and Wellbeing HWB focuses on the human environmental quality. It is designed to expand the
(HWB) scope of previous indoor environmental quality (IEQ) category and absorb human
centric design elements. The core objectives of HWB are as follows:
i. Design for Green Living;

ii. Inclusive Design; and
iii. Indoor Environmental Quality.
Innovations and IA focuses on promoting and rewarding true innovations. The core objectives of IA
Additions are as follows:
(IA)
i. Innovation Techniques; and
ii. Innovation Challenges.
Credit Allocation Credits have been broadly allocated to each assessment criterion by taking into
account the other internationally recognised green building assessment tools as
well as the sensitivity analysis and the comments received during the stakeholder
engagement workshops.
Category Weighting Having reviewed the local and international assessment schemes and other
relevant information, a percentage of weighting for each environmental
performance category has been assigned to reflect its importance and the global
trends as follows:
Category Weighting
IDCM 18%
SS 15%
MW 9%
EU 29%
WU 7%
HWB 22%
Prerequisites The Applicant must demonstrate that all the pre-requisites are achieved.
Otherwise, the project will be graded as “Prerequisite(s) Not Achieved”.
BONUS Credit & The BONUS credits and additional BONUS credits in NB v2.0 are counted under
Additional the corresponding categories. A factor of 1.2 is applied in score calculation for
BONUS Credit the attainment of BONUS credits and additional BONUS credits.
Bonus credits are independent from the normal credit(s) under the same credit
item. They can be achieved regardless of the success or failure in attaining the
normal credit(s). Whereas the additional BONUS credits are dependent on the
normal credit(s) under the same credit item. The award of normal credit(s) is the
prerequisite for attaining the additional BONUS credits.
The maximum possible score under each category is 100%.
IA Credit The IA credits in NB v2.0 are counted towards the total number of credits qualifying
for an award classification. A maximum of 10 IA credits could be submitted for
achieving a higher score in the assessment.

Determination of The final certificate grading for projects certified under BEAM Plus NB v2.0 is
Overall Grade subject to the following conditions:
i. Satisfying all pre-requisites;
ii. Achieving overall score required; and
iii. Obtaining minimum percentage (%) for each category listed below.
Grade Minimum Percentage for Total Score

Each Category
Platinum 20% ≥ 75%
Gold 20% ≥ 65%
Silver 20% ≥ 55%
Bronze 20% ≥ 40%
If a project can comply with all the applicable pre-requisites but cannot reach the
threshold of Bronze rating, it will be graded as “Pre-requisites Achieved”. In case
the project fails to demonstrate compliance with any one of the applicable pre-
requisites, it will be graded as “Pre-requisite(s) Not Achieved”.

BEAM Plus New Buildings Version 2.0 Summary of Credits
1.3 Summary of Credits
Section Credit Requirement Extent of Credit

Application
2 Integrated
25 + 14
Design and
BONUS
Construction
Management
(IDCM)
IDCM P1 Sustainability Prerequisite achieved for demonstrating All buildings Required

Champions - that an accredited BEAM Professional
Project (BEAM Pro) with a valid credential for
BEAM Plus New Buildings is engaged as
the Project BEAM Pro of the consultant
team.
The Project BEAM Pro shall:
1) Act as the point of contact with the

Hong Kong Green Building Council
and the BEAM Society Limited for
administrative matters relating to
BEAM Plus certification;
2) Participate as one of the key project

team members in the design and
construction stages, with assistance
of the Construction BEAM Pro (and
Affiliates, if any) defined under IDCM 6
if any, to oversee the submission
materials are in the compliance with
relevant requirements of the BEAM
Plus Manual. The Project BEAM Pro
may also assume other roles in the
consultant team of the project (The
Project BEAM Pro, Design BEAM Pros
under IDCM 1 and Construction BEAM
Pros under IDCM 6 must be different
personnel);
3) Create a BEAM Plus NB Certification

Checklist including project goals,
performance and BEAM Plus target
rating;
4) Provide guidance to the project and

construction teams regarding BEAM
Plus principles, structure, timing,
certification process and
requirements of credits; and
5) Advise the Client on relevant

professionals or parties on respective
tasks to address relevant BEAM Plus
certification requirements.


Application
IDCM P2 Environmental Prerequisite achieved for demonstrating All buildings Required
Management that an Environmental Management
Plan Plan has been properly prepared.
IDCM P3 Timber Used Prerequisite achieved for demonstrating All buildings Required
for Temporary that no virgin forest products are used for
Works temporary works.
IDCM 1 Sustainability 1 credit for at least two (2) members from at All buildings 1+1
Champions - least two (2) applicable core design additional
Design disciplines shall be accredited BEAM BONUS
Professionals with valid credentials for
BEAM Plus New Buildings.
1 additional BONUS credit for at least

one (1) additional member, from an
applicable core design discipline different
from the disciplines counted in the above
credit, shall be an accredited BEAM
Professional with valid credentials for
BEAM Plus New Buildings;
Alternatively,
At least two (2) additional members, of an
applicable core design discipline different
from the disciplines counted in the above
credit, shall be accredited BEAM Affiliates
with valid credentials for BEAM Plus New
Buildings.
IDCM 2 Complimentary (a) BEAM Plus Neighbourhood (ND) All buildings that 3 BONUS
Certification 1 BONUS credit where the project is are applicable
certified by BEAM Plus for respective
Neighbourhood (ND) certification. BEAM Plus
certification
tools.
(b) BEAM Plus Interiors (BI)
1 BONUS credit for preparing the
Project for BEAM Plus Interiors (BI)
certification.
(c) BEAM Plus Existing Buildings (EB)

1 BONUS credit for preparing the
project for BEAM Plus Existing
Buildings (EB) certification
(Comprehensive Scheme).
IDCM 3 Integrated (a) Early Consideration(s) of Integrated All buildings 4
Design Process Building Design
1 credit for consideration of the
integrated design process regarding
whole-system thinking to explore the
interrelationships among green building
design strategies and systems in the
conceptual design stage.


Application
1 additional credit for organising at least
one multi-disciplinary design charrette to
formulate passive and active design
strategies in the conceptual/ schematic
design stages.
(b) Early Design Consideration of
Buildability/ Constructability
1 credit for early design consideration of
buildability to ease construction and
save on-site materials/ labour before
completion of the design development
stage.
(c) Design Consideration of Operation
and Maintenance
1 credit for design consideration of the
long-term operation and maintenance
needs of the building and its engineering
services.
IDCM 4 Life Cycle 1 credit for conducting life cycle costing All buildings 1
Costing for active systems.
IDCM 5 Commissioning 2 credits for demonstrating (a) the All buildings 4

appointment of commissioning authority
(CxA) before tender stage and (b)
providing a commissioning plan.
1 credit for providing a commissioning
review report before construction as
described in part (c).
1 credit for providing commissioning
reports as described in part (d).
IDCM 6 Sustainability 1 credit for at least two (2) accredited All buildings 1
Champions - BEAM Professionals with valid credentials
Construction for BEAM Plus New Buildings are
engaged by the main/ lead contractor of
the project.
Alternatively,
1 credit for at least one (1) accredited
BEAM Professional and two (2)
accredited BEAM Affiliates, with valid
credentials for BEAM Plus New Buildings
are engaged by the main/ lead contractor
of the project.


Application
IDCM 7 Measures to (a) Minimisation of Air Pollution All buildings 4
Reduce Site 1 credit for providing adequate
Emissions monitoring and mitigation measures to
minimize air pollution during construction
(demolition and foundation are included, if
any).
(b) Minimisation of Noise Pollution
1 credit for providing adequate
monitoring and mitigation measures to
minimize noise pollution during
construction (demolition and foundation
are included, if any).
(c) Minimisation of Water Pollution
1 credit for providing adequate
monitoring and mitigation measures to
minimize water pollution during
construction (demolition and foundation
(d) Minimisation of Light Pollution
1 credit for providing adequate mitigation
measures to minimize light pollution
during construction (demolition and
foundation are included, if any).
IDCM 8 Construction (a) Demolition Waste Recycling IDCM 8a 2+4

and Demolition 1 credit for demonstrating compliance All buildings additional
Waste with the Waste Management Plan and requiring BONUS
Recycling the application of proactive waste demolition
management provisions during which are under
demolition; and recycling at least 15% of the Client’s
demolition waste. control
1 additional BONUS credit for IDCM 8b

demonstration of recycling at least 30% of All buildings
demolition waste.
For exemplary performance, 1 additional
BONUS credit for demonstration of
recycling at least 60% of demolition
waste.
(b) Construction Waste Recycling

1 credit for demonstrating compliance
with the Waste Management Plan and
the application of proactive waste
management provisions during
construction (foundation to be included, if
any); and recycling of at least 15% of
construction waste (foundation waste to
be included, if any).
1 additional BONUS credit for
demonstration of recycling at least 30% of
construction waste (foundation waste to


Application
BONUS credit for demonstration of
recycling at least 60% of construction
waste (foundation waste to be included, if
any).
IDCM 9 Construction 1 credit for implementing a Construction All areas to 1

IAQ IAQ Management Plan, undertaking a implementing a
Management building ‘flush out’ or ‘bake out’, and Construction
replacement of all filters prior to IAQ
occupancy. Management
Plan.
All areas with

central air-
conditioning
and ventilation
systems for
undertaking a
building ‘flush
out’ or ‘bake
out’ and
replacement of
all filters prior to
occupancy.
IDCM 10 Considerate 1 credit for demonstrating considerate All buildings 1

Construction measures to the neighbourhood, passers-
by and workers. Good tree protection
practices where tree preservation within
the project site is required, should also be
carried out.
IDCM 11 Building 1 credit for providing a fully documented All buildings 1
Management Operations and Maintenance Manual and
Manuals Energy Management Manual.
IDCM 12 Operator 1 credit for providing training for All buildings 1

Training plus operations and maintenance staff to the
Chemical minimum specified; and demonstrating
Storage and that adequate maintenance facilities are
Mixing Room provided for chemical storage
and mixing.
IDCM 13 Digital Facility 1 BONUS credit for providing a digital All non- 1 BONUS
Management interface in addition to the project design residential
Interface metering provision for future facility buildings and
management team to review the building common areas
operation performance. of residential
buildings
IDCM 14 Occupant 1 BONUS credit for providing a digital All non- 1 BONUS
Engagement platform to engage building occupants. residential
Platform buildings.
IDCM 15 Document (a) Project Team Document All buildings 2

Management Management
System
1 credit for demonstrating the use of
document management systems within
the design team.


Application
(b) Facility Management Team Document

Management
1 credit for demonstrating the use of
document management platform by the
building owner or building management
company.
IDCM 16 BIM Integration (a) Coordinated Use of BIM within Design All buildings 1+1
Teams additional
1 credit for the coordinated use of BIM BONUS +
among the design team. 2 BONUS
(b) Coordinated Use of BIM within
Design and Construction teams
1 additional BONUS credit for coordinated
use of BIM among the design team and
the contractors.
(c) BIM for time
1 BONUS credit for using the BIM model
for scheduling, cost and quantity,
schedules preparation and tracking the
project budget.
(d) BIM for Facility Management Use
1 BONUS credit for updating the BIM
model to as-built condition.
IDCM 17 Design for 1 credit for providing any two (2) All buildings 1+1
Engagement education elements from the following list additional
and Education of green building design measures and BONUS
on Green provisions accredited by BEAM Plus and
Buildings implemented in the project. The Project
must achieve a rating of Bronze or above.
1) Provide users with manuals for all

green building design measures and
provisions.
2) Provide educational signage system

that is integrated with the major
communal areas of the project to
educate users and visitors about the
benefits of the green building design
measures and provisions.
3) Provide users a platform for

sustainable living showcase
demonstration, experience or sharing
that are relevant to the enabling
design measures and provisions in
the project. e.g. websites, regular
publications available to the public,
newspapers or other means proposed
by the Applicant.


Application
4) Additional or alternative education
element(s) proposed by the Applicant
with substantiation demonstrating
strategies compatible with the listed
strategies for achieving the credit
objective.
1 additional BONUS credit for providing

four (4) education elements mentioned
above on green buildings.
3 Sustainable 20 + 19
Site (SS) BONUS
SS P1 Minimum Prerequisite achieved for demonstrating All sites with a Required
Landscaping compliance with minimum planting site area of
Requirements provisions in terms of viability and site 1,000 m2 or
coverage of greenery of at least 20% of more.
the site.
SS 1 Pedestrian- (a) Accessibility to Public Transport All buildings 2+1

oriented and 1 credit for achieving Accessibility Index of additional
Low Carbon 15 or more for all buildings of a BONUS +
Transport development. 2 BONUS
(b) Pedestrian-oriented Access

1 credit for achieving 50% or more of the
applicable pedestrian-oriented transport
planning measures.
1 additional BONUS credit for achieving
100% of the applicable pedestrian-
oriented transport planning measures.
(c) Cycling Facilities and Network

Integration
1 BONUS credit for providing cycling
facilities within the Site and integrating
with the public cycling network if a public
cycling network exists or has been
planned nearby.
(d) Charging Facilities for Electric

Vehicle (EV)
1 BONUS credit for providing EV medium
chargers for at least 50% of all parking
spaces and EV charging- enabling for all
parking spaces (including visitor car
parks).


Application
SS 2 Neighbourhood (a) Amenities for Building Users All buildings 2
Amenities 1 credit where adequate amenities for
building users are located within the site or
500m walking distance/ an equivalent
horizontal commuting time from the site
entrance(s).
(b) Shared Amenities for Neighbourhood

1 credit where adequate shared amenities
for the neighbourhood are provided within
the site and are made available for public
use.
SS 3 Building Design (a) Sustainable Urban Design All buildings 2+1

for Sustainable 1 credit for preparing a site design additional
Urbanism appraisal report demonstrating a proactive BONUS +
approach in achieving a people-oriented 1 BONUS
and place-making approach for
sustainable site planning, and at least
30% of applicable sustainable urbanism
measures are achieved.
2 credits for achieving at least 60% of
applicable sustainable urbanism
measures.
1 additional BONUS credit for achieving at
least 90% of applicable sustainable
urbanism measures.
(b) Conservation of Cultural Heritage

1 BONUS credit for demonstrating that a
proper heritage impact assessment
mechanism and its recommendations
have been implemented.
SS 4 Neighbourhood 1 credit for the designs which the access to All buildings 1
Daylight daylight of neighbouring sensitive
Access buildings is maintained to the prescribed
levels.
SS 5 Noise Control 1 credit for demonstrating that the level of All buildings 1
for Building the intruding noise at the facade of
Equipment potential noise sensitive receivers is in
compliance with the criteria
recommended in the Technical
Memorandum for the Assessment of
Noise from Places Other than Domestic
Premises, Public Places or Construction
Sites.


Application
SS 6 Light Pollution (a) Control of Obtrusive Artificial Light All buildings 2
Control 1 credit for demonstrating that the
obtrusive light from exterior lighting meets
the specified performance for the
environmental zone in which the building
development is located.
(b) Control of External Light Reflection

from Building
1 credit for demonstrating that sunlight
reflection from external surfaces of the
buildings is controlled by using materials
with acceptable external light reflectance.
SS 7 Biodiversity (a) Reduction of Ecological Impact SS 7a 1+2

Enhancement All sites with additional
1 credit for demonstrating that all
existing tree BONUS +
identified habitat types on Site are of low
except 3 BONUS
or negligible indicative ecological values
brownfield sites
or sites on
Alternatively,
reclaimed land
Demonstrate that all identified habitat
types on Site of medium to high indicative
SS 7b
ecological value are preserved intact and
Sites with
are either unaffected by the planned
adjacent areas
development.
of medium or
high ecological
value.
demonstrating that the combined girth of
the retained trees, with individual girth of
at least 150mm, is at least 20% of the total
girth of all existing trees on site.

demonstrating that the combined girth of
the retained trees, with individual girth of
at least 150mm, is at least 40% or more of
the total girth of all existing trees on site.
(b) Enhancement of Biodiversity

Prepare a manual on biodiversity-
friendly landscape maintenance, PLUS a
biodiversity enhancement report
demonstrating each of the following
measures for enhancing the biodiversity
of the Site:
1 BONUS credit for physical connectivity
between areas with ecological values
1 BONUS credit for increased diversity
and complexity of planting
1 BONUS credit for wildlife-friendly
building features (e.g. windows and
lighting)


Application
SS 8 Urban Heat For Site area <1000m2 All buildings For Site area
Island < 1000m2:
Mitigation (a) Urban Design Guidelines Chapter 11 1
1 credit for implementing at least 2 site
level strategies under Section 11 of Hong
Kong Planning Standards and Guidelines For Site area
≥ 1000m2:
Chapter 11 Urban Design Guidelines. 4+2
additional
For Site area ≥ 1000m2 BONUS +
(a) Sustainable Building Design Measures 4 BONUS
1 credit for providing shade on at least 5%
of the site area and at least 50% of non-
roof impervious surfaces on the site
(parking, walkways, plazas) using light
coloured high-albedo materials (albedo of
at least 0.4).
1 credit for demonstrating compliance with
prescribed requirements of the SBD
Guidelines as promulgated in the PNAP
APP-152.
demonstrating compliance with prescribed
requirements of the SBD Guidelines as
promulgated in the PNAP APP-152 with
enhanced performances.
(b) Tree Coverage

2 BONUS credits for demonstrating that at
least 10% of the total Site Area is provided
with tree coverage.
BONUS credit where 20% or more of the
site is provided with tree coverage.
(c) Air Ventilation Assessment (AVA)

For conducting an AVA by wind tunnel or
Computer Fluid Dynamics (CFD)
according to the prevailing AVA
methodology introduced by the
Government demonstrating that better or
equivalent ventilation performances than a
baseline case:
1 credit for demonstrating annual wind
condition.
1 credit for demonstrating summer wind
condition.
(d) Intra Urban Heat Island Study

2 BONUS credits for conducting an Intra
Urban Heat Island Study demonstrating
that a maximum Intra-Urban Heat Index
(difference between Turban and Tmet) in
summer is less than 0.8 °C.


Application
SS 9 Immediate 1 credit for demonstrating that no All buildings 1
Neighbourhood pedestrian areas will be subject to
Wind excessive wind velocities caused by
Environment amplification due to the site layout design
and/ or building design.
SS 10 Outdoor (a) Shaded or Covered Routes All sites with 2

Thermal site area of
Comfort 1 credit where at least one shaded or 1,000m2 or
covered route, connects the site with more.
nearby amenities/site main
entrance/transport hub.
(b) Passive Open Spaces with Thermal

Comfort
1 credit where 50% or more of the passive
open spaces and pedestrian zones
achieve thermal comfort. This is
demonstrated on a typical summer day at
3:00 pm in Hong Kong.
SS 11 Stormwater 2 credit for demonstrating that adequate All sites with site 2+1
Management stormwater management design area of 1,000m2 additional
measures have been provided to cater or more. BONUS
the total volume of runoff for one hour
corresponding to a design rainfall of at
least 30mm/event for the site in its post-
developed conditions.
demonstrating that adequate stormwater
management measures have been
provided to cater the total volume of
runoff corresponding to a design rainfall
of at least 40mm/event for the site in its
post-developed conditions.
SS 12 Design for 1 BONUS for studying the projected All buildings 1 BONUS +
Climate variation in temperature and rainfall and 1 additional
Change water level rise/storm surge of adjacent BONUS
Adaptation water bodies due to climate change and
its impact on the development and
prepare mitigation proposal to improve
the climate resilience of the building.
1 additional BONUS credit for including
quantitative calculation to support the
resilience design which is technically
eligible and cost effective.


Application
4 Materials and 14 + 21
Waste (MW) BONUS
MW P1 Minimum Prerequisite achieved for meeting the All buildings Required

Waste minimum provisions of waste recycle except one-single
Handling facilities for the collection, sorting, family domestic
Facilities storage, recycling (recovered material) building with not
and disposal (waste). more than 3 floors,
or domestic part of
a composite
building for one
single family with
not more than 3
floors, or a
building not
normally occupied
or for transient
stay (e.g. pump
house, sewage
treatment plant,
carpark building).
MW 1 Building Re- Compliance Method 1 All buildings 2 BONUS +

use 1 BONUS credit for the reuse of 20% or 1 additional
more (by mass or volume) of existing BONUS
structures (sub-structure and
superstructure).
2 BONUS credits for the reuse of 40% or
more (by mass or volume) of existing
superstructure).
BONUS credit for the reuse of 90% or
more (by mass or volume) of existing
superstructure).
Alternatively,
Compliance Method 2
1 BONUS credit for the reuse of 25% or
more (by surface area) of superstructure
elements (including at least floor, roof
decking) & enclosure materials
(including at least skin, framing).
2 BONUS credits for the reuse of 50% or
BONUS credit for the reuse of 90% or

Application
MW 2 Modular and 1 credit for designing modular elements All buildings 1+1
Standardised which contributed at least 50% (by mass, except for a additional
Design volume, dollar value or surface area) of single one-storey BONUS
the major elements and modules in the building with total
project. floor areas not
exceeding 230m2
BONUS credit for designing modular
elements which contributed 90% or more
(by mass, volume, dollar value or surface
area) of the major elements and modules
in the project.
MW 3 Prefabrication (a) Structural Elements All buildings 1+3

1 credit when 10% of structural elements additional
has been prefabricated off-site. BONUS
1 additional BONUS credit when 20% of
structural elements has been
prefabricated off-site.
Alternatively,
(b) Façade Elements
1 credit when 10% of facade elements
has been prefabricated off-site.
facade elements has been prefabricated
off-site.
Alternatively,
(c) Architectural/ Internal Building
Elements
1 credit when 10% of architectural/
internal building elements has been
architectural/ internal building elements

compliance with the requirements listed
in above sub-item (a), (b) and (c), i.e. 10%
or more of structural, façade and
architectural/ internal building elements
BONUS credit when 50% or more of the
elements in sub-item (a) or (b) or (c) has
been prefabricated off-site.


Application
MW 4 Design for (a) Building Material Selection Appraisal All buildings 1+2
Durability and 1 credit for appraisal report BONUS
Resilience demonstrating a proactive approach to
evaluate the durability of the building
materials with at least 3 of the relevant
listed items.
(b) Protecting Vulnerable Parts of the

Building from Damage
1 BONUS credit for providing suitable
protective measures, or designed
features or solutions to prevent damage
to vulnerable parts.
(c) Protecting Exposed Parts of the

Building from Material Degradation
1 BONUS credit for incorporating
appropriate design and specification
measures to limit material degradation
due to environmental factors.
MW 5 Sustainable 1 credit for demonstrating at least 30% All buildings, 1+1

Forest (for residential development) and 50% except buildings additional
Products (for non-residential development) of all with an BONUS
timber and composite timber products insignificant
used in the project are from sustainable amount of timber
sources/ recycled timber. products being
For exemplary performance, 1 additional adopted
BONUS credit for demonstrating 90% or
more of all timber and composite timber
products used in the project are from
sustainable sources/ recycled timber.
MW 6 Recycled (a) Outside Surface Works and All buildings 1+2

Materials Structures additional
1 credit where at least 10% of all BONUS
materials used for site exterior surface
works, structures and features with
recycled content.
Alternatively,
(b) Building Façade and Structural
Components
1 credit where at least 10% of all
materials used for facade and structural
components are materials with recycled
content;
OR
the use of Pulverised Fuel Ash (PFA) as
a partial cement replacement in concrete
that the PFA content is not less than
25%;
OR

Application
the use of Ground Granulated Blast
furnace Slag (GGBS) as a partial cement
replacement in concrete that the GGBS
content is not less than 40%.
Alternatively,
(c) Interior Non-structural Components
1 credit where at least 10% of all
materials used for interior non-structural
components are materials with recycled
content.
compliance with requirements listed in
sub-item (a), (b) and (c).
BONUS credit where 50% or more of all
materials used for sub-item (a) or (b) or
(c) are materials with recycled content.
MW 7 Ozone (a) Refrigerants All buildings 2

Depleting 1 credit for the use of refrigerants with a
Substances value less than or equal to the threshold
of the combined contribution to ozone
depletion and global warming potentials
using the specified equation.
(b) Ozone depleting materials

1 credit for the use of products in the
building fabric and services that avoid
using ozone depleting substances in
their manufacture, composition or use.
MW 8 Regional 1 credit for the use of regional materials All buildings 1+2
Materials meeting prescribed requirement, which additional
contributes at least 10% of all building BONUS
materials used in the project.
1 additional BONUS credit for the use of
regional materials meeting prescribed
requirement, which contributes at least
20% of all building materials used in the
project.
BONUS credit for the use of regional
materials meeting prescribed
requirement, which contributes 50% or
above of all building materials used in
the project.
MW 9 Use of Green (a) Certified Green Products All buildings 2+3

Products 1 credit for having at least 5% certified additional
green products in one (1) of the listed BONUS +
categories (outside surface works, 1 BONUS
building façade and structures, interior
non-structural components, and building
services components).

Application
2 credits for having at least 5% certified
green products in two (2) of the listed
categories (outside surface works, building
façade and structures, interior non-
structural components, and building
services components).
1 additional BONUS credit for having at
least 5% of certified green products under
Construction Industry Council (CIC) Green
Product Certification, Carbon Labelling
Scheme/ HKGBC Green Product
Accreditation and Standard (HK G-Pass)
in one (1) of the listed categories (outside
surface works, building façade and
structures, interior non-structural
components, and building services
components).
BONUS credit for having at least 25% of
certified green products under CIC Green
Product Certification, CIC Carbon
Labelling Scheme/ HK G-PASS in one (1)
of the listed categories (outside surface
works, building façade and structures,
interior non-structural components, and
building services components).
(b) Rapidly renewable materials

1 BONUS credit for demonstrating 5% of all
building materials/ products of interior non-
structural components in the project is
rapidly renewable materials.
BONUS credit for demonstrating 25% of all
building materials/ products of interior non-
structural components in the project is
rapidly renewable materials.
MW 10 Life Cycle 1 credit for demonstrating the embodied All buildings 1

Assessment energy in the major elements of the
building structure of the building has been
studied and optimised through a Life
Cycle Assessment (LCA).
Alternatively,
1 credit for demonstrating the embodied

energy in the major elements of the
building structure of the building has been
studied and optimised by using the CIC
Carbon Assessment Tool or similar
assessment tools.


Application
MW 11 Adaptability (a) Spatial Adaptability All buildings 1+1
and 1 credit for designs providing spatial additional
Deconstruction flexibility that can adapt spaces for BONUS
different uses and allows for expansion to
permit additional spatial requirements to
be accommodated.
Alternatively,
(b) Flexible Engineering Services
1 credit for flexible design of services that
can adapt to changes of layout and use.
Alternatively,
(c) Structural Adaptability
1 credit for designs providing flexibility
through the use of building structural
systems which allow for change in future
use, and which is coordinated with interior
planning modules.
1 additional BONUS credit for compliance
with requirements listed in sub-item (a), (b)
and (c).
MW 12 Enhanced (a) Additional Recyclables Collection All buildings 2+2

Waste 1 credit for the provision of facilities for except one BONUS
Handling collection, sorting, storage and disposal of single family
Facilities 2 other recyclable streams in addition to domestic
those described in MW P1. building with not
more than 3
(b) Additional Facility Provisions to floors, or
Enable enhanced Municipal Solid Waste domestic part of
(MSW) Charing Scheme a composite
building for one
1 credit for additional facilities for collection, single family
sorting, storage and disposal of recyclables with not more
in addition to those described in MW P1 than 3 floors, or
and MW12 part (a). a building not
normally
(c) Waste Treatment Equipment occupied or for
1 BONUS credit for providing at least one transient stay
set of waste treatment equipment. (e.g. pump
house, sewage
(d) Alternatives to Recycling Facilities treatment plant,
carpark
1 BONUS credit for providing alternative
building).
means of waste collection systems.
Part (b) is
applicable only
when Municipal
Solid Waste
Charging
Scheme is
activated.


Application
5 Energy Use 31 + 13
(EU) BONUS
EU P1 Minimum Demonstrate performance improvement All buildings Required

Energy against the latest edition of Building
Performance Energy Code (BEC).
For BEC Governing Building Types:

Refer to the latest edition of BEC to
demonstrate that performance
improvement is achieved in both of the
following building services systems
provided by the project owner:
1. Improve 2% of code specified
minimum coefficient of performance
(COP) for air-conditioning equipment
unit; and
2. Reduce 3% of code specified
maximum allowable lighting power
density for lighting installation.
For Non-BEC Governing Building Types:

All Non-BEC governing building types
and spaces are required to demonstrate
their compliance with the latest BEC on:
1. Air-conditioning equipment efficiency
(full load COP); and
2. Lighting power density for listed space
type in the code.
For buildings consist of BEC and non-

BEC Governing Building or Space type:
All requirements of compliance listed in
this credit are required.
EU 1 Low Carbon Passive designs that can reduce building All buildings 6
Passive HVAC load, facilitate natural ventilation except for
Design and maximise daylight will be rewarded in Option 2 part (5)
this credit under either prescriptive path
or performance path.
Option 1: Prescriptive Path

4 Credits for incorporating any 4 of the
passive design strategies listed below:
1) Optimum Spatial Planning
2) External Overhang (fix/ movable)
3) Vegetated Building Envelope
4) Cross Ventilation Provision
(normally occupied space)
5) Cross Ventilation Provision (not
normally occupied space)
6) Daylight Provision

Application
Option 2: Performance Path For Option 2

HVAC Load Reduction part (5),
buildings with
1) Built Form and Orientation normally
1 credit for reducing building envelope occupied space
load from a hypothetic case with at least for which
22.5° difference in orientation with operable
justification by simulation. windows are
practical to be
2) Optimum Spatial Planning provided
1 credit for demonstrating consideration
of optimum spatial planning to enhance
energy conservation with justification by
simulation.
3) External Shading Devices
1 credit for the provision of fixed or
movable external shading devices, in
the form of vertical or horizontal sun
shading feature with justification by
simulation.
4) Vegetated building envelope
1 credit for the provision of vegetated
building envelope with justification by
calculation.
Natural Ventilation
Space Layout for Natural Ventilation
1 credit for demonstrating that project
space (both normally occupied space
and not normally occupied space) is
designed to facilitate the utilisation of
natural ventilation with justification by
simulation.
Daylight
Space Layout for Daylight Penetration
1 credit for demonstrating that the space
is well-lit by daylight and reduce
occupants’ dependency on artificial
lighting with justification by simulation
method.
EU 2 Reduction of Select one of the 2 compliance path Option 1: 10 + 5

CO2 Emissions options described below. All buildings BONUS
Option 1 – Performance Path (1-10

Credits + 5 additional BONUS)
Demonstrate a percentage of reduction
on annual CO2 emission of the proposed
building performance compared with the
baseline performance.
1 to 10 credits for annual CO2 emission
reduction from 1% to 19%.


Application
1 to 5 additional BONUS credits for Option 2:

annual CO2 emission reduction from All buildings for
21% to 29%. Part (1.1), (1.2)
and (2.2).
Option 2 – Prescriptive Path (1-7
Credits) For Part (2.1),
Demonstrate a prescriptive compliance Buildings not
in below listed item. Residential buildings using district
and non-residential buildings should cooling systems
follow different paths. and with newly
installed air-
For building consist of both residential
conditioning
and non-residential parts, demonstrate
system
the compliance for all requirements as
listed below.
For Part (2.3),
(1) Passive Building Design Buildings with
Enhancement (0.5 to 3 credits) lift and/or
(1.1) Building Envelope escalator
(1.2) Natural Ventilation installation
(2) Active Building Design Improvement

(1 to 4 credits)
(2.1) Each air-conditioning
equipment
(2.2) Lighting System
(2.3) Lift and escalator installation
EU 3 Peak Electricity Option 1 - Based on EU 2 All Buildings 3

Demand Performance Path
Reduction 1 to 3 credits for reducing the peak
electricity demand by 5% to 15%.
Option 2 - Based on EU 2 Prescriptive

Path
1 credit for EU 3 when 4 credit points in
EU 2 (prescriptive path) is achieved.
2 credits for EU 3 when 7 credit points in
EU 2 (prescriptive path) is achieved.
EU 4 Metering and (a) Fundamental Metering and Part (a): 1+2

Monitoring Monitoring All non-residential BONUS
1 credit for providing energy monitoring buildings and
system for equipment and systems in common area of
spaces. residential
buildings
1 BONUS credit for providing
performance auditing monitoring
system for equipment and systems in
spaces Part (b):
All non-residential
(b) Metering for Tenanted Area buildings and
1 BONUS credit for allowing monitoring common area of
provision of tenants’ energy residential
consumption. buildings and with
tenant areas


Application
EU 5 Renewable and (a) Solar Energy Feasibility Study All buildings 6+5
Alternative additional
Energy Systems 1 credit for evaluating the building roof’s BONUS
potential in harnessing solar energy.
(b) On-site Renewable Energy Application

1 to 5 credits plus 5 additional BOUNS for
using on-site renewable energy systems
to offset annual building energy
consumption for controlled area from
0.2% to 2%.
EU 6 Air- (a) Compliance with Manufacturer’s All buildings using 2

Conditioning Recommendation. variable
Units refrigerant flow
1 credit for complying with
(VRF) units,
manufacturer’s recommended
window or split-
installation positions for optimal heat
type air
rejection.
conditioners as
major source of
(b) Performance Verification
air conditioning.
1 credit for demonstrating the operating
temperatures of all variable refrigerant
flow (VRF) units, window type, split-
type or packaged type air-conditioning
units do not exceed manufacturer’s
recommendation for the specified COP
in the manufacturer’s technical
specifications via computational
simulation techniques.
EU 7 Clothes Drying (a) Provision of Clothes Drying Facilities Residential 1+1

Facilities 1 credit for providing permanent clothes buildings BONUS
drying facilities provision for all
residential units under suitable location
conditions.
(b) Demonstration of Effectiveness

1 BONUS credit for demonstrating the
effectiveness of permanent clothes
drying facilities via computational
analysis.
EU 8 Energy Efficient 1 credit when 60% of total rated power Residential 2

Appliances of appliances are certified energy buildings and
efficient products. hotel
2 credits when 80% of total rated power
of appliances are certified energy
efficient products.


Application
6 Water Use 12 + 3
(WU) BONUS
WU P1 Minimum Water Demonstrate that the use of water All buildings Required
Saving efficient flow devices leads to an
Performance estimated annual saving of 10%.
WU 1 Annual Water (a) Further Potable Water Saving All buildings 3+1
Use 1 to 3 credits for demonstrating that the additional
use of water efficient flow devices leads BONUS
to an estimated annual saving from 20%
to 30%.
(b) Exemplary Potable Water Saving.

demonstrating that the use of water
efficient flow devices leads to an
estimated annual saving of 40%.
WU 2 Water Efficient 1 to 2 credits for reducing potable water All buildings with 2+1
Irrigation consumption for irrigation from 25% to permanent additional
50% in comparison with the baseline. greenery BONUS
1 additional BONUS credit for reducing
potable water consumption for irrigation
by 100% in comparison with the
baseline.
WU 3 Water Efficient 1 credit for installing water efficient Residential 1
Appliances appliances that achieve Grade 1 under buildings
the WSD’s Water Efficiency Labelling
Scheme.
WU 4 Water Leakage 1 credit for installing water leakage All buildings with 1
Detection detection systems in all municipal potable water tank
potable water tank rooms. rooms
WU 5 Twin Tank 1 credit for providing twin tank for All buildings 1
System potable water supply system and (including
flushing water supply system. buildings with
centralized/
shared tank that is
outside the
assessment
boundary)
WU 6 Cooling Tower 1 credit for achieving 7 or more cycles of All buildings 1
Water concentration with acceptable water equipped with
quality. cooling tower
using potable
water as makeup
water
WU 7 Effluent 1 credit for demonstrating a reduction in All buildings 1
Discharge to annual sewage volumes by 20% or
Foul Sewers more.
WU 8 Water (a) Harvested Rainwater All buildings 2+1
Harvesting 1 credit for harvesting of rainwater that BONUS
and achieve a reduction of 5% or more in the
Recycling consumption of potable water.


Application
(b) Recycled Grey Water

1 credit for recycled grey water that
achieve a reduction of 5% or more in the
consumption of potable water.
(c) Exemplary Water Recycling

1 BONUS credit where harvested
rainwater, recycled grey water or a
combination of both leads to a reduction
of 10% or more in the consumption of
potable water.
7 Health and 19 + 10
Wellbeing BONUS
(HWB)
HWB P1 Minimum (a) Measure outdoor air pollutants on- All buildings Required
Ventilation site prior to building design to
Performance understand the site conditions.
(b) Demonstrate the project is in
compliance with the minimum ventilation
quantity with respective to its designed
ventilation mode.
HWB 1 Healthy and 1 BONUS credit for scoring at least 3 All buildings 1 BONUS
Active Living items of all applicable design measures
for healthy and active living.
HWB 2 Biophilic 1 BONUS credit for demonstrating visual All Buildings 1 BONUS +
Design connection with nature and/ or biophilic 1 additional
design features at an assessment space BONUS
with Visual Quality Score of 2 or above.
demonstrating visual connection with
nature and/ or biophilic design features
at an assessment space with Visual
Quality Score of 3 or above.
HWB 3 Inclusive (a) Universal Accessibility All buildings 1+1

Design 1 credit for providing at least ten (10) BONUS
applicable enhanced provisions as
stipulated in the “Recommended Design
Requirements” of BFA 2008.
(b) Weather protection and family

friendly facilities
1 BONUS credit for providing prescribed
weather protection and at least two (2)
family friendly facilities.


Application
HWB 4 Enhanced (a) Fresh Air Provision All buildings 3+1
Ventilation Additional
1.1 Fresh air provision in normally BONUS
occupied spaces
1 credit for demonstrating that all
normally occupied spaces in the building
are provided with increased ventilation.
1.2 Fresh air provision in not

normally occupied spaces
1 credit for demonstrating that all not
normally occupied spaces in the building
are provided with adequate ventilation.
1.3 On-site measurements

conducting on-site measurements to
verify the ventilation performance for all
normally occupied spaces.
(b) Exhaust air

1 credit for the provision of an effective
ventilation system for spaces where
significant indoor pollution sources are
generated.
HWB 5 Waste Odour 1 credit for installing odour sensor at all All buildings with 1
Control discharge points from enclosed waste RS&MRC(s)
disposal and recycling spaces. and/or
RS&MRR(s)
HWB 6 Acoustics and (a) Room Acoustics All buildings with 4+1
Noise the spaces BONUS
1) 1 credit for demonstrating that mid- specified in the
frequency reverberation time in assessment
applicable spaces of landlord’s- criteria, with
controlled area meets the spaces where
prescribed criteria of different types speech
of premises. intelligibility is
2) 1 credit for demonstrating that mid- important, and
frequency reverberation time in without rooms of
applicable rooms of non-landlord a special
meets the prescribed criteria of acoustical nature
different types of premises. for parts (a) (1),
(b) (1) and (c)
(b) Noise Isolation
All buildings with
1) 1 credit for demonstrating airborne tenanted spaces
noise isolation between, spaces of the type(s) of
fulfills the prescribed criteria. premises specified
in the assessment
2) 1 BONUS credit for demonstrating criteria, with
impact noise isolation between spaces where
floors fulfills the prescribed criteria. speech
intelligibility is
(c) Background Noise important, and
1 credit for demonstrating background without rooms of a
noise levels within the prescribed criteria special acoustical


Application
(including traffic noise and external nature for part (a)
building services equipment that are (2)
within the project boundary).
Residential
buildings for part
(b) (2)
HWB 7 Indoor 1 credit for demonstrating vibration All buildings with 1

Vibration levels not exceeding the prescribed normally occupied
criteria. spaces
HWB 8 Indoor Air (a) Indoor air quality in occupied spaces All buildings 4+1
Quality for part (a) additional
Path 1 BONUS
All buildings with
2 credits for demonstrating compliance
enclosed and/ or
with the prescribed limits for Carbon
semi-enclosed
monoxide (CO), Nitrogen dioxide (NO2),
car park of areas
Ozone (O3), Carbon dioxide (CO2),
more than 10%
Respirable suspended particulates
of Construction
(PM10), Total volatile organic compounds
Floor Area for
(TVOCs), Formaldehyde (HCHO) and
part (b)
Radon (Rn) in the sampled occupied
spaces.
with the prescribed limits for Airborne
bacteria and conduct the Mould
assessment in the sampled occupied
spaces.
Path 2
3 credits for submitting a valid IAQ
Certification Scheme (Good Class)
certificate issued by the Environmental
Protection Department (EPD) covering
the whole building.
3 credits and 1 additional BONUS credit

for submitting a valid IAQ Certification
Scheme (Excellent Class) certificate
issued by the Environmental Protection
Department (EPD) covering the whole
building.
(b) Air Quality in Car Park

with the pollutant concentration limits
specified in ProPECC PN 2/96.


Application
HWB 9 Thermal (a) Thermal Comfort Analysis All buildings 2+1
Comfort additional
2 credits for conducting thermal comfort
BONUS
analysis and demonstrate that normally
occupied spaces can fulfill the thermal
comfort requirements.
(b) Thermal Comfort Measurement

conducting on-site measurements to
verify the thermal comfort performance.
HWB 10 Artificial (a) Artificial lighting in normally occupied All buildings 2

Lighting spaces
1 credit for achieving the prescribed
lighting performance in normally
occupied spaces.
(b) Artificial lighting in not normally

occupied spaces and unoccupied
spaces
1 credit for achieving the prescribed
lighting performance in not normally
occupied spaces and unoccupied
spaces.
HWB 11 Daylight 2 BONUS credits for demonstrating at Residential, office 2 BONUS

least 55% of the total area of the studied and education
normally occupied spaces achieves buildings
spatial Daylight Autonomy300/50%
(sDA300/50%) and no more than 10% of
the same area receives Annual Sunlight
Exposure1000,250 (ASE1000, 250).
HWB 12 Biological 1 credit for complying with the All buildings 1

Contamination recommendations given in the Code of
Practice for Prevention of Legionnaires’
Disease 2016 Edition in respect of Water
Supply Systems, HVAC Systems and
other Water Features.
8 Innovations Maximum
and Additions 10 BONUS
(IA)
IA 1 Innovations Present evidence of the application of All buildings, for Maximum
and Additions new practices, technologies and/ or innovations that 10 BONUS
techniques that are (1) not described in have not been
this manual; or (2) not market addressed in
mainstream implementation; or (3) respective
multiple aspect achievement; and the categories of the
associated benefits in addressing NB certification.
sustainability objectives for new
buildings.
BEAM Plus New Buildings Version 2.0 Integrate Design and Construction Management - IDCM
2 Integrated Design 2.P Prerequisite

and Construction 2.1 Integrated Design Process
Management (IDCM) 2.2 Green Construction Practices
2.3 Smart Design and Technologies
2.4 Design for Engagement and Education on Green Buildings
Introduction This section focuses on the integration design management which

maximises the opportunities for integrated and cost-effective green design
approaches and construction methodologies; improvement in user’s health
and wellbeing; smart technologies and innovative approaches for green
design and construction.
2.P Prerequisite IDCM P1 Sustainability Champions – Project

IDCM P2 Environmental Management Plan
IDCM P3 Timber Used for Temporary Works
Background This part sets out the minimum requirements for integrated design
management in terms of engaging the Project BEAM Professional (BEAM
Pro) to facilitate the certification, non-virgin timber used for temporary works,
Environmental Management Plan and Waste Management Plan during
construction.
2.1 Integrated Design IDCM 1 Sustainability Champions - Design

Process IDCM 2 Complimentary Certification
IDCM 3 Integrated Design Process
IDCM 4 Life Cycle Costing
IDCM 5 Commissioning
Background An integrated process is a comprehensive approach to building systems and

equipment design. With the guidance of Project BEAM Pro, the project team
looks for synergies among systems and components, the mutual
advantages that can help in achieving high levels of building performance
for human comfort and environmental benefits. The process should involve
rigorous questioning, coordination and challenge to the typical project
assumptions. Team members collaborate to enhance the efficiency and
effectiveness of every system.
2.2 Green Construction IDCM 6 Sustainability Champions - Construction

Practices IDCM 7 Measures to Reduce Site Emissions
IDCM 8 Construction and Demolition Waste Recycling
IDCM 9 Construction IAQ Management
IDCM 10 Considerate Construction
IDCM 11 Building Management Manuals
IDCM 12 Operator Training plus Chemical Storage and Mixing Room
Background Construction site activities can be the significant source of environmental

degradation, unless appropriate steps are taken to reduce the emissions to
air, land and water, and to reduce annoyance from construction related
noise. It is the responsibility of contractors to do all in their ability to employ
appropriate construction methods to reduce air, noise, water and light
pollution.

BEAM Plus New Buildings Version 2.0 Integrative Design and Construction Management - IDCM
2.3 Smart Design and IDCM 13 Digital Facility Management Interface

Technologies IDCM 14 Occupant Engagement Platform
IDCM 15 Document Management System
IDCM 16 BIM Integration
Background To encourage the use of automation, data and behavioural science to

enable the building professionals to boost and maintain energy efficiency by
optimising equipment and related processes for energy performance and
comfort requirements.
2.4 Design for IDCM 17 Design for Engagement and Education on Green Buildings
Engagement and
Education on Green
Buildings
Background To encourage public education that focuses on strategies and solutions

applied to the green buildings.

BEAM Plus New Buildings Version 2.0 Integrated Design and Construction Management - IDCM P1

and Construction
Management
IDCM P1 Sustainability Champions – Project
Extent of Application All buildings
Objective Facilitate the application of the BEAM Plus certification process and to
ensure the compliance of relevant requirements of the BEAM Plus Manual.
Credits Attainable Prerequisite
Credit Requirement Prerequisite achieved for demonstrating that an accredited BEAM

Professional (BEAM Pro) with a valid credential for BEAM Plus New
Buildings is engaged as the Project BEAM Pro of the consultant team.
The Project BEAM Pro shall:

1. Act as the point of contact with the Hong Kong Green Building
Council and the BEAM Society Limited for administrative matters
relating to BEAM Plus certification;
2. Participate as one of the key project team members in the design and
construction stages, with the assistance of the Construction BEAM
Pro (and Affiliates, if any) defined under IDCM 6 if any, to oversee
the submission materials are in compliance with relevant
requirements of the BEAM Plus Manual. The Project BEAM Pro may
also assume other roles in the consultant team of the project (The
Project BEAM Pro, Design BEAM Pros under IDCM 1 and Construction
BEAM Pros under IDCM 6 must be different personnel);
3. Create a BEAM Plus NB Certification Checklist including project
goals, performance and BEAM Plus target rating;
4. Provide guidance to the project and construction teams regarding
BEAM Plus principles, structure, timing, certification process and
requirements of credits; and
5. Advise the Client on relevant professionals or parties on respective
tasks to address relevant BEAM Plus certification requirements.
Assessment 1) Complete the prescribed form with qualification details, appointment

information and confirmation of appointment of the Project BEAM Pro.
The appointed Project BEAM Pro should provide valid credentials from
appointment to completion of the certification process. If more than 1
Project BEAM Pro was employed for the project, the applicant should
clearly document the works for each BEAM Pro and how the works are
handed over and the timeline for their involvement.
2) Provide a BEAM Plus NB Certification Checklist which shall include the

following:
2.1 Determine the BEAM Plus certification level to pursue;
2.2 Select the BEAM Plus credits to meet the targeted certification
level; and
2.3 Identify the responsible parties to ensure the BEAM Plus

requirements for each prerequisite and selected credits are met.

2.4 Changes between PA and FA stage should be recorded and

a summary should be submitted to report the changes in
submission.
3) Provide a copy of the meeting minute (date and content of the minute
will be reviewed for compliance) showing the participation of the Project
BEAM Pro. Confidential or sensitive project information on the minute
is not required and could be covered:
3.1 Introductory workshop/ meeting

Highlight the attendance of Project BEAM Pro(s) and the section
of providing guidance to the project team regarding BEAM Plus
principles, structure, timing and certification processes. Indicate
the inclusion of Design BEAM Pros (and Affiliates, if any) as
defined under IDCM 1, if any;
3.2 Kick-off meeting with building main contractor

Highlight the attendance of BEAM Pro(s) and contractor
representative(s). Indicate the coordination with Construction
BEAM Pro(s) (and Affiliates, if any) as defined under IDCM 6, if
any. Highlight the key BEAM Plus requirements during the
construction stage; and
3.3 Review meeting(s) with contractors

Highlight the attendance of BEAM Pro and the section of providing
guidance on BEAM Plus requirements to the contractors during
construction.
Submittals
Supporting Documents PA FA
Please provide softcopies with filename prefix as
indicated on the leftmost column below.
IDCM_P1_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template for

 
IDCM P1
IDCM_P1_01 BEAM Plus NB Certification Checklist  
IDCM_P1_02 A copy of the meeting minute of

introductory workshop/ meeting
 -
IDCM_P1_03 A copy of the meeting minute of kick-off

meeting with main building contractor/ * 
Construction BEAM Pro(s) (and
Affiliates, if any)
IDCM_P1_04 A copy of the meeting minute of review * 

meeting(s) with contractors
IDCM_P1_05 Supporting documents showing how
the works are handed over and the
timeline for their involvement, if  
applicable (e.g. Declaration letter from
the employer of the Project BEAM Pro)
* Meeting minutes shall be submitted in PA if the meeting(s) is/are held

not less than 3 months prior to PA (first submission).

Remarks (a) Additional Information

Hong Kong Green Building Council publishes the latest registers of
BEAM Professionals and BEAM Affiliates on its website. [ONLINE].
Available at:
https://practitioner2.hkgbc.org.hk/index.php?r=Beam/Directory.
[Accessed April 2021].
(b) Related Credits

IDCM 1 Sustainability Champions – Design
The related credit encourages the engagement of Design BEAM Pros
and/ or Affiliates engaged by respective core design disciplines to
integrate BEAM standards and practices into the planning, design and
construction of the building.
IDCM 3 Integrative Design Process

The related credit encourages early consideration of integrative
building design process, buildability and operational issues to support
holistic and cost-effective outcomes of building performance, human
health and environmental benefits.
IDCM 6 Sustainability Champions – Construction

The related credit encourages the engagement of BEAM Pros and/ or
Affiliates engaged by contractors during construction to work
collaboratively with the Project BEAM Pro to monitor progress against
targeted construction-related BEAM Plus requirements.


and Construction
Management
Objective Encourage a high standard of environmental management during

construction.
Credit Requirement Prerequisite achieved for demonstrating that an Environmental

Management Plan has been properly prepared.
Assessment 1) An Environmental Management Plan (EMP) shall be prepared to

address potential significant environmental aspects and impacts, to
propose appropriate mitigation measures, to include environmental
monitoring and auditing plans and to propose a waste management
system. Reference shall be made to all of the following:
1.1. Environment, Transport and Works Bureau (ETWB)’s Technical

Circular (Works) 19/2005, Appendix C [1];
1.2. Hong Kong Construction Association (HKCA)’s Best Practice

Guide for Environmental Protection on Construction Sites,
Section 3.2.3 [2];
1.3. Environmental Protection Department (EPD)’s Environmental

Monitoring and Audit - Guidelines for Development Projects in
Hong Kong, Appendix D2 [3]
1.4. Buildings Department, PNAP ADV-19, Construction and

Demolition Waste [4]
1.5. Project Administration Handbook for Civil Engineering Works,

Section 4.1.3, Construction and Demolition Materials [5]
2) For a project that is a Designated Project under the Environmental

Impact Assessment (EIA) Ordinance, environmental measurement
points agreed by EPD shall be adopted.
1 Environment, Transport and Works Bureau (ETWB), Technical Circular (Works) 19/2005, Appendix C. [ONLINE]. Available at:
http://www.devb.gov.hk/filemanager/technicalcirculars/en/upload/19/1/C-2005-19-0-1.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].
2 Hong Kong Construction Association (HKCA), Best Practice Guide for Environmental Protection on Construction Sites, 3.2.3.
[ONLINE]. Available at: https://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/greenconstruction/links/links.html. [Accessed April 2021].
3 Environmental Protection Department (EPD), Environmental Monitoring and Audit - Guidelines for Development Projects in Hong
Kong Appendix D2. [ONLINE]. Available at: http://www.epd.gov.hk/eia/hb/materials/images/AppendixD2.pdf. [Accessed April
2021].
4 Buildings Department, PNAP ADV-19, Construction and Demolition Waste. [ONLINE]. Available at:
https://www.bd.gov.hk/doc/en/resources/codes-and-references/practice-notes-and-circular-letters/pnap/ADV/ADV019.pdf.
5 Project Administration Handbook for Civil Engineering Works, Section 4.1.3, Construction and Demolition Materials. [ONLINE].
Available at:
https://www.cedd.gov.hk/filemanager/eng/content_80/PAH%202020%20Chapter%204%20Rev%2001%20clean_210308.pdf.

3) Provide EMP(s) of construction (demolition and foundation to be

included, if any) prepared by contractors and reviewed/ endorsed by
Construction BEAM Pro (or Construction BEAM Affiliate) defined
under IDCM 6 or Project BEAM Pro defined under IDCM P1.
4) Provide extracts of tender documents (e.g. specifications)

highlighting the clause requiring contractors to prepare EMP(s), if no
construction stage has commenced before the submission of PA
stage.
5) Provide endorsed EMP(s), if any construction stage has commenced

before the submission of PA.
6) If IDCM 7 (d) is targeted, the corresponding plan and measures in

achieving the credit should be included in the EMP.
Submittals
Please provide softcopies with filename prefix as indicated
on the leftmost column below.
IDCM_P2_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template for

IDCM P2  
IDCM_P2_01 Specification requiring EMP(s)  -

[or]
EMP(s) of construction (demolition and * 

foundation to be included, if any)
* Evidence of compliance with prerequisite requirements for construction

works started not less than 3 months prior to PA (first submission) shall be
submitted in PA.


Environmental Protection Department, Recommended Pollution Control
Clauses for Construction Contracts. [ONLINE]. Available at:
http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/environmentinhk/eia_planning/guide
_ref/rpc.html. [Accessed April 2021].
Environmental Protection Department, Quality Powered Mechanical

Equipment (QPME) system. [ONLINE]. Available at:
http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/environmentinhk/noise/qpme/index.h
tml. [Accessed April 2021].
Buildings Department, PNRC-17, Control of Environmental Nuisance

from Construction Sites. [ONLINE]. Available at:
https://www.bd.gov.hk/doc/en/resources/codes-and-references/practice-
notes-and-circular-letters/pnrc/Pnrc17.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].
Development Bureau (ETWB)’s Technical Circular (Works) 6/2010, Trip

Ticket System for Disposal of Construction & Demolition Materials.
[ONLINE]. Available at:
http://www.devb.gov.hk/filemanager/technicalcirculars/en/upload/308/1/
C-2010-06-01.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].
(b) Related Credits

IDCM 7 Measures to Reduce Site Emissions
The related credit addresses measures to minimise air, noise, water and
light pollution during construction of buildings and the infrastructure
serving buildings.

The related credit encourages best practices in the management of
construction resources consumption, including waste reduction.


and Construction
Management
IDCM P3 Timber Used for Temporary Works
Objective Encourage the well-managed use of timber.
Credit Requirement Prerequisite achieved for demonstrating that no virgin forest products
are used for temporary works.
Assessment 1. Timber used for all temporary works (falsework, formworks and
hoarding works) shall originate from sustainable forestry or re-used
existing material, unless exceptional circumstances occur.
2. Sustainable timber shall be certified by the Forest Stewardship

Council (FSC) [ 1 ], the American Forest and Paper Association
(AFPA) [2] or Programme for the Endorsement of Forest Certification
(PEFC) [3] or “known licensed sources” [4].
3. Monthly summary tables which demonstrate prerequisite

requirement shall be prepared and declared by contractor.
4. In PA, provide extracts of tender documents (e.g. specifications)

highlighting the clause precluding the use of virgin timber in all
temporary works if no construction works have commenced.
5. Provide records (e.g. invoices and delivery notes for new timbers
used / transfer notes for reused timers) if construction (demolition
and foundation to be included, if any) has commenced before the
submission of PA.
6. If timber was not used for temporary works during certain

construction stage(s), provide declaration letter(s) from the site
representative(s) OR project developer specifying that timber was
not used.
1 Forest Stewardship Council. [ONLINE]. Available at: http://www.fsc.org/ [Accessed April 2021].
2 American Forest and Paper Association. [ONLINE]. Available at: http://www.afandpa.org/ [Accessed April 2021].
3 Programme for the Endorsement of Forest Certification. [ONLINE]. Available at: https://www.pefc.org/ [Accessed April 2021].
4 Architectural Services Department, General Specifications for Building 2017, Section 13, Carpentry and Joinery. [ONLINE].
Available at: https://www.archsd.gov.hk/media/publications-publicity/general-specification-for-
building/general_specification_for_building_2017_edition-20191223.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].

7. The reuse of timber or timber products for temporary works is

acceptable. Transfer notes and site photo records should be kept
and submitted to show the originating old timber source, the quantity
and the date of transfer of the timber products between the despatch
work site and the project site (recipient). The transfer notes should
bear the detailed name and address of the work sites concerned
and duly signed by both the despatch and recipient parties
undertaking the transfer (i.e. site representative / stores officer in
managerial position), together with company chops.
If the old timber products are from the same project site, a detailed
usage record or inventory prepared by a site representative in
respect of the timber products being used/reused at the project site
shall suffice to prove the reuse.
8. In the event the timber products are not purchased from a supplier
who is an "accredited company”, the following basic evidence
should be produced to demonstrate the products:
(i) conform to sustainable forestry practice guidelines;

(ii) be accredited by recognised organisations; and
(iii) in compliance with the specification set down by the
organisation.
Provided that the timber products are sourced from a supplier

already accredited by the Approval Organisations, i.e. FSC, AFPA,
PEFC or other "known licensed sources” according to the respective
protocol (accredited company), and the timber products purchased
are issued with the Certificate under the CoC (Chain of Custody)
system, it is acceptable that the following documents as proof to
demonstrate the timber products as purchased from the timber
supplier and used in the project site are from a sustainable source:
(i) Invoice plus Delivery Note (DN) from the supplier of the timber
products purchased - on the invoice & DN, it should be marked
with the reference Certificate No.; a note which has the effect of
confirming the products in the invoice and delivery note are
certified; the pack no. of the timber products (samples are
available on BSL’s website [5] [6]);
(ii) A copy of the CoC Certificate of the certified timber supplier;
AND
(iii) Photographic evidence of the timber products.
5 BEAM Society Limited. [ONLINE]. Available at:

https://www.beamsociety.org.hk/files/download/20191129_FAQ_MA_Attachment_a1.pdf [Accessed April 2021].
6 BEAM Society Limited. [ONLINE]. Available at: https://www.beamsociety.org.hk/files/download/20191129_FAQ_MA_Attachment_a2.pdf

Submittals
IDCM_P3_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template

 
for IDCM P3
IDCM_P3_01 Summary of Timber Use for

Temporary Works [Appendix A] with
contractor’s endorsement
* 
(for the use of new timber and/ or
reused timber from other sites/ same
project site)
IDCM_P3_02 Specifications precluding the use of

virgin timber  -
IDCM_P3_03 Declaration letter from the site

representative OR project developer
 
specifying that timber was not used for
temporary works
IDCM_P3_04 Timber Product Compliance

Certificate [e.g. Chain of Custody
(CoC), etc.] * 
(for the use of new timber only)
IDCM_P3_05 Invoices and delivery notes

quantifying the new timber used during
construction works * 
(for the use of new timber only)
IDCM_P3_06 Transfer notes for timber reused from

other sites during construction works
* 
(for the reuse of timber from other sites
only)
* Evidence of compliance with prerequisite requirements for construction

submitted in PA.
Remark: Photo records of timber products shall be kept and submitted for
assessment upon request.


WWF, Guide to Responsible Purchasing of Forest Products.
http://assets.wwf.org.uk/downloads/responsible_purchasing.pdf.
Buildings Department, PNAP ADV-5 Tropical Hardwood Timber,

gives guidance for alternatives to the use of hardwoods in order
to reduce the amount of tropical hardwood timber used in
building projects. [ONLINE]. Available at:
https://www.bd.gov.hk/doc/en/resources/codes-and-
references/practice-notes-and-circular-
letters/pnap/ADV/ADV005.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].
Works Bureau Technical Circular (WBTC) No. 19/2001, “Metallic

Site Hoardings and Signboards” establishes the revised policy
requiring the use of metallic site hoardings and signboards in order
to reduce the amount of timber used on construction sites. This
Circular supersedes WBTC 19/99 and shall be read in conjunction
with WBTC 32/92 on “The Use of Tropical Hardwood on
Construction Sites” to reduce the amount of hardwood timber
used on construction sites. [ONLINE]. Available at:
https://www.devb.gov.hk/filemanager/technicalcirculars/en/upload/1
53/1/wb1901.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].
(b) Related Credits

None

BEAM Plus New Buildings Version 2.0 Integrated Design and Construction Management – IDCM 1
2 Integrated Design 2.1 Integrated Design Process

and Construction
Management
IDCM 1 Sustainability Champions – Design
Objective Encourage the engagement of BEAM Professionals and/ or Affiliates to

integrate BEAM Plus standards and practices into the planning and design
of the building.
Credits Attainable 1 + 1 additional BONUS
Credit Requirement 1 credit for at least two (2) members from at least two (2) applicable core
design disciplines shall be accredited BEAM Professionals with valid
credentials for BEAM Plus New Buildings.
1 additional BONUS credit for at least one (1) additional member,

from an applicable core design discipline different from the disciplines
counted in the above credit, shall be an accredited BEAM Professional
with valid credentials for BEAM Plus New Buildings; or
Alternatively,
At least two (2) additional members, of an applicable core design

discipline different from the disciplines counted in the above credit, shall
be accredited BEAM Affiliates with valid credentials for BEAM Plus New
Buildings.
Assessment The Design BEAM Pros (and Affiliates, if any) shall:

1. Be engaged in the applicable core design disciplines from project
inception to completion of detailed design and specifications stage of
the Project. Core design disciplines shall be justified by the specific
nature of the Project. The following disciplines, if they are engaged
in the Project, shall form the core design disciplines:
1.1. Project management;

1.2. Facility management;
1.3. Architectural;
1.4. Structural/ civil engineering;
1.5. Building services engineering;
1.6. Surveying;
1.7. Landscaping;
1.8. Sustainability / Environmental;
1.9. Interior designer; and
1.10. Other as proposed and justified by the specific nature of the
Project.
The Design BEAM Pros (and Affiliates, if any) may also assume other
roles in the consultant team of the Project. (The Design BEAM Pros
and Project BEAM Pro under IDCM P1 must be different personnel)

2. If there is any change of Design BEAM Pro/ Affiliate during the period
from project inception to completion of detailed design and
specifications stage of the Project, supporting documents should be
provided to document the hand-over
3. Participate in introductory workshop/ meeting as required under IDCM

P1.
4. Participate in multi-disciplinary design charrette as required under

IDCM 3, if applicable.
5. Complete the prescribed form with qualification details, appointment

information and confirmation of appointment of the Design BEAM
Pros (and Affiliates, if any).
The appointed Design BEAM Pros (and Affiliates, if any) should

maintain his/ her accreditation and credential during his/ her
appointment.
6. Provide a copy of the following meeting minutes (date and content

of the minute will be reviewed for compliance) showing the
participation of the Design BEAM Pros (and Affiliates, if any) in an
introductory workshop/ meeting as required under IDCM P1 and a
multi-disciplinary design charrette as required under IDCM 3 (if
applicable). Confidential/ sensitive project information is not required
and could be covered.
Submittals
IDCM_01_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template for

 
IDCM 1
IDCM_01_01 A copy of the meeting minutes

 #
of introductory workshop/ meeting
IDCM_01_02 A copy of the meeting minutes of multi-

disciplinary design charrette (if any)  #
under IDCM 3
IDCM_01_03 Supporting documents showing how the

works are handed over and the timeline  
for their involvement, if applicable (e.g.
Declaration letter from the employer of
the Design BEAM Pro/ Affiliate)
# The supporting documents are not required in FA if the credit is achieved in

PA

Remarks (a) Additional information

Available at:
(b) Related credits

IDCM P1 Sustainability Champions - Project
The related prerequisite encourages the engagement of BEAM
Pro to facilitate the application for the BEAM Plus certification
process and to ensure the compliance of relevant requirements of
the BEAM Plus.
IDCM 3 Integrative Design Process

The related credit encourages early considerations for integrative
building design process, buildability and operational issues to
support holistic and cost-effective outcomes of building
performance, human health and environmental benefits.

The related credit encourages the engagement of BEAM Pro(s)
and/ or Affiliates engaged by contractors during construction to
work collaboratively with the Project BEAM Professional to
monitor progress towards the targeted construction-related BEAM
Plus requirements.


and Construction
Management
IDCM 2 Complimentary Certification
Extent of Application All buildings that are applicable for respective BEAM Plus certification tools
Objective Encourage to pursue green building practices from planning, building

design, construction, interior fitting-out to operation.
Credits Attainable 3 BONUS
Credit Requirement (a) BEAM Plus Neighbourhood (ND)

1 BONUS credit where the project is certified by BEAM Plus
Neighbourhood (ND) certification.

1 BONUS credit for preparing the Project for BEAM Plus Interiors (BI)
certification.

1 BONUS credit for preparing the project for BEAM Plus Existing
Buildings (EB) certification (Comprehensive Scheme).
Assessment (a) BEAM Plus Neighbourhood (ND)

Provide a copy of valid BEAM Plus Neighbourhood Certificate at the
time of the first submission of Provisional Assessment of the BEAM
Plus New Building (NB) certification.
Provide evidence demonstrating that site planning is aligned with and
is essentially the same as the Master Plan defined in the ND
certification.

Provide justification of the extent of eligible non-domestic premises of
the project. Definition of eligible premises shall refer to section 1.2.1 of
BEAM Plus Interiors Manual v1.0 [1].
Provide a report demonstrating the prerequisite compliance for at least
50% of total Internal Floor Area (IFA) of all eligible premises in BEAM
Plus BI certification.
Declaration letter signed by the Project Owner/ Developer in attaining
the BONUS Credit(s) is accepted as an alternative to the above-
mentioned evidence for Provisional Assessment.

Provide an undertaking letter signed by the Owner/ Developer
regarding their commitment to pursue BEAM Plus EB certification
(comprehensive scheme).
Provide a feasibility study report on BEAM Plus EB certification of the

project with the following details:
1) Checklist for potential credits and rating;
1 BEAM Society Limited – BEAM Plus Interiors Manual v1.0. [ONLINE]. Available at:
http://www.beamsociety.org.hk/files/Manual/BEAM%20Plus%20Interiors%20Manual.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].

2) Budget estimation for EB certification; and

3) Roll-out plan.
If a feasibility study is not available, declaration letter signed by the

Project Owner/ Developer in attaining the BONUS credit(s) is
accepted as alternative to the abovementioned evidence for
Provisional Assessment.
Submittals (a) BEAM Plus Neighbourhood (ND)

Please provide softcopies with filename prefix
as indicated on the leftmost column below.
IDCM_02a_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template  

for IDCM 2a
IDCM_02a_01 BEAM Plus Neighbourhood (ND)  #

certificate
IDCM_02a_02 Evidence to demonstrate adaptation

of the Master Plan design certified  #
under ND
# The supporting documents are not required in FA if the credit is achieved
in PA

IDCM_02b_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template  

for IDCM 2b
IDCM_02b_01 Justification of the extent of eligible

non-domestic premises * 
IDCM_02b_02 Report to demonstrate prerequisite

* 
compliance for BI
[or]
Declaration letter signed by the  -

Project Owner/ Developer (alternative
evidence)
* Evidence of credit compliance is required if declaration letter by the

Project Owner/ Developer is not available.


IDCM_02c_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template

for IDCM 2c  
IDCM_02c_01 Undertaking letter signed by the

Project Owner/ Developer on the
commitment to pursue BEAM Plus - 
EB certification.
IDCM_02c_02 Feasibility study report, including

* 
scorecard, budget and roll-out plan
[or]
Declaration letter signed by the  -

Project Owner/ Developer (alternative
evidence)
* Evidence of credit compliance is required if declaration letter signed

by the Project Owner/ Developer is not available.

The latest manuals of BEAM Plus Neighbourhood, BEAM Plus
Interiors and BEAM Plus Existing Buildings are available on Hong
Kong Green Building Council’s website. [ONLINE]. Available at:
https://www.hkgbc.org.hk/eng/BPRef-manuals_assessment.aspx.
(b) Related Credits

None

BEAM Plus New Buildings Version 2.0 Integrated Design and Construction Management - IDCM 3

and Construction
Management
IDCM 3 Integrated Design Process
Objective Encourage early consideration of the integrated building design process,

buildability and operational issues to support holistic and cost-effective
outcomes of building performance, human health and environmental
benefits.
Credits Attainable 4
Credit Requirement (a) Early Considerations for Integrated Building Design

1 credit for consideration of the integrated design process regarding
whole-system thinking to explore the interrelationships among green
building design strategies and systems in the conceptual design stage.
1 additional credit for organising at least one multi-disciplinary design

charrette to formulate passive and active design strategies in the
conceptual/ schematic design stages.
(b) Early Design Consideration of Buildability/ Constructability

1 credit for early design consideration of buildability to ease
construction and save on-site materials/ labour before completion of
the design development stage.
(c) Design Consideration for Operation and Maintenance

1 credit for design consideration of the long-term operation and
maintenance needs of the building and its engineering services.
Assessment (a) Early Considerations for Integrated Building Design
1. Exploration of interrelationships among green building

design strategies and systems
Provide a design review report in comparing preliminary

sustainable design benefits for at least one (1) baseline and one
(1) alternative design option for each issue.
The report should at least have the sections below with no less
than 500 words for each identified issue:
i. Executive Summary
ii. Project Program
iii. Workshop arranged for integrated design process (with date of
workshop, number or arrangement of attendances)
iv. Selected consideration, each with:
A baseline with the same development potentials as the design

options. The design should conform to the statutory requirements
such as Building Ordinance and Town Planning Ordinance.

An alternative design option with graphical support at concept

stage level and board brush calculation in supporting the
argument.
v. Conclusion
One or multiple design options is demonstrated to address at least

two (2) issues of each of the following considerations:
Considerations Issues
Site planning and - Building permeability/ air ventilation/
outdoor thermal comfort;
environmental
- Landscaping/ site coverage with
quality
greenery;
- Neighbourhood daylight access;
- Ecological value;
- Climate resilience.
Built form/ - Cooling load reduction;
orientation and
- Lighting load reduction;
energy use/
generation - Natural ventilation potential;
- Renewable energy opportunities.
Building envelope - Cooling load reduction/OTTV/
attributes1 and RTTV estimation;
energy use
- Lighting load reduction;
- Natural ventilation potential.
Note: 1. Building envelope attributes refer to:
- insulation values;
- window-to-wall ratios;
- glazing characteristics;
- shading;
- window operability.
Strategies addressing multiple consideration and issues are
acceptable.
The sustainable design benefits for respective considerations shall

be demonstrated in design appraisal by either:
1) Qualitative assessment report making reference to the Urban
Design Guidelines of the Hong Kong Planning Standards and
Guidelines Chapter 11 as appropriate:
a) Identify good design features;
b) Identify obvious problematic areas and propose some

mitigation measures;
c) Define “focus” and methodologies of any further study in

the schematic or design development stages;
2) Spreadsheet calculations; or
3) “Simple box” environmental/ energy modelling (simplified

massing model that may not include detail of systems)

2. Multi-disciplinary design charrette

Provide evidence that at least one multi-disciplinary design
charrette has been held before the completion of schematic
design stage.
The charrette shall, at minimum, address the following issues:
2.1 Participants:
a) Developer/ owner representative;
b) User representative (if users are known in design stage);
c) Operation and maintenance team representative (if
identified in schematic design stage);
d) Members from core design disciplines as defined in
IDCM 1;
2.2 Introduce fundamentals of integrated design process [1]:

a) Well-defined vision, goals and objectives;
b) Collaborative team and open communication;
c) Whole-system thinking and innovative synthesis, and
d) Iterative process and feedback cycles;
2.3 Review and agree on following principal design strategies:
a) Key stakeholders’ values, aspirations and requirements;

b) Functional programming;
c) Site planning and outdoor environmental quality
d) Built form and orientation;
e) Building envelope attributes;
f) Key active building systems for energy saving/
generation;
g) Other strategies to be proposed by the Applicant.

1. Demonstrate early consideration of buildability to ease
construction and save on-site materials/ labour before the
completion of the design development stage, either by:
1.1. engaging a construction management consultant or

contractor who should be with adequate experience such as
at least 10 years of experience OR at least 5 years of
experience across 2 projects or more in building construction
industry and should not be under the design team (e.g. the
client’s representative or construction team member with
relevant experience);
1 BC Green Building Roundtable. Roadmap for the Integrated Design Process. [ONLINE]. Available at:
http://www.greenspacencr.org/events/IDProadmap.pdf [Accessed April 2021].

1.2. design optimisation of voids and complex form; or

1.3. adopting at least 75% of design measures on the 3S concept
(standardisation, simplification and single integrated element)
as promulgated in the Development Bureau’s Guidelines [2].
1.4. Alternative standard could be proposed.
2. For item (b) 1.1, provide evidence demonstrating that

recommendations/ inputs by the construction management
consultant/contractor have been reviewed/ adopted. This shall
include the following:
2.1. Appointment letter of the construction management

consultant or the contractors;
2.2. Correspondence or any of the meeting minute(s)
(confidential/sensitive project information is not required and
shall be excluded) demonstrating that the design has been
reviewed and recommendations have been suggested; and
2.3. The recommendations have been adopted.
3. For item (b) 1.2, provide evidence demonstrating that design of

high voids and complex forms, if any, have been optimised:
3.1. Percentage of high voids to total building height is below 15%;

and
3.2. Complexity of tower-built form in terms of tilting, tapering,
twisting or free form has been optimised to fulfill both
requirements:
Height of Maximum offset of the Maximum percentage

building building measuring of total number of
against the ground floors with offsets
floor plate or any measured against the
typical floor plate total number of floors
of the building
< 45m 4m 35%
45m < 90m 3m 25%
90m <135m 2m 15%
≥ 135m 1m 5%
4. For item (b) 1.3, provide report with completed prescribed form to
demonstrate implementation of at least 75% of listed 3S concept
measures.
4.1. Provide extracts of tender documents, contract conditions

and/ or specifications highlighting the clause requiring the
contractors to carry out 3S concept measures, if construction
(foundation to be included, if any) has not yet been
commenced at PA stage.
2 Development Bureau – Guidelines for Enhancement of Productivity of Skilled Workers in Public Works Projects. [ONLINE].
Available at:
https://www.devb.gov.hk/filemanager/en/content_29/Guidelines_Enhancement_of_Productivity_(Mar_2013)_English.pdf.


1. Provide evidence that the design has considered the long-term
operation and maintenance needs for the building and its
engineering services by providing at least 5 of the following
features:
1.1. Building Management System (BMS);

1.2. Davit arm/ gondola system;
1.3. External pipe duct or pipe duct in communal areas;
1.4. Fall arrest system;
1.5. Maintenance platform for building services installations;
1.6. Maintenance workshop for facility management;
1.7. Movable working platform for maintenance;
1.8. Access and safety provision for external air-conditioning unit
at height without use of scaffolding;
1.9. Others, to be proposed by the Applicant with justification.
Submittals (a) Early Considerations for Integrative Building Design

IDCM_03a_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template for

IDCM 3a  
IDCM_03a_01 Design review report on preliminary

sustainable design benefits  #
IDCM_03a_02 Multi-disciplinary design charrette report

 #
(if the additional credit is targeted)
# The supporting document(s) is/ are not required in FA if the credit(s)
is/ are achieved in PA.

IDCM_03b_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template for

 
IDCM 3b with
Summary of Adoption of 3S Concept
[Form S-A] (for Item (b) 1.3 only) * 
For Item (b) 1.1, please submit the followings: PA FA
IDCM_03b_01 Appointment letter of the construction  #

management consultant or contractors

Correspondence or any of the meeting

minute(s) with construction management  #
consultant or contractors.
Report on adoption of construction

management consultant’s (or  #
contractors’) recommendations
CV of the construction management

 #
consultant or contractor
IDCM_03b_02 Design report demonstrating

optimisation of high voids and complex  #
forms
IDCM_03b_03 Report with completed prescribed form to

* 
demonstrate compliance with 3S
concept measures.
[or]
Extracts of tender documents (e.g.  -
specifications) specifying the
requirements for 3S concept measures
implementation (if applicable)
* Evidence of compliance with credit requirements for construction

works started not less than 3 months prior to PA (first submission) shall
be submitted in PA.

IDCM_03c_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template for  

IDCM 3c
IDCM_03c_01 Design report demonstrating the  
adoption of O&M features
IDCM_03c_02 Dated photo records of the completed - 
O&M features
[or]
Approved material submission - *
[or]
Declaration letter signed by the Project
Owner undertaking the provision - *
*Alternative supporting document is accepted ONLY if photo records of

the completed O&M features are not available at the time of FA.


For IDCM 3a
Buildings Department – PNAP APP-152, Sustainable Building Design
Guidelines. [ONLINE]. Available at:
references/practice-notes-and-circular-letters/pnap/APP/APP152.pdf.
Buildings Department – Codes of Practice and Design Manuals, Code

of Practice for Overall Thermal Transfer Value in Buildings 1995.
https://www.bd.gov.hk/doc/en/resources/codes-and-references/code-
and-design-manuals/OTTV1995_e.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].
Buildings Department – PNAP APP-156, Design and Construction

Requirements for Energy Efficiency of Residential Buildings.
references/practice-notes-and-circular-letters/pnap/APP/APP156.pdf.
For IDCM 3c
Buildings Department – PNAP ADV-14, Facilities for External
Inspection and Maintenance of Buildings. [ONLINE]. Available at:
references/practice-notes-and-circular-letters/pnap/ADV/ADV014.pdf.
Buildings Department – Appendix A2 of PNAP ADV-33, Essential

Information in Plan Submissions. [ONLINE]. Available at:
Buildings Department – Circular Letter dated 23 December 2016,

Guidelines for Designing Access and Safety Provisions for the
Maintenance and Repair (M&R) of External Air Conditioners (ACs) at
Height. [ONLINE]. Available at:
letters/circular/CL_GDASP2016e.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].
(b) Related Credits

The related credit encourages the use of life cycle costing to facilitate
an investigation of potential design options, specifications, operation
and maintenance.
SS P1 Minimum Landscape Requirements

The related prerequisite credit encourages building development to
preserve or expand urban greenery.
SS 4 Neighbourhood Daylight Access

The related credit encourages building development which is sensitive
to the needs of neighbours in terms of preserving daylight and views.

SS 7 Biodiversity Enhancement
The related credit encourages strategies to preserve and/or enhance
the ecological value of the site in terms of habitat and biodiversity.
SS 8 Urban Heat Island Mitigation

The related credit encourages higher overall site coverage of
greenery and stipulates minimum site coverage of greenery in the
Primary Zone (the 15m vertical zone of a site along the abutting street
level).
SS 9 Immediate Neighbourhood Wind Environment

The credit encourages improvement in wind environments around and
adjacent to the buildings and adequate considerations of wind
amplification, and where appropriate, suitable mitigation measures
are provided.
SS 10 Outdoor Thermal Comfort

The related credit considers the positive effect of shading by trees and
the surrounding ground surface temperatures of greenery within the
site.
EU 1 Low Carbon Passive Design

The related credit encourages passive building design allowing
buildings to respond to the local climate; reducing the reliance on
active servicing for human comfort.
EU 5 Renewable and Alternative Energy Systems

The related credit encourages the wider application of renewable
energy sources in buildings.


and Construction
Management
Objective Encourage the use of life cycle costing to facilitate investigation of potential
design options, specifications, operation and maintenance.
Credit Requirement 1 credit for conducting life cycle costing for active systems.
Assessment Conduct life cycle costing analysis with design options for each of the below
active system, if present in the project construction scope:
1) Hot water system;
2) Interior lighting system; and
3) Air-conditioning system;
The life cycle costing exercise can be non-discounted and should include
the following costs:
1) Acquisition;
2) Operation (utilities); and
3) Maintenance (replacements, planned maintenance and management
costs).
While developing design options, the applicant should consider different

configurations and specifications, for example, initial costs, number of
equipment units involved, equipment efficiency and lifespan, etc.
Indicate cost of each design option of active system over 20, 30, 40 and 50
years and highlight which design option will have the lowest life cycle cost
at the 50th year.
Prepare a life cycle costing report including all the assumptions made and
the results of life cycle costing.
Substantiate the costs with catalogues, suppliers’ recommendations or

quotation. Cost approximations suggested by Quantitative Surveyor are
also accepted. No professional life cycle costing software is required for
this study.
Note that the costing exercise imposes no obligation for implementation but
encourages consideration of the costs of systems throughout their life
cycle.
The life cycle costing report should include at least the below items with a
minimum of 8 A4 pages:
1. Executive Summary
2. Project Description with Construction scope
3. System options to be considered

4. Life cycle costing and analysis

5. Conclusion
Submittals
IDCM_04_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template

 
for IDCM 4
IDCM_04_01 Life cycle costing report  #
# The supporting document is not required in FA if the credit is achieved
in PA.

ISO 15686-5:2008 Buildings & constructed assets – Service life
planning – Part 5: Life cycle costing
(b) Related Credits

None


and Construction
Management
IDCM 5 Commissioning
Objective Ensure the building systems perform as design specified and buildings
operate as design intended.
Credit Requirement 2 credits for demonstrating (a) the appointment of commissioning authority
(CxA) before tender stage and (b) providing a commissioning plan.
1 credit for providing a commissioning review report before construction as

described in part (c).
1 credit for providing commissioning reports as described in part (d).
Assessment (a) Engage Commissioning Authority (CxA)

1. Identify a Chartered Engineer, Registered Professional Engineer,
Member of HKIE (under the discipline of building services,
mechanical, electrical, energy or environmental), ASHRAE BCxP
as the CxA
2. The CxA should have the proper experience and credentials

including adequate expertise in the commissioning of electrical and
mechanical systems, equipment and components to develop and
implement effective commissioning.
3. The CxA should have direct experience with at least two similar
projects and must have been involved before the start of schematic
design stage to countercheck that the systems will meet the design
intents.
4. The CxA must not be responsible for any aspect of the project
design, construction or installation of any building services
installations of the project.
5. The CxA must not be an employee of the design firm.
6. The CxA must not be an employee of, or contracted through, a

contractor or construction manager dealing with construction
contracts. For design and build projects, the owner should directly
employ the CxA.
7. The CxA may be a qualified employee or consultant of the owner.
8. Reporting of all conditions and findings must be immediate and

directly from the CxA to the Client. The CxA shall be responsible
for:
8.1. Review and approval of commissioning specifications;
8.2. The development of a commissioning plan;
8.3. Facilitate and ultimately oversee the commissioning
process for all systems to be commissioned; and

8.4. Document whether systems, equipment and components are

functioning in accordance with the design intent and in
accordance with the construction documents.
(b) Develop Commissioning Plan

1. Establish a preliminary commissioning plan for the CxA to outline
the scope of commissioning and systems to be tested.
2. Project roles and responsibilities, the commissioning team’s

project directory, and schedule of commissioning activities should
all be included in the commissioning plan.
3. The Commissioning plan is a living document that is updated

throughout the life of the project and will become the basis for the
final commissioning report.
4. The Commissioning plan should include the following content:

4.1. Goals and objectives;
4.2. General project information;
4.3. Systems to be commissioned;
4.4. Description of the Commissioning team, including team
members, roles and responsibility;
4.5. Description of the Commissioning team’s communication
protocol, coordination, meetings and management;
4.6. Development of system (if applicable) functional test
procedures for the following:
4.6.1. HVAC&R systems and associated controls;
4.6.2. Light and daylighting controls;
4.6.3. Domestic hot water systems (including swimming pool
if heating is provided);
4.6.4. Lift and escalator systems; and
4.6.5. Renewable energy systems;
4.7. Verification of system performance;
4.8. Reporting deficiencies and the resolution process; and
4.9. Acceptance of the building systems.
(c) Commissioning Review Report

1. Before construction begins, develop commissioning requirements
based on the systems included in the design and incorporate
them into the construction documents.
2. Commissioning specifications informing the contractors and/ or

sub-contractors of their roles and responsibilities throughout the
commissioning process.
3. Before construction begins, review and document whether the

system is designed in accordance with the design intent as
acknowledged by the project owner.

4. Provide a commissioning review report endorsed by the CxA
(d) Commissioning Report

1. After all commissioning tasks except seasonally deferred
commissioning have been completed, the commissioning
report(s) with all the approved checklists and endorsement from
CxA shall be provided.
2. The Commissioning report should include the following content:

2.1. Executive summary of commissioning process and
results, system deficiencies identified and resolutions,
outstanding issues identified.
2.2. List of participants and their respective roles;
2.3. Brief building description;
2.4. Commissioning process scope;
2.5. Installation verification checklist;
2.6. List of systems commissioned;
2.7. Equipment documentation;
2.8. Functional performance tests including date and time of
test, individuals present during testing, visual inspection
observations, sensor checks, device checks, operating
mode tests and results;
2.9. List of outstanding commissioning issues and any testing
that is scheduled on a later date; and
2.10. All outstanding deficiencies identified during or as a result
of commissioning activities should be listed and
highlighted.
Submittals
 
for IDCM 5.
IDCM_05_01 Specification on the scope of services  #

of CxA.
IDCM_05_02 Organisation Chart of the project

team with CxA’s involvement and a
 #
brief description of the
commissioning tasks.
IDCM_05_03 CV of CxA to demonstrate adequate  #

expertise of the CxA.
IDCM_05_04 Commissioning Plan meeting the
requirements with endorsement by  #
CxA.
IDCM_05_05 Commissioning specifications

detailing the commissioning  -
requirements for each system and
equipment.

IDCM_05_06 Endorsed commissioning review

report to demonstrate all tasks in part - 
(c)
IDCM_05_07 Endorsed commissioning report to

demonstrate all commissioning tasks - 
fulfilling part (d)
IDCM_05_08 Undertaking letter from the project's

CxA confirming his/her involvement  -
before the start of schematic design
stage, duties and responsibilities for
the testing & commissioning process
# For IDCM 5a and IDCM 5b, the supporting documents are not required
in FA if (i) the credits are achieved in PA; and (ii) there is no change of
the CxA after PA.
The Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE) – Air

distribution systems. CIBSE. Commissioning Code A. [ONLINE].
Available at: http://www.cibse.org/. [Accessed April 2021].
The Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE) –

Water distribution systems. CIBSE Commissioning Code W.
The Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE) –

Automatic controls. CIBSE Commissioning Code C.
Building Services Research and Information Association (BSRIA) –

Commissioning air systems. Application procedures for buildings.
[ONLINE]. Available at: https://www.bsria.co.uk/. [Accessed April
2021].
American Society of Heating, Air-conditioning, and Refrigerating

Engineers (ASHRAE) – Standard and Guidelines on Commissioning
Essentials. [ONLINE]. Available at: http://www.ashrae.org/. [Accessed
April 2021].
Architectural Services Department, Building Services Branch – Testing

and Commissioning Procedure. [ONLINE]. Available at:
https://www.archsd.gov.hk/en/publications-publicity/testing-
commissioning-procedure.html. [Accessed April 2021].
(b) Related Credits

None

2 Integrated Design 2.2 Green Construction Practices

and Construction
Management
Objective Encourage the engagement of BEAM Professionals and/or Affiliates by

contractors during construction to work collaboratively with the project
BEAM Professional to monitor progress towards the targeted construction-
related BEAM Plus requirements.
Credit Requirement 1 credit for at least two (2) accredited BEAM Professionals with valid
credentials for BEAM Plus New Buildings are engaged by the main/ lead
contractor of the project.
Alternatively,
1 credit for at least one (1) accredited BEAM Professional and two (2)
accredited BEAM Affiliates, with valid credentials for BEAM Plus New
Buildings are engaged by the main/ lead contractor of the project.
Assessment 1. The Construction BEAM Pro(s) (and Affiliates, if any) shall:
1.1. Be engaged by main/ lead contractor of superstructure from

commencement of the respective contract [i.e. if project scope
covers foundation and superstructure, the Construction BEAM
Pro(s) (and Affiliates, if any) shall be engaged at the start of
foundation stage] to completion of the certification process.
1.2. If there is any change of Construction BEAM Pro/ Affiliate within
each construction stage (foundation or superstructure) of the
Project, supporting documents should be provided to document
the hand-over.
1.3. Collaborate with the Project BEAM Pro to monitor the progress
towards the targeted construction-related BEAM Plus
requirements as defined in the BEAM Plus NB certification
checklist.
1.4. Participate in the kick-off meeting and at least 1 review meeting
as required under IDCM P1.
1.5. Check and ensure that the construction-related submission
materials comply with requirements of attempted credits in the
BEAM Plus Manual. The Construction BEAM Pro(s) (and
Affiliates, if any) may also assume other roles in the construction
team of the project. (The Construction BEAM Pros and Project
BEAM Pro under IDCM P1 must be different personnel)

2. Complete the prescribed form with qualification details, appointment

information and confirmation of the appointment of the Construction
BEAM Pro(s) (and Affiliates, if any).
The appointed Construction BEAM Pro(s) (and Affiliates, if any) should

maintain his/ her accreditation and credentials during his/her
appointment.
Provide copies of relevant contract documents highlighting the clause

requiring the main/ lead contractor to engage related Construction
BEAM Pro(s) (and Affiliates, if any) if construction has not yet
commenced at PA stage.
3. Provide meeting minutes (confidential/sensitive project information is

not required and should be excluded) showing the participation of the
Construction BEAM Pros (and Design Affiliates, if any) in the kick-off
meeting and at least one review meeting as required under IDCM P1,
which shows the checking and compliance efforts by Construction
BEAM Pro(s) (and Affiliates, if any).
Submittals
IDCM_06_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template for  
IDCM 6
IDCM_06_01 Specification requiring engagement of

Construction BEAM Pro(s) and BEAM
Affiliates (if applicable) (for each
 -
construction stage)
IDCM_06_02 A copy of the meeting minutes of kick- 

*
off meeting with the Project BEAM Pro
IDCM_06_03 A copy of the meeting minutes of review * 

meeting(s) with the Project BEAM Pro
IDCM_06_04 Supporting documents showing how the

works are handed over and the timeline
for their involvement, if applicable (e.g.  
Declaration letter from the employer of the
Construction BEAM Pro/ Affiliate)
* Meeting minutes shall be submitted in PA if the meeting(s) is/are held

not less than 3 months prior to PA (first submission).


Available at:
(b) Related Credits

IDCM P1 Sustainability Champions - Project
The related prerequisite encourages the engagement of BEAM
Professionals to facilitate the application for the BEAM Plus
certification process and to ensure the compliance of relevant
requirements of the BEAM Plus.
IDCM 1 Sustainability Champions - Design

The related credit encourages the engagement of BEAM Pros and/ or
Affiliates engaged by respective core design disciplines to integrate
BEAM Plus standards and practices into the planning, design and
construction of the building.


and Construction
Management
IDCM 7 Measures to Reduce Site Emissions
Objective Minimise pollution (air, noise, water discharge and light) during the
demolition (if any), construction of buildings and the infrastructure serving
buildings.
Credit Requirement (a) Minimisation of Air Pollution

1 credit for providing adequate monitoring and mitigation measures
to minimise air pollution during construction (demolition and foundation

to minimise noise pollution during construction (demolition and

to minimise water pollution during construction (demolition and

1 credit for providing adequate mitigation measures to minimise light
pollution during construction (demolition and foundation are included,
if any).
Note:
1) Partial credit shall be awarded for individual construction stage (i.e.
demolition, foundation and superstructure in a default ratio of 1:1:3).
The Applicant may submit justification and propose an alternative
ratio based on the relative pollution control extent and resource
demand in various construction stages. For a project that covers
all 3 stages, the partial credit attainable for demolition, foundation
and superstructure are 0.2, 0.2 and 0.6 respectively. Similarly, for
a project where demolition is not required or not under the Client’s
control, the partial credit attainable for foundation and
superstructure are 0.25 and 0.75 respectively.
2) All applicable stages must be included in the partial credit

calculation.

Assessment (a) Minimisation of Air Pollution
1. Proactive dust control provisions shall be referred to Good

Housekeeping Checklist in Appendix 4.1 of Hong Kong
Construction Association’s Best Practice Guide for Environmental
Protection on Construction Sites [1]. Checklist of dust control
provisions is provided in the prescribed form.
2. Provide baseline monitoring measurements for point(s) as

prescribed in IDCM P2.
Provide baseline monitoring measurement report to demonstrate

the followings:
2.1. Description and locations of air sensitive receivers (ASRs);

2.2. Details of baseline monitoring measurement period,
measurement results of baseline 1-hour Total Suspended
Particulates (TSP) and identification of action levels; and
2.3. Calibration certificates of the measurement instruments.
Provide extracts of tender documents, contract conditions and/

or specifications highlighting the clause requiring the contractors
to provide baseline monitoring measurements if construction has
not yet commenced at the PA stage.
3. Prepare monthly environmental management reports throughout

the construction period to demonstrate the following:
3.1. Implementation of monitoring and mitigation measures to

minimise air pollution as defined in Environmental
Management Plan (EMP) under IDCM P2;
3.2. There are no convictions or complaints about air emissions
from site, that have been upheld by the Environmental
Protection Department or police leading to the issue of a fine
or prosecution;
3.3. Implementation of proactive dust control provisions with the
completed prescribed forms; and
3.4. Total Suspended Particulates (TSP) levels are satisfactory
according to IDCM P2, Assessment 1) 1.3.
3.5. Measurement of 24-hour TSP levels is NOT required.
The report(s) should be reviewed and endorsed by the

Construction BEAM Pro (or BEAM Affiliate) as defined under IDCM
6 or the project BEAM Pro as defined under IDCM P1.
1 Hong Kong Construction Association (HKCA), Best Practice Guide for Environmental Protection on Construction Sites.

4. For a project that is a Designated Project under the Environmental

Impact Assessment (EIA) Ordinance with requirement of
environmental monitoring, submit:
4.1. Copy of the EM&A Report(s) submitted to EPD required under

the EIA Ordinance in replacement of the monthly
environmental management reports as stated above; and
4.2. Completed prescribed form endorsed by the Construction
BEAM Pro (or BEAM Affiliate) as defined under IDCM 6 or the
project BEAM Pro as defined under IDCM P1 to demonstrate
the implementation of proactive dust control provisions.
5. Provide extracts of tender documents (e.g. specifications)

highlighting the clause requiring the contractors to provide
monthly environmental management / EM&A report(s) if
construction (demolition and foundation to be included, if any) has
not yet commenced at PA stage.
1. Proactive noise control provisions shall refer to section 6.9 of Hong

Kong Construction Association’s Best Practice Guide for
Environmental Protection on Construction Sites. Checklist of noise
control provisions are provided in the prescribed forms.
2. Provide baseline monitoring measurements for point(s) as

prescribed in submitted Environmental Management Plan in IDCM
P2.
Provide baseline monitoring measurement report to demonstrate

the followings:
2.1. Description and locations of noise sensitive receivers (NSRs)
2.2. Details of baseline monitoring measurement period,
measurement result of baseline noise levels and identification
of noise limit levels.
2.3. Calibration certificates of the measurement instruments
Provide extracts of tender documents, contract conditions and/

or specifications highlighting the clause requiring the contractors
to provide baseline monitoring measurements if construction
(demolition and foundation to be included, if any) has not yet
commenced at PA stage


minimize noise pollution as defined in the Environmental
3.2. There are no convictions or complaints about noise emissions
from site, that have been upheld by the Environmental
Protection Department or Police leading to the issue of a fine

or prosecution;
3.3. Implementation of proactive noise control provisions with the
completed prescribed form; and
3.4. Noise levels that complied with the noise level limitation
according to IDCM P2, Assessment 1) 1.3.
The report(s) shall be reviewed and endorsed by the

Construction BEAM Pro (or BEAM Affiliate) as defined under IDCM
6 or the project BEAM Pro as defined under IDCM P1.
4. For a project that is a Designated Project under the Environmental

Impact Assessment (EIA) Ordinance with requirement of
environmental monitoring, submit:
4.1. Copy of the EM&A Report(s) submitted to EPD required under
the EIA Ordinance in replacement of the monthly
environmental management reports as stated above; and
4.2. Completed prescribed form endorsed by the Construction
BEAM Pro (or BEAM Affiliate) as defined under IDCM 6 or the
project BEAM Pro as defined under IDCM P1 to demonstrate
the implementation of proactive dust control provisions.

highlighting the clause requiring the contractors to provide
monthly environmental management / EM&A report(s) if
construction (demolition and foundation to be included, if any) has
not yet commenced at PA stage.
1. Proactive wastewater management provisions shall be referred

to Environmental Protection Department’s Practice Note for
Professional Persons on Construction Site Drainage [2]. Checklist
of wastewater management provisions is provided in the
prescribed forms.
2. Provide monitoring measurements fulfilling permit requirement as

prescribed in IDCM P2, Assessment 1) 1.3.


minimise water pollution as defined in Environmental
3.2. There are no convictions or complaints about water
pollution from site, that have been upheld by the
Environmental Protection Department or Police leading to
the issue of a fine or prosecution;
2 Environmental Protection Department – Practice Note for Professional Persons ProPECC PN 1/94. Construction Site Drainage.
http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/sites/default/files/epd/english/resources_pub/publications/files/pn94_1.pdf. [Accessed April 2021]

3.3. Implementation of proactive wastewater control provisions

with completed prescribed form; and
3.4. Wastewater discharge qualities fulfilling permit requirement
according to IDCM P2, Assessment 1) 1.3. Copy of the
discharge license issued by EPD and testing reports of the
discharge water samples by accredited laboratory shall be
provided as substantiation.
The report(s) shall be reviewed and endorsed by the Construction

BEAM Pro (or BEAM Affiliate) as defined under IDCM 6 or the project
BEAM Pro as defined under IDCM P1.

highlighting the clause requiring the contractors to provide monthly
environmental management report(s) if construction (demolition and
foundation to be included, if any) has not yet commenced at PA
stage.
1. Provide evidence demonstrating that external light control

measures have been implemented during construction (demolition
and foundation are included, if any). External light control measures
shall include all of the following:
1.1. Operating hours for light
1.1.1. Switch off external lighting (essential light and

feature light not included) when not needed or after
operating hours.
1.1.2. Switch off feature lighting (e.g. hoarding lighting) after
11p.m.
1.1.3. Maintain only essential light (e.g. lighting for safety and
security) at the acceptable level as required.
1.2. Automatic controls for lighting
1.2.1. Incorporate automatic control (e.g. timer switch) to

switch off the external lighting when not needed or
after operating hours.
1.3. Lighting nuisance control measures
1.3.1. Position and aim the lighting at hoarding properly to

avoid overspill of light to the outside area being lit up.
1.3.2. For lighting up vertical structures (e.g. signs &
hoarding), direct the beam to the structures and
avoid overspill of light.
1.3.3. Provide lighting with appropriate shields, baffles,
louvers and cut-off features to prevent light overspill
to nearby residence and into the sky, and glare from
the light source.

1.4. Prevention of glare to road users
1.4.1. Ensure the external lighting along site boundary is

appropriately positioned, aimed or shielded so that
illumination of nearby roads will not be adversely
affected.
2. Provide extracts of tender documents (e.g. specification)

highlighting the clause requiring the contractors to provide external
light control measures if construction (demolition and foundation to
be included, if any) has not yet been commenced at PA stage.
3. Demonstrate implementation of external light control measures with

the completed prescribed form.
Submittals (a) Minimisation of Air Pollution

IDCM_07a_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template  

for IDCM 7a
IDCM_07a_01 Baseline monitoring measurement

* 
report
[or]
Extracts of tender documents,

contract conditions and/or  -
specifications highlighting the clause
requiring the contractors to provide
baseline monitoring measurements
IDCM_07a_02 A total of 3^ monthly environmental

management / EM&A reports at a
minimum with at least 1 report for * 
each of the construction stages with
the completed prescribed form
[IDCM-07-1_Form]
[or]
Extracts of tender documents (e.g.

 -
requirements of monthly
environmental management / EM&A
report(s) (if applicable)

IDCM_07a_03 Summary of baseline and impact

* 
monitoring for construction air quality
[Appendix A]

works started not less than 3 months prior to PA (first submission)
shall be submitted in PA.
^ If there are less than 3 construction stages, a minimum total of 3
monthly reports should still be submitted, with at least 3-month
interval between each report (e.g. if the first submitted report is
dated September 2019, the next report to be submitted should be
dated December 2019 or later).

IDCM_07b_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template  

for IDCM 7b
IDCM_07b_01 Baseline monitoring measurement

* 
report
[or]
Extracts of tender documents,

contract conditions and/or  -
specifications highlighting the clause
requiring the contractors to provide
baseline monitoring measurements
IDCM_07b_02 A total of 3^ monthly environmental

management / EM&A reports at a
minimum with at least 1 report for * 
each of the construction stages with
the completed prescribed form
[IDCM-07-2_Form]
[or]
 -
requirements of Monthly
environmental management / EM&A
IDCM_07b_03 Summary of baseline and impact

* 
monitoring for construction noise
[Appendix B]

IDCM_07b_04 Examination schedule# for any

educational institution(s) identified as * 
noise sensitive receiver(s) (Optional)

interval between each report (e.g. if the first submitted report is dated
September 2019, the next report to be submitted should be dated
December 2019 or later).
# Construction
Noise Limit Level for School: 70 dB(A) (Normal School
Days)/ 65dB(A) (Examination Period)

IDCM_07c_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template  

for IDCM 7c
IDCM_07c_01 A total of 3^ monthly environmental

management reports at a minimum
with at least 1 report for each of the * 
construction stages with the
completed prescribed form [IDCM-
07-3_Form].
[or]
Extracts of tender documents (e.g.  -

requirements of Monthly
environmental management
IDCM_07c_02 Summary of construction

* 
wastewater discharge monitoring
result [Appendix C]

interval between each report (e.g. if the first submitted report is dated
September 2019, the next report to be submitted should be dated
December 2019 or later).


IDCM_07d_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template  

for IDCM 7d
IDCM_07d_01 External light control measures to * 

minimise light pollution during
construction [Appendix D]
IDCM_07d_02 Evidence demonstrating the

implementation of external light * 
control measures
[or]

requirements of external light control  -
measures (if applicable)

Buildings Department. PNAP ADV-4, Control of Environmental

Nuisance from Construction Sites. [ONLINE]. Available at:
letters/pnap/ADV/ADV004.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].
Environmental Protection Department. Air - Guidelines &

References. [ONLINE]. Available at:
http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/environmentinhk/air/guide_ref
/air_guidelines.html. [Accessed April 2021].
Environmental Protection Department. Noise - Guidelines &
References. [ONLINE]. Available at:
https://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/environmentinhk/noise/guid
e_ref/noise_guidelines.html. [Accessed April 2021].
Environmental Protection Department. Good Practices on

Mitigating Construction Noise. [ONLINE]. Available at:
https://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/misc/construction_noise
/contents/index.php/en/index.html. [Accessed April 2021].
Environment Bureau. Guidelines on Industry Best Practices for

External Lighting Installations. [ONLINE]. Available at:
http://www.enb.gov.hk/sites/default/files/en/node78/guidelines_ex
_lighting_install_eng.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].

(b) Related Credits

The related prerequisite credit encourages a high standard of
environmental management during construction.


and Construction
Management
Extent of Application IDCM 8a – All buildings requiring demolition which are under the Client’s
control.
IDCM 8b – All buildings
Objective Encourage best practices in the management of construction resource

consumption, including waste reduction.
Credit Requirement (a) Demolition Waste Recycling

1 credit for demonstrating compliance with the Waste Management
Plan and the application of proactive waste management provisions
during demolition; and recycling at least 15% of demolition waste.
1 additional BONUS credit for demonstration of recycling at least 30% of
demolition waste.
For exemplary performance, 1 additional BONUS credit for

demonstration of recycling at least 60% of demolition waste.
1 credit for demonstrating compliance with the Waste Management

Plan and the application of proactive waste management provisions
during construction (foundation to be included, if any); and recycling at
least 15% of construction waste (foundation waste to be included, if
any).
1 additional BONUS credit for demonstration of recycling at least 30% of

construction waste (foundation waste to be included, if any).
For exemplary performance, 1 additional BONUS credit for

demonstration of recycling at least 60% of construction waste
(foundation waste to be included, if any).
Assessment Proactive waste management provisions shall be referred to the Good

Housekeeping Checklist in Appendix 8.2 of Hong Kong Construction
Association’s Best Practice Guide for Environmental Protection on
Construction Sites [1]. Checklist of waste management provisions is
provided in the prescribed form.
The disposal of inert waste to landfills, fill banks, sorting facilities, fill barging
points, public fill reception facility, other construction waste disposal facilities
and reuse of timber or timber products from the same site (timber or timber
products under reuse are considered as resource materials and not waste)
will not be considered as acceptable strategies for fulfilling the credit
requirement. Waste handled by specialist Third Party Contractor could be
considered as an acceptable strategy for fulfilling this credit requirement.
1 Hong Kong Construction Association (HKCA), Best Practice Guide for Environmental Protection on Construction Sites.

(a) Demolition Waste Recycling

1. Provide the Demolition Waste Management Plan (WMP) as defined
in Environmental Management Plan (EMP) under IDCM P2 prepared
by the demolition contractor and reviewed/ endorsed by
Construction BEAM Pro (or Construction BEAM Affiliate) defined
under IDCM 6 or Project BEAM Pro defined under IDCM P1.
Reference shall be made to Civil Engineering and Development
Department (CEDD)'s Project Administration Handbook, Chapter 4,
Paragraph 4.1.3 [2].
2. Provide monthly waste management reports to show the followings:

2.1. Implementation of the Waste Management Plan (WMP) as
defined in Environmental Management Plan (EMP) under
IDCM P2;
2.2. Proactive waste management provisions and the completed
prescribed form;
2.3. Waste flow tables;
2.4. All waste and recycling records; and
2.5. Collection organisation/ recycler information.
Monthly waste management report(s) shall be prepared by
contractors and reviewed/ endorsed by Construction BEAM Pro (or
Construction BEAM Affiliate) defined under IDCM 6 or Project
BEAM Pro defined under IDCM P1 from the commencement to
completion of the demolition works
3. Provide a summary of the percentage of demolition waste recycled

(either by weight or by volume) prepared and declared by
contractor, Demolition waste (including broken concrete and
excavated materials) that is diverted from Government public fill
reception facilities and reused/ recycled in other projects/ facilities
shall be included.
4. Provide extracts of tender documents, contract conditions and/ or

specifications highlighting the clause requiring the contractors to
carry out waste management measures and recycle demolition
waste.
1. Provide the Construction Waste Management Plan (WMP)

(foundation to be included, if any) as defined in the Environmental
Management Plan (EMP) under IDCM P2 prepared by the
contractor(s) and reviewed/ endorsed by Construction BEAM Pro (or
Construction BEAM Affiliate) defined under IDCM 6 or Project BEAM
Pro defined under IDCM P1. Reference shall be made to Civil
Engineering and Development Department (CEDD)'s Project
Administration Handbook, Chapter 4, Paragraph 4.1.3 [2].
2 Civil Engineering and Development Department (CEDD)'s Project Administration Handbook, Chapter 4, Paragraph 4.1.3.
https://www.cedd.gov.hk/filemanager/eng/content_80/PAH%202020%20Chapter%204%20Rev%2001%20clean_210308.
pdf. [Accessed April 2021].

2. Provide monthly waste management reports to show the

followings:
2.1. Implementation of the Waste Management Plan (WMP) as
defined in Environmental Management Plan (EMP) under
IDCM P2;
2.2. Proactive waste management provisions with the completed
prescribed form;
2.3. Waste flow table;
2.4. All waste and recycling records; and
2.5. Collection organisation/ recycler information.
Monthly waste management report(s) shall be prepared by
contractors and reviewed/ endorsed by Construction BEAM Pro (or
Construction BEAM Affiliate) defined under IDCM 6 or Project
BEAM Pro defined under IDCM P1 from the commencement to
completion of all construction activities (foundation to be included,
if any).
3. Provide a summary of the percentage of construction waste

recycled (either by weight or by volume) prepared and declared by
contractor. Construction waste (including broken concrete and
excavated materials) that is diverted from Government public fill
reception facilities and reused/ recycled in other projects/ facilities
shall be included.
4. Provide extracts of tender documents, contract conditions and/

or specifications highlighting the clause requiring the contractors to
carry out waste management measures and recycle construction
waste (foundation waste is to be included, if any) if construction
(foundation is to be included, if any) has not yet commenced at PA
stage.
Submittals (a) Demolition Waste Recycling

IDCM_08a_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template for  

IDCM 8a
IDCM_08a_01 IDCM-08-1_Form * 
IDCM_08a_02 Endorsed Demolition Waste

* 
Management Plan
IDCM_08a_03 Extracts of tender documents (e.g.

requirements of waste management  -
[or]
IDCM_08a_04 Any 3 monthly waste management 

*
reports.

IDCM_08a_05 Waste flow table [Appendix A]

summarizing the monthly disposal and
recycling records throughout the * 
demolition stage with calculation of the
percentage of demolition waste recycled

be submitted in PA.

IDCM_08b_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template for  

IDCM 8b
IDCM_08b_01 IDCM-08-1_Form * 
IDCM_08b_02 Endorsed Construction Waste * 

Management Plan
IDCM_08b_03 Extracts of tender documents (e.g.
requirements of waste management  -
[or]
IDCM_08b_04 Any 3 monthly waste management

* 
reports.
IDCM_08b_05 Waste flow table [Appendix A]

summarizing the monthly disposal and
recycling records throughout the
* 
construction stage and calculation of the
percentage of construction waste
recycled

be submitted in PA.
Buildings Department, PNAP ADV-19, Construction and Demolition Waste.

[ONLINE]. Available at: https://www.bd.gov.hk/doc/en/resources/codes-
and-references/practice-notes-and-circular-letters/pnap/ADV/ADV019.pdf.
Development Bureau's Technical Circular (Works) No. 6/2010, Trip Ticket

System for Disposal of Construction & Demolition Materials". [ONLINE].
Available at:
https://www.devb.gov.hk/filemanager/technicalcirculars/en/upload/308/1/C-
2010-06-01.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].

Environmental Protection Department. Waste Collectors and Recyclers.

http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/environmentinhk/waste/guide_ref/guide_
ref_dwc.html. [Accessed April 2021].
(b) Related Credits

The prerequisite encourages a high standard of environmental management
and a waste management system for the sorting, recycling and the proper
disposal of materials during construction (demolition and foundation are to


and Construction
Management
IDCM 9 Construction IAQ Management
Extent of Application All areas to implementing a Construction IAQ Management Plan; and All
areas with central air-conditioning and ventilation systems for
undertaking a building ‘flush out’ or bake out’ and replacement of all filters
prior to occupancy.
Objective Ensure that project materials and ventilation systems are not contaminated
by construction activities.
Credit Requirement 1 credit for implementing a Construction IAQ Management Plan,

undertaking a building ‘flush out’ or ‘bake out’, and replacement of all filters
prior to occupancy.
Assessment 1. Provide a Construction IAQ Management Plan that includes the

following:
1.1. An overview of tasks to be executed;

1.2. A list of reference documents, including environmental legislation
and guidelines;
1.3. A list of participants in the process and their responsibilities;
1.4. A plan for management, communication and documentation;
1.5. Construction IAQ management plan control measures [1] on:
HVAC protection, source control, pathway interruption,
housekeeping, scheduling;
1.6. Monitoring and auditing of implementation;
1.7. Expected written work products should include checklists and
worksheets; and
1.8. A schedule of activities.
2. Provide copy(ies) of the monthly report(s) demonstrating the effective

implementation of the Construction IAQ Management Plan during the
indoor construction period. A master programme shall also be
included.
The report(s) shall be reviewed and endorsed by the Construction

BEAM Pro (or BEAM Affiliate) as defined under IDCM 6 or Project
BEAM Pro as defined under IDCM P1.
Provide extracts of tender documents (e.g. specifications) highlighting

the clause which requires the contractors to carry out considerate
measures, if indoor construction has not yet commenced at PA stage.
1 Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association (SMACNA), ANSI/SMACNA 008•2008 Guidelines for Occupied
Buildings Under Construction, Chapter 3. [ONLINE]. Available at: https://www.smacna.org/store/product/iaq-guidelines-for-
occupied-buildings-under-construction. [Accessed April 2021].

3. Provide a report to demonstrate:
3.1. Technical information for the filtration media used during

construction and prior to occupancy;
3.2. Details of building flush-out procedures including actual dates of
the flush-out;
3.3. The filtration media used had a Minimum Efficiency Reporting
Value (MERV) of 13 as determined by ANSI/ASHRAE 52.2-2012
[2] or equivalent performance specification;
3.4. A flush-out with new filtration media is being carried out after the
completion of construction and prior to occupancy;
3.5. Flushing duration as defined by calculation of the fresh air
required to attain the IAQ certification 'Good' class requirement;
3.6. No construction work done in the vicinity of the space during the
flushing out; and
3.7. The space was protected against any recontamination after
flushing out.
The report shall be reviewed and endorsed by the Construction BEAM

Pro (or BEAM Affiliate) as defined under IDCM 6 or Project BEAM Pro
as defined under IDCM P1.
Provide extracts of tender documents (e.g. specifications) highlighting

the clause which requires the contractors to carry out considerate
measures, if indoor construction has not yet commenced at PA stage.
2 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE), ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 52.2-2012,
Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size. [ONLINE]. Available at:
www.ashrae.org. [Accessed April 2021].

Submittals PA FA
Supporting Documents

 
IDCM 9
IDCM_09_01 Construction IAQ Management Plan for 

*
indoor construction within the site
IDCM_09_02 Any 3 monthly report(s) on the

implementation of the Construction IAQ
* 
Management Plan during indoor
construction period
[or]
Extracts of tender documents, (e.g.
specifications) specifying the  -
requirements for the implementation of the
Construction IAQ Management Plan (if
applicable)
IDCM_09_03 Report on filter replacement and flush out - 

[or]
requirements for filter replacement and  -
flush out (if applicable)
IDCM_09_04 HVAC drawings to demonstrate if any

central air-conditioning and ventilation
system is provided (to substantiate  
exemption for a building ‘flush out’ or ‘bake
out’ and replacement of all filters prior to
occupancy)
(superstructure) works started not less than 3 months prior to PA (first
submission) shall be submitted in PA.
None
(b) Related Credits
None.


and Construction
Management
IDCM 10 Considerate Construction
Objective Encourage care of workers, mitigate nuisances to immediate neighbours and

promote good practices of tree protection during construction.
Credit Requirement 1 credit for demonstrating considerate measures to the neighbourhood, passers-
by and workers. Good tree protection practices where tree preservation within
the project site is required, should also be carried out.
Note:
1) Partial credit shall be awarded for individual construction stages (i.e.
demolition, foundation and superstructure in a default ratio of 1:1:3). The
Applicant may submit justification and propose an alternative ratio based
on the relative pollution control extent and resource demand in various
construction stages. For a project covering all 3 stages, the partial credit
attainable for demolition, foundation and superstructure are 0.2, 0.2 and
0.6 respectively. Similarly, for a project where demolition is not required or
not under the Client’s control, the partial credit attainable for foundation
and superstructure are 0.25 and 0.75 respectively.
2) All applicable stages must be included in the partial credit calculation.
Assessment 1. Considerate measures to (a) neighbourhood, passers-by and (b) workers,

shall refer to the assessment criteria recommended in “Being Considerate
to Neighbourhood and Passers-by” and “Care of Workers and Others” in the
Considerate Contractors Site Award Scheme Guidelines [1,2]. A checklist
of considerate measures is provided in the prescribed form.
2. Good tree protection practices shall make reference to the Guideline in

“Tree Preservation during Development by Greening, Landscape and Tree
Management Section” of Development Bureau, HKSAR Government [3]. A
checklist of good tree protection practices is provided in the prescribed form.
3. Provide quarterly report(s) with the completed prescribed form to

demonstrate the implementation of considerate measures to (a)
neighbourhood, passers-by, and (b) workers during construction (demolition
and foundation to be included, if any); and the application of corrective
actions to avoid continuous dissatisfaction/ non-compliance of any item(s).
1 Development Bureau and Construction Industry Council. Considerate Contractors Site Award Scheme Guideline for Non-Public
Works Site Participation, Appendix V Scope of Assessment Criteria. [ONLINE]. Available at:
https://www.devb.gov.hk/filemanager/en/content_175/28th_CCSAS_Non_Public_Works_Guidelines_Eng_r2.pdf. [Accessed April
2021].
2 Development Bureau and Construction Industry Council. Considerate Contractors Site Award Scheme Guideline for Public Works
Site Participation, Appendix V Scope of Assessment Criteria. [ONLINE]. Available at:
https://www.devb.gov.hk/filemanager/en/content_175/28th_CCSAS_Public_Works_Guidelines_Eng_r2.pdf. [Accessed April
2021].
3 Development Bureau - Greening, Landscape and Tree Management Section. Guideline on Tree Preservation during
Development. [ONLINE]. Available at:
https://www.greening.gov.hk/filemanager/content/pdf/tree_care/Guidelines_on_Tree_Preservation_during_Development_e.pdf
. [Accessed April 2021].

Provide extracts of tender documents (e.g. specifications) highlighting the

clause which requires the contractors to carry out considerate measures,
if construction (demolition and foundation to be included, if any) has not
yet commenced at PA stage.
Valid Considerate Contractors Site Awards certificate(s) for New Works

Contracts under Considerate Contractors Site Award Scheme (CCSA) shall
be accepted as an alternative compliance path for the considerate
measures, hence no quarterly report is required.
4. Provide quarterly report(s) with the completed prescribed form to

demonstrate good tree protection practices during construction (demolition
and foundation to be included, if any); and the application of corrective
actions to avoid continuous dissatisfaction/ non-compliance of any item(s).
Provide extracts of tender documents (e.g. specifications) highlighting the

clause which requires the contractors to carry out good tree protection
practices, if construction (demolition and foundation to be included, if any)
has not yet commenced at PA stage.
Submittals

 
IDCM 10
IDCM_10_01 A total of 3^ quarterly reports at a minimum

with at least 1 quarterly report for each of
the construction stages with the completed 
*
prescribed form [IDCM-10-1_Form] to
demonstrate compliance with considerate
measures
[or]

specifications) specifying the requirements  -
for considerate measures (if applicable)
[or]
Valid CCSA Certificate (alternative

* 
compliance path, if applicable)

IDCM_10_02 Any 3 quarterly report(s) with the

completed prescribed form [IDCM-10-
1_Form] to demonstrate compliance in * 
good tree protection practices (if
applicable)
[or]

 -
requirements for good tree protection
practices (if applicable)
[or]
 
Evidence such as site photos or aerial
photo to justify no existing tree within the
site

submitted in PA.
^ If there are less than 3 construction stages, a minimum total of 3 quarterly
reports should still be submitted.
Provision of hoardings, covered walkways and other necessary

precautionary measures are statutorily required to protect the
neighbourhood, passers-by and workers during construction.
Buildings Department, PNAP APP-21, Demolition Works – Measures for

Public Safety. [ONLINE]. Available at:
notes-and-circular-letters/pnap/signed/APP021se.pdf. [Accessed April
2021].
Buildings Department, PNAP APP-23, Hoardings, Covered Walkways and

Gantries (including Temporary Access for Construction Vehicles) Part IX of
Building (Planning) Regulations. [ONLINE]. Available at:
notes-and-circular-letters/pnap/APP/APP023.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].
Development Bureau – Greening, Landscape and Tree Management

Section, Guidelines on Tree Preservation during Development. [ONLINE].
Available at:
https://www.greening.gov.hk/filemanager/content/pdf/tree_care/Guidelines
_on_Tree_Preservation_during_Development_e.pdf. [Accessed April
2021].
(b) Related Credits
None.


and Construction
Management
IDCM 11 Building Management Manuals
Objective Encourage the provision of a fully documented operations and maintenance

manual to enable building operators to implement the design intent and a
fully documented energy management manual containing instructions that
enables systems to operate at a high level of energy efficiency.
Credit Requirement 1 credit for providing a fully documented Operations and Maintenance
Manual and Energy Management Manual.
Assessment 1. Building Operations and Maintenance Manual (O&M Manual)
1.1. The O&M Manual shall include all of the following:
1.1.1. the design intent;

1.1.2. the basis of design; and
1.1.3. full sequences of operation for all equipment and systems,
including HVAC&R systems and associated controls, light
and daylighting controls, domestic hot water systems and
renewable energy systems; all of which must meet the
legal requirements and industry wide standards.
1.2. The description of the design intent shall include all of the
following:
1.2.1. space temperature and humidity criteria;

1.2.2. levels operator and/ or occupant control over HVAC
systems;
1.2.3. ventilation requirements and related indoor air
quality criteria;
1.2.4. performance criteria related to energy efficiency;
1.2.5. environmental responsiveness of the facility;
1.2.6. and commissioning criteria.
1.3. The basis of design shall include all of the following:
1.3.1. details of occupancy;

1.3.2. space activity and any process requirements;
1.3.3. applicable regulations, codes, and standards;
1.3.4. design assumptions;
1.3.5. performance standards and benchmarks; and

1.3.6. control system appropriate for the skill of the operations

and maintenance staff.
1.4. The O&M Manual must include for each piece of equipment and
each system:
1.4.1. the name and contact information of the manufacturer

or vendor and installing contractor;
1.4.2. submittal data; and
1.4.3. operations and maintenance instructions with the
models and features for the subject site clearly marked.
1.5. The O&M Manual shall include only data for equipment that is
actually installed, and include the following:
1.5.1. instructions for installation, maintenance, replacement,

start-up;
1.5.2. special maintenance requirements and sources for
replacement parts/ equipment;
1.5.3. parts list and details of any special tooling requirements;
1.5.4. performance data; and
1.5.5. warranty information.
1.6. The O&M Manual shall include an as-built documentation

package for controls covering all of the following:
1.6.1. control drawings and schematics;

1.6.2. normal operation;
1.6.3. shutdown;
1.6.4. unoccupied operation;
1.6.5. seasonal changeover;
1.6.6. manual operation;
1.6.7. controls set-up and programming;
1.6.8. troubleshooting;
1.6.9. alarms; and
1.6.10. final sequences of operation.
2. Energy Management Manual (EMM)
2.1. The EMM for all energy-related systems shall include the following:
2.1.1. Descriptions of the final design intent and basis of design,

including brief descriptions of each system;
2.1.2. Final sequences of operations for all equipment;
2.1.3. Procedures for seasonal start-up and shutdown,
manual and restart operation;
2.1.4. As-built control drawings;

2.1.5. For all energy-saving features and strategies, rationale

description, operating instructions, and caveats about
their function and maintenance relative to energy use;
2.1.6. Recommendations and brief method for appropriate
accounting of energy use of the whole building;
2.1.7. Specifications of re-calibration frequency of sensors and
actuators by type and use;
2.1.8. Recommendations for continuous commissioning or
recommended frequency for re-commissioning by
equipment type, with reference to tests conducted during
initial commissioning;
2.1.9. Recommendations regarding seasonal operational
issues affecting energy use;
2.1.10. List of all user-adjustable set points and reset schedules,
with a discussion of the purpose of each and the range
of reasonable adjustments with energy implications;
2.1.11. Schedules of frequency of reviewing the various set
points and reset schedules to ensure that they are still
near optimum;
2.1.12. List of time-of-day schedules and a frequency of
reviewing them for relevancy and efficiency;
2.1.13. Guidelines for establishing and tracking benchmarks
for building energy use and primary plant equipment
efficiencies;
2.1.14. Guidelines for ensuring that future renovations and
equipment upgrades will not result in decreased energy
efficiency and will maintain the design intent;
2.1.15. List of diagnostic tools, with a description of their use, that
will assist facility staff of the building in operating
equipment more efficiently;
2.1.16. A copy of the commissioning report; and
2.1.17. Index of all commissioning documents with notation of
their location.

Submittals
IDCM_11_00 BEAM Plus NB submission

 
template for IDCM 11
IDCM_11_01 Owner’s requirements/

specification on provision of O&M
Manual for all equipment and  -
systems, including those given in
item 1.1.3.
IDCM_11_02 Operations and maintenance

manual adequately cover the
major energy consuming building
services systems and equipment - 
where the manual includes the
details given in the assessment
criteria.
IDCM_11_03 Owner’s requirements/
specification on the provision of  -
Energy Management Manual for
energy-related systems.
IDCM_11_04 A dedicated Energy Management
Manual meeting the requirements
- 
as stipulated in the assessment
criteria.
American Society of Heating, Air-conditioning, and Refrigerating

Engineers (ASHRAE), Preparation of Operating and Maintenance
Documentation for Building Systems, ASHRAE Guideline 4. Atlanta.
[ONLINE]. Available at: https://www.ashrae.org/. [Accessed April
2021].
J H Armstrong, Building Services Research and Information Association

(BSRIA), Operating and Maintenance Manuals for Building Services
Installations, Application Guide 1/87, Dec. 1990. [ONLINE]. Available at:
https://www.bsria.co.uk/. [Accessed April 2021].
(b) Related Credits
None


and Construction
Management
IDCM 12 Operator Training plus Chemical Storage and Mixing Room
Objective Encourage the provision of training for operations and maintenance staff to
the minimum specified and demonstrate adequate maintenance facilities
are provided for chemical storage and mixing.
Credit Requirement 1 credit for providing training for operations and maintenance staff to the
minimum specified; and demonstrating that adequate maintenance facilities
are provided for chemical storage and mixing.
Assessment (a) Operator Training
1. The training program should be carried out for the appointed

Facilities Management Team or client representatives.
2. The training program shall cover as a minimum the items listed

below:
2.1. General purpose of each building system including basic

theory of operation, capabilities and limitations, and modes
of control and sequences of operation;
2.2. Review of control drawings and schematics;
2.3. Procedures for start-up, shutdown, seasonal changeover,
normal operation, unoccupied operation and manual
operation;
2.4. Controls set-up and programming;
2.5. Troubleshooting;
2.6. Alarms;
2.7. Interactions with other systems;
2.8. Operational monitoring and record keeping requirements,
and the use of data for analysing system performance;
2.9. Adjustments and optimising methods for energy
conservation;
2.10. Any relevant health and safety issues;
2.11. Inspection, service, and maintenance requirements for each
system, including any need for specialised services;
2.12. Sources for replacement parts/ equipment; and
2.13. Any tenant interaction issues.
3. The demonstration portion of the training program shall include the

following:

3.1. Typical operation examples of each system;

3.2. Start-up and shutdown procedures;
3.3. Operation under all specified modes of control and
sequences of operation;
3.4. Procedures under emergency or abnormal conditions; and
3.5. Procedures for effective operational monitoring.
4. Verify that the training of the building’s operations and

maintenance staff was undertaken for all commissioned systems
and major equipment, using the operations and maintenance
manual, and the energy management manual as the basis for the
training.
5. A permanent room for training is not necessary. Evidence of

carrying out operator training (e.g. record of attendance) is
required.
(b) Chemical Storage Room
1. A centralised chemical storage and mixing room for each individual

building on the site (i.e. janitor and central storage area) should be
provided where buildings include provision of housekeeping and
chemical products that create odour during their mixing processes
(non-domestic spaces which will be managed and maintained for
multiple occupant’s usage). Chemical products include HVAC and
cleaning relates (e.g. refrigerants, cleansing chemicals) for all
building’s future operation and maintenance items and equipment.
2. The following table sets out the buildings required to provide

chemical storage and/or chemical mixing provision;
Parts of the Type of A/C Requires Requires

building System Chemical Chemical
Storage Mixing
Area Area
Domestic1, 2 Window-type units  
Split-Type/VRF
system without fresh  
air provisions
Split-Type/VRF
system with fresh air
provisions  
(including DX-PAU
and fresh air
processing units)

Non- Chiller plant  

Domestic3 installed within the
assessment
boundary
District cooling
system or chiller  
plant installed
outside of the
assessment
boundary
Split-Type/VRF
system without fresh  
air provisions
Split-Type/VRF
system with fresh air
provisions  
(including DX-PAU
and fresh air
processing units)
Note:
1 Domestic refers to the part of a composite building that is
constructed or intended for habitation. This may include residential
flats and dormitories.
2 The requirement on chemical storage area and chemical mixing
area is exempted for the domestic parts of the building given that
the habitant will be responsible for the operation and maintenance
of their personal domestic space.
3 Non-domestic refers to the part of a composite building that is
constructed or intended for use otherwise than for habitation. This
may include clubhouses, offices, hotel rooms, shopping arcade,
cinema, common entrance.
3. No size requirement for the chemical storage room.
4. Submit details in the form of drawings and a report with ventilation

calculation to demonstrate the compliance of the following
functional requirements of chemical storage and/ or mixing
provision where applicable:
4.1. A drainage point and a water supply point (where chemical

mixing is required);
An exhaust route for ventilation system to vent out (e.g.
separate outside venting or exhaust route to centralised
exhaust riser with non-return damper at the branched duct for
the designated room) and maintain negative pressure with
respect to adjacent spaces when the doors to the room are
closed (where chemical mixing is required);
4.2. A separate area with self-closing and lockable door (where

chemical storage is required); and
4.3. Full height-partitions (where chemical mixing is required).

Submittals
IDCM_12_00 BEAM Plus NB submission

 
template for IDCM 12
IDCM_12_01 Owner’s requirements/ specification

on the provision of program and
records of operation and
 -
maintenance training.
IDCM_12_02 Copies of Training program (e.g.

PowerPoint presentation,
training manual, etc.) which cover - 
the items listed in the assessment
criteria.
IDCM_12_03 Evidence of operator training (e.g.

sample record of attendance)
verifying that training of the
building’s operations and
maintenance staff was undertaken
for all commissioned systems and - 
major equipment, using the
operations and maintenance
manual, and the energy
management manual as the basis
for the training.
IDCM_12_04 Drawing(s) to show the required

drainage point and water supply  
points are provided (if applicable)
IDCM_12_05 Drawing(s) and calculation

demonstrating that chemical
storage room is equipped with the  
required ventilation provisions (if
applicable).
IDCM_12_06 Drawing(s) to show the chemical

storage room with self-enclosing
and lockage door and/ or full-height  
partitions (if applicable)

None
(b) Related Credit
None

2 Integrated Design 2.3 Smart Design and Technologies

and Construction
Management
IDCM 13 Digital Facility Management Interface
Extent of Application All non-residential buildings and common areas of residential buildings
Objective Encourage provision of digital interfaces to enable future facility

management teams to review the building operation performance
Credit Requirement 1 BONUS credit for providing a digital interface in addition to the project
design metering provision for future facility management team to review the
building operation performance.
Assessment Develop and implement a digital interface for future facility management
team to review data collected by the electricity metering system installed in
the building. The assessment focuses on the interface provision for
providing vision regarding operation characteristics. This is for future
implementation of first class (Cat I) energy management opportunities
(EMOs), with reference to the Code of Practice for Building Energy Audit
2018 [1]. Metering system design and hardware quality is not assessed in
this credit.
The interface should be a provisional media, providing the information

below for the future facility management team to review the building
operation. The format and media used for the interface is not restricted
provided the credit objectives are achieved by meeting the requirements
below:
1) Providing charts and summaries for hourly data collected. Minimum

data required should refer to below table:
System (if applicable) Data point for Performance

Auditing
Outdoor Condition • Air Temperature (oC)

• Humidity (RH)
• Daylight (Lux)
Building • Total Energy Use Intensity

(kWh/m2) [Daily, Monthly &
Annual]
• Total HVAC Energy Use Intensity
(kWh/m2) [Daily, Monthly &
Annual]
• Total Lighting Energy Use
Intensity (kWh/m2) [Daily, Monthly
& Annual]
HVAC Each Equipment in • Electricity (kW and kWh)

System HVAC (Water Side) • Operation Hour
1 Electrical and Mechanical Services Department – Code of Practice for Building Energy Audit 2018. [ONLINE]. Available at:
https://www.emsd.gov.hk/beeo/en/pee/EAC_2018.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].

- Chillers • Supply & Return Water

- Heat temperature (oC)
pumps • Water Flow rate (m3/s)
- Pumps
- Heat
Rejection
Each Equipment in
• Fuel (kW and kWh)
HVAC (Water Side)
• Operation Hour
- Absorption
Chiller • Supply & Return
- Boiler Water temperature (oC)
• Water Flow rate (m3/s)
Each Equipment in • Electricity (kW and kWh)

HVAC (Air Side)
• Operation Hour
- Primary Air/
• Each service zone’s temperature
Air
(oC)
Handling
Unit Fans • Supply & Return Air
- Return Air temperature (oC)
Fans • Flow rate (m3/s)
- Free
Cooling
Fans
VRV and Unitary

• Electricity (kW and kWh)
System
Ventilation System
- Carpark
Ventilation • Electricity (kW and kWh)
- Toilet • Operation Hour
Ventilation
(≥ 2.5kW • CO / NOx concentration level
each) (if applicable)
Lift and
Escalators Each Lift and
Escalators • Electricity (kW and kWh)
System
2) Keeping inventories and records of the identified systems, including

manuals, technical brochures indicating their configurations and
characteristics.
3) Enabling a trend of total building electricity use reporting for the last 12
months.
4) Enabling a trend of total electricity costs reporting for the last 12
months.
5) As-built drawing and system schematic that shows the layouts of
energy consuming equipment and systems, and drawings showing the
layout of the building.
6) Providing Operation and Maintenance programmes that include the
timing of major alterations, additions or replacements for the building.
Achievement of EU 4 is not required as the basic requirement in assessing

this credit.

Submittals
IDCM_13_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template  

for IDCM 13
IDCM_13_01 Specifications of monitoring system  -

for future facility management team
IDCM_13_02 Schematics of interface
demonstrating compliance with the  
requirements
IDCM_13_03 Evidence (e.g. approved contractor's

submission with technical
information) showing that the
interface is capable of providing the - 
information as prescribed in the
assessment requirement items (1) to
(6)
None
(b) Related Credits
This credit may act as a platform gathering and processing the data
collected in EU 4 Metering and Monitoring.
In conjunction with IDCM 3c Design Consideration for Operation and
Maintenance, it is recommended to consult the facility management
team while specifying the document management system


and Construction
Management
IDCM 14 Occupant Engagement Platform
Extent of Application All non-residential buildings
Objective Encourage the provision of digital platforms to connect building occupants

and the building status to drive behaviour change.
Credit Requirement 1 BONUS credit for providing a digital platform to engage building occupants.
Assessment Develop a digital platform for future occupants to understand the building
status. The platform shall contain information to be reviewed by the
respective occupant only. The digital platform should contain data
referenced to the EU 4 part (a) requirement and provide the following
information:
1) Description of green measures implemented in the building;
2) Energy consumption in the occupants’ respective leased spaces;
3) Recommendations to conserve energy use in the building; and
4) Healthy lifestyle tips.
The digital platform should be in a form of one of the followings:
1) Digital displays in at least one common area(s) accessible by all

occupants;
2) Mobile applications accessible by all occupants; or
3) Web-based applications accessible by all occupants.
Submittals
 
for IDCM 14
IDCM_14_01 Specifications of digital platform for  -

future occupants
IDCM_14_02 Operation manual or other evidence

(e.g. approved contractor's
submission with technical
information) showing that the digital - 
platform can provide the information
as prescribed in the credit
requirement

None
(b) Related Credits
This credit may act as a platform to present the data collected in EU

4 - Metering and Monitoring in a simple way for occupants to
understand the building status.


and Construction
Management
IDCM 15 Document Management System
Objective Encourage tidy and digital documentation throughout the design and
construction process for the ease of handing over to facility management
teams.
Credit Requirement (a) Project Team Document Management

1 credit for demonstrating the use of document management systems
within the design team.
(b) Facility Management Team Document Management

1 credit for demonstrating the use of document management platform
by the building owner or building management company.
Assessment (a) Project Team Document Management
1. Demonstrate coordinated use of Design Team Document

Management among design teams which shall include the
following members:
1.1. Project Owner;

1.2. Architects / project designers;
1.3. MEP engineers;
1.4. Structural engineers
1.5. Quantity Surveyors; and
1.6. Contractors.
2. Provide specifications of the document management system

including:
2.1. Naming rules for the digital documents to follow;

2.2. Filing rules, in the form of hierarchy, for the digital documents
to follow; and
2.3. File format of digital documents.
3. The document management system should perform the following

functions:
3.1. Storage of documents;

3.2. Spare storage for future documents;
3.3. Allow update of existing documents;
3.4. Accessible online;
3.5. Support multiple users access and different level of access
rights;
3.6. Alarms and notifications; and

3.7. Security protection by passwords.
4. The document management system should store the following

documents:
4.1. Project timeline / programme;

4.2. Meeting minutes;
4.3. All documents submitted to government bodies; and
4.4. Material submissions from contractors.
1. Provide specifications of the document management platform by

the building owner/ building management company including:
1.1. Naming rules for the digital documents to follow;

1.2. Filing rules, in the form of hierarchy, for the digital documents
to follow; and
1.3. File format of digital documents.
2. The document management system should perform the following

functions:
2.1. Storage of documents;

2.2. Spare storage for future documents;
2.3. Allow update of existing documents;
2.4. Accessible online;
2.5. Support multiple users access and different level of access
rights;
2.6. Alarms and notifications; and
2.7. Security protection by passwords.
3. The document management system should store all documents

specified in IDCM 11 – 14 in addition to the following:
3.1. Approved drawings by all government departments;

3.2. All documents submitted to government bodies;
3.3. As-built drawings;
3.4. Waste management manual;
3.5. Water management manual;
3.6. Warranty of building equipment;
3.7. Tenant fitting out guide;
3.8. Tenancy green guide; and
3.9. Tenant feedback procedures notes and records.

Submittals (a) Project Team Document Management

IDCM_15a_00 BEAM Plus NB submission  

template for IDCM 15a
IDCM_15a_01 Specifications of document  -

management system
IDCM_15a_02 Evidence (e.g. screenshots) to
demonstrate the use of document - 
management system

IDCM_15b_00 BEAM Plus NB submission  
template for IDCM 15b
IDCM_15b_01 Specifications of document
management system
 -
IDCM_15b_02 Evidence to demonstrate that the

platform will be used by the
building owner/ building - 
management company.
Hong Kong Green Building Council – Hong Kong Green Office Guide.
https://www.hkgbc.org.hk/eng/engagement/guidebooks/green-
office-guide/index.jsp. [Accessed April 2021].
Hong Kong Green Building Council – Hong Kong Green School
Guide. [ONLINE]. Available at:
school-guide/index.jsp. [Accessed April 2021].
Hong Kong Green Building Council – Hong Kong Green Shop Guide.
https://www.hkgbc.org.hk/eng/engagement/guidebooks/green-shop-
guide/index.jsp. [Accessed April 2021].
Hong Kong Green Building Council – Green Tenancy Driver For
Office Buildings. [ONLINE]. Available at:
tenancy-driver/index.jsp. [Accessed April 2021].
The Hong Kong Institute of Surveyors - Green Property Management
Practices. [ONLINE]. Available at:
https://www.hkis.org.hk/ufiles/gpmp2015.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].
(b) Related Credits
In conjunction with IDCM 3c Design Consideration for Operation and

Maintenance, it is recommended to consult the facility management
team while specifying the document management system.


and Construction
Management
IDCM 16 BIM Integration
Objective Encourage the design team to discuss and work through the design
platform and deliver holistic solution using Building Information Modelling
(BIM)
Credits Attainable 1 + 1 additional BONUS + 2 BONUS
Credit Requirement (a) Coordinated Use of BIM within Design Teams

1 credit for the coordinated use of BIM among the design team.
(b) Coordinated Use of BIM within Design and Construction Teams

1 additional BONUS credit for coordinated use of BIM among the
design team and the contractors.
(c) BIM for Time

1 BONUS credit for using the BIM model for scheduling, cost and
quantity, schedules preparation and tracking the project budget.

1 BONUS credit for updating the BIM model to as-built condition.
Assessment (a) Coordinated Use of BIM within Design Teams

1. Prepare a project execution plan including the following content:
1.1. Project BIM objectives;

1.2. Model Level of Development (LOD);
1.3. Methods of communication;
1.4. Project BIM standards; and
1.5. Model/Data validation protocols.
2. Demonstrate coordinated use of BIM among design teams which

shall include the following members:
2.1. Architects/project designers;

2.2. MEP engineers; and
2.3. Structural engineers.
3. Demonstrate the use of BIM performing the following functions:
3.1. Coordinate spatial design;

3.2. Clash detection; and
3.3. Building performance simulation.

4. The BIM model should be at least LOD 300 (both graphical

presentation and non-graphical information) as defined in local or
international standards such as the Hong Kong Construction
Industry Council BIM Standards and Guidelines [1] or the
American Institute of Architects (AIA) Project Building Information
Modelling Protocol Form [2] for builder and MEP elements.

In addition to requirements in a), provide one representing document
(e.g. crashes report) to demonstrate use of BIM among design teams
and the contractors
(c) BIM for Time

1. Demonstrate the use of BIM in performing the following functions:
1.1. Report real time on-site construction activity;

1.2. Review construction progress against the construction
programme;
1.3. Prepare cost and quantity schedules; and
1.4. Track project budget.

Update the BIM model to the as-built condition including fixtures,
finishes and equipment data.
Demonstrate that the BIM will be handed over to the facility

management team for facility management use.
Submittals (a) Coordinated Use of BIM within Design Teams

IDCM_16a_00 BEAM Plus NB submission  

template for IDCM 16a
IDCM_16a_01 Project execution plan  #
IDCM_16a_02 Specifications of BIM software  -

IDCM_16a_03 Project-specific documents
demonstrating the use of BIM  #
performing the required functions
IDCM_16a_04 Project-specific document
demonstrating the coordinated use  #
of BIM among design teams
in PA
1 The Hong Kong Construction Industry Council – CIC BIM Standards. [ONLINE]. Available at:
https://www.bim.cic.hk/en/resources/publications?cate=3&keyword=. [Accessed April 2021].
2 The American Institute of Architects (AIA) - The American G202™ – 2013, Project Building Information Modelling Protocol Form
[ONLINE]. Available at: https://contractdocs.aia.org/PreviewFiles/Preview_G202-2013%20OmniClass.pdf. [Accessed April
2021].

IDCM_16b_00 BEAM Plus NB submission

 
template for IDCM 16b
IDCM_16b_01 Project execution plan  
IDCM_16b_02 Specifications of BIM software  -

IDCM_16b_03 Project-specific representing
document demonstrating the use of
BIM among design team and
* 
construction team
* Evidence of compliance with credit requirements shall be submitted in

PA if superstructure works are started not less than 3 months prior to PA
(first submission).
(c) BIM for Time

IDCM_16c_00 BEAM Plus NB submission

 
template for IDCM 16c
IDCM_16c_01 Project execution plan  
IDCM_16c_02 Specifications of BIM software  -

IDCM_16c_03 Project-specific documents
demonstrating the use of BIM which
 
performs the function requirements
related to time

IDCM_16d_00 BEAM Plus NB submission

 
template for IDCM 16d
IDCM_16d_01 Specifications of an as-built BIM
model to be provided by contractor
 -
IDCM_16d_02 Specifications of handing over the

as-built BIM model to facility  -
management
IDCM_16d_03 Evidence of handing over the as-built
BIM model to facility management
- 

Housing Authority, Building Information Modelling. [ONLINE].

Available at: http://www.housingauthority.gov.hk/en/business-
partnerships/resources/building-information-modelling/. [Accessed
April 2021].
Buildings Department, Practice Note for Authorized Persons,

Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical
Engineers ADV-34. [ONLINE]. Available at:
Hong Kong Construction Industry Council, CIC BIM Standards.

https://www.bim.cic.hk/en/resources/publications?cate=3&keyword=.
(b) Related Credits
The use of BIM is a valuable add-on to IDCM 3 Integrative Design

Process as it facilitates integrative design by strengthening the
coordination within the project team.

2 Integrated Design 2.4 Design for Engagement and Education on Green

and Construction Buildings
Management
IDCM 17 Design for Engagement and Education on Green

Buildings
Objective Encourage public education that focuses on strategies and solutions applied
to the green buildings.
Credit Requirement 1 credit for providing any two (2) education elements from the following list
of green building design measures and provisions accredited by BEAM Plus
and implemented in the project. The Project must achieve a rating of Bronze
or above.
1) Provide users with manuals for all green building design measures
and provisions.
2) Provide educational signage system that is integrated with the major

communal areas of the project to educate users and visitors about the
benefits of the green building design measures and provisions.
3) Provide users a platform for sustainable living showcase

demonstration, experience or sharing that are relevant to the enabling
design measures and provisions in the project. e.g. websites, regular
publications available to the public, newspapers or other means.
4) Additional or alternative education element(s) proposed by the

Applicant with substantiation demonstrating strategies compatible
with the listed strategies for achieving the credit objective.
1 additional BONUS credit for providing four (4) education elements

mentioned above on green buildings.
Assessment Present evidence of the education elements provided to the users and/ or
visitors that focuses on strategies and solutions applied to the project.

Submittals

for IDCM 17  
IDCM_17_01a User manual: Synopsis & content

framework  -
IDCM_17_01b User manual: Completed manual - 
IDCM_17_02a Educational signage plan  -

IDCM_17_02b Record photos of educational
signage
- 
IDCM_17_03a Undertaking letter signed by the project

owner declaring that the education
platform will be provided for building
 -
users
IDCM_17_03b Supporting document of education

platform(s) provided, e.g. pdf of the
website or pdf of the electronic
- 
newsletter, etc.
IDCM_17_04a Other supporting document(s) for the

additional or alternative education  -
element(s) proposed by applicant
IDCM_17_04b Record photos of additional or

alternative education element(s) - 
proposed by applicant

None
(b) Related Credits

None

BEAM Plus New Buildings Version 2.0 Sustainable Site - SS
3 Sustainable Site 3.P Prerequisite

3.1 Neighbourhood Integration
3.2 Ecologically Responsible Design
3.3 Bioclimatic Design
3.4 Climate Resilience and Adaptability
Introduction This section focuses on the planning and design to harness the sustainable
design potentials of a site for its occupants and neighbours, preserve/
enhance its ecological capacity, optimize its microclimate and create better
climate resilience. Site attributes and scale of development have been
taken account of in the formulation of the assessment criteria.
Site locations/ Site planning and design strategies in the following aspects
will be assessed for their sustainable design quality and performances:
• Building disposition, orientation and form;
• Spatial relationship of the building(s) to the immediate built and
natural environment;
• Relationship of the building(s) to the site topography and ground
conditions;
• Overall massing of the proposed development;
• Site coverage of greenery, choice of plant species, tree coverage/
preservation;
• View factors and ambient forces;
• Balance of built-up and landscaped/ open area;
• Environmental enhancement to the surroundings of the site; and
• Master landscaping strategy; and
• Conservation and protection of archaeological remains, historic
buildings and monuments.
3.P Prerequisite SS P1 Minimum Landscaping Requirements
Background This part sets out the minimum requirements of greenery coverage on site
and provisions for viability of planting for all buildings with site area of 1,000
m2 or above.
3.1 Neighbourhood SS 1 Pedestrian-oriented and Low Carbon Transport

Integration SS 2 Neighbourhood Amenities
SS 3 Building Design for Sustainable Urbanism
SS 5 Noise Control for Building Equipment
Background Integration with the neighbourhood is addressed in terms of pedestrian-

oriented transport, adequacy of local amenities, sustainable urban design,
daylight access for neighbouring sensitive receivers and reduction of noise
from building services equipment to neighbours.
The planning and design issues which affect the environmental

performance of a site and master layout planning should include:
• Disposition of individual buildings within the site;
• Spatial relationship of the building(s) to the immediate built and
natural environment;

• Relationship of the building(s) to the site topography and ground

conditions;
• Overall massing of the proposed development;
• Built form of the buildings;
• Orientation of buildings in relationship to view factors and ambient
forces;
• Balance of built-up and landscaped/ open area;
• Environmental enhancement to the surroundings of the site; and
• Master landscaping strategy;
• Conservation and protection of archaeological remains, historic
buildings and monuments.
Tall buildings can cause substantial overshadowing of neighbouring
developments and amenities, affecting both direct and indirect sunlight and
light from the sky. Noise emissions from equipment on and around
buildings contributes to noise pollution with potential impacts on
neighbouring properties. It is the responsibility of the project team to
alleviate adverse effect on neighbouring properties by good design and
proper installation and maintenance.
3.2 Ecologically SS 6 Light Pollution Control

Responsible Design SS 7 Biodiversity Enhancement
Background Habitat conservation is the most effective means to minimise development

impacts on the natural environment and endangered species (if any). If an
area of high biodiversity is identified in the site, it is encouraged to formulate
management strategies to protect habitats and any rare or endangered
species within the land under ownership.
Light pollution may be regarded as waste light from lighting schemes that
produces glare, obscures the night sky, adversely effects nocturnal
ecosystems and may intrude on neighbouring properties.
3.3 Bioclimatic Design SS 8 Urban Heat Island Mitigation

Background The use of non-reflective external surfaces contributes to localised
elevated temperatures created when solar heat gains are absorbed and
then radiated back to the surroundings. The effect may be local to
pedestrian and recreational areas and contribute to urban heat islands.
Site planning, building design and landscaping strategies can enhance a
site’s microclimate. Elevated temperatures can be mitigated through the
choice of finishes on buildings and horizontal hard surfaces that reflect
heat, the application of shading or planted vegetation, and the
enhancement of building permeability.
3.4 Climate Resilience SS 11 Stormwater Management

and Adaptability SS 12 Design for Climate Change Adaptation
Background Hong Kong is located along the common track of tropical cyclones and
hence experiences very heavy rainstorms at times. In the New Territories,
the area is characterised by its wide floodplain and low-lying terrain. In the
past decades, rapid urbanisation has turned natural ground to hard paved

impervious areas. In the old built-up areas in Kowloon and in parts of Hong
Kong Island, insufficient drainage capacity and dense land development
aggravate the potential for flooding in the neighbourhoods. The climate
change brings further challenges such as sea level rise and increased
occurrence of extreme weather.
A high standard of stormwater management can reduce the risk of flooding

and promote groundwater recharge. The “Sponge City” benchmarks to
control the total stormwater run-off volume in Mainland China (Shenzhen)
has been taken as reference in formulating the standards. Furthermore, the
impact of projected climate change scenarios on building development are
also encouraged. Using available best practice of local or national industry
standard of weather data, a study on the projected variations in
temperature, rainfall and storm surge, that will occur based on a building
life cycle of 50 years as a result of climate change, is carried out and the
respective strategies on improving climate resilience are considered.

BEAM Plus New Buildings Version 2.0 Sustainable Site - SS P1
3 Sustainable Site 3.P Prerequisite
SS P1 Minimum Landscaping Requirements
Extent of Application All sites with site area of 1,000 m2 or more.
Objective Encourage building development to preserve or expand urban greenery.
Credit Requirement Prerequisite achieved for demonstrating compliance with minimum

planting provisions in terms of viability and site coverage of greenery of at
least 20% of the site.
Assessment (a) Minimum Provisions for Viability of Planting

1. Submit tree survey plans and tree assessment report if there are
existing trees on the project site.
2. Highlight any existing trees to be preserved on the plan
3. Reserve vertical and horizontal soil for preserved, transplanted or

added trees and all planted areas:
3.1. Soil volume per tree shall be at a minimum of 12m3;

3.2. Soil depths shall be at least 1.2m, 0.6m and 0.3m for trees,
shrubs and grass/ ground covers respectively.
4. Demonstrate by citing relevant literature or reference that plant

species used for covered greenery are shade tolerant.
5. Provide at least a means of irrigation for planting areas.
6. Provide access for the maintenance to the planting areas.
(b) Minimum Site Coverage of Greenery

1. Provide a minimum of 20% overall site coverage of greenery
(method of measurement and calculation of site coverage of
greenery except otherwise stated below shall be in accordance
with Buildings Department PNAP APP-152 Sustainable Building
Design Guidelines [1]):
1.1 The minimum site coverage of greenery in the primary zone

required in the PNAP is not assessed under this prerequisite.
1.2 Covered greenery areas above the primary zone (measured
from 45° projected line taken from the edge of building) in
communal areas accessible to the public, occupiers or
visitors shall be counted (50% reduction factor applies).
1.3 Vertical greening within 15m vertical zone from communal
areas accessible to the public, occupiers or
1 Buildings Department - PNAP APP-152 Sustainable Building Design Guidelines

visitors shall be counted (no reduction factor applies but

vertical frames with a height more than 7.5m are not
accountable for vertical greening provided by climbing or
weeping plants).
1.4 The maximum accountable percentage of greening features

stated in the PNAP Appendix D is not assessed under this
prerequisite.
Submittals Supporting Documents PA FA

SS_P1_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template for
 
SS P1
SS_P1_01 Tree survey plans and tree assessment
schedules highlighting any existing/
preserved trees (if applicable)
[or]
 -
Site photos / aerial photo showing that
there is no existing tree on the project
site
SS_P1_02 Landscape plans and sections showing
soft landscape layout, irrigation
provisions, maintenance access, soil  
volumes/ depths of all planted areas for
trees, shrubs and grass/ groundcover
SS_P1_03 Planting plans, planting schedules and
extracts of relevant literature or
reference demonstrating plant species - 
with shade tolerance are used for any
covered greenery
SS_P1_04 Summary for the total and breakdowns
of areas and site coverage of greenery
 
of accountable greenery areas and
greening features
SS_P1_05 Drawings and planting schedules for soft
landscape works highlighting the
locations, areas and dimensions of
accountable greenery areas and
 
greening features, plant types and
highlighting plant species with shade
tolerance that are used for any covered
greenery

The Practice Note No. 7/2007 of Lands Department HKSAR provides
the guidance on minimum soil volume and depth for trees.
Greening, Landscape & Tree Management Section of Development
Bureau, HKSAR provides guidelines for proper planting practices for
trees.

(b) Related Credits
SS 1 Pedestrian-oriented and Low Carbon Transport

The related credit encourages the shading of main pedestrian paths
by trees. The soil space of trees shall meet the minimum standards
stipulated in SS P1.

The related credit encourages a higher overall site coverage of
greenery and stipulates the minimum site coverage of greenery in the
Primary Zone (the 15m vertical zone of a site along the abutting street
level).

site.
SS 11 Stormwater Management
The related credit considers the softscape provided with the site for
infiltration and detention in stormwater management.
WU 2 Water Efficient Irrigation

The related credit considers water efficient irrigation for greenery
provided within the site.
HWB 2 Biophilic Design

The related credit encourages human-nature connection for building
occupants.

BEAM Plus New Buildings Version 2.0 Sustainable Site - SS 1
3 Sustainable Site 3.1 Neighbourhood Integration
Objective Encourage the use of pedestrian-oriented, low carbon and/ or public

transport, with an aim to create a safer, more sustainable and appealing
environment that promotes human interaction, a sense of place as well as
integration with the surrounding pedestrian transport network.
Credit Requirement (a) Accessibility to Public Transport

1 credit for achieving Accessibility Index of 15 or more for all buildings
of a development.
1 credit for achieving 50% or more of the applicable pedestrian-

oriented transport planning measures.
1 additional BONUS credit for achieving 100% of the applicable

pedestrian-oriented transport planning measures.
(c) Cycling Facilities and Network Integration
1 BONUS credit for providing cycling facilities within the Site and
integrating with the public cycling network if a public cycling network
exists or has been planned nearby.
(d) Charging Facilities for Electric Vehicle (EV)
1 BONUS credit for providing EV medium chargers for at least 50% of

all parking spaces and EV charging-enabling for all parking spaces
(including visitor car parks).
Assessment (a) Accessibility to Public Transport

1. Indicate the distances shown alongside unhampered walking
routes within a walking distance of 1,000m from the site main
entrance(s) to each public transport [1] stop or the main entrance
of each station in vicinity on an A3-sized scaled drawing.
2. Provide evidence of service frequencies of the public transport.
3. Calculate the Accessibility Index (AI) [2] for all buildings of a

development using the prescribed form.
3.1. Use service frequency data at peak periods for the calculation
of waiting time.
3.2. Adopt a walking speed of 80m per minute for the calculation
of walk time.
1 Public transport includes railways, bus (franchised bus/ non-franchised public bus), green minibus (GMB), tram and ferry
2 Transport for London. Public Transport Accessibility Levels. [ONLINE]. Available at: https://data.london.gov.uk/dataset/public-
transport-accessibility-levels. [Accessed April 2021].

3.3. For a walking route using mechanical means to assist

pedestrian movement, provide evidence to demonstrate:
3.3.1. The mechanical means shall be in operation either

at least between 7am to 7pm every day or a period
that meets the specific needs of building users
(occupancy pattern of the project to be justified by
the Applicant);
3.3.2. Mapping of the start and end points of the mechanical

means shall be shown on a scaled drawing, and
3.3.3. Calculation of the combined horizontal commuting

time (walk times) plus horizontal commuting time of
the mechanical means to the public transport
services, wait time for vertical transportation to be
excluded, with substantiation by supplier’s
information on the commuting speed of the
mechanical installation. The combined horizontal
commuting time to the public transport services shall
not be more than 13 minutes.
4. Provide evidence issued by a government agency or a quasi-

government body for the targeted operation date of any future
public transport services/ facilities. Future services/ facilities
provisions not operable at the time of building completion will be
accepted if they will be in operation no later than one year after the
occupation of the proposed development.
5. For a site served by dedicated shuttle service vehicles for the

development and to be considered under the AI method, provide
the following:
5.1. Notification of services provisions by the service provider to

building users confirming that:
5.1.1. Routes and stops of the shuttle services providing

connection links to the public transport,
5.1.2. Capacity of the shuttle service vehicles,
5.1.3. Locations of the shuttle service drop-off/ pick-up
points, and
5.1.4. Operating frequency of the services.
5.2. Justification of the adequacy of the service if the capacity of

the shuttle service vehicles is below 16 passengers.
5.3. An undertaking letter by the developer/ property owner for

the provision of the shuttle service for a minimum of 5
years. A minimum of 1 year rolling contract in place with the
service provider submitted.

1. Demonstrate compliance for the applicable pedestrian-oriented
transport planning measures using the following score table.

2. Complete the prescribed form to indicate whether the following

sub-items are achieved or not.
3. Provide justifications for each of the achieved sub-item and

descriptions with illustrations, drawings and photos of measures
adopted.
4. Provide justifications for each of the non-applicable sub-item.
Safe Environment Score

a Segregation between main pedestrian pathways 1
and vehicular traffic for private cars/ taxis within the
Site if there is no speed limit or the targeted speed
is higher than 20 km/h; OR
Vehicular traffic calming measures adopted and 1
speed limit signs provided for a speed of no more
than 20 km/h for over 50% of roads within the Site;
OR
Vehicular traffic calming measures adopted and 2
speed limit signs provided for a speed of no more
than 20 km/h for 100% of roads within the Site.
b Whole length of main pedestrian access pathways 1
to be overlooked from any normally occupied
spaces of buildings within or outside the site.
c Lighting of the illuminance of all 1
pedestrian pathways within the site is at least 50
Convenient Environment Score
d Short and direct pathways as compared to the 1

vehicular access/ pathways.
e Minimised level changes for pathways meeting 1
recommended design requirements of barrier-
free access in Chapter 4 of BFA 2008.
f Widths of the street furniture and greening zones 1
along the main pedestrian pathways meeting
recommended widths of HKPSG Chapter 8 [3].
g Widths for the main pedestrian pathways 1
meeting recommended widths of HKPSG
Chapter 8 [3].
h Clear and easily understood wayfinding signage is 1
sited prominently and in predictable locations
within the Site.
Pleasant Environment Score
i Car parking spaces not exceeding the minimum 1
requirement from the government, excluding
parking for shuttle service vehicles; OR
No car parking is provided other than provisions 2
intended for use by people with a disability and for
shuttle service vehicles.
j Planting zone of a minimum width of 1m along 1
the main pedestrian pathways.
k Main pedestrian pathways under covered 1
or shaded by trees.
l Pedestrian pathways designed with high 1
architectural/ landscape quality, with design
features intended for human delight/ celebration of
culture or public art.
3 Planning Department. Hong Kong Planning Standards and Guidelines. Chapter 8: Internal Transport Facilities. [ONLINE].
Available at https://www.pland.gov.hk/pland_en/tech_doc/hkpsg/sum/pdf/sum_ch8_en.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].

Note:
Main pedestrian pathways are defined as pathways of width not less
than 2m for pedestrian circulation from building main entrance(s) to
site entrance(s) or amenities within the site.
5. The following assessment requirements for car parking facilities

shall be fulfilled for scoring the first point under Pleasant
Environment:
5.1. The car parking spaces not exceeding the minimum

requirement from the government (lease/ engineering
conditions). If no requirement is stipulated in lease/
engineering conditions, the lower bound number of any
recommended range in HKPSG Chapter 8 [4] or Transport
Department (TD)’s advice shall be followed;
5.2. Simultaneous free flow of vehicles in and out of the car park
at the point of access; and
5.3. Provisions to avoid ground contamination from oil run-off by:
5.3.1. For covered parking spaces: Petrol interceptors, and
5.3.2. For open parking spaces: Petrol interceptors or, if

there is no open transport interchange/ vehicular
servicing area, pervious paving and construction
with a maximum gradient of 1:20, a depth of at least
600mm from top surface of paving to anticipated
highest water table, and a permeability rate of at least
0.1mm/sec.
6. Demonstrate that the width of each horizontal screen, covered

walkway or trellis over main pedestrian pathways shall be at least
2m.
7. If shading for main pedestrian pathways is provided by trees at-

grade, demonstrate by an ecologist or a landscape architect that:
7.1. The shade provided should be a continuous strip of trees

planted along the pedestrian route.
7.2. Suitable species of broadleaved trees (not palms conifers)

with sufficient anticipated crown diameters are provided to
offer shade.
7.3. The tree coverage shall be measured using the estimated

crown diameters of 10 years after landscape installation, with
evidence of crown measurement of the species taken in
similar local growing conditions.
7.4. A shaded pedestrian route of a minimum width of 2m under

the trees shall be demonstrated on plan.
4 Planning Department. Hong Kong Planning Standards and Guidelines. Chapter 8: Internal Transport Facilities. [ONLINE].
Available at https://www.pland.gov.hk/pland_en/tech_doc/hkpsg/sum/pdf/sum_ch8_en.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].


1. Demonstrate that there is a public cycling network within 500m
walking distance from the perimeter of the site, either existing or
planned (to be in operation no later than one year after the
occupation for the proposed Project).
2. Demonstrate that the following facilities are provided by means of

layout and drawings, supplementary calculations and photos of the
installed facilities:
2.1. Cycling tracks and parking facilities complying with the

requirements in Section 6 – Cycling of Internal Transport
Facilities presented in the Chapter 8 of HKPSG [5] or
Transport Department (TD)’s requirements.
2.2. The cycling tracks comply with the following conditions:
2.2.1. A continuous cycling network within the Site and

the existing/ planned public cycling network if the
public cycling network is immediately adjacent to the
Site; and
2.2.2. The cycling network within the Site shall have

physically designated in-/ off-street cycle tracks or
are integrated with roads designed for a target
speed of 20 km/h or slower.
2.3. For non-residential projects or non-residential portion of

mixed-use projects, shower and changing facilities of at least
one shower for the first 100 regular building occupants
(excluding occasional visitors) and one additional shower
facility for every additional 150 regular building occupants.
(d) Charging Facilities for Electric Vehicles (EV)

1. For both Indoor parking and outdoor parking space, basic EV
charging-enabling/ facilities requirements are as follows:
Provide descriptions with illustrations, schematic drawings and
photos of the EV charging-enabling for ALL the carparking spaces
with reference to the requirements in Technical Guidelines for
Electric Vehicle (EV) Charging-enabling for Car Parks of New
Building Developments [6].
2. Demonstrate that 50% of all the carparking spaces are provided

with EV charging facilities that meet the following requirements:
2.1. Installation of medium chargers with output power not less

than 7kW;
2.2. Sockets/ connectors provided are widely applicable for

various EV brands/ types of the market;
5 Planning Department. Hong Kong Planning Standards and Guidelines. Chapter 8: Internal Transport Facilities [ONLINE].
Available at: https://www.pland.gov.hk/pland_en/tech_doc/hkpsg/sum/pdf/sum_ch8_en.pdf [Accessed April 2021].
6 Technical Guidelines for Electric Vehicle (EV) Charging-enabling for Car Parks of New Building Developments [ONLINE].
Available at:
https://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/sites/default/files/epd/english/environmentinhk/air/prob_solutions/files/guidelines_on_enabling_eng.p
df. [Accessed April 2021].

2.3. Medium chargers with both American SAE standard and

European IEC standard sockets/ connectors shall be
provided for all visitor car parks; and
2.4. For outdoor EV chargers, safety requirement in IEC 60364-

7-722 is required with protection of at least IPX4.
Submittals (a) Accessibility to Public Transport

SS_01a_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template
 
for SS 1a
SS_01a_01 Calculation for Accessibility Index  
(AI) [Appendix A]
SS_01a_02 Scaled drawing on an A3-sized sheet
indicating the distances alongside
unhampered walking routes from site  
entrance(s) to stops/ stations of
public transport services
SS_01a_03 Evidence of service frequencies of
 
public transport
SS_01a_04 Evidence for the operating hours and
required information of mechanical
means to assist pedestrian
movement, and calculation of the
 
combined horizontal commuting time
(If a walking route uses a mechanical
means to assist pedestrian
movement)
For future services/ facilities provisions in operation PA FA
no later than one year after the completion and
occupation of the proposed development, please
include the followings:
SS_01a_05 Evidence issued by a government
agency or a quasi-government body
for the targeted operation dates of  
any future public transport services/
facilities
SS_01a_06 Evidence showing the actual
occupation date of the proposed - 
development
If shuttle service is provided, please include the PA FA
followings:
SS_01a_07 Scaled building layout plans for drop-
off/ pick-up point(s) of shuttle service  
vehicles

SS_01a_08 Notification of shuttle service

provisions by the service provider to
building users confirming that:
- Routes and stops that provide
connection links to the public
transport,
- 
- Capacity of the shuttle service
vehicles,
- Locations of the shuttle service

drop-off/ pick-up points, and
- Fixed operating frequency of the

services.
SS_01a_09 Justification for the adequacy of
services (if the capacity of shuttle 
service vehicles is below 16 -
passengers)
SS_01a_10 Undertaking letter by the developer/
property owner that the shuttle
services will be provided for a - 
minimum of 5 years.
SS_01a_11 A minimum of 1 year rolling contract
in place with the service provider - 
information.
SS_01a_12 Evidence of shuttle services in project - 
completion

SS_01b_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template
 
for SS 1b
SS_01b_01 Drawings and descriptions on the
 
relevant pedestrian-oriented features
SS_01b_02 Relevant parts of the lease conditions/
engineering conditions on the car park
 
provisions
(If applicable)
SS_01b_03 Extracts of HKPSG’s recommended
minimum car park provisions, or
Transport Department advice on
minimum car park provisions
 
(If applicable and there is no
requirement stipulated for car park
provision in the lease or engineering
conditions)
SS_01b_04 Layout plan showing the locations and
types of car parking spaces (If  
applicable)
SS_01b_05 Calculation of minimum car park
provision (If applicable)  

SS_01b_06 Swept path diagram to show

simultaneous free flow of vehicles in
and out of the car park at the point of  
access (If applicable)
SS_01b_07 Drawings showing the provisions in
the carpark to avoid ground  
contamination from oil run-off (If
applicable)
SS_01b_08 Plans showing a shaded pedestrian
route under trees for main pedestrian
pathways; and
Report on species of trees and
 
anticipated crown diameters 10 years
after landscape installation
(If applicable and shading for main
pedestrian pathways is provided by
trees at-grade)
SS_01b_09 Evidence of pedestrian-oriented
features in project completion
- 

SS_01c_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template
 
for SS 1c
SS_01c_01 Scaled drawing on an A3-sized sheet
indicating the nearby public cycling
 
network
SS_01c_02 Drawings and calculations of cycling
tracks, parking and other facilities
 
within the site meeting stipulated
requirements
SS_01c_03 Extracts of HKPSG’s recommended
cycling facilities provisions, or
 
Transport Department advice on
cycling facilities provisions
SS_01c_04 Evidence of cycling facilities in project
completion - 
SS_01c_05 Drawings demonstrating the shower

and changing facilities (for non-
 
residential projects or non-residential
portion of mixed-use projects)
(d) Charging Facilities for EV

SS_01d_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template
 
for SS 1d
SS_01d_01 Drawings and description of EV
 
charging facility provisions
SS_01d_02 Evidence of EV charging facilities in
project completion
- 


Recommended design requirements for barrier free access are published
in the Design Manual for Barrier Free Access 2008 of the Buildings
Department HKSAR.
Civil Engineering and Development Department, HKSAR publishes

projects on the latest and on-going cycle track networks in its website.
Transport Department, Public Transport in Hong Kong. [ONLINE].

Available at:
http://www.td.gov.hk/en/transport_in_hong_kong/public_transport/
(b) Related Credits

The related prerequisite requires a minimum site coverage of greenery
that may contribute to the design of a pleasant environment for
pedestrians.
SS 2 Neighbourhood Amenities
The related credit promotes a good pedestrian accessibility to amenities
within and in the vicinity of the Site. Better integration of the surrounding
pedestrian networks and pedestrian pathways within the site will
achieve enhanced accessibility for building users and/ or the public.
The related credit encourages strategies to preserve and/ or enhance

The related credit encourages a higher overall site coverage of greenery
and stipulates minimum site coverage of greenery in the Primary Zone
(the 15m vertical zone of a site along the abutting street level). The
enhanced greenery in the Primary Zone will contribute to a more
pleasant pedestrian environment.

site.
The related credit considers the hardscape and softscape provided with
the site for infiltration and detention in stormwater management that
may contribute to the design of a pleasant environment for pedestrians
and the pervious construction to avoid ground contamination from oil
run-off for open carpark.

Objective Encourage building development that is integrated within, and an asset to,
the immediate neighbourhood.
Credit Requirement (a) Amenities for Building Users

1 credit where adequate amenities for building users are located within
the site or 500m walking distance/ an equivalent horizontal commuting
time from the site entrance(s).

1 credit where adequate shared amenities for the neighbourhood are
provided within the site and are made available for public use.
Assessment (a) Amenities for Building Users

1. Provide a summary based on a survey of the immediate
neighbourhood and the development itself to demonstrate that at
least 15 amenities for building users are located within the site or
500m walking distance from the site entrance(s) to the main
entrances of the amenities or the common entrance of a collective
amenity (a complex comprising 2 or more amenities).
Building Amenities Building Types

C1 C2 E1 E2 R O
Food outlets
Restaurants/ cafes/ food & beverage
C  C C C 
outlets
Community retail
Convenience/ grocery stores C  C C C 
Supermarkets/ wet markets      
Other retail shops      
Services
Banks or Automated Teller Machines
C   C C 
Hairdressers      
Pharmacy (with registered license
     
and for retail purpose)
Laundry or dry cleaners      
Community facilities
Nursery classes */ kindergartens */
    
day care/ child care facilities

Elderly care facilities      

Primary/ secondary school*     
Arts venues */ public entertainment

     
[1]
Places of worship      
Medical/ health facilities (including
     
dental clinic) *
Libraries      
Post offices */ postal facilities      
Community hall *      
Public Toilets      
Recreational facilities/open spaces
Active recreational facilities or open
C  C C  
spaces *
Passive recreational facilities or
    C 
open spaces *
Legend:
C Core amenity for building type
 Amenity relevant to building type
* Definition referred to in HKPSG Chapter 3/ Chapter 4 [2]
Building Types:
C1 Commercial Office / Retail /Mixed-use
C2 buildings Hotel
E1 Educational Pre-school / Primary / Secondary School

E2 buildings Tertiary / Post-secondary Education /
Universities
R Residential
buildings
O Other building
types
2. Indicate lines and distances shown alongside of unhampered

walking routes from the site entrance(s) to the main entrance of
each amenity or each collective amenity in vicinity on an A3-sized
scaled drawing.
2.1. When there are multiple site entrances in a development, the

one having the least numbers of amenities complying with
the credit requirements shall be demonstrated for
compliance.
1 Public entertainment means any entertainment to which the general public is admitted with or without payment (ref. to Cap 172
Places of Public Entertainment Ordinance, HKSAR)
2 Planning Department. Hong Kong Planning Standards and Guidelines. Chapter 3: Community Facilities [ONLINE]. Available at:
https://www.pland.gov.hk/pland_en/tech_doc/hkpsg/full/pdf/ch3.pdf. [Accessed April 2021]; Planning Department. Hong Kong
Planning Standards and Guidelines. Chapter 4: Recreation, Open Space and Greening. [ONLINE]. Available at:
https://www.pland.gov.hk/pland_en/tech_doc/hkpsg/full/pdf/ch4.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].

3. Demonstrate that the available amenities shall include at least 2

different core amenity types (core amenities are regarded as the
most vital and essential basic services / recreational facilities)
referred above for:
2.1. Office, retail or mixed-use buildings;

2.2. Pre-school, primary or secondary school;
2.3. Tertiary, post-secondary education or universities, and
2.4. Residential buildings.
4. Count 2 or more amenities of the same type as 2 amenities.

Example 1: 3 cafes and 2 ATMs shall be counted as 4 amenities.
Example 2: 3 cafes, 2 ATMs and 3 public toilets shall be counted
as 6 amenities.
5. The predominant service of the development itself could be

counted as an amenity for this credit. For example, a school
development itself is countable as an amenity for this credit.
6. For a walking route using a mechanical means to assist pedestrian

movement, provide evidence to demonstrate:
6.1. The mechanical means having no restricted operating hour

or in operation when the counted amenities are opened;
6.2. Mapping of the start and end points of the mechanical means
to be shown on a scaled drawing, and
6.3. Calculation of combined horizontal commuting time (walk

times plus horizontal commuting times on the mechanical
means to amenities being no more than 7 minutes (wait time
for vertical transportation to be excluded; walking speed of
80m per minute to be adopted for calculation of walk time)),
with substantiation by supplier’s information on the
commuting speed of the mechanical installation.

1. Demonstrate that at least 5 amenities referred in SS 2a are
provided within the Site and will be made available for public use,
and no core amenity is needed to be counted.
2. Count 2 or more amenities of the same type as 2 amenities.

Example 1: 3 cafes and 2 ATMs shall be counted as 4 amenities.
Example 2: 3 cafes, 2 ATMs and 3 public toilets shall be counted
as 6 amenities.
3. Provide evidence that prominent and permanent public signage

is provided on site or at least one notice in the public domain
(websites, regular publications available to the public,
newspapers or other means proposed by the Applicant) is served
to notify the public about the shared amenities for
neighbourhood, and any arrangement to be made for using the
facilities.

4. State any restrictions or conditions of access to the amenities that

will be in place. Reasonable opening time restriction and / or fees
charged for the use of the amenities by public shall be acceptable
for this credit. Private clubhouses primarily for residents or
building occupants of the proposed development shall not be
counted in this credit requirement.
For both SS 2a and SS 2b:
1. Provide justifications to count amenities that are not listed in this

credit for consideration. The justification shall be considered
based on the individual merits of the amenities, basic necessity,
psychological and/or physical wellbeing of the immediate
neighbourhood.
2. Provide evidence for the targeted opening schedules for future

amenities provisions not operable at the time of building
completion. The amenities can be counted if they will be in
operation no later than one year after the occupation of the
proposed development.
Submittals (a) Amenities for Building Users

SS_02a_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template for  

SS 2a
SS_02a_01 Scaled drawing on an A3-sized sheet

indicating the distances alongside  
unhampered walking routes from the
site’s entrance(s) to amenities
SS_02a_02 Evidence for the operating hours and
required information of the mechanical
means to assist pedestrian movement,
and detailed account of combined  
horizontal commuting time
(If a walking route uses a mechanical
means to assist pedestrian movement)
SS_02a_03 Justifications on the needs of building

users/public to count amenities that are  
not listed (If applicable)
SS_02a_04 Evidence for the targeted opening

schedules for future amenities provisions  
(If applicable)
SS_02a_05 Evidence of the actual occupation date of

the proposed development
- 
(If future amenities with known targeted
opening schedules are counted)

SS_02a_06 Evidence of the amenities identified in the

vicinity within 500m walking distance  
SS_02a_07 Evidence of the amenities provided within

the Site for building users (if applicable) - 

SS_02b_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template for  

SS 2b
SS_02b_01 Scaled drawing on an A3-sized sheet
 
indicating the shared amenities within the
Site
SS_02b_02 Justifications on the needs of building

users/ public to count amenities that are  
not listed
SS_02b_03 Evidence for the targeted opening

 
schedules for future amenities provision (If
applicable)
SS_02b_04 Evidence of the actual occupation date for

the proposed development (if future - 
amenities with known targeted opening
schedules are counted)
SS_02b_05 Evidence for the public on-site signage or

evidence of notice in the public domain for - 
the shared amenities
SS_02b_06 Evidence of the amenities provided within - 

the site

None
(b) Related Credits

The related credit promotes good pedestrian accessibility to public
transport. Better integration of the surrounding pedestrian networks and
pedestrian pathways within the site will achieve enhanced accessibility
for building users and/ or the public.

SS 3 Building Design for Sustainable Urbanism
Extent of Application All Buildings
Objective Encourage a people-oriented and place-making approach for a sustainable

urban design and conserve cultural heritage.
Credit Requirement (a) Sustainable Urban Design

Preparing a site design appraisal report demonstrating a proactive
approach in achieving a people-oriented and place-making approach
for a sustainable site planning.
Credit (s) Percentage of achievement in

site design appraisal report
at least 30% of applicable
1 sustainable urbanism measures
are achieved
2 sustainable urbanism measures.

2 + 1 additional BONUS sustainable urbanism measures.

1 BONUS credit for demonstrating that a proper heritage impact
assessment mechanism and its recommendations have been
implemented.
Assessment (a) Sustainable Urban Design

1. Complete a checklist in the submission template of this credit to
indicate which sub-items are achieved, not achieved or not
applicable.
2. Provide a site design appraisal report demonstrating a proactive

approach in achieving relevant applicable sustainable urbanism
measures for public realm (interpreted as public spaces within
and surrounding the Site for socialisation and enjoyment by the
community), providing justifications on all the achieved or not
applicable sub-items of the following:
2.1 Avoid dwarfing effect in public realm, considering visual

effect of the building masses/ forms/ heights from public
spaces in relation to human scale.
2.2 Create or preserve visual corridors and prominent

pedestrian linkages in public realm to less developed rural
areas in urban fringe or towards adjacent public open
spaces in vicinity. (This sub-item is not applicable for sites
where there is no surrounding public open space or less
developed rural area in vicinity.)
2.3 Create or preserve visual corridors in public realm from

inland to the waterfront of the Victoria Harbour or major

water bodies such as Inner Port Shelter, Junk Bay, Ma

Wan, South China Sea, Tolo Harbour. (This sub-item is not
applicable for inland sites where public realm has no view
of the water bodies.)
2.4 Harmonise building masses/ forms/ heights with the natural

environment in rural areas or urban fringe. (This sub-item is
not applicable for inland urban sites where public realm has
no view of the natural environment.)
2.5 Avoid monotony by diversified but yet compatible building

masses/ forms/ heights in relation to topography or
character of surrounding landscape/ developments.
2.6 Create stepped and compatible building height profile within

the Site in relation to topography, water bodies or character
of surrounding landscape/ developments.
2.7 Preserve views to selected sections of ridgelines/ peaks by

maintaining a 20% building free zone [1] as viewed from
relevant vantage points [2] or give punctuation effects of the
ridgelines by special landmark mega tower design with high
quality architectural design at suitable locations [3]. (This
sub-item is not applicable for inland sites that could not be
seen from the afore-mentioned vantage points on both
sides of Victoria Harbour.)
2.8 Preserve views to local building/ landscape features and

public spaces from public realm by appropriate building
masses/ forms / heights.
2.9 Open up or preserve view from public realm to any adjacent

heritage feature. Arrange massing of larger elements of the
new development furthest from an adjacent heritage feature
and smaller elements of the massing closer to the feature.
(This sub-item is not applicable for sites where there is no
adjacent heritage feature.)
2.10 Provide building set-back (at least 2m from site boundary)

from street and neighbourhood amenities along street to
activate public realm. (This sub-item is not applicable for
sites with no street frontage.)
2.11 Create building masses/ forms as high quality architectural

landmark features in public realm/ waterfront to create
orientation and a sense of place.
2.12 Provide public open spaces of diverse shapes and sizes for
social and cultural events with prominent pedestrian
linkages.
1 Planning Department. Hong Kong Planning and Standards Guidelines. Chapter 11: Urban Design Guidelines. Figure 2: Building
Free Zone to Preserve Views to Ridgelines. [ONLINE]. Available at:
https://www.pland.gov.hk/pland_en/tech_doc/hkpsg/full/pdf/ch11.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].
2 Planning Department. Hong Kong Planning and Standards Guidelines. Chapter 11: Urban Design Guidelines. Figure 3: Vantage
Points. [ONLINE]. Available at: https://www.pland.gov.hk/pland_en/tech_doc/hkpsg/full/pdf/ch11.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].
3 Planning Department completed the "Urban Design Guidelines for Hong Kong" (the UDG Study) in 2003 and has suggested that
no additional high-rise nodes should be designated outside the southern tip of West Kowloon Reclamation and Tsim Sha Tsui
area.

2.13 Avoid monotony by diversified but yet compatible building

facade/ streetscape design in public realm (styles/ colours/
materiality/ architectural details) in relation to surrounding
developments.
2.14 Define entrance(s) and focal point(s) in public realm to

create a sense of place.
2.15 Provide high quality architectural design of seating,

pedestrian signage, pavement surface and other street
furniture in the public realm to strengthen human scale and
to complement the character of the area or the adjacent
developments.
2.16 Harmonise architectural design, especially in the lower

floors, with an adjacent built heritage in terms of style, scale,
proportion, colour and/ or materials (at least 2 of these
items). (This sub-item is not applicable for sites where there
is no adjacent built heritage.)
2.17 Create landscape with seasonal colour changes and scenic

effect to enhance street character.
2.18 Provide suitable landscaping to minimise negative visual

impact of stilted structures on sloping sites. (This sub-item
is not applicable for sites where there is no stilted structure.)

1. Compile a comprehensive inventory of cultural heritage within or
in the vicinity of the Site (interpreted as not more than 50m
measured from the nearest point of the site boundary (inclusive of
works area) in accordance with the Technical Circular (Works)
No. 6/2009 for Heritage Impact Assessment Mechanism for
Capital Works Projects [4]).
1.1 Cultural heritage referred to in this credit include declared

monuments/ Grade 1 to Grade 3 historic buildings confirmed
by the Antiquities Advisory Board (AAB) and other sites/
historic buildings proposed to be recorded/ graded by AAB.
The information of cultural heritage shall be assembled from
the Antiquities and Monuments Office (AMO) [ 5 ], public
libraries and archives and tertiary institutions.
1.2 If there is any potential heritage site/ structure/ feature/

building within or in the vicinity of the Site, present the latest
record by AMO’s grading confirmation or advice on the
heritage value of the site/ structure/ feature/ building.
2. For a project with culture heritage within or in the vicinity of the

Site, demonstrate that a heritage impact assessment mechanism
in accordance with Development Bureau’s Technical Circular
(Works) No. 6/2009 “Heritage Impact Assessment Mechanism for
4 Development Bureau. Technical Circular (Works) No. 6/2009: Heritage Impact Assessment Mechanism for Capital Works
Projects. [ONLINE]. Available at: http://www.heritage.gov.hk/images/impact/TC_Heritage.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].
5 Antiquities and Monuments Office, Hong Kong. [ONLINE]. Available at: https://www.amo.gov.hk/en/main.php [Accessed
April 2021].

Capital Works Projects” [4] and its recommendations have been

implemented.
Submittals (a) Sustainable Urban Design

SS_03a_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template
 
for SS 3a with
Checklist for sustainable urbanism
measures for public realm [Form S-A]  #
SS_03a_01 Site design appraisal report

demonstrating a proactive approach
 #
in achieving relevant applicable
sustainable urbanism measures, with
detailed narrative and supporting
information such as existing site
photos, layout plans, renderings, etc.
to demonstrate compliance
# The supporting documents are not required in FA if the credit(s) and
additional BONUS credit is/are achieved in PA

SS_03b_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template  
for SS 3b
SS_03b_01 Heritage impact assessment report  
SS_03b_02 Supporting documents and photos for - 
implementation of recommendations
in heritage impact assessment report

None

(b) Related Credits

The related credit encourages pleasant pedestrian-oriented design and
may help achieve the people-oriented and vibrant streetscape.
The related credit encourages building developments to provide
neighbourhood amenities and will help activate public realm.
The related credit encourages habitat preservation/ enhancement that
may contribute to the landscape quality of the public realm.

The related credit encourages greenery and building setback that may
enhance the quality of the public realm.

Objective Encourage building development which is sensitive to the needs of

neighbours in respect of preserving daylight and views.
Credit Requirement 1 credit for the designs which the access to daylight of neighbouring sensitive
buildings is maintained to the prescribed levels.
Assessment 1. Demonstrate either by:
1.1 Computational lighting simulation / physical modelling, the Vertical

Daylight Factors (VDFs) [1] on the facades of the lowest floors of
the sensitive buildings most affected by the proposed development
are either unchanged or are no less than 12%, OR
1.2 Unobstructed Vision Area (UVA) Method [1], the UVAs of the
windows on the lowest floors of the sensitive buildings most
affected by the proposed development are unchanged.
2. For development located in an area where daylight is thought to be of

no value to neighbouring properties, submit a scaled map covering the
assessment area (see Section 4.1 Sensitive Buildings) to substantiate.
3. Submit a daylight access study report demonstrating compliance with

the assessment criteria. The report should include:
3.1 Types and locations of the sensitive buildings identified within the
Site and in the vicinity on an A3-sized scale drawing;
For VDF simulation method:
3.2 Name of the simulation software used;
3.3 Modelling assumptions;
3.4 Screen captures of project building, surrounding building and

terrain of the 3D model;
3.5 Screen captures of the Sensitive Receivers’ locations;
3.6 Summary of sensitive receivers and VDF results;
3.7 Simulation output results (raw data output files / render images);
3.8 If the simulation software is not on the list in Annex 4 of PNAP APP-
130, a software validation report from the software developer should
be provided to ensure the accuracy of the simulation by the
software.
1 Buildings Department - PNAP APP-130 Lighting and Ventilation Requirements – Performance-based Approach. [ONLINE].
Available at: https://www.bd.gov.hk/doc/en/resources/codes-and-references/practice-notes-and-circular-
letters/pnap/APP/APP130.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].

For physical modeling method:

3.9 General information such as site orientation, site latitude, scale of
physical model, etc.;
3.10 Sensor and camera location;
3.11 Material and edge joining
3.12 Colour and Wall Reflection Coefficient;
3.13 Modelisation of the external surfaces;
3.14 Modelisation of external obstructions;
For UVA method:

3.15 Scaled drawings showing the UVA at Sensitive Receivers before
and after the proposed development;
4. The report should be endorsed by a locally qualified professional who

has at least 3 years of relevant experience in natural daylight study.
4.1 Sensitive Buildings

4.1.1 Assessment area shall be 1H (H being the building height
(m) of the tallest building on the project site) or 100m away
from the project site, whichever is larger;
4.1.2 All sensitive buildings within the assessment area
(excluding those within the site) shall be assessed to
determine the value of daylight;
4.1.3 Sensitive buildings include:

a. Residential buildings;
b. Premises that requires daylight to enhance the lighting
environment for the occupants to perform tasks, such as
offices and schools;
c. Premises that require daylight for energy saving and an
improved environment for the transient stage of
occupation, such as the circulation area of shopping
centres and indoor games halls; and
d. Premises that require daylight primarily for view, such as
hotels and hospitals.
• Examples of premises that should be included:
Commercial, education, shopping centre, hall,
church, temple, hotel, hostel, hospitals and shops
• Temporary structures are not required to be
modelled
4.2 Sensitive Receivers

4.2.1 Sensitive receivers should be placed at the glazing of the
lowest floors of sensitive buildings within the assessment
area.

5 The below requirements should be fulfilled in the daylight simulation:

5.2 Sky model should use CIE overcast sky (10,000 lux)
5.3 Overall external reflectance of an average of 0.2 for building

(include the project development, unless provide other supporting)
and 0.2 for ground.
5.3 Surrounding buildings and terrain shall be included in the model

based on the GIS information from Lands Department.
5.4 The surrounding building and large structures should be included

in the simulation model. The surrounding area should be at least
2H (H being the building height (m) of the tallest building on the
project site) or 200m away from the project site boundary,
whichever is larger. The building geometry can be simplified as
blocks.
5.5 The terrain area shall be in a size of at least, 10H (H being the
building height (m) of the tallest building on the project site) or
1000m × 1000m, whichever is larger, with the project placed in the
centre. Where smaller terrain area is desired, the applicant should
propose a terrain area with justification and the terrain area should
be surrounded by a wall with a height of the average height of the
surrounding buildings.
Submittals
SS_04_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template for  
SS 4
SS_04_01 CV of the professional as described in  #
credit requirement
SS_04_02 Site plan indicating the location of the  #
sensitive receiver
SS_04_03 Daylight access study report  #
SS_04_04 Validation Report of the simulation

software (Simulation Path only)*  #

in PA
* It is required only if the simulation software is not on the list in Annex 4 of
PNAP APP-130

None
(b) Related Credits

HWB 11 Daylight
This credit considers the daylight performance in indoor normally
occupied spaces by considering the sufficiency of daylight illuminance
and the potential risk of excessive sunlight penetration.

SS 5 Noise Control for Building Equipment
Objective Encourage proactive design techniques to reduce the nuisance caused to

the neighbours by noise from building services equipment.
Credit Requirement 1 credit for demonstrating that the level of the intruding noise at the facade
of potential noise sensitive receivers is in compliance with the criteria
recommended in the Technical Memorandum for the Assessment of Noise
from Places Other than Domestic Premises, Public Places or Construction
Sites [1].
Assessment 1. Provide a noise prediction / assessment report with detailed analysis,

appropriate calculations or measurements to demonstrate that the
levels of the intruding noise at the facades of existing or planned
noise sensitive receivers comply with the following assessment
criteria:
1.1 Provide a background noise measurement report with detailed

monitoring records to support the ANL requirements of day time
and night time and background noise.
1.2 On the basis of promoting good environmental design

assessment, existing uses and land uses under statutory plans
of Town Planning Ordinance should be examined to identify
existing or planned noise sensitive developments. Where there
is a piece of vacant land and no available information to verify its
use, it should be assumed that it will become a noise sensitive
receiver.
1.3 Ideally, assessment should be made at the facade on the noise

sensitive receiver. Under circumstances that access to the noise
sensitive development is not granted for measurement,
calculation or a combination of measurement at a nearby
location with calculation adjustment is permitted.
1.4 The noise assessments shall be conducted in accordance with

the Technical Memorandum [1].
1.5 Noise sensitive receivers should follow the Technical

Memorandum. Only buildings external to the site boundary are
assessed.
1.6 The major noise sources include chillers, water cooling towers,
fans (duct type and centrifugal) and ducts [2]. Only equipment
provided by the developer/owner is assessed.
1 Environmental Protection Department - Technical Memorandum for the Assessment of Noise from Places Other than Domestic
Premises, Public Places or Construction Sites. [ONLINE]. Available at:
https://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/sites/default/files/epd/english/environmentinhk/noise/guide_ref/files/tm_nondomestic.pdf
2 EPD - Good Practices on Ventilation System Noise Control (April 2006)

1.7 All fixed noise sources should be located and designed so that
when assessed in accordance with the Technical Memorandum,
the level of the intruding noise at the facade of the nearest
sensitive receiver should be at least 5 dB(A) below the
appropriate ANL shown in Table 2 of the Technical
Memorandum or, in the case of the background being 5 dB(A)
lower than the ANL, should not be higher than the background,
in accordance with paragraph 4.2.13, Chapter 9 of the Hong
Kong Planning Standards and Guidelines [3 ]. Applicants are
required to justify the selected Area Sensitivity Rating (ASR).
1.8 The acoustic calculation or measurement report should be

endorsed by:
• a Corporate Member of Hong Kong Institute of
Acoustics; or
• a corporate/ certified/ full member of other international
acoustic institution; or
• a member of HKIE (Building Services, Mechanical or
Environmental discipline) with relevant experience in
Acoustic/ Vibration Design.

SS_05_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template for
 
SS 5
SS_05_01 Layout plans indicating the location of
the major noise sources and NSR’s  
location and corresponding distance
SS_05_02 Endorsed noise prediction/ assessment  
report
SS_05_03 Equipment catalogue showing the sound
 
power level of equipment
SS_05_04 Outline zoning plan to show the planned
 
development(s) around the project site
SS_05_05 CV of the professional as described in
 
credit requirement

None
(b) Related Credits

None
3 Hong Kong Planning Standards and Guidelines, Chapter 9 Environment. [ONLINE]. Available
at: https://www.pland.gov.hk/pland_en/tech_doc/hkpsg/full/pdf/ch9.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].

3 Sustainable Site 3.2 Ecologically Responsible Design
SS 6 Light Pollution Control
Objective Ensure that the exterior lighting and building design do not create unwanted
and unnecessary light pollution.
Credit Requirement (a) Control of Obtrusive Artificial Light

1 credit for demonstrating that the obtrusive light from exterior lighting
meets the specified performance for the environmental zone in which
the building development is located.
(b) Control of External Light Reflection from Building

1 credit for demonstrating that the sunlight reflection from external
surfaces of the buildings is controlled by using materials with acceptable
external light reflectance.
Assessment (a) Control of Obtrusive Artificial Light

1. Provide a scaled map showing the immediate neighbourhood of the
Site highlighting the surrounding buildings included in the assessment.
Only buildings outside the site boundary are assessed.
2. Provide a schedule of all exterior lighting fixtures, including their

quantities, locations and model references and compile supplier
information on the performance of the light fixtures used for
modelling studies.
3. Provide the exterior lighting layout plan showing types and

locations of all exterior lighting fixtures.
4. Demonstrate that the relevant recommendations in the HKSAR

Government's Guidelines on Industry Best Practices for External
Lighting are complied with [1].
5. Meet the obtrusive light control requirements, using either the

backlight-uplight-glare (BUG) method when all installed luminaires’
BUG rating information is available, or the calculation method if
partial exterior luminaires are not BUG rated.
1 Environment Bureau. Guidelines on Industry Best Practices for External Lighting. [ONLINE]. Available at:
http://www.enb.gov.hk/sites/default/files/en/node78/guidelines_ex_lighting_install_eng.pdf [Accessed April 2021].

Calculation Method
6. Demonstrate that the exterior lighting design complies within the
maximum figure for each parameter (light into windows, source
intensity, sky glow and building luminance), taken from Table 3,
Table 4, Table 6 and Table 8 respectively in ILP Guidance Notes [2].
Provide justification of the environmental zone as defined in Table 2
of ILP Guidance Notes [2] for the project. Note that it is a district-
scale consideration.
7. Prepare a light pollution calculation report for modelling studies

to demonstrate compliance of the above criteria, including:
7.1 Assumptions adopted;
7.2 Screen capture of input parameters;
7.3 Screen capture of modelled buildings;
7.4 Results highlighting compliance of credit requirements.
BUG Method
8. Demonstrate that the luminaire uplight, backlight and glare ratings for
the specific light source installed in the luminaire, taken from IES TM-15-
11 – Addendum A [3], based on mounting location and distance from the
property line (assessment boundary), do not exceed the criteria for the
corresponding lighting zone as defined in Model Lighting Ordinance
(MLO)[4]. Provide justification for the lighting zone adopted for the
project. Note that the lighting zone is a district-scale consideration.
9. Define assessment boundary on layout
10. BUG values are typically published by product manufacturers. If

published BUG data do not address the design position of the luminaire
(or are not available at all), ratings can be calculated by reviewing a
luminaire’s photometric test data and zonal lumen distribution and
comparing the data with maximum zonal lumens for backlight, uplight,
and glare established in IES TM-15-11, Addendum A. Software
calculation for BUG rating is acceptable to reflect the compliance.
11. Prepare a BUG method report to demonstrate compliance of the above

criteria, including:
11.1 Highlighting manufacturer BUG rating information for installed

luminaires
11.2 Software calculation (if applicable) for the BUG rating with all
assumption adopted, screen capture of input parameters and
results of BUG rating.
* Exemptions from this credit assessment

12. The following exterior lighting is exempted from the requirements,
provided it is controlled separately from the non-exempt lighting:
12.1 Specialised signal, directional, and marker lighting for

transportation.
2 The Institution of Lighting Professionals. Guidance notes for the reduction of obtrusive light, GN01:2011. [ONLINE]. Available at:
https://www.theilp.org.uk/documents/obtrusive-light/. [Accessed April 2021].
3 Backlight, Uplight, and Glare (BUG) Ratings - IES TM-15-11 – Addendum A. [ONLINE]. Available at: https://ies.org/wp-
content/uploads/2017/03/TM-15- 11BUGRatingsAddendum.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].
4 Illuminating Engineering Society and International Dark-Sky Association (IES/ IDA) Model Lighting Ordinance User Guides.
[ONLINE]. Available at: http://darksky.org/wp-content/uploads/bsk-pdf-manager/16_MLO_FINAL_JUNE2011.PDF. [Accessed April
2021].

12.2 Lighting for theatrical purposes for stage, film, and video
performances.
12.3 Hospital emergency departments, including associated helipads.

1. Demonstrate objectively that the sunlight reflection from the
external surfaces of the building development is properly
controlled and meets the following requirements:
External surfaces of various Total Specular

parts of the building External Light reflectance not
development to exceed
Glass 20% Nil
At least 50% (measured by Nil 10%
surface areas) of materials
(other than glass) on building
facades and roof
Note:
(i) Specular reflectance is the type of reflectance when light is
reflected away from the reflecting surface at the same angle
as it is incident.
(ii) Total external light reflectance is the sum of specular and

diffuse reflectance.
2. The testing of reflectance values for any material shall be

conducted by accredited laboratories in accordance with
ASTM E903: Standard Test Method for Solar Absorptance,
Reflectance, and Transmittance of Materials Using
Integrating Spheres, or equivalent, with an integrating sphere
of minimum 150mm diameter.
Submittals (a) Control of Obtrusive Artificial Light

SS_06a_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template for
 
SS 6a
SS_06a_01 Scaled map showing immediate
neighbourhood of the site for  #
assessment
SS_06a_02 External lighting layout plans  #
SS_06a_03 Schedule of exterior lighting fixtures and
 #
lighting catalogues on performance data
SS_06a_04 Light pollution calculation report
 #
[or]
BUG method report  #

SS_06a_05 Report on the compliance of Guidelines
on Industry Best Practices for External  #
Lighting
# The supporting documents are not required in FA if the credit is
achieved in PA

SS_06b_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template for SS
 
6b
SS_06b_01 Schedules or drawings on materials used
on the external surfaces of the building
 
development
SS_06b_02 Some similar reference material
catalogues/ test reports showing their
specular reflectance values to demonstrate
the design intent for the proposed types
and finishes of the surface materials;  -
schedule of external materials and
proposed finishes treatments, and tender
specifications on the specular reflectance
requirements of the materials
SS_06b_03 Calculations for surface areas using

different materials (other than glass) to
demonstrate compliance in design stage  
and when the building is completed
respectively
SS_06b_04 Photos of the building facade - 
SS_06b_05 Catalogues or test reports confirming the
relevant external light reflectance of - 
materials used on the external surfaces of
the building development

International Dark-sky Association. Information Resource. [ONLINE].
Available at: http://www.darksky.org/resources. [Accessed April 2021].
International Commission on Illumination. Guidelines for Minimising Sky

Glow. Technical Report CIE 126: 1997.
(b) Related Credits

None

3 Sustainable Site 3.2 Ecologically Responsible Design
Extent of Application All sites with existing tree except brownfield sites or sites on reclaimed
land for SS 7a
Sites with adjacent areas of medium or high ecological value for SS 7b
Objective Preserve and/ or enhance the biodiversity of the site.
Credit Requirement (a) Reduction of Ecological Impact

Credit Requirement
All identified habitat types on Site are of low or
negligible indicative ecological values
OR
1 All identified habitat types on Site of medium to high
indicative ecological value are preserved intact and
are unaffected or enhanced by the planned
development
The combined girth of the retained trees, with
1 additional
individual girth of at least 150mm, is at least 20% of
BONUS
The combined girth of the retained trees, with

1 additional
individual girth of at least 150mm, is at least 40% of
BONUS

Prepare a manual on biodiversity-friendly landscape maintenance,
PLUS a biodiversity enhancement report demonstrating each of the
following measures for enhancing the biodiversity of the Site:
1. 1 BONUS credit for physical connectivity between areas with

ecological values
2. 1 BONUS credit for increased diversity and complexity of planting
3. 1 BONUS credit for wildlife-friendly building features (e.g.

windows and lighting)
Assessment (a) Reduction of Ecological Impact

1. Provide a habitat mapping report of the Site to identify the
locations, dimensions and areas of all existing habitat types within
the Site and determine their corresponding indicative ecological
value. The mapping of habitat types, their definition and ecological
value identification shall make reference to Terrestrial Habitat
Mapping and Ranking Based on Conservation Value [1]. Types
of habitats and their indicative ecological values are summarised
below:
1 Sustainable Development Unit, Environment Bureau, HKSAR. 2009. Terrestrial Habitat Mapping and Ranking Based on
Conservation Value.

Ecological Value Habitat Types

High Value Fung Shui Forest;
Montane Forest;
Lowland Forest;
Mixed Shrubland;
Freshwater/ Backish Wetland;
Natural Watercourse;
Seagrass Bed; and
Intertidal Mudflat.
Medium Value Shrubby Grassland (including Baeckea
Shrubland)
Plantation or Plantation/ Mixed Forest;
Fishpond/ Gei Wai;
Sandy Shore;
Rocky Shore; and
Cultivation.
Low Value Bare Rock or Soil;
Grassland;
Modified Watercourse;
Artificial Rocky/ Hard Shoreline;
Golf Course/ Urban Park; and
Quarry
Negligible Value Rural industrial storage/ containers;
Landfill; and
Others.
2. Provide an ecological impact assessment report to demonstrate one

of the following is achieved:
2.1 All identified habitat types on Site are of low or negligible

indicative ecological value; OR
2.2 All identified habitat types on Site of medium to high indicative

ecological value are preserved intact and are unaffected or
enhanced by the planned development.
3. Retention of Trees
3.1 Provide a detailed tree survey of all trees on Site in accordance
with the Development Bureau Technical Circular (Works) No.
7/2015 of the HKSAR Government.
3.2 Demonstrate the combined girth of retained trees shall be at least

20% (or 40%) of the total girth of all existing trees on site.
3.3 The individual girth of the retained trees counting towards the
20% (or 40%) shall not be less than 150mm and shall each have
no more than 25% of its crown pruned to enable construction
and operation of the Project.
3.4 Trees transplanted within the Site do not qualified as retained

trees of this BONUS credit.

1. Provide a habitat mapping report of the adjacent areas to the Site
to identify the locations, dimensions and areas of all existing
habitat types of areas adjacent to the Site and determine their
corresponding indicative ecological value. The mapping of habitat
types, their definition and ecological value identification shall make
reference to Terrestrial Habitat Mapping and Ranking Based on
Conservation Value. Types of habitats and their indicative
ecological values are summarised in the table under Part (a)(1)

above.
1. Prepare a Biodiversity-friendly Landscape Maintenance Manual
including the sections below for at least 20 A4 pages:
a. Design objectives of biodiversity enhancement
b. Maintenance requirement
c. Waste minimisation
3. Prepare a Biodiversity enhancement report to indicate the

measures to be implemented:
3.1. Physical connectivity between areas with ecological values
3.1.1. Provide planting plans and demonstrate the physical

interconnectivity between new planting area and any
preserved areas of medium to high ecological value
within the Site or any areas of medium to high
indicative ecological value adjacent to the Site
(supported by a habitat map of adjacent area) [2].
3.1.2. Physical interconnectivity refers to contiguous

planting areas less than 2m wide apart, without
broken by occasional footpaths, installations or other
features wider than 2m.
3.1.3. Demonstrate the total connected area is more than

5% of the total Site area.
3.2. Increased diversity and complexity of planting
3.2.1. Provide planting plans and demonstrate plant

species type, characteristics of the species chosen
(tree/ shrub/ herb/ climber), nativeness (native/
exotic), quantity and location.
3.2.2. Demonstrate the planting scheme incorporated ALL

elements below:
a. Chosen diverse plant species. Reference to

10;20-30 rule for planting [3].
b. Increase complexity of vegetation structure and

provide habitats for wildlife by mixing vegetation
with varied heights [4].
c. Use >50% native or adaptive species.

3.3. Wildlife-friendly building features
3.3.1. Demonstrate features on design drawings that reduce
bird collision:
a. Design that avoid bird collision on windows (e.g.
use pattern on glass/ façade/ shades, translucent
glass) [5].
2 Sustainable Development Unit, Environment Bureau, HKSAR. 2009. Terrestrial Habitat Mapping and Ranking Based on
Conservation Value.
3 Development Bureau, HKSAR, 2018 Street Tree Selection Guide “Chapter 9 – Complementary Vegetation Community Mix”
4 Development Bureau, HKSAR, 2018 Street Tree Selection Guide “Chapter 9 – Complementary Vegetation Community Mix”
5 Sheppard, C. 2011. Bird-Friendly Building Design. American Bird Conservancy, The Plains, VA. USA

b. Design essential outdoor lighting only and adopt

measures to minimise impacts of outdoor
lighting to wildlife (e.g. use narrow-spectrum light
bulbs to lower the range of species affected by
light; use light sources that emit minimal UV light
and avoid the white and blue wavelengths; use
shields to minimise light spill) [6].
4. The biodiversity enhancement report should be endorsed by a

qualified landscape architect or ecologist. Alternative measures
proposed other than those listed for compliance is acceptable
with justification.
Submittals (a) Reduction of Ecological Impact

SS_07a_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template for
 
SS 7a
SS_07a_01 Evidence such as site survey photo or aerial
photo of the site condition before  #
development
SS_07a_02 Habitat mapping report (Site) with scaled
and dimensioned drawings and
photographic records of the existing site  #
conditions for habitat types identified in the
Site (if SS 7a is applicable)
SS_07a_03 Ecological impact assessment report on
interconnectivity with adjacent areas of  #
ecological value if (if SS 7a is applicable)
SS_07a_04 Detailed tree survey of all the trees on Site  #

(for additional BONUS only)
SS_07a_05 Landscape layout plans, sections showing
 #
the retained trees (for additional BONUS
only)
SS_07a_06 Summary and calculations to demonstrate
the girth of retained trees shall be at least
 #
20% (or 40%) of the total girth of all existing
trees on site (for additional BONUS only)
# The supporting documents are not required in FA if the credit/ additional
BONUS credit(s) is/are achieved in PA
6 Gunnell, K. et al. 2013. Designing for Biodiversity: A Technical Guide for New and Existing Buildings. Second Edition. RIBA
Publishing, London. UK.

indicated on leftmost column.
SS_07b_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template for SS
 
7b
SS_07b_01 Habitat mapping report (Adjacent Area)
with scaled and dimensioned drawings and
photographic records of the existing  #
conditions for habitat types identified in the
areas adjacent to the Site
SS_07b_02 Biodiversity-friendly landscape
 #
maintenance Manual (if SS 7b is
applicable)
SS_07b_03 Biodiversity enhancement report (if SS 7b is  #
applicable)
SS_07b_04 CV of the professional as per requirements
in the assessment (if SS 7b is applicable)  #
# The supporting documents are not required in FA if the BONUS credit(s)
is/are achieved in PA

Development Bureau HKSAR Government, ‘A Comprehensive Street
Tree Management Plan for Hong Kong’, Annex IV: Encouraging
Biodiversity in the Urban Landscape through Planting Appropriate
Tree Species in Hong Kong.
Development Bureau. Greening, Landscape and Tree Management

Office (GLMTS) 2010, Guiding principles on use of native plant
species in public works projects.
Beck T, Principles of ecological landscape design. Island Press,

Washington, Covelo, London.
MacArthur R.H. and Wilson E.O., The theory of island biogeography,

Princeton University Press, New Jersey, USA.
(b) Related Credits

The related prerequisite requires minimum site coverage of greenery
and minimum provisions for viability of planting, for example, the
minimum soil volumes and depths for all plant areas.

The related credit encourages the shading of main pedestrian paths
by trees. The soil space of trees shall meet the minimum standards
stipulated in SA P1.

The related credit encourages higher overall site coverage of
greenery.


site.
The related credit considers softscape provided with the site for
infiltration and detention in stormwater management.


occupants.

3 Sustainable Site 3.3 Bioclimatic Design

Objective Encourage building design to adopt measures to mitigate urban heat island
effect.
Credits Attainable For Site area < 1000m2: 1

For Site area ≥ 1000m2: 4 + 2 additional BONUS + 4 BONUS
Credit Requirement For Site area <1000m2

(a) Urban Design Guidelines Chapter 11
1 credit for implementing at least 2 site level strategies under Section
11 of Hong Kong Planning Standards and Guidelines Chapter 11 Urban
Design Guidelines.
For Site area ≥ 1000m2

(a) Sustainable Building Design Measures
(1) 1 credit for providing shade on at least 5% of the site area and at
least 50% of non-roof impervious surfaces on the site (parking,
walkways, plazas) using light coloured high-albedo materials
(albedo of at least 0.4).
(2) 1 credit for demonstrating compliance with prescribed

requirements of the SBD Guidelines as promulgated in the PNAP
APP-152.
(3) 1 additional BONUS credit for demonstrating compliance with

prescribed requirements of the SBD Guidelines as promulgated in
the PNAP APP-152 with enhanced performances.
(b) Tree Coverage

2 BONUS credits for demonstrating that at least 10% of the total Site
Area is provided with tree coverage.
For exemplary performance, 1 additional BONUS credit where 20% or

more of the site is provided with tree coverage.

For conducting an AVA by wind tunnel or Computer Fluid Dynamics
(CFD) according to the prevailing AVA methodology introduced by the
Government demonstrating that better or equivalent ventilation
performances than a baseline case:
1 Credit for demonstrating annual wind condition.
1 Credit for demonstrating summer wind condition.

2 BONUS credits for conducting an Intra Urban Heat Island Study
demonstrating that a maximum Intra-Urban Heat Index (difference
between Turban and Tmet) in summer is less than 0.8 °C.

Assessment For Site area <1000m2

(a) Urban Design Guidelines Chapter 11
1. Demonstrate the site planning comply with 2 strategies under
Section 11 of Hong Kong Planning Standards and Guidelines
Chapter 11 Urban Design Guidelines with:
2. Mark up on layout plan for the implemented strategies
3. Description on the implemented strategies
For Site area ≥ 1000m2

(a) Sustainable Building Design Measures
1. Non-roof Impervious Surfaces Requirements
Demonstrate that shade is provided on at least 5% of the site
area and at least 50% of non-roof impervious surfaces on the
site (parking, walkways, plazas) using light coloured high-
albedo materials (albedo of at least 0.4). (Podium roof no
matter whether it is accessible or not will not be counted as
non-roof surfaces).
2. Sustainable Building Design (SBD) Guidelines

Requirements
Provide evidence in the form of scaled drawings and
calculations to demonstrate compliance with relevant
prescriptive requirements of the SBD Guidelines on site
coverage of greenery as promulgated in the PNAP APP-152
[1].
Provide a summary of overall site coverage of greenery
(method of measurement and calculation of site coverage of
greenery except otherwise stated below shall be in accordance
with Buildings Department PNAP APP-152):
2.1 Covered greenery areas above the primary zone (measured

from 45o projected line taken from the edge of building) in
communal areas accessible to public, occupiers or visitors
shall be counted (50% reduction factor applies).
2.2 Planters along the perimeter of an inaccessible roof above

the primary zone but within 15m vertical zone from
communal areas accessible to public, occupiers or visitors
shall be counted (50% reduction factor applies).
2.3 Vertical greening within 15m vertical zone from communal

areas accessible to public, occupiers or visitors shall be
counted (no reduction factor applies but vertical frames with
a height more than 7.5m are not accountable for vertical
greening provided by climbing or weeping plants).
2.4 Roof materials with Solar Reflectance Index (SRI) of 78 or

above is acceptable as an alternative to vegetated roof. A
combination of both vegetated roof and roof using materials
with Solar Reflectance Index (SRI) of 78 or above is also
acceptable.
1 Buildings Department - PNAP APP-152 Sustainable Building Design Guidelines

3. Enhanced Performances of Sustainable Building Design

Guidelines
Further to requirements stated in SS 8a (2), provide evidence

demonstrate compliance with the followings:
3.1 Sustainable Soft Landscape Requirements

Provide the landscape plans for the site and detail the
landscape treatment of the development including the
planting and hard finishes of all landscaped areas, slopes
and retaining structures, showing:
a) Planting plans with the character and planting

densities for all softworks elements;
b) Tree planting locations;
c) Details of the species;
d) Live load calculation of roof (if planting is provided
on the roof), and
e) Maintenance plan for the greenery.
3.2 Demonstrate how soft landscaping has addressed the

guidelines and recommendations provided in the Hong
Kong Planning Standards and Guidelines Chapter 4
Section 2 Greenery, appropriate to the type and scale of
the building development and the immediate
surroundings.
3.3 Demonstrate that at least 50% of the plant species used

for trees, shrubs and grass/ ground covers respectively in
terms of quantities are drought-tolerant to minimise
watering requirements.
3.4 Demonstrate that the species, density and topsoil comply

with the General Specification for Building Section 25:
Landscape, or equivalent.
3.5 Minimum Permeability:

Minimum P of buildings in each assessment zone on two
Height projection planes
(H) of Site area Site area
the < 20,000m2 < 20,000m2 Site area
tallest and and ≥ 20,000m2
building with Lp < 60m with Lp ≥ 60m
Each Plane Each Plane Plane 1 Plane 2
H ≤ 60m 20% 25% 25% 30%
H > 60m 20% 25% 25% 40%
3.6 Minimum Site Coverage of Greenery:

Site Coverage of Greenery
Site Area
Primary zone Overall
< 20,000 m2 12.5% 30%
≥ 20,000 m2 17.5% 40%

(b) Tree Coverage

1. Submit plan drawing or calculation for tree coverage showing the
estimated crown spread 10 years after the landscape installation:
2. Tree coverage is defined as the combined plan area under all tree
canopies, projected perpendicularly onto the ground/ floor
surface, within the Site, where tree canopies are drawn at their
estimated spread 10 years after the landscape installation.
3. Evidence for tree diameters prediction shall be provided with

reference to examples of existing trees of that species planted in
similar conditions in Hong Kong. In order not to overestimate
tree crown diameter, the largest dimension permitted in the
calculation shall be 12m in diameter for large wide spreading
trees.
4. EVA shall be excluded from the total site are for the purpose of
tree coverage calculation.

1. Between site velocity ratio (SVR) or local velocity ratio (LVR),
show that one of these two ratios increases or remain the same
in the optimal option compared to the base case, while the other
ratio is not reduced.
2. The annual wind rose (wind probability table) at 400 – 600m of

the site should be used. The annual or summer prevailing wind
used in the simulation should have an accumulated percentage
occurrence of 75% (accumulation starts in the order from the
highest occurrence to the lowest). The baseline scheme should
meet Design Requirements (1) and (2) of Building Separation
under the SBD Guidelines.
3. Demonstrate credit compliance by following one of the below

routes:
Compliance Route 1: CFD Simulation

4. Submit an air ventilation assessment report. The report shall also
include simulation assumptions and screen capture of project
building, surrounding building and terrain of the 3D model.
5. The site velocity ratio (SVR) and local velocity ratio (LVR) of all
test points should be reported.
6. The modelling methodology should adopt prevailing AVA

methodology introduced by the government [2], unless specified
below.
7. A software validation report from the software developer should

be provided to ensure the accuracy of simulation by the software.
8. The below requirements should be fulfilled in the CFD simulation:

8.1 Surrounding buildings and terrain shall be included in the
model based on the GIS information from Lands
Department, the Government of HKSAR.
2 Technical Circular No.1/06 Annex A - Technical Guide for Air Ventilation Assessment for Developments in Hong Kong, HPLB &
ETWB, the Government of HKSAR

8.2 The surrounding area shall be at least, 2H (H being the

building height (m) of the tallest building on the project site)
or 200m away from the project site boundary, whichever is
larger
8.3 The terrain area shall be in a size of at least, 10H (H being

the building height (m) of the tallest building on the project
site) or 1000m × 1000m, whichever is larger, with the
project placed in the centre.
8.4 For practical reasons, the geometry can be simplified to

block.
9. Wind data, such as wind frequency, wind rose, wind profile should
be adopted from the appropriate and reliable sources, such as
simulated site wind data based on appropriate mathematical
models, such as RAMS from the Planning Department (PlanD) [3]
or experimental site wind data from wind tunnel test.
10. If wind profile is not provided from the above sources, applicant
can refine the ground roughness and model the wind profile using
power law or log law for each wind direction, based on:
α
Uz Zz u∗ Z
Power Law � � = � � Log Law Uz = ln � �
Ug Zg σ Z0
Uz Wind speed at height z from ground

Ug Wind speed at reference height (top of wind boundary layer)
Zz Height z from ground
Zg Reference height (top of the wind boundary layer)
α Power law exponent
σ Von Karman constant = 0.4
Z0 Roughness length
u* Friction velocity
Z Height z from ground, same as Zz in power law
Terrain crossed by
Α Zg Z0
approaching wind
Sea and open space ≈ 0.15 ≈ 300 ≈ 0.1
Suburban or mid-rise ≈ 0.35 ≈ 400 ≈ 1
City centre or high-rise ≈ 0.50 ≈ 500 ≈ 3
11. These coefficients serve as reference only [4]. Applicants should

justify the suitability of coefficients for the project.
12. Detailed Study shall be carried out if it is required under the

Technical Circular No. 1/06 of Housing, Planning and Lands
Bureau (HPLB) and Environment, Transport and Works Bureau
(ETWB). For the Detailed Study, wind from all 16 directions and
their probability of occurrences must be accounted for, and wind
profiles(s) obtained from wind tunnel experiments should be used
to conduct the study, and when calculating the Wind Velocity Ratio.
3 RAMS wind data. [ONLINE]. Available at: http://www.pland.gov.hk/pland_en/info_serv/site_wind/site_wind/index.html. [Accessed

April 2021].
4 Feasibility Study for Establishment of Air Ventilation Assessment System Final Report, Department of Architecture, Chinese
University of Hong Kong, Nov 2005

13. The simulation report should be endorsed by a locally qualified

professional with 3 years of relevant experience in CFD
simulation.
Compliance Route 2: Wind Tunnel Test

14. Demonstrate compliance by submitting a wind tunnel test report.
15. The technical standards pertaining to the execution of the current

boundary layer wind tunnel studies conform to the guidelines
outlined within the Hong Kong Wind Loading Code and are fully
in-line with the guidelines of the Air Ventilation Assessment
Technical Circular No. 1/06 for developments in Hong Kong.
16. The wind tunnel facilities should comply with the requirements of
internationally recognised guides such as the guidelines of the
American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) Manual of Practice
No.67 for Wind Tunnel Studies and the Quality Assurance
Manual, AWES-QAM-1-2001 by the Australasian Wind
Engineering Society (AWES).
17. The wind profile can be created by the Power Law or the Log
Law with appropriate coefficients.
18. Detailed Study shall be carried out if it is required under the

Technical Circular No. 1/06 of Housing, Planning and Lands
Bureau (HPLB) and Environment, Transport and Works Bureau
(ETWB). For the Detailed Study, wind from all 16 directions and
their probability of occurrences must be accounted for, and wind
profiles(s) obtained from wind tunnel experiments should be used
to conduct the study, and when calculating the Wind Velocity
Ratio.
Test Point Locations and Focus Areas for Both Routes

19. The assessment area shall be at least, 1H (H being the building
height (m) of the tallest building on the project site) or 100m
away from the project site boundary, whichever is larger.
20. Test point shall be placed 2m above pedestrian level within the
assessment area.
21. Perimeter test points are positioned on the project site
boundary. Typically about 30 perimeter test points well-spaced
out and located will suffice.
22. Overall test points are evenly distributed and positioned in the
open spaces, on the streets where pedestrians frequently
access. For areas that are not open to the public can be
exempted. For practical reasons, around 50 test points may be
adequate for typical development sites.

1. Provide an Intra-urban Heat Island Study report demonstrating
that a maximum Intra-Urban Heat Index (difference between Turban
and Tmet) in summer is less than 0.8 °C through Urban Heat
Island Intensity calculation.
2. Temperature calculation shall be carried out for 10 consecutive

days, the 10th day temperature profile between 08:00 to 18:00
hours shall be used for current assessment.

3. The calculation should use the maximum temperature difference

of Turban and Tmet between 08:00 to 18:00 hours to represent
the Intra Urban Heat Index for the Site, where
Intra Urban Heat Index = Max[ T(t)urban -T(t)met ] < 0.8
T(t)urban = Predicted urban air temperature at the Site
T(t)met = Meteorological air temperature
4. In the report, provide a brief summary of the adopted methodology

to calculate the Intra-Urban Heat Index.
5. Assess an individual Intra-Urban Heat Index within the Site and

report under appropriate area breakdown with the maximum area
of 10 ha.
6. The Intra-Urban Heat Island effect of a project is the contribution

to the energy balance at a certain time, which can be quantified
by Intra-Urban Heat Index. The Intra-Urban Heat Index here
shall be defined by the maximum temperature difference of
T(t)urban and T(t)met in the corresponding hour between 08:00
to 18:00 hours on a typical summer day. The detailed calculation
methodology shall refer to relevant literature [5,6,7 and 8].
7. In order to capture Intra-Urban Heat Island effect of the Project

precisely, the proposed methodology shall address the air
temperature changes due to the Intra-Urban Heat Island Effect.
8. The report shall contain detailed considerations of all the factors

listed below:
8.1 Radiation heat gain/ loss from/ to the environment;
8.1.1 Direct and diffused solar radiation on surface;
8.1.2 Shading effect from buildings/ trees;
8.1.3 Radiant heat loss from urban fabric to the

surrounding; and
8.1.4 Effect of Absorptivity/ Emissivity of surfaces;
8.2 Thermal storage effect of urban fabric;
8.2.1 Thermal capacity in participating ground layer,

building and tree surface etc.;
8.3 Wind environment;
8.3.1 Convective heat transfer within urban cluster;
8.3.2 Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) technique shall

be used to assess the ventilation of the Project (refer
to section below);
5 Santamouris M. 2001, ‘On the impact of urban climate on the energy consumption of buildings’, Solar Energy, vol. 70, pp. 201-
216.
6 Oke TR. 1988, ‘The urban energy balance’, Progress in Physical Geography, vol.12, pp. 471-508.
7 Shashua-Bar, L. Hoffman, M. E. 2002, ‘The Green CTTC model for predicting the air temperature in small urban wooded sites’,
Building and Environment, vol. 37, pp. 1279 –1288.
8 Elnahas, M. M., Willimanson, T. J. 1997, ‘An improvement of the CTTC model for predicting urban air temperatures’, Energy and
Building, vol. 25, pp. 41–49.

8.4 Evaporative heat transfer;
8.4.1 Greenery evapotranspiration;
8.4.2 Evaporative heat transfer from water features; and
8.4.3 Evaporative heat transfer from ground surface.
9. Calculation of T(t)met shall refer to reference environmental

condition detailed in “Reference Environmental Conditions for
Intra-Urban Heat Index Calculation” table.
10. The Applicant should use reference environmental condition in

“Reference Environmental Conditions for Intra-Urban Heat Index
Calculation” table except near ground wind velocity on Project
Site to calculate T(t)urban.
11. In order to calculate T(t)urban, the wind environment of the Project

shall be derived from Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) using
wind tunnel data or RAMS data as stipulated in Air Ventilation
Assessment (AVA) Technical Circular and Technical Guide [9].
12. Reference Environmental Conditions [10] for Intra-Urban Heat

Index Calculation
Near
Ground
Global Diffuse
Wind
Air Relative Horizontal Horizontal
Velocity
Temperature, Humidity Irradiance Irradiance,
Hours at the
Ta , RH , GHI DHI
Weather
(°C) (%) (W/m2) (W/m2)
Station
, (m/s)
1 28.5 83 0 0 0.5
2 28.3 84 0 0 0.4
3 28.1 85 0 0 0.4
4 28.0 85 0 0 0.4
5 27.8 86 0 0 0.4
6 27.7 87 0 0 0.4
7 27.8 86 0 0 0.4
8 28.1 84 154 93 0.4
9 28.5 82 298 161 0.6
10 29.0 79 449 216 0.7
11 29.8 76 573 259 0.8
12 30.3 74 622 272 0.8
13 30.7 73 638 285 0.9
14 30.9 72 602 287 0.9
15 31.0 72 525 254 0.9
16 31.0 72 429 210 0.8
17 30.5 73 290 154 0.7
9 Housing, Planning and Lands Bureau, and Environment, Transport and Works Bureau 2006, Technical Circular No. 1/06: Air
Ventilation Assessments. [ONLINE]. Available at: https://www.devb.gov.hk/filemanager/en/content_679/hplb-etwb-tc-01-06.pdf
10 Hong Kong Observatory (Averaged data from 2009 to 2013)

18 29.9 75 141 89 0.7

19 29.5 77 0 0 0.6
20 29.3 78 0 0 0.6
21 29.1 80 0 0 0.5
22 29.0 80 0 0 0.5
23 28.9 81 0 0 0.5
24 28.7 82 0 0 0.5
13. The Intra-urban Heat Island Study report should be endorsed by

a locally qualified professional with 3 years of relevant experience
in urban heat island study.
Submittals (a) Sustainable Building Design Measures
SS_08a_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template for  

SS 8a
For SS 8a with site area < 1000 m2, please provide the PA FA
followings:
SS_08a_01 Narrative and layout plan with markup to

demonstrate the site planning comply with  #
the strategies under Section 11 of HKPSG
For SS 8a(1) with site area ≥ 1000 m2, please provide the PA FA
followings:
SS_08a_02 Scale drawings and calculations to

demonstrate compliance with the
 
relevant prescriptive requirements of the
light coloured high-albedo materials on
non-roof impervious surfaces.
SS_08a_03 Material catalogues/test reports showing - 

albedo values of the surface materials.
SS_08a_04 A schedule of external materials, their
 
proposed finishes treatments, and albedo
requirements of the materials.
SS_08a_05 Tender specifications on the albedo  -

requirements of the materials
For SS 8a(2)& (3), please provide the followings: PA FA
SS_08a_06 Scaled drawings and calculations to

demonstrate compliance with relevant  
prescriptive requirements of the SBD
Guidelines

For SS 8a(2), please provide the followings: PA FA
SS_08a_07 Tender specifications on the SRI

requirement of the roof materials (if  -
applicable)
SS_08a_08 Material catalogues/ test reports showing

SRI values of the roof materials (if - 
applicable)
For SS 8a(3), please provide the followings: PA FA
SS_08a_09 Landscape plans, sections, planting

schedules and extracts of relevant
supporting documents showing soft
landscape layout, plan density, topsoil of  
all planted areas for trees, shrubs and
grass/groundcover and demonstrating
the use of drought-tolerant plant species
SS_08a_10 Live load calculation of roof (if planting is

provided on the roof)  
SS_08a_11 Maintenance plan of the greenery - 
SS_08a_12 Dated photos of the as-built soft landscape

works - 
# For SS 8a for project with site area < 1000 m2, the supporting document
is not required in FA if the credit is achieved in PA
(b) Tree Coverage
SS_08b_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template for  

SS 8b
SS_08b_01 Landscape plans, sections, planting
supporting documents showing the soft  
landscape layout of all planted areas for
trees
SS_08b_02 Summary for the total and breakdowns of

tree coverage areas and evidence for tree  
diameters prediction
SS_08b_03 Live load calculation of roof (if tree  

planting is provided on the roof)
SS_08b_04 Maintenance plan of the trees - 
SS_08b_05 Dated photos of the as-built soft

landscape works - 

SS_08c_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template for  

SS 8c
For Compliance Route 1, please provide the followings: PA FA
SS_08c_01 Air Ventilation Assessment Report  #
SS_08c_02 Validation Report of the simulation  #

software
SS_08c_03 CV of the professional as described in  #

credit requirement
SS_08c_04 Wind Tunnel Test Report  #

#The supporting documents are not required in FA if the credit(s) is/are
achieved in PA
SS_08d_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template for SS
 
8d
SS_08d_01 Intra-urban Heat Island Study report  #
SS_08d_02 CV of the professional as per  #

requirements in the assessment
SS_08d_03 Landscape plans, sections planting

supporting documents showing soft  #
landscape layout of all planted areas for
trees
SS_08d_04 Summary for the total and breakdowns of

tree coverage areas and evidence for tree  #
diameters prediction
SS_08d_05 Validation Report of the simulation software  #
SS_08d_06 Dated photos of the as-built soft landscape

- 
works
# The supporting documents are not required in FA if the BONUS credits
are achieved in PA


Hong Kong Herbarium on Hong Kong plant species. [ONLINE]. Available
at:
http://www.herbarium.gov.hk/Search_Form.aspx. [Accessed April 2021].
Planning Standards and Guidelines Chapter 4 Section 2 Greenery.

General Specification for Building Section 25: Landscape.
Buildings Department- PNAP APP-152 Sustainable Building Design
Guidelines
(b) Related Credits


The related credit encourages the shading of main pedestrian paths by
trees. The soil space of trees shall meet the minimum standards
The related credit encourages strategies to preserve and/ or enhance


occupants.

3 Sustainable Site 3.3 Bioclimatic design
Objective Ensure the wind environment around and adjacent to buildings has been
adequately considered regarding wind amplification and, where
appropriate, suitable mitigation measures are provided.
Credit Requirement 1 credit for demonstrating that no pedestrian areas will be subject to
excessive wind velocities caused by amplification due to the site layout
design and/ or building design.
Assessment 1. Demonstrate that no test point reported exceeds a frequency

weighted wind speed of 4m/s for the annual prevailing wind condition
unless it is demonstrated that the excess of 4m/s is not caused by the
proposed building.
2. The annual wind rose (wind probability table) at 400 – 600m of the site
should be used. The annual prevailing wind used in the simulation
should have an accumulated percentage occurrence of over 75%
(accumulation starts in the order from the highest occurrence to the
lowest).
3. Demonstrate credit compliance by following one of the below routes:
Compliance Route 1: CFD Simulation

4. Submit a wind environment report. The report shall also include
simulation assumptions and screen captures of the project building,
surrounding buildings and terrain of the 3D model.
5. A software validation report from the software developer should be

provided to ensure the accuracy of simulation by the software.
6. The below requirements should be fulfilled in the CFD simulation:
6.1 Surrounding buildings and terrain shall be included in the model

based on the GIS information from Lands Department, the
Government of HKSAR.
6.2 The surrounding area shall be at least, 2H (H being the building

height (m) of the tallest building on the project site) or 200m away
from the project site boundary, whichever is larger.
6.3 The terrain area shall be in a size of at least, 10H (H being the
1000m × 1000m, whichever is larger, with the project placed in
the centre.
6.4 For practical reasons, the geometry can be simplified to blocks.
7. Wind data, such as wind frequency, wind rose, wind profile should be
adopted from appropriate and reliable sources, such as simulated site
wind data based on appropriate mathematical models (e.g. RAMS

from Planning Department, the Government of HKSAR [ 1 ]) or

experimental site wind data from wind tunnel test.
8. If the wind profile is not provided from the above sources, applicant
can refine the ground roughness and model the wind profile using
power law or log law for each wind direction, based on:
α
Uz Zz u∗ Z
Power Law � � = � � Log Law Uz = ln � �
Ug Zg σ Z0
Uz Wind speed at height z from ground

Ug Wind speed at reference height (top of wind boundary layer)
Zz Height z from ground
Zg Reference height (top of the wind boundary layer)
α Power law exponent
σ Von Karman constant = 0.4
Z0 Roughness length
u* Friction velocity
Z Height z from ground, same as Zz in power law
Terrain crossed by
α Zg Z0
approaching wind
Sea and open space ≈ 0.15 ≈ 300 ≈ 0.1
Suburban or mid-rise ≈ 0.35 ≈ 400 ≈1
City centre or high-rise ≈ 0.50 ≈ 500 ≈3
9. These coefficients serve as reference only [2]. Applicants should

justify the suitability of coefficients for the project.
10. Detailed Study shall be carried out if it is required under the Technical
Circular No. 1/06 of Housing, Planning and Lands Bureau (HPLB) and
Environment, Transport and Works Bureau (ETWB). For the
Detailed Study, wind from all 16 directions and their probability of
occurrences must be accounted for, and wind profiles(s) obtained
from wind tunnel experiments should be used to conduct the study,
and when calculating the Wind Velocity Ratio.
11. The simulation report should be endorsed by a locally qualified

professional with 3 years of relevant experience in CFD simulation.
Compliance Route 2: Wind Tunnel Test

12. Demonstrate compliance by submitting a wind tunnel test report.
13. The technical standards pertaining to the execution of the current

boundary layer wind tunnel studies conform to the guidelines outlined
within the Hong Kong Wind Loading Code and are fully in-line with the
guidelines of the Air Ventilation Assessment Technical Circular No.
1/06 for developments in Hong Kong.
14. The wind tunnel facilities should comply with the requirements of
internationally recognised guides such as the guidelines of the
American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) Manual of Practice No.67
for Wind Tunnel Studies and the Quality Assurance Manual, AWES-
QAM-1-2001 by the Australasian Wind Engineering Society (AWES).
1 RAMS wind data. [ONLINE]. Available at: http://www.pland.gov.hk/pland_en/info_serv/site_wind/site_wind/index.html.

2 Feasibility Study for Establishment of Air Ventilation Assessment System Final Report, Department of Architecture, Chinese
University of Hong Kong, Nov 2005
15. The wind profile can be created by the Power Law or the Log Law with
appropriate coefficients.
16. Detailed Study shall be carried out if it is required under the Technical
Circular No. 1/06 of Housing, Planning and Lands Bureau (HPLB) and
Environment, Transport and Works Bureau (ETWB). For the Detailed
Study, wind from all 16 directions and their probability of occurrences
must be accounted for, and wind profiles(s) obtained from wind tunnel
experiments should be used to conduct the study, and when
calculating the Wind Velocity Ratio.
Test Point Locations for Both Routes

17. The assessment area shall be at least, 1H (H being the building height
(m) of the tallest building on the project site) or 100m away from the
project site boundary, whichever is larger.
18. Test points shall be placed 2m above pedestrian level within the
assessment area.
19. Perimeter test points are positioned on the project site boundary.
Typically, about 30 perimeter test points which are well-spaced out
and well located will suffice.
20. Overall test points are evenly distributed and positioned in the open
spaces, on the streets where pedestrians frequently access. For
areas that are not open to the public can be exempted. For practical
reasons, around 50 test points may be adequate for typical
development sites.
21. Additional test points shall be placed in outdoor recreational areas,

open spaces and pedestrian paths within the project site.
Submittals

SS 9
SS_09_01 Wind Environment Report  #
SS_09_02 Validation Report of the simulation  #

software
SS_09_03 CV of the professional as per  #

SS_09_04 Wind Tunnel Test Report  #
#The supporting documents are not required in FA if the credit is
achieved in PA

None
(b) Related Credits

None

3 Sustainable Site 3.3 Bioclimatic Design
Objective Ensure adequate thermal comfort of outdoor environment within the Site
Credit Requirement (a) Shaded or Covered Routes

1 credit is awarded where at least one shaded or covered route,
connecting the site with nearby amenities/ site main entrance/
transport hub.
(b) Passive Open Spaces with Thermal Comfort

1 credit is awarded where 50% or more of the passive open spaces
and pedestrian zones achieve thermal comfort. This is demonstrated
on a typical summer day at 3:00 pm in Hong Kong.
Assessment (a) Shaded or Covered Routes

1. Demonstrate at least one pedestrian route within the site from a
notional building entry point to neighbourhood amenities/ site
main entrance/ transport hub with shade or cover. The provision
of shade or cover is confined to the site boundary.
2. The shape of shade or cover can be justified by daylight

simulation software considering building self-shading and
shading by exterior buildings and trees at the summer solstice at
9:00 am and 3:00 pm in Hong Kong.

1. This credit applies to passive open space(s) [ 1 ] and pedestrian
zone(s) within the Site Area. A pedestrian zone includes covered,
but not enclosed areas such as covered walkways and covered sitting
areas.
2. Submit an outdoor thermal comfort report demonstrating anticipated

thermal comfort. The report should include the following:
2.1 Scale drawing(s) depicting the building disposition; and

2.2 Input data, picture of the 3D model, simulation assumptions
3. Relevant input data should be justified by applicants.
4. The report should be endorsed by a locally qualified professional who

has 3 years of relevant experience in outdoor thermal comfort study.
5. The assessment should be based on the following approaches:
5.1 All passive open spaces and pedestrian routes, hereafter

referred to as the Focus Areas, within the Site should be included
1 Planning Department – Hong Kong Planning Standards and Guidelines Chapter 4 : Recreation, Open Space and Greening

in the assessment. A demarcation plan of the Focus Areas

should be provided in the report
5.2 The climatic conditions of a typical summer day should make

reference to the environmental conditions in Table “Reference
Environmental Conditions” below, which are based on a 5-year
average from 2009 to 2013
5.3 A brief summary of the selected thermal comfort calculation

methodology, together with the selected method’s recommended
thermal comfort range, should be clearly stated in the report
6. Reference Environmental Conditions [2]
Global Direct Diffuse

Horizontal Normal Horizontal Air Relative
Time Irradiance, Irradiance, Irradiance, Temp., Humidity
GHI DNI DHI Ta (oC) , RH (%)
(W/m2) (W/m2) (W/m2)
3PM 525 340 254 31.0 72
7. Demonstrate credit compliance by following one of the below routes:

Compliance Route 1: Thermal Sensation Index (TSI)
TSI [3] can be established using the following formula:
TSI = 1.7 + 0.118 × Ta + 0.0019 × SR - 0.322 × WS - 0.0073 ×
RH + 0.0054 × ST
Where,
Ta = air temperature (°C)
SR = horizontal solar radiation (W/m2)
WS = wind speed (m/s)
RH = relatively humidity (%)
ST = surrounding ground surface temperature (°C)
TSI should be based on the following:
(i) Refer to reference environmental conditions shown in Table
above, which outlines solar irradiation, air temperature, and
relatively humidity to assess outdoor thermal comfort;
(ii) Surrounding ground surface temperature (ST) of Air

Temperature plus 3°C, (i.e. Ta + 3°C) should be used in the TSI
equation.
(iii) Wind environment of the Site shall use Computational Fluid

Dynamics (CFD) technique to assess air velocity (m/s) of the
Project. The methodology of using CFD in outdoor urban scale
studies shall refer to Air Ventilation Assessment (AVA) Technical
Circular and Technical Guide [4];
2 Hong Kong Observatory (Averaged data from 2009 to 2013)

3 Givoni, B., M. Noguchi, H. Saaroni,O, Pocher, Y., Yaacov, N. Feller and S. Becker 2003, Outdoor comfort research issues, Energy
and Buildings vol. 33, pp. 77-86.
4 Housing, Planning and Lands Bureau, and Environment, Transport and Works Bureau 2006, Technical Circular No. 1/06: air
ventilation assessments

(iv) Thermal comfort assessment shall consider the effect of shading

from immediate surroundings, for example, trees, shading
devices, self-shading from buildings; and
(v) The calculations should be based on an area breakdown in the

range between 1m2 and 100m2.
Where it is demonstrated that 50% or more of the passive open

spaces and pedestrian zones, in terms of area, have achieved
thermally acceptable range on a typical summer day at 3:00 pm, the
credit will be awarded.
TSI Thermal Sensation

1 Cold
Too Cold
2 Slightly Cold
3 Acceptably Cool
Thermally Acceptable
4 Neutral
Range
5 Acceptably Warm
6 Slightly Hot
Too Hot
7 Hot
Compliance Route 2: Physiological Equivalent Temperature (PET)

PET [5] should be used to assess the outdoor thermal comfort. Mean
radiant temperature, Tr (Air Temperature plus 3°C, (i.e. Ta + 3°C) shall
be used.
Thermal Perception Thermal Range of

Perceptions Thermal
Classification (TPC) Comfort
for Subtropical
Region
Very Cold < 14
Cold ≥ 14 to < 18 Too Cold
Cool ≥ 18 to < 22
Slightly Cool ≥ 22 to < 36
Neutral ≥ 26 to < 30 Thermally

Acceptable
Slightly Warm ≥ 30 to < 34 Range
Warm ≥ 34 to < 38
Hot ≥ 38 to < 42 Too Hot
Very Hot ≥ 42
Where it is demonstrated that 50% or more of the passive open

spaces and pedestrian zones, in terms of area, have achieved the
range of thermal comfort on a typical summer day at 3:00 pm, the
credit will be awarded.
5 Hoppe, P. 1999, ‘The physiological equivalent temperature—A universal index for the biometeorological assessment of the
thermal environment’, International Journal of Biometeorology, vol. 43, pp. 71–75.

8. Alternative Route
8.1 The study may elect any widely accepted methodology to
demonstrate that the thermal comfort is in accordance with the
credit requirement.
8.2 Should any method other than the Thermal Sensation Index (TSI)
or Thermal Physiological Equivalent Temperature (PET) be
chosen to demonstrate thermal comfort in outdoor spaces (e.g. or
equivalent indicator/ index for thermal comfort level),

supplementary information on methodology, calculation and/ or
simulation results should be supplied. The onus is placed on the
Applicant to demonstrate the appropriateness of the chosen
methodology and relevant precedent(s) where the selected
methodology was used and accepted by professionals in the field.
Submittals (a) Shaded or Covered Routes
SS_10a_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template  

for SS 10a
SS_10a_01 Site plan highlighting at least one  #
shaded or covered pedestrian route
SS_10a_02 Schematics of shades or cover  #
SS_10a_03 Daylight simulation results to justify  #

shape of shades/cover (if applicable)
achieved in PA
SS_10b_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template

 
for SS 10b
SS_10b_01 Outdoor thermal comfort report  #
SS_10b_02 CV of professional as described in  #

credit requirement
achieved in PA

None
(b) Related Credits

None

3 Sustainable Site 3.4 Climate Resilience and Adaptability
Objective Encourage a high standard of stormwater management to reduce risk of

flooding and promote groundwater recharge.
Credit Requirement 2 credit for demonstrating that adequate stormwater management design
measures have been provided to cater the total volume of runoff for one hour
corresponding to a design rainfall of at least 30mm/event for the site in its
post-developed conditions.
1 additional BONUS credit for demonstrating that adequate stormwater

management measures have been provided to cater the total volume of
runoff corresponding to a design rainfall of at least 40mm/event for the site
in its post-developed conditions.
Assessment 1. Calculate the stormwater detention storage volume on site required to

cater the total volume of runoff for one hour using the following formula:
V = 10 x H x ∑ᵩ x A / 10000
V: Stormwater storage volume on site required (in m3)
H: Rainfall intensity (30mm or 40mm for the credit/ bonus respectively)
per event
ᵩ: Runoff coefficients of various surfaces/ substrates (please refer to the
following table)
A: Areas of various surfaces/ substrates (in m2)
Surfaces/ substrates Runoff

coefficients
Water bodies 1
Flat roof/ road/ hardscape with impervious 0.85

construction
Flat roof covered with pebbles 0.65
Green roof (soil depth of at least 300mm) 0.35
Earth-covered (soil depth not more than 500mm) 0.35

basement
Pervious paving and construction (maximum slope 0.25

of porous pavement surface to a gradient of 1:20;
the minimum permeability coefficient under 15℃ for

permeable paving / construction should be 1.0 x 10-

2 cm/s)
At-grade softscape 0.15
Earth-covered (soil depth more than 500mm) 0.15

basement
Note:
1) The above information has made reference to the design guides
for stormwater management/runoff control GB50014 and
DB11/685 of PRC.
2) Alternative runoff coefficients may be proposed and justified by

the Applicant which is subject to approval.
2. Calculate the volume of various designed stormwater management

facilities such as detention tanks, sunken plaza/ wet ponds/ reservoirs,
bioretention facilities, rainwater storage cisterns/ modules, etc.
3. Demonstrate adequate stormwater management measures to meet the

credit requirements have been provided by a stormwater management
report with a summary of volume/ area calculations, layout drawings
and typical construction details/ sections of infiltration measures.
4. Stormwater detention volume will be discharged either by gravity or

pumping.
5. It is required to empty the tank within a day to ensure the detention

volume is daily available for potential storm event.
6. Stormwater in detention volume will be discharge after 1 hour of

rainstorm.
7. For any detention facility with discharge mechanisms, control system is

required for discharging the stormwater in order to maintain the daily
designed detention volume.
8. Handover the facilities with operation and maintenance checklist as

stated in Appendix 9 – 9.5
Submittals

SS 11
SS_11_01 Report for stormwater management
with a summary of volume/ area
calculations, layout drawings and typical  
construction details/sections of
infiltration measures

SS_11_02 Catalogue and test report of surfaces/

substrates (if alternative runoff  
coefficients are used)

Sponge City Construction Technical Guide by Ministry of Housing and
Urban-Rural Development of PRC
Technical Guide for On-site Stormwater Detention Tank Systems.

https://www.pub.gov.sg/Documents/detentionTank.pdf. [Accessed April
2021].
Pervious Pavement. [ONLINE]. Available at:

http://www.asphaltpavement.org/index.php. [Accessed April 2021].
Water Permeable Brick (JCT 945 – 2005)
(b) Related Credits


The related credit encourages the shading of main pedestrian paths by
trees. The soil space of trees shall meet the minimum standards
The related credit encourages preservation/enhancement of existing
habitat within the site.

site.
WU 8 Water Harvesting and Recycling

The related credit considers harvesting of rainwater provided within the
site. Stormwater collected under SS11 could only be discharged

occupants.

3 Sustainable Site 3.4 Climate Resilience and Adaptability
SS 12 Design for Climate Change Adaptation
Objective Encourage reviewing the impact of the projected climate change scenarios
on the development and consider strategies to improve climate resilience.
Credits Attainable 1 BONUS + 1 additional BONUS
Credit Requirement 1 BONUS credit for studying the projected variation in temperature and
rainfall and water level rise/ storm surge of adjacent water bodies due to
climate change and its impact on the development and prepare mitigation
proposal to improve the climate resilience of the building.
1 additional BONUS credit for including quantitative calculation to support

the resilience design which is technically eligible and cost effective.
Assessment 1. Refer to the projected annual rainfall and changes in annual

temperature under the medium-low scenario (mean value) [1] and
water level rise/ storm surge of adjacent water bodies, suggest 3
negative issues caused by the projected variations which will have
impacts on the building such as its structure, facade, outdoor area or
building services system.
2. Prepare a climate resilience proposal including at least 1 strategy for

each of the above-mentioned negative issue. The strategies should
be supported by preliminary design description and expected
outcome on resolving the respective negative issue. If necessary,
assume a building life cycle of 50-years to outline the possible
benefits. No simulations are required for the first BONUS credit.
Additional BONUS is granted if applicant demonstrated that the
design is cost effective.
3. Note that no obligation is required to implement the proposal.
4. Relevant measures that have been implemented in the design in other

credits may be included to demonstrate compliance for this credit.
Climate Resilience proposal should include a minimum of 10 A4

pages with sections below:
1. Description of project annual climate change

2. Impact Identification
3. Proposal of the Climate Resilience Strategies
4. Effectiveness of the proposed strategies
5. Cost effectiveness (for additional BONUS)
1 Hong Kong Observatory - Climate Projections for Hong Kong. [ONLINE]. Available at:
https://www.hko.gov.hk/en/climate_change/future_climate.htm. [Accessed April 2021].

Submittals
SS_12_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template for SS  

12
SS_12_01 Climate resilience proposal  #
#The supporting documents are not required in FA if the BONUS /
additional BONUS credit(s) is/are achieved in PA

GovHK – Global Environment Climate Change. [ONLINE]. Available
at: http://www.gov.hk/en/residents/environment/global/climate.htm.
Environment Bureau - Hong Kong Climate Change Report 2015.
http://www.enb.gov.hk/sites/default/files/pdf/ClimateChangeEng.pdf.
EPD – Climate Change. [ONLINE]. Available at:
http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/climate_change/. [Accessed April
2021].
Hong Kong Observatory - Climate Projections for Hong Kong.
https://www.hko.gov.hk/en/climate_change/future_climate.htm.
(b) Related Credits

None

BEAM Plus New Buildings Version 2.0 Materials and Waste - MW
4 Materials and Waste 4.P Prerequisite

4.1 Use of Materials
4.2 Selection of Materials
4.3 Waste Reduction
Introduction In construction, operations, maintenance and fitting-out of buildings;

environmentally-sustainable natural resources should be used as materials
to a significant extent. Practical considerations should include extracted
raw materials, emissions and embodied energy. There are opportunities to
reduce environmental impacts through improved design, choice of
materials, and installation methods. The following are of concern:
• Pollutants arising from manufacturing, transportation and operation;
and
• Waste generated and recycled
There are opportunities to reduce the use of materials through modular
designs allowing off-site prefabrication, lean construction methods, etc.;
and to reduce waste from a life cycle perspective, including provisions of
appropriately designed waste facilities for waste recycling/ recovery/ reuse.
4.P Prerequisite MW P1 Minimum Waste Handling Facilities
Background This part sets out the minimum requirement for materials aspects in terms
of the provision of waste handling facilities.
4.1 Use of Materials MW 1 Building Re-use

MW 2 Modular and Standardised Design
MW 3 Prefabrication
MW 4 Design for Durability and Resilience
Background Efficiency in the use of materials can be significantly improved through

reuse of building elements, such as foundations, main structures, facades,
etc. Flexibility in design allows for change in the use of layout of the
premises within a building development. High standards of design detailing
permit off-site prefabrication of major building components allows for
deconstruction, and improves durability and longevity of buildings.
4.2 Selection of MW 5 Sustainable Forest Products

Materials MW 6 Recycled Materials
MW 7 Ozone Depleting Substances
MW 8 Regional Materials
MW 9 Use of Green Products
MW 10 Life Cycle Assessment
Background The selection of materials that are environmentally sustainable, have

significant recycled content, or otherwise have relatively low environmental
impacts and result in lower embodied energy, should be considered at the
earliest stages of planning and design of building developments, and
carried over to the fitting-out and subsequent redecoration.
4.3 Waste Reduction MW 11 Adaptability and Deconstruction

MW 12 Enhanced Waste Handling Facilities
Background Designs which enable users to modify the premise layout conveniently and
allow for dismantling during demolition can reduce resources consumption
and waste generation significantly.
Well-managed facilities for the recycling of solid waste encourage recycling
and result in reductions in the disposal at landfill sites. Buildings should be
designed with the provision of facilities for effective on-site sorting,
collection, and recycling/ reusing of waste.

BEAM Plus New Buildings Version 2.0 Materials and Waste - MW P1
4 Materials and 4.P Prerequisite

Waste
MW P1 Minimum Waste Handling Facilities
Extent of Application All buildings except one-single family domestic building with not more than
3 floors, or domestic part of a composite building for one single family with
not more than 3 floors, or a building not normally occupied or for transient
stay (e.g. pump house, sewage treatment plant, carpark building).
Objective Reduce waste generation at source, reduce pressure on landfill sites and
help to preserve non-renewable resources by promoting recycling of waste
materials
Credit Requirement Prerequisite achieved for meeting the minimum provisions of waste recycle
facilities for the collection, sorting, storage, recycling (recovered material)
and disposal (waste).
Assessment The assessment shall take into account how a system of waste collection,
storage, sorting, recycling and disposal can be managed for the buildings,
with consideration given to the adequacy of space provisions on individual
floors, within the building as a whole, and at local/ estate level. There
should be opportunities for the management of different waste types, such as
organic, non- recyclable and recyclable waste. Easy access to the facilities
shall be provided for cleaning staff, contractors, building users and waste
recycling and collection companies.
(a) Recycle & Waste Management Strategy Plan

1. Provide proposal to:
1.1 Identify and estimate the quantities of expected waste streams

(organic, recyclable and non-recyclable) of the development;
1.2 Demonstrate adequate numbers of general refuse bin(s) and in

particular, recycling bin(s) provided to cater for the general
waste and recyclables generated from the development as per
the waste steam calculation mentioned in 1.1;
1.3 Demonstrate compliance with the space requirement of waste

recycling facilities (for waste storage, sorting and recycling),
including sufficient size to cope with the numbers of general
refuse bins and recycling bins as listed in (b);
1.4 Elaborate the storage for recycling of, as a minimum, materials

listed in (c); and
1.5 Demonstrate management plan, accessibility and hygiene. It

includes the outlines of how the municipal solid waste disposal
rate can be reduced by the waste management hierarchy -
prevention, reuse, recycling, recovery and disposal; what is the
collection and separation methodology of waste and
recyclables; and how the building users dispose refuses and
recyclables and janitorial staffs collect and deliver to refuse
storage and material recovery chambers (RS&MRC) & Refuse
Chutes.

(b) Waste Recycling Facilities

1. Refuse storage and material recovery chambers (RS&MRC) Provision
Demonstrate RS&MRC of adequate size to cope with the waste
generated. Prescribed space requirements are listed below:
Overall floor space of RS&MRC#

Residential/ For UFS ≥1,320m2, 1m2 per 347m2 UFS
Domestic
For UFS<1,320m2, please refer to point 3
below.
Hotel 1m2 per 347m2 UFS
Retail/ For 3,960m2 ≤ UFS <39,600m2, 2m2 per 925m2
Commercial/ UFS
Clubhouse
For UFS ≥39,600m2, 1m2 per 925m2 UFS +
43m2
For UFS < 3,960m2, please refer to point 3
below
Non-residential/ For 3,960m2 ≤ UFS <39,600m2, 1m2 per
Non-domestic 925m2 UFS
buildings other For UFS < 3,960m2, please refer to point 3
than Retail/ below
Commercial/
Clubhouse
Remarks:
• UFS = Usable Floor Area
• The provision of Refuse Storage & Material Recovery
Chamber (RS&MRC) is required under “Schedule” in
B(RS&MRC&RC)R.
• RS&MRR shall not be included in the RS&MRC space
requirement calculation. Additional areas of waste and
recycling facilities provided in addition to the statutorily
required RS&MRR can be counted.
• # Point 3 under Part (b) applies
2. Refuse storage and material recovery room (RS&MRR) Provision
i. The provision of refuse storage and material recovery room

(RS&MRR) on every floor of a domestic building or the domestic
part of a composite building is required under Reg.3A in
B(RS&MRC&RC)R.
ii. For a domestic building or composite building on a site of an area

of not more than 250m² (i.e. ≤ 250m²), the provision of a
RS&MRR on every domestic floor shall be exempted
iii. For domestic building or composite building on a site of an area

>250m2 and ≤500m2, please refer to item 3 below.
3. Except for the building types mentioned in the Extent of Application of

this prerequisite, other building not required to provide RS&MRC and/
or domestic building not required to provide RS&MRR by Building
Regulations including those buildings referred to in (b) 1 and (b) 2 (iii)
above, should provide an alternative proposal on the provision of
waste recycling facilities. Details on the estimated waste streams and

quantities from the building to justify its location and the adequate size
of such provision shall be submitted. Management plan, accessibility,
hygiene and fire protection factors shall also be taken into
consideration. All submissions regarding the alternative proposal of the
waste recycling facilities shall also demonstrate compliance with the
requirements as indicated below:
a. General waste bins and recycling bins shall be provided;
b. Observe relevant government regulations such as fire and
hygiene regulations; and
c. Observe the size and location of the provided waste and recycling
bins shall not obstruct any means of escape
4. For cluster of low-rise domestic houses where the RS&MRC is

located at a walking distance of longer than 60m from the farthest
house, intermediate waste recycling facility (IWF) shall be provided
within 60m walking distance from each house unit. General waste
bins and recycling bins should be provided at the IWF, which should
be weatherproof with sufficient size, placed at a safe location and
comply with relevant government regulations.
5. Mechanical ventilation and air purifying facilities for every RS&MRC is

statutorily-required under Reg.12A of B(RS&MRC&RC)R. In addition,
odour control measure shall be considered at MRR in accordance with
PNAP APP-35. Correspondent assessment is under HWB 5.
(c) Minimum Types of Recyclables to be Collected

1. Metal
2. Plastics
3. Paper/ Cardboard, and
4. Glass
Submittals
MW_P1_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template for  

MW P1
MW_P1_01 Recycle & Waste Management Strategy  
Plan
MW_P1_02 Drawings showing the locations of the  

waste handling facilities
MW_P1_03 Calculation showing the adequacy of the
space requirement for the waste handling  
facilities
MW_P1_04 Alternative proposal on the provision of

waste recycling facilities (if applicable)  
MW_P1_05 Master layout plan or extract of relevant

page(s) from the GBP to substantiate the
 
exemption from the requirements of this
prerequisite

MW_P1_06 Purchase orders or undertaking letter from

the project owner to substantiate the
provision of general refuse bins and - 
recycling bins
Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered

Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineer. PNAP No.
APP-35 on requirements for Refuse Storage and Material Recovery
Chambers, Material Recovery Chambers.
Environmental Protection Department. Waste Data & Statistics. [ONLINE].

Available at:
http://www.wastereduction.gov.hk/en/assistancewizard/waste_red_sat.htm
. [Accessed April 2021].
(b) Related Credits

This credit encourages enhanced provisions for recyclables collection,
recycling facilities and waste treatment equipment.
HWB 5 Waste Odour Control

This credit addresses the hygiene aspects of waste disposal.

BEAM Plus New Buildings Version 2.0 Materials and Waste - MW 1
4 Materials and Waste 4.1 Use of Materials
MW 1 Building Re-use
Objective Encourage the reuse of major elements of existing building structures, to

reduce demolition waste, conserve resources and reduce environmental
impacts during construction.
Credit Requirement Compliance Method 1

1 BONUS credit for the reuse of 20% or more (by mass or volume) of
existing structures (sub-structure and superstructure).
2 BONUS credits for the reuse of 40% or more (by mass or volume) of
existing structures (sub-structure and superstructure).
For exemplary performance, 1 additional BONUS credit for the reuse of 90%
or more (by mass or volume) of existing structures (sub-structure and
superstructure).
Alternatively,
Compliance Method 2
1 BONUS credit for the reuse of 25% or more (by surface area) of
superstructure elements (including at least floor, roof decking) & enclosure
materials (including at least skin, framing).
2 BONUS credits for the reuse of 50% or more (by surface area) of
superstructure elements (including at least floor, roof decking) & enclosure
materials (including at least skin, framing).
For exemplary performance, 1 additional BONUS credit for the reuse of 90%
or more (by surface area) of superstructure elements (including at least
floor, roof decking) & enclosure materials (including at least skin, framing).
Assessment Compliance Method 1

1. Provide all of the following supporting documents:
1.1 Outline the extent of reused major building elements from the
existing building;
1.2 Include calculations with details of pre and post construction,
drawings, and supporting documentation; and
1.3 Demonstrate that the quantity (by mass or volume) of the retained
and reused portions of the major building elements from the
existing building sub-structure and superstructure, as a
percentage of the quantity (by mass or volume) of the major
building elements in the new building sub-structure and
superstructure. Credits will be awarded where the prescribed
percentage is achieved.
2. Existing major building elements to be reused include:

1.4 Sub-structure (including foundation)
1.5 Superstructure

1.6 Enclosure materials (excluding windows, doors and similar

assemblies)
Compliance Method 2
1.1 Outline the extent of reused major superstructure elements and
enclosure materials from the existing building;
1.2 Include calculations with details of pre and post construction,

drawings, and supporting documentation; and
1.3 Demonstrate that the quantity (by surface area) of the retained
and reused portions of the major superstructure elements and
enclosure materials from the existing building, as a percentage of
the quantity (by surface area) of the major superstructure elements
and enclosure materials in the new building. Credits will be
awarded where the prescribed percentage is achieved.
2. Existing major superstructure elements and enclosure materials to be

reused include:
2.1 Floor,
2.2 Roof decking,
2.3 Skin and framing (exclude windows, doors and similar
assemblies)
Submittals
MW_01_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template for

 
MW 1
For Compliance Method 1, please provide the followings: PA FA
MW_01_01 Pre and post construction details,

structural drawings that demonstrate the  
re-use of the sub-structure and
superstructure
MW_01_02 Calculation showing the percentage of

sub- structure and superstructure being  
reused
For Compliance Method 2, please provide the followings: PA FA
MW_01_03 Report summarizing the extent of

reused major superstructure elements
and enclosure materials from existing  -
building, with structural drawings that
support the extent.
Report summarizing the extent of

reused major superstructure elements
and enclosure materials from existing
building, with pre and post construction
- 
information & structural drawings that
demonstrate the re-use of the
superstructure elements & enclosure
materials
MW_01_04 Calculation showing the percentage of  

superstructure elements & enclosure
materials

None
(b) Related Credits
None

MW 2 Modular and Standardised Design
Extent of Application All buildings except for single one-storey buildings with total floor areas not
exceeding 230m2
Objective Encourage the increased use of modular and standardised components in

building design in order to enhance buildability and to reduce waste.
Credit Requirement 1 credit for designing modular elements which contributed at least 50% (by
mass, volume, dollar value or surface area) of the major elements and
modules in the project.
For exemplary performance, 1 additional BONUS credit for designing

modular elements which contributed 90% or more (by mass, volume, dollar
value or surface area) of the major elements and modules in the project.
Assessment 1. Provide all of the following supporting documents:

1.1 Specifications to demonstrate the extent of application of modular
and standardised design of the major elements and modules;
1.2 Drawings or information to highlight the extent of application of

modular and standardised design of the major elements and
modules; and
1.3 Demonstration of the percentage of major elements and modules

that are prescribed modular and standardised design elements
and modules.
2. The unit may be mass/ volume/ dollar value/ surface area but shall be
consistent throughout the assessment of this credit. For surface area,
only the exposed surface area shall be considered in the calculation
and the inner area shall be excluded.
3. Extent of modular and standardised design checklist:
Structural elements Structural beam system

Concrete slab
Concrete flooring
Facade elements External wall

Cladding unit
Bay window (for residential buildings)
Utility platform/ balcony (for residential
buildings)
Architectural/ internal Internal partition/ wall panels

building elements Door sets
Staircases


MW_02_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template
 
for MW 2
MW_02_01 Specifications that demonstrate the
extent of application of modular or  -
standardised design
MW_02_02 Drawings or information that

demonstrate modular or standardised  
design
MW_02_03 Calculation on modular and

 
standardised design [Appendix A]
MW_02_04 Extract of relevant page(s) from the

GBP showing the building(s) is/are
single one-storey building(s) with total
floor areas not exceeding 230m2  
(substantiation for non-applicability
only)
International Standard Organization. ISO 1006 Building construction –

Modular coordination – Basic module (1983) and ISO 2848 Building
Construction – Modular coordination – Principles and rules (1984)
recommend that modular components shall be designed to have size
of a multiple or subdivision of the basic module.
British Standards Institution. British Standard BS 6750. Specification

for Modular coordination in building (1986) provides background on
the requirements for modular coordination.
Development Bureau. Standardised Components and Practices gives

guidance on accessing and locating standardised components and
modular components that have been successfully used in
construction, and finding out the standardised practices, including
standard designs, construction methods, and techniques adopted in
the construction industry. This contains a standardisation database of
hyperlinks which promotes the wider use of standardised and modular
components in local construction, with the public sector taking the
lead. [ONLINE]. Available at:
http://www.devb.gov.hk/en/publications_and_press_releases/publica
tions/standardised_components_and_practices/index.html.
(b) Related Credits
None

4 Materials and 4.1 Use of Materials

Waste
MW 3 Prefabrication
Extent of All buildings

Application
Objective Encourage prefabrication of building elements in order to reduce wastage of

materials and quantities of on-site waste.
Credit Requirement (a) Structural Elements
1 credit when 10% of structural elements has been prefabricated off-

site.
1 additional BONUS credit when 20% of the structural elements have

been prefabricated off-site.
Alternatively,
(b) Façade Elements
1 credit when 10% of facade elements has been prefabricated off-

site.
1 additional BONUS credit when 20% of facade elements have been

Alternatively,
(c) Architectural/ Internal Building Elements
1 credit when 10% of architectural/ internal building elements have been

1 additional BONUS credit when 20% of architectural/ internal building

elements has been prefabricated off-site.
1 additional BONUS credit for compliance with the requirements listed in above
sub-item (a), (b) and (c), i.e. 10% or more of structural façade and
architectural/ internal building elements have been prefabricated off-site.
For exemplary performance, 1 additional BONUS credit when 50% or more

of the elements in sub-item (a) or (b) or (c) has been prefabricated off-site.
Assessment (a) Structural Elements (pre-cast concrete) Checklist
Residential Commercial Educational Other Building

Buildings Buildings Buildings Types
⦁Slabs ⦁Slabs ⦁Slabs ⦁Slabs
⦁Staircases ⦁Staircases ⦁Staircases ⦁Staircases
Remarks: Additional or alternative items may be proposed at discretion

of the applicant.

(b) Facade Elements (pre-cast concrete) Checklist

⦁Façade ⦁Façade ⦁Façade ⦁Façade
⦁Sun-shading ⦁Sun-shading ⦁Sun-shading ⦁Sun-shading

fins fins fins fins
⦁Balcony/
utility platform
Remarks:
- Additional or alternative items may be proposed at the discretion of
the applicant.
- Curtain wall/ windows shall be excluded from the assessment
(c) Architectural/ Internal Building Elements (pre-cast concrete)

Checklist

⦁Partition walls ⦁Partition walls ⦁Partition walls ⦁Partition walls
⦁Balustrades/ ⦁Balustrades/ ⦁Balustrades/ ⦁Balustrades/

parapets parapets parapets parapets
Remarks: Additional or alternative items may be proposed at the

discretion of the applicant.
1. To avoid long-distance transportation, the manufacturing factory shall

be located within an 800km radius of the HKSAR by road
transportation; within a 1,600km radius by rail transportation; or within
a 4,000km radius by sea transportation. Travel distances within the
HKSAR are ignored in calculation for simplification. Credit compliance
to be demonstrated through the submission of contract specifications,
drawings and other supporting documents that the quantities (by mass
or volume, consistent throughout the assessment of the credit) of those
building elements prefabricated off-site are in accordance with the
Code of Practice for Pre-cast Concrete Construction 2016 [1].
2. The assessment shall take into account the number and quantities of
building elements in the building development that was prefabricated
off-site and credits will be awarded where the assessment criteria
have been met. Only off-site prefabricated portion (by mass or volume)
to be counted in semi-prefab components for quality control and
reduction of on-site waste.
1 Buildings Department. Code of Practice for Pre-cast Concrete Construction 2016. [ONLINE]. Available at:
https://www.bd.gov.hk/doc/en/resources/codes-and-references/code-and-design-manuals/cppcc2016e.pdf. [Accessed April
2021].

Submittals
MW_03_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template
for MW 3  
MW_03_01 Calculation Sheet on Prefabricated  

Building Elements [Appendix A]
with endorsement from the
contractor(s) - 
MW_03_02 Specifications that demonstrate the

extent of application of prefabrication
 -
MW_03_03 Structural drawings that demonstrate  

the adoption of the prefabrication
MW_03_04 Map showing the distance between
the manufacturing factory and the site - 
None
(b) Related Credits
Prefabricated building elements are manufactured locally so as to reduce
the environmental impacts arising from transportation.

MW 4 Design for Durability and Resilience
Objective Encourage material selection and adequate protection of exposed building

elements to minimise the frequency of replacement and maximise materials
optimisation.
Credits Attainable 1 + 2 BONUS
Credit Requirement (a) Building Material Selection Appraisal

1 credit for appraisal report demonstrating a proactive approach to
evaluate the durability of the building materials with at least 3 of the
relevant listed items.
(b) Protecting Vulnerable Parts of the Building from Damage

1 BONUS credit for providing suitable protective measures, or
designed features or solutions to prevent damage to vulnerable parts.
(c) Protecting Exposed Parts of the Building from Material

Degradation
1 BONUS credit for incorporating appropriate design and specification
measures to limit material degradation due to environmental factors.
Assessment (a) Building Components Selection Appraisal

1. Conduct an appraisal report demonstrating a proactive approach to
explain the details in building material selection with suitable
durability that minimises the necessary refurbishment or renewal and
prevents excessive material use.
2. The report should cover at least 3 items of the following:

2.1 Timber doorsets (fire rated doors)
2.2 Panel wall for partitions
2.3 Cement products (for architectural uses)
2.4 Tile adhesives
2.5 Ceramic tiles (floor tiles and wall tiles)
2.6 Aluminium windows
2.7 Heat soaked tempered glass
2.8 Drainage uPVC pipe and fittings
2.9 Other items may be proposed at discretion of the applicant
3. The building material shall be certified to a specified product

certification scheme by a certification body with accreditation of Hong
Kong Accreditation Service (HKAS) and issued with an accredited
certificate bearing a Hong Kong Certification Body Accreditation
Scheme (HKCAS) accreditation symbol or a statement on the
certificate.
Alternatively,

4. The building material shall be compared with at least one alternative

material in terms of the anticipated service life. Service life refers to the
expected period of life which ends when the material or equipment
breaks down or loses its required physical functions.

1. Provide suitable protective measures, or designed features or
solutions to prevent damage to vulnerable parts of the internal and
external building and landscaping elements. This must include at
least 2 items from the following:
1.1 Protection from the impacts of high pedestrian traffic in main

entrances, public areas and thoroughfares (corridors, lifts,
stairs, doors)
1.2 Protection against any internal vehicular or trolley movement

within 1m of the internal building fabric in storage, delivery,
corridor and kitchen areas
1.3 Protection against, or prevention from, any potential vehicular

collision where vehicular parking and manoeuvring occurs within
1m of the external building façade for all car parking areas and
within 2m for all delivery areas.

Degradation
1. Conduct an appraisal report demonstrating a proactive approach to

explain the design measures to protect the exposed parts of the
building from material degradation due to environmental factors.
The report should cover at least 2 applicable building elements
from the following, with the applicable environmental factors and
material degradation effects.
Applicable Building Elements

• Foundation, substructure, lowest floor, retaining walls
• External walls
• Roof or balconies
• Glazing: windows, skylight
• External doors
• Railings or balustrades (where exposed to the external
environment)
• Cladding (where exposed to the external environment)
• Staircases or ramps (where exposed to the external
environment)
• Hard landscaping
Environmental Factors
• Environmental agents, including:
- Solar radiation
- Temperature variation
- Water or moisture
- Wind
- Rain

• Extreme weather conditions, including:

- High wind speeds
- Flooding
- Driving rain
• Biological agents, including:
- Vegetation
- Pests, insects
• Pollutants, including:
- Air contaminants
- Ground contaminants.
Material Degradation Effects
• Corrosion
• Dimensional change, e.g. swelling or shrinkage
• Fading or discolouration
• Rotting
• Leaching
• Blistering
• Abrasion
Remarks: Additional or alternative items may be proposed at the
discretion of the applicant.
Submittals (a) Building Component Selection Appraisal
MW_04a_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template for  
MW 4a
MW_04a_01 Appraisal report on selection of the
building material
- 
MW_04a_02 Tender documents (e.g. specifications)

specifying the use of building materials
 -
MW_04a_03 Drawings showing the provisions  
MW_04a_04 Certificates, catalogues or information to

demonstrate the quality assurance or the
- 
service life of the building materials
compared with alternative materials
MW_04b_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template for  
MW 4b
MW_04b_01 Appraisal report on protection measures - 
MW_04b_02 Tender documents (e.g. specifications)

specifying the protection measures  -
MW_04b_03 Drawings showing the vulnerable areas or  

parts of the building


Degradation
MW_04c_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template for
 
MW 4c
MW_04c_01 Drawings confirming the applicable  

elements
MW_04c_02 Report showing the applicable building

elements, environmental factors and
material degradation effects which are - 
considered relevant and protection
measures
MW_04c_03 Tender documents (e.g. specifications)

specifying the projection measures  -

Hong Kong Council for Testing and Certification – Local Product
Certification Schemes for Construction Materials [ONLINE]. Available
at:
https://www.hkctc.gov.hk/en/tcsector/ba/construction_product_cert.ht
ml. [Accessed April 2021].
Hong Kong Housing Authority - Construction Product Certification

http://www.housingauthority.gov.hk/en/business-
partnerships/resources/construction-product-certification/index.html.
(b) Related Credits

None

4 Materials and Waste 4.2 Selection of Materials
MW 5 Sustainable Forest Products
Extent of Application All buildings, except buildings with an insignificant amount of timber products
being adopted (e.g. all timber products used in the building consists of five
sets of doors only).
Objective Encourage the use of timber from well-managed forests.
Credit Requirement 1 credit for demonstrating at least 30% (for residential development) and 50%
(for non-residential development) of all the timber and composite timber
products used in the project are from sustainable sources/ recycled timber.
For exemplary performance, 1 additional BONUS credit for demonstrating
90% or more of all the timber and composite timber products used in the
project are from sustainable sources/ recycled timber.
Assessment 1. Provide supporting documents quantifying the amount of forest

products used are from sustainable source/ recycled (reused from other
sites) timber, as a percentage of all the timber and composite timber
products used. Timber products or accessories of an insignificant
amount and not forming part of timber doors, flooring, skirting, wall
panels, ceiling systems and built-in furniture can be ignored in the
calculation for simplification. The unit may be mass/ volume/ dollar
value but shall be consistent throughout the assessment of this credit.
2. The timber should conform to the requirement of sustainable forestry

practice guidelines and accredited by recognised organisations, such
as the non-profit Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) [1] or the American
Forest and Paper Association (AFPA) [2] or Programme for the
Endorsement of Forest Certification (PEFC) [3] or “known licensed
sources” [4]. The Client shall demonstrate compliance with the
specification for timber products with the recommended certifications
(e.g. FSC, AFPA, PEFC, or other “known licensed sources”).
3. In PA, provide extracts of tender documents (e.g. specifications)

highlighting the clause specifying the use of sustainable timber.
1 Forest Stewardship Council. [ONLINE]. Available at: http://www.fsc.org/. [Accessed April 2021].
2 American Forest and Paper Association. [ONLINE]. Available at: http://www.afandpa.org/. [Accessed April 2021].
3 Programme for the Endorsement of Forest Certification. [ONLINE]. Available at: https://www.pefc.org/. [Accessed April 2021].
4 Architectural Services Department, General Specifications for Building 2017, Section 13, Carpentry and Joinery.
[ONLINE]. Available at: https://www.archsd.gov.hk/media/publications-publicity/general-specification-for-
building/general_specification_for_building_2017_edition-20191223.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].

4. The reuse of timber or composite timber products from other sites is

acceptable. Transfer notes and site photos records should be kept and
submitted to show the originating old timber source, the quantity and
the date of transfer of the timber products between the despatch work
site and the project site (recipient). The transfer notes should bear the
detailed name and address of the work sites concerned and duly signed
by both the despatch and recipient parties undertaking the transfer (i.e.
site representative / stores officer in managerial position), together with
company chops.
5. In the event the timber products are not purchased from a supplier who
is an "accredited company”, the following basic evidence should be
produced to demonstrate the products:
• conform to sustainable forestry practice guidelines;
• be accredited by recognised organisations; and
• in compliance with the specification set down by the organisation.
Provided that the timber products are sourced from a supplier already
accredited by the Approval Organisations, i.e. FSC, AFPA, PEFC or
other "known licensed sources” according to the respective protocol
(accredited company), and the timber products purchased are issued
with the Certificate under the CoC (Chain of Custody) system, it is
acceptable that the following documents as proof to demonstrate the
timber products as purchased from the timber supplier and used in the
project site are from a sustainable source:
(i) Invoice plus Delivery Note (DN) from the supplier of the timber
products purchased - on the invoice & DN, it should be marked with
the reference Certificate No.; a note which has the effect of
confirming the products in the invoice and delivery note are
certified; the pack no. of the timber products (see the samples on
BSL’s website [5] [6]);
(ii) A copy of the CoC Certificate of the certified timber supplier; AND
(iii) Photographic evidence of the timber products
6. For timber products made from recycled timber, supporting documents

quantifying the timber and composite timber products installed in the
project site such as invoices plus delivery notes should be provided.
Also, certificates (e.g. FSC Recycled) (if any), declaration letter or other
supporting documents should be provided to show the timber and
composite timber products are made from timber recycled by
recognised recyclers.
7. In the case of buildings with an insignificant amount of timber products

being adopted, the material schedule or an undertaking letter from the
Project Owner/ Developer should be provided to substantiate that only
an insignificant amount of timber products is used in the project.
5 BEAM Society Limited. [ONLINE]. Available at:

https://www.beamsociety.org.hk/files/download/20191129_FAQ_MA_Attachment_a1.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].
6 BEAM Society Limited. [ONLINE]. Available at: https://www.beamsociety.org.hk/files/download/20191129_FAQ_MA_Attachment_a2.pdf.

Submittals
MW_05_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template for  

MW 5
MW_05_01 Material schedule
[or]
Undertaking letter from the Project Owner/
Developer confirming that only an
insignificant amount of timber products will  
be used in the project.
(Substantiation for non-applicability only)
MW_05_02 Specifications specifying the use of
sustainable timber  -
MW_05_03 Timber product compliance certificate

(Applicable to Timber and Composite - 
Timber Product Type* [b] and [c] only)
MW_05_04 Invoices plus delivery notes quantifying the

timber and composite timber products
installed in the project site. - 
(Applicable to Timber and Composite
Timber Product Type* [a], [b] and [d] only)
MW_05_05 Chain of Custody Flow Chart [Appendix A]

(Applicable to Timber and Composite - 
Timber Product Type* [c] only)
MW_05_06 Substantiation to support each step in the

Chain of Custody (CoC) [e.g. invoices,
delivery notes, undertaking letter, etc.] - 
Timber Product Type* [c] only)
MW_05_07 Supporting information showing the timber

and composite timber products are made
from recycled timber. (e.g. certificate of - 
FSC/PEFC Recycled, declaration letter,
etc.)
MW_05_08 Transfer notes showing the transfer of

timber and composite timber products from
other sites to the project site - 
Timber Product Type* [e] only)
MW_05_09 Calculation or other supporting documents

(if any) to substantiate the calculated
weight or volume of timber and composite
timber products, if weight or volume is - 
used in the calculation of quantities of
timber and composite timber products

MW_05_10 Calculation on Sustainable Forest Product

[Appendix B] with the endorsement from - 
the main contractor.
*Timber and Composite Timber Product Types:

[a] Timber and Composite Timber Products NOT from Sustainable
Sources nor Recycled Timber
[b] Sustainable Timber and Composite Timber Products Sourced from
Supplier accredited by the Approval Organisations
[c] Sustainable Timber and Composite Timber Products Sourced from
Supplier who is NOT an accredited company
[d] Timber and Composite Timber Products made from recycled timber.
[e] Timber and Composite Timber Products reused from other project
site(s).
Remark: Photo records of timber products shall be kept and submitted

for assessment upon request.

World Wildlife Fund, Guide to Responsible Purchasing of Forest
Products provides guidelines, templates and implementation measures
to help organisations develop purchasing policies and practices that
help conserve forest resources.
Buildings Department PNAP No. ADV-5 gives guidance for alternatives

to the use of hardwoods in order to reduce the amount of tropical
hardwood timber used in building projects.
(b) Related Credits

IDCM P3 Timber used for Temporary Works
The prerequisite requires no virgin forest products to be used for
temporary works during construction.

MW 6 Recycled Materials
Objective Promote the use of recycled materials in order to reduce the consumption
of virgin resources.
Credit Requirement (a) Outside Surface Works and Structures

1 credit where at least 10% of all materials used for site exterior surface
works, structures and features with recycled content.
Alternatively,
(b) Building Façade and Structural Components

1 credit where at least 10% of all materials used for facade and
structural components are materials with recycled content; OR
the use of Pulverised Fuel Ash (PFA) as a partial cement replacement
in concrete that the PFA content is not less than 25%; OR
the use of Ground Granulated Blast-furnace Slag (GGBS) as a partial
cement replacement in concrete that the GGBS content is not less than
40%.
Alternatively,

1 credit where at least 10% of all materials used for interior non-
structural components are materials with recycled content.
1 additional BONUS credit for compliance with the requirements listed in

sub-item (a), (b) and (c).
For exemplary performance, 1 additional BONUS credit where 50% or more

of all materials used for sub-item (a) or (b) or (c) are materials with recycled
content.
Assessment (a) Outside Surface Works and Structures

1.1 List the materials/ items/ products used that contain recycled
material (minerals, plastics, etc.)
1.2 Demonstration for the target percentage of materials/ items/

products with recycled content as compared to all used for
exterior surfacing works and structures
2. Exterior surfacing works and structures include paths, surfaces

for recreational areas, structures such as seating, playground
features, etc.

3. The unit may be mass/ volume/ dollar value but shall be

consistent throughout the assessment of this credit.
(b) Building Façade and Structural Components

materials

products with recycled content as compared with all used for
facade and structural components

3. Crushed concrete aggregate complying with the quality and

grading requirements of British Standard BS EN 12620 [1] or
similar for use in concrete for foundations. The fills in foundations
and for over-site use of recycled materials should comply with the
requirements of BS 6543 [2] or similar specification.
4. Steel and glass which normally consist of recycled content will not
be considered as materials with recycled content for this credit.

materials

products with recycled content as compared with all
materials used for interior non-structural components.

Submittals
MW 6
MW_06_01 Calculation Sheet on Materials Used  
[Appendix A]
with endorsement from the main contractor - 
1 British Standards Institution. Aggregates for concrete. British Standard BS EN 12620:2002+A1:2008.

2 British Standards Institution. Guide to use of industrial by-products and waste materials in building and civil engineering. British
Standard BS 6543: 1985.

MW_06_02 Specifications specifying the use of

recycled materials  -
MW_06_03 Catalogues or information to demonstrate

that the outside surface works and
structures, building façade and structural
components and/or interior non-structural - 
components are made from recycled
materials
MW_06_04 Drawings that demonstrate the use of
materials for outside surface works and
structures, building façade and structural  
components and/ or interior non-structural
components

A list of Recycled Materials for Construction Industry is available from
the Environmental Protection Department.
Buildings Department PNAP APP-129 on Use of Recycled Aggregates

in Concrete sets out the technical guidelines for using recycled
aggregates in prescribed mixed concrete of specified grade strength of
20P and designed mixed concrete of specified grade strengths of 25D
to 35D.
CIC & HKCI's study on PFA. [ONLINE]. Available at:

http://www.hongkongci.org/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/Better-
Utiilzation-of-Ultimate-Strength-Gain-of-Concrete-with-Pozzolanic-
Materials-for-Sustainable-Development-of-Construction-Works-in-HK-
Ir-Prof.-Albert-K.-H.-Kwan.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].
CEDD study on GGBS. [ONLINE]. Available at:

http://www.devb.gov.hk/filemanager/en/content_763/Part%203%20-
%20H%20D%20Wong%20&%20J%20Y%20W%20Mak.pdf.
British Standards Institution. Aggregates for concrete. British Standard

BS EN 12620:2002+A1:2008
British Standards Institution. Guide to use of industrial by-products and

waste materials in building and civil engineering.
British Standard BS 6543: 1985.
(b) Related Credits

None

MW 7 Ozone Depleting Substances
Objective Reduce the release of harmful ozone-depleting substances into the

atmosphere.
Credit Requirement (a) Refrigerants

1 credit for the use of refrigerants with a value less than or equal to the
threshold of the combined contribution to ozone depletion and global
warming potentials using the specified equation.
(b) Ozone Depleting Materials

1 credit for the use of products in the building fabric and services that
avoid using ozone depleting substances in their manufacture,
composition or use.
Assessment (a) Refrigerants

1. The air-conditioning and refrigeration equipment shall fulfill the
following equation which determines a maximum threshold for the
combined contributions to ozone depletion and global warming
potentials:
LCGWP + LCODP × 105 ≤ 13
LCGWP = [GWPr x (Lr x Life + Mr) x Rc] / Life

LCODP = [ODPr x (Lr x Life + Mr) x Rc] / Life
LCGWP = Lifecycle Global Warming Potential (kg CO2 /kw -Yr)
LCODP = Lifecycle Ozone Depletion Potential (kg CFC 11/kw-Yr)
GWPr = Global Warming Potential of Refrigerant
ODPr = Ozone Depletion Potential of Refrigerant (0 to 0.2 kg
CFC11/kg r)
Lr = Refrigerant Leakage Rate (0.5% to 2.0%; default of 2% unless
otherwise demonstrated)
Mr = End-of-life Refrigerant Loss (2% to 10%; default of 10% unless
otherwise demonstrated)
Rc = Refrigerant Charge
Life = Equipment Life (default based on equipment type as listed in
table below, unless otherwise demonstrated)
Default
Equipment
Equipment Life
Window air-conditioner, heat pump 10 years
Unitary, split, packaged air-conditioner,
15 years
package heat pump
Reciprocating and scroll compressor,
20 years
reciprocating chiller

Absorption chiller 23 years

Water-cooled packaged air-conditioner 24 years
Centrifugal chiller 25 years
2. For systems with different types of equipment, a weighted average of all

the air-conditioning and refrigeration equipment shall be calculated using
the following equation:
[ Σ (LCGWP + LCODP ×105) ×Qunit ] / Qtotal ≤ 13

Qunit = Gross ARI rated cooling capacity of an individual air-
conditioning or refrigeration unit (kW)
Qtotal = Total gross ARI rate cooling capacity of all air- conditioning
or refrigeration (kW)
3. Small air-conditioning units, defined as those containing less than 0.23

kg of refrigerant, and other equipment, such as standard refrigerators,
small water coolers and any other cooling equipment that contains less
than 0.23 kg of refrigerant, can be excluded from this assessment.
4. Provide calculation endorsed by locally qualified professional who has at

least 3 years of post-qualification experience in mechanical/ BS
discipline giving details of the air-conditioning and refrigeration
equipment installed; and demonstrating that the global warming potential
and ozone depletion potential of the refrigerants used in equipment
meets the specified requirement. Reference shall be made to refrigerant
suppliers and/or equipment manufacturer’s data, etc.
1. Provide a full description and specifications of all major thermal

insulation and fire-retardant materials specified in roof
constructions, walls, chilled water pipes, refrigerant pipes,
ductwork, advising the presence or otherwise of ozone depleting
agents.
2. Where there is any doubt as to the ozone depletion potential of a

material or product, details shall be ascertained from the
manufacturer. Credit will be awarded where demonstration of
reasonable effort has been made to avoid the use of products that
have significant ozone depletion potential.
Submittals (a) Refrigerants
MW_07a_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template for  
MW 7a
MW_07a_01 Specifications specifying the use of
refrigerants
 -
MW_07a_02 Endorsed Air-conditioning and

Refrigeration Equipment Worksheet  
[Appendix A]

MW_07a_03 CV of the professional as per the  
MW_07a_04 Equipment schedule of HVAC&R

equipment showing the refrigerants - 
employed
MW_07a_05 Catalogues of HVAC&R equipment

showing the refrigerants employed
- 
MW_07a_06 Catalogues of refrigerants or statement

from manufacturer demonstrating that the - 
products are free from CFC and HCFC
MW_07b_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template for

 
MW 7b with
Ozone Depleting Materials Worksheet
[Form S-A] endorsed by the main - 
contractor
MW_07b_01 Specifications specifying the use of

insulation materials
 -
MW_07b_02 Catalogues of insulation materials or

statement from manufacturer
demonstrating that the products are free - 
from CFC and HCFC

The Montreal Protocol has scheduled the phasing out of controlled
substances, including chemicals containing chlorine and bromine used
as refrigerants, solvents, foam blowing agents, aerosol propellants, fire
suppressants, and for other purposes.
Ozone Layer Protection Ordinance (Cap. 403) gives effect to Hong

Kong’s international obligations to control the manufacture, import and
export of ozone depleting substances.
Ozone Layer Protection (Controlled Refrigerants) Regulation requires the

conservation of controlled refrigerants used in large scale installations
and motor vehicles.
Ozone Layer Protection (Product Containing Scheduled Substances)

(Import Banning) (Amendment) Regulation passed in 2009 extends the
banning of the import of controlled products (including refrigeration and
air-conditioning equipment, aerosol products such as metered dosed
inhalers, insulation panel and pre-polymer) containing
chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs) and halons to those containing other
scheduled substances including hydrochloroflurocarbons (HCFCs) by
phases.
All products containing HCFCs, except dichlorotrifluoroethane (HCFC-

123) have been banned since 1 January 2015. It is targeted to ban all
products containing HCFCs starting from 1 January 2020.

The Amendment Regulation also bans the import of CFC-containing

metered dosed inhalers and fire extinguishers containing HCFCs and
bromochloromethane (BCM) from 1 January 2010.
Given that CFCs and HCFCs have been banned, except HCFC-123,
HFCs offer near-zero ODP but some have comparatively high GWPs.
Refrigerant ODP[1] GWP[1]

Hydrofluorocarbons
HFC-23 ~0 12240
HFC-32 ~0 650
HFC-134a ~0 1320
HFC-152a ~0 140
HFC-402A ~0 1680
HFC-404A ~0 3900
HFC-407C ~0 1700
HFC-410A ~0 1890
HFC-413A ~0 1774
HFC-507A ~0 3900
Hydrochlorofluorocarbons
HCFC-123 0.02 76
[1] – Sources:
i. IPCC Second Assessment Report;
ii. “World Resources Institute (2005), World Business Council for
Sustainable Development”;
iii. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency provides information on

suitable substitutes for ozone depleting substances, including refrigerants
for various types of air-conditioning and refrigeration equipment, fire
suppression, blowing agents, solvents, etc.
CIBSE GN01 outlines the hazards of using these refrigerants and

provides design guidance for refrigeration systems, thermal insulation
and fire protection systems.
ASHRAE Guideline 3-1996. Reducing Emission of Halogenated

Refrigerants in Refrigeration and AS recommends practices and
procedures that will reduce inadvertent release of halogenated
refrigerants. The practices and procedures in this guideline cover
emission reduction of halogenated hydrocarbon and halogenated ether
refrigerants:
(i) from stationary refrigeration, air-conditioning, and heat pump

equipment and systems; and
(ii) during manufacture, installation, testing, operation, maintenance,
and disposal of equipment and systems.
(b) Related Credits

None

Objective Encourage the use of materials originated locally so as to reduce the

environmental impacts arising from transportation.
Credits Attainable 1+ 2 additional BONUS
Credit Requirement 1 credit for the use of regional materials meeting prescribed requirement, which
contributes at least 10% of all building materials used in the project.
1 additional BONUS credit for the use of regional materials meeting prescribed
requirement, which contributes at least 20% of all building materials used in
the project.
For exemplary performance, 1 additional BONUS credit for the use of

regional materials meeting prescribed requirement, which contributes 50% or
above of all building materials used in the project.
Assessment 1. Provide all of the following supporting documents:

1.1 In PA, extracts of tender documents (e.g. specifications) highlighting
the clause specifying the use of regionally manufactured materials;
1.2 List of the materials satisfying the requirements;
1.3 Quantification for the value of materials originated locally in percentage

of the total value of the materials used;
1.4 Supporting documents from the suppliers listing the name of the
manufacturer and the location of the manufacturing plant; and
1.5 Demonstration for the point of raw materials and manufacture within the
prescribed radius of the HKSAR.
2. The unit may be mass/ volume/ dollar value but shall be consistent
throughout the assessment of this credit.
3. Raw materials (constituents) used for making the claimed building materials
shall fulfill the assessment requirements.
4. In-situ concrete, which is unlikely imported outside the region, will not be
considered for this credit. The quantity of in-situ concrete shall be excluded
from the calculation of the total building materials for this credit.
5. Mechanical and electrical systems components are excluded in the

calculation. Plumbing products however may be included at the discretion of
the project team.
6. Reused and salvaged material such as furniture may also be included. The
location from which they were salvaged may be used as the point of
manufacture.
7. The point of raw materials and manufacture shall be located within an 800km
radius of the HKSAR by road transportation; within a 1,600km radius by rail
transportation; or within a 4,000km radius by sea transportation.

The 800km radius should radiate from the default coordinates of HKSAR. For
simplicity, road travel distances within HKSAR are excluded in the
calculation.
Submittals
MW 8 with
Estimated Summary of Regional Materials
from Foundation Works (if any) [Form S-  -
A] and Superstructure Works [Form S-B]
Summary of Regional Materials from

Foundation Works (if any) [Form S-A] and - 
Superstructure works [Form S-B]
endorsed by contractor(s)
MW_08_01 Specifications specifying the use of  -
regionally manufactured materials
MW_08_02 Supporting documents from the suppliers
listing the name of the manufacturer and - 
the location of the manufacturing plant
MW_08_03 Maps showing the point of raw materials

and the manufacture, and the distance - 
from the site

None
(b) Related Credits

None

4 Materials and Waste 4.2 Green Product/ Materials
MW 9 Use of Green Products
Objective Encourage the use of green products that have low environmental impacts.
Credit Requirement (a) Certified Green Products

1 credit for having at least 5% certified green products in one (1) of the
listed categories (outside surface works, building façade and structures,
interior non-structural components, and building services components).
2 credits for having at least 5% certified green products in two (2) of the
listed categories (outside surface works, building façade and structures,
1 additional BONUS credit for having at least 5% of certified green

products under Construction Industry Council (CIC) Green Product
Certification, Carbon Labelling Scheme/ HKGBC Green Product
Accreditation and Standard (HK G-Pass) in one (1) of the listed
categories (outside surface works, building façade and structures,
For exemplary performance, 1 additional BONUS credit for having at least
25% of certified green products under CIC Green Product Certification,
CIC Carbon Labelling Scheme/ HK G-PASS in one (1) of the listed
categories (outside surface works, building façade and structures,
(b) Rapidly Renewable Materials

1 BONUS credit for demonstrating 5% of all building materials/ products
of interior non-structural components in the project are rapidly renewable
materials.
For exemplary performance, 1 additional BONUS credit for demonstrating
25% of all building materials/ products of interior non-structural
components in the project are rapidly renewable materials.
Assessment (a) Certified Green Products

1. Outside Surface Works
1.1 Use of certified green products contributing to at least 5% of
all materials as listed below.
Outside surface i. Pavement Block
works ii. Stone (Natural/ Artificial)
iii. Paint & Coating
iv. Alternative elements proposed by
the applicant.
1.2 Provide all of the following supporting documents:

1.2.1 Demonstrate the percentage calculation (by mass, volume,
exposed finishing surface area or dollar value) of all the
items including certified green products

1.2.2 Include a summary table listing the product type, product

name/ serial no., manufacturer, certification body,
calculation and reference source;
1.2.3 Certificate(s) of the green products;
1.2.4 Record photographs
1.3 For certified green products as specified in CIC Green Product

Certification are deemed to be included in the calculation.
1.4 For any green products, which have been certified under other
internationally recognised schemes, the applicant shall refer to the
list of worldwide recognised Green Building Product Certifications
and Standards under HKGBC’s Eco-Product Directory
(http://epdir.hkgbc.org.hk/textdisplay.php?serial=32) or provide the
product’s technical information with justification for BSL’s
consideration.
2. Building Façade and Structures

2.1 Use of certified green products contributing to at least 5% of all
materials as listed below.
Building Facade i. Cement

and Structures ii. Concrete
iii. Reinforcing bar
iv. Structural steel
v. Extruded aluminum product
vi. Glazing
vii. Alternative elements proposed by
the applicant.

area or dollar value) of all the items including certified green
products

2.2.3 Certificate(s) of the green products; and

consideration.
3. Interior Non-structural Components

3.1 Use of certified green products contributing to at least 5% of any 5
items as listed below.

i. Panel board
Interior Non- ii. Ceramic tile
structural iii. Plant-based fibre composite
Components iv. Furniture
v. Stone (Natural/ Artificial)
vi. Wall covering
vii. Paint & coating
viii. Adhesive & sealant
ix. Block for internal partition
x. Synthetic carpet
xi. Thermal insulation
xii. Alternative elements proposed by
the applicant.

exposed finishing surface area or dollar value) of all the
items including certified green products

name/ serial no., manufacturer, certification body, calculation
and reference source;

consideration.
4. Building Services Components

4.1 Use of certified green products contributing to at least 5% of all
materials under either sub-category (a), (b) or (c) as listed below.
Building (a) Lighting & i. LED lighting

Services electrical ii. CFL
Components installation iii. Electronic ballast
iv. Cable & wire
v. Alternative elements
proposed by the
applicant.
(b) Air- i. Chiller
conditioning ii. VRF split type system
systems iii. AHU
iv. FCU
v. Cooling tower
vi. Alternative elements
proposed by the
applicant.

(c) Plumbing & i. Water pump

drainage ii. Sanitary wares-
ceramic product
iii. Alternative elements
proposed by the
applicant.
4.2 Provide all of the following supporting document:

quantity or dollar value) of all the items including certified
green products

4.3 For certified green products as specified in CIC Sustainable

Product Certification are deemed to be included in the calculation.
list of worldwide recognised Building Product Certifications and
Standards under HKGBC’s Eco-Product Directory
consideration.
5. Rapidly Renewable Materials

5.1 Use of at least 5% of all building materials/ products of interior non-
structural components under the following categories are rapidly
renewable materials, such as bamboo, cork, natural linoleum, soy
bean composite, strawboard, sunflower seed and wheatboard.
Interior Non-structural i. Flooring

Components ii. Panel/ partitions
iii. Cabinetry/ built-in furniture
iv. Insulation
v. Alternative elements proposed by
the applicant.

exposed finishing surface area or dollar’s value) of all the
items including rapidly renewable materials;

name/ serial no., rapidly renewable material content,
manufacturer, calculation and reference source;
5.2.3 Supporting documents of rapidly renewable materials; and
5.3 No material specified shall present a fire hazard when installed.

Submittals (a) Certified Green Products
MW_09a_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template for
 
MW 9a
MW_09a_01 Calculation sheet on materials used for:
Outside Surface Works [Appendix A];

and/or
Building Façade and Structures [Appendix
B]; and/or  
Interior Non-structural Components
[Appendix C]; and/or
Building Services Components [Appendix
D]
with endorsement from the main

contractor
- 
MW_09a_02 Specifications specifying the use of

green products
 -
MW_09a_03 Drawings showing the provision - 
MW_09a_04 Certificate(s) of the green products - 
Remarks: Photo records of installed certified green products shall be kept

and submitted for assessment upon request.
(b) Rapidly Renewable Materials
MW_09b_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template for  

MA 9b
MW_09b_01 Calculation sheet on rapidly renewable

materials used for interior non-structural  
components [Appendix E]
with endorsement from the main

- 
contractor
MW_09b_02 Specifications specifying the rapidly
 -
renewable materials
MW_09b_03 Drawings showing the provision - 
MW_09b_04 Supporting documents of rapidly

- 
renewable materials
Remarks: Photo records of installed rapidly renewable materials shall be
kept and submitted for assessment upon request.


HKGBC’s Eco-Product Directory [ONLINE]. Available at:
http://epdir.hkgbc.org.hk/textdisplay.php?serial=32. [Accessed April
2021].
CIC Green Product Certification [ONLINE]. Available at:

http://cicgpc.hkgbc.org.hk/. [Accessed April 2021].
(b) Related Credits

None

MW 10 Life Cycle Assessment
Objective Encourage the design of structural elements and choice of materials that
results in lower embodied energy
Credit Requirement 1 credit for demonstrating the embodied energy in the major elements of
the building structure of the building has been studied and optimised
through a Life Cycle Assessment (LCA).
Alternatively,
1 credit for demonstrating the embodied carbon in the major elements of

the building structure of the building has been studied and optimised by
using the CIC Carbon Assessment Tool or similar assessment tools.
Assessment 1. Demonstrate the reduced environmental effects by conducting a Life

Cycle Assessment (LCA) on a baseline case, justified by the
applicant, and the proposed case. The LCA should be conducted
during the design stage
2. The LCA should cover only the elements and materials used in the
building foundations, walls, primary and secondary structures and
building facade, and does not include the building services system.
3. The service life of the baseline and proposed cases should be the
same and at least of 50 years. The same software tools and data sets
should be used to evaluate both the baseline building and the
proposed building, and report all the listed impact categories. Data
sets must be compliant with ISO 14044. In lieu to these requirements,
the LCA tool developed by EMSD can also be used.
4. Select at least three of the following impact categories for reduction:

4.1 Global warming potential (greenhouse gases), in CO2e;
4.2 Depletion of the stratospheric ozone layer, in kg CFC-11;
4.3 Acidification of land and water sources, in moles H+ or kg SO2;
4.4 Eutrophication, in kg nitrogen or kg phosphate;
4.5 Formation of tropospheric ozone, in kg NOx or kg ethene; and
4.6 Depletion of non-renewable energy resources, in MJ.
5. Alternatively, demonstrate that the materials used for (a) permanent

works - substructure and (b) permanent works - superstructure have
lower embodied carbon in the proposed case than the baseline case,
with the result of the study generated from the "Design Input" module
of the CIC Carbon Assessment Tool or similar assessment tool.

6. Prepare an LCA/ embodied carbon assessment report, including the

following contents with a minimum of 6 A4 pages:
6.1 Quantity of the building materials

6.2 Assumptions made
6.3 Methodologies
6.4 Screenshots of input parameters
6.5 Results
6.6 Conclusions
Submittals
MW_10_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template  

for MW 10
MW_10_01 LCA report/ Embodied Carbon  #
Assessment Report
# The supporting document is not required in FA if the credit is achieved
in PA

None.
(b) Related Credits

None.

4 Materials and Waste 4.3 Waste Reduction
MW 11 Adaptability and Deconstruction
Objective Encourage the design of building interior elements and building services
components that allow modifications to space layout, and to reduce waste
during churning, refurbishment and deconstruction.
Credits Attainable 1 +1 additional BONUS
Credit Requirement (a) Spatial Adaptability

1 credit for designs providing spatial flexibility that can adapt spaces
for different uses and allows for expansion to permit additional spatial
requirements to be accommodated.
Alternatively,

1 credit for flexible design of services that can adapt to changes of
layout and use.
Alternatively,

1 credit for designs providing flexibility through the use of building
structural systems which allow for change in future use and is
coordinated with interior planning modules.
1 additional BONUS credit for compliance with requirements listed in sub-

items (a), (b) and (c).
Assessment (a) Spatial Adaptability

1. Provide a report presenting evidence as to how and the extent
to which building adaptability and deconstruction is provided.
The report shall include drawings and documents including
building plans and detailed specifications together with
elaboration and justification of specific design strategies that
provide for the intended outcome.
2. Where it can be demonstrated that applicable good practices in

respect of Spatial Adaptability have been adopted whenever
feasible and at least 20% for residential development and 70%
for non-residential development of the listed items in the
checklist could be achieved, the credit shall be awarded.
Other
Residential Commercial
Spatial Adaptability Building
Buildings Buildings
Types
Use of adaptable floor plans,
including large grids that can [●] ● ●
be subdivided, etc.
Spaces designed for a loose
[●] ● ●
fit rather than tight fit;

Inclusion of multifunctional
[●] ● ●
spaces;
Design that allows interior
fitting-out to use modular and [●] ● ●
prefabricated components;
Spaces designed such that
minimum disruption will be
[●] ● ●
caused to occupants due to
physical change;
Easy relocation of partition
walls that causes minimum
● ● ●
damage to flooring or ceiling
systems;
Partition walls are fully
● ● ●
salvageable;
Separating long-lived
components from short-lived
components to\ reduce the
complexity of deconstruction [●] ● ●
and churning so as to facilitate
the collection process for
recycling; and
Use of interior partitions that
are demountable, reusable [●] ● ●
and recyclable, etc.
Remarks:
- ASTM provides guidance for various types of buildings and uses [1,
2].
- Additions to the list may be proposed at the discretion of the
applicant
[●] This item only applicable to clubhouse/ amenity facilities of the
residential development

1. Provide a report presenting evidence as to how and the extent to
which building adaptability and deconstruction is provided. The
report shall include drawings and documents including building
plans and detailed specifications together with elaboration and
justification of specific design strategies that provide for the
intended outcome.

respect of Flexible Engineering Services have been adopted
whenever feasible and at least 20% for residential development
and 70% for non-residential development of the listed items in
the checklist could be achieved, the credit shall be awarded.
1 ASTM International. Designation E1692-95a Standard Classification for Serviceability of an Office for Change and Churn by
Occupants.
2 ASTM International. Designation E1679-13 Standard Practice for Setting the Requirements for the Serviceability of a Building or
Building-Related Facility and for Determining What Serviceability is Provided or Proposed.

Other
Flexible Engineering Residential Commercial
Building
Services Buildings Buildings
Types
Design that allows interior
fitting-out to use modular
[●] ● ●
and prefabricated
components;
Luminaires, including
electrical connection and
mechanical fixing, are
[●] ● ●
easily relocated within
ceiling grid or uplighters are
used;
Air diffusers on flexible
ducts can be relocated at
minimum cost with [●] ● ●
minimum disruption to
occupants;
Exhaust air ducts for
special exhausts are easy
to install, and space and [●] ● ●
capacity are available in
ceiling and duct shafts;
Pre-wired horizontal
distribution systems in
ceilings or floors, with spare
- ● ●
capacity and easy access
to accommodate change of
workplace layouts; and
Reducing the use of
embedded infrastructure for
[●] ● ●
power, data and HVAC
systems, etc.
Remarks:
applicant

1. Provide a report presenting evidence as to how and the extent
to which building adaptability and deconstruction is provided.
The report shall include drawings and documents including
building plans and detailed specifications together with
elaboration and justification of specific design strategies that
provide for the intended outcome.

respect of Structural Adaptability have been adopted whenever
feasible and at least 20% for residential development and 70%
for non-residential development of the listed items in the
checklist could be achieved, the credit shall be awarded.

Other
Residential Commercial
Structural Adaptability Building
Buildings Buildings
Types
Foundations allow for
potential vertical expansion - ● ●
of the building;
Installation of isolation
joints or other features
avoid the potential for
- ● ●
differential settlements and
for progressive collapse
due to accidental loading;
Reliance on a central core
for lateral load resistance
that allows for local
modifications to the [●] ● ●
structure while maintaining
complete structural
integrity;
Wide structural grids [●] ● ●
Lower floors allow for
[●] ● ●
heavier live load;
Sufficient height to lower
floors to enable a range of [●] ● ●
uses;
Building envelope is
independent of the [●] ● ●
structure
Versatile envelope capable
of accommodating changes [●] ● ●
to the interior space plan;
Means of access to the
exterior wall system from
[●] ● ●
inside the building and from
outside;
Structural floor system that
accommodates a number
of mechanical and electrical
service distribution - ● ●
schemes based on different
occupancies; and
Provision of more than the
minimum spatial areas and [●] ● ●
floor heights, etc.
Remarks:
- Reference may be made to various publications [3]
applicant
3 International Energy Agency. Annex 31. Energy-Related Environmental Impact of Buildings. 2005. [ONLINE]. Available
at: http://www.iisbe.org/annex31/index.html. [Accessed April 2021].

Submittals
MW 11
MW_11_01 Specifications specifying the application of

spatial adaptability/ flexible engineering
-
service/ structural adaptability strategy 
features
MW_11_02 A report with detailed explanation on the
fulfillment of checklist’s criteria/ justification  
for non-applicability
MW_11_03 Drawing to demonstrate that the checklist’s  

requirements are fulfilled

None
(b) Related Credits

None

4 Materials and 4.3 Waste Reduction

Waste
Extent of Application All buildings except one-single family domestic building with not more than
3 floors, or domestic parts of a composite building for one-single family with
not more than 3 floors, or a building not normally occupied or for transient stay
(e.g. pump house, sewage treatment plant, carpark building).
Part (b) is applicable only when Municipal Solid Waste Charging Scheme
is activated.
Objective Encourage integrated waste management for operational reduction at

source, effective sorting and collection within the site and recycling/ reuse of
waste.
Credit Requirement (a) Additional Recyclables Collection

1 credit for the provision of facilities for collection, sorting, storage
and disposal of 2 other recyclable streams in addition to those described
in MW P1.
(b) Additional Facility Provisions to Enable enhanced Municipal Solid

Waste (MSW) Charing Scheme
1 credit for additional facilities for collection, sorting, storage and disposal
of recyclables in addition to those described in MW P1 and MW 12 part
(a).
(c) Waste Treatment Equipment

1 BONUS credit for providing at least one set of waste treatment
equipment.
(d) Alternatives to Recycling Facilities

1 BONUS credit for provide alternative means of waste collection systems.

Assessment (a) Additional Recyclables Collection

1. Provide an Operational Waste Management Plan that demonstrates the
adequacy of two (2) additional recyclables, in addition to prescribed
recyclables in MW P1, to be collected, such as food waste, organic
landscape waste, and other (fluorescent light tubes, electronic
products etc.). The plan should include the followings in addition to the
items required under MW P1:
1.1. Identify and estimate the quantities of expected waste streams for
the additional recyclables of the development by waste stream
calculation;
1.2. Demonstrate with calculation that there are sufficient capacity and
provision for the additional recyclables generated from the
development based on the waste stream calculation;
1.3. Elaborate the management plan, accessibility and hygiene for the
additional recyclables. It includes what is the collection and
separation methodology of recyclables; and how the building users
dispose recyclables and janitor staffs collect and deliver to refuse
storage and material recovery chambers (RS&MRC) & refuse
chutes.
(b) Additional Recycling Facility Provisions to Enable Municipal Solid

Waste (MSW) Charging Scheme
1. Provide an Operational Waste Management Plan that includes the

following:
1.1 Proposal of additional facility that enables MSW Charging
Scheme;
1.2 The proposal should indicate the solid waste disposal rate, target
reduction rate, proposed features and the management
methodology.
1.3 Demonstrate how the municipal solid waste disposal rate can be
reduced by the proposal. Target reduction for 10% in weight (kg)
or size (m3).
1.4 Demonstrate that the location and design of the facility have
considered accessibility of building users, and operation and
maintenance of the recycling facilities, cleaning staff/ contractors
and for waste recycling and collection companies.
2. Drawing is required to indicate the additional facility for enabling

municipal solid waste management.
3. Detail documents (e.g. specification or as-built information) of the

additional recycling/ design features for enabling the MSW charging
scheme.

1. Where the consistent generation in volume of the appropriate
operational waste streams is likely to exist, e.g. large amounts of
packaging or compostable waste generated by the building's use and
operation, the following facilities are provided for 5% waste reduction in
size (m3):
1.1 Static waste compactors or balers; situated in a service area or

dedicated waste management space

1.2 Vessels for composting suitable organic waste resulting from the
building's daily operation and use; OR adequate space for storing
segregated food waste and compostable organic material prior to
collection and delivery to an alternative composting facility
1.3 Where organic waste is to be stored or composted on site, a water

outlet is provided adjacent to or within the facility for cleaning and
hygiene purposes.

1. Automated waste collection systems and separate chutes for different
waste types are accepted as a form of compliance as long as a
management plan is in place, which can either be public (local
authority) or private and requirements for separation are met. The plan
should include the followings in addition to the items required under MW
P1:
1.1 Provide narrative on the alternative recycling facilities (e.g.

automated waste collection systems and separate chutes);
1.2 Demonstrate with calculation that there are sufficient capacity and
spaces of the alternative recycling facilities for different waste
types generated in the development based on the waste stream
calculation; and
1.3 Demonstrate management plan, accessibility and hygiene for the

alternative recycling facilities. It includes the outlines of what is the
collection and separation methodology of waste and recyclables;
and how the building users dispose refuses and recyclables and
janitor staffs collect and deliver to refuse storage and material
recovery chambers (RS&MRC) & Refuse Chutes, if the proposed
alternatives to recycling facilities are separated from the
RS&MRC.
Submittals (a) Additional Recyclables Collection
MW_12a_00 BEAM Plus NB Submission template for  
MW 12a
MW_12a_01 Operational Waste Management Plan  
MW_12a_02 Drawings showing the locations of all

waste handling facilities with indications of
 
additional recyclable collections
MW_12a_03 Master layout plan or extract(s) of the

General Building Plan to substantiate the
exemption from the requirements of this  
credit

(b) Additional Recycling Facility Provisions to Enabling Municipal Solid

Waste (MSW) Charging Scheme
MW_12b_00 BEAM Plus NB Submission template for
 
MW 12b
MW_12b_01 Operational Waste Management Plan  
MW_12b_02 Drawings showing the locations of all

waste handling facilities with indications of  
the additional recycling facility provision to
enable MSW charging
MW_12b_03 Specification of the additional recycling/

design features for enabling the MSW  -
charging scheme
MW_12b_04 As-built information of the additional

recycling/ design features for enabling the - 
MSW charging scheme
MW_12b_05 Master layout plan or extract(s) of the

General Building Plan to substantiate the
exemption from the requirements of this  
credit
MW_12c_00 BEAM Plus NB Submission template for
 
MW 12c
MW_12c_01 Operational Waste Management Plan  
MW_12c_02 Drawings showing the locations of all

waste handling facilities with indications of  
the waste processing facilities
MW_12c_03 Calculation to justify the waste processing  

facilities achieve the credit required target
MW_12c_04 Catalogues/ information of the waste

processing facilities - 
MW_12d_00 BEAM Plus NB Submission template for  
MW 12d

MW_12d_01 Operational Waste Management Plan  
MW_12d_02 Drawings showing the locations of all

waste handling facilities with indications of
the alternative recycling facilities  

Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered
Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical Engineer. PNAP No.
APP-35 on requirements for Refuse Storage and Material Recovery
Chambers, Material Recovery Chambers.
Environmental Protection Department. Waste Data & Statistics. [ONLINE].
Available at:
http://www.wastereduction.gov.hk/en/assistancewizard/waste_red_sat.htm
.[Accessed April 2021].
(b) Related Credits

MW P1 Minimum Waste Recycling Facilities
This prerequisite stipulates the minimum requirements for waste recycling
facilities.

This credit addresses the hygiene aspects of waste disposal.

BEAM Plus New Buildings Version 2.0 Energy Use - EU
5 Energy Use 5.P Prerequisite

5.1 Energy Use Reduction and Control
5.2 Renewable and Alternative Energy Generation
5.3 Energy Efficient Equipment
Introduction Electricity generation accounts for around 60% of the total CO2 emissions
from energy use in Hong Kong. Buildings account for 90% of our electricity
consumption. Ensuring buildings are designed for good energy performance
is a key factor to the conservation of energy.
Power stations operate under licenses issued by the Director of
Environmental Protection Department, requiring operators to employ the best
practicable means to control the emissions to acceptable levels. However,
there is a growth in demand which leads to an increasing power generation,
transmission and distribution capacity, because of the use of air- conditioning
where the buildings are responsible for much of the peak load in summer.
Demand side management can reduce the rate of expansion of supply-side
capacity.
5.P Prerequisite EU P1 Minimum Energy Performance
Background BEAM provides incentives to achieve energy performance better than the
minimum requirements of building energy codes. Therefore, compliance with
the up-to-date Building Energy Codes (BEC) is the mandatory requirement
governing the energy performance of building services installations. This is
taken as the energy performance prerequisite for BEAM certification.
5.1 Energy Use EU 1 Low Carbon Passive Design

Reduction and EU 2 Reduction of CO2 Emissions
Control EU 3 Peak Electricity Demand Reduction
EU 4 Metering and Monitoring
Background The estimation of annual energy use and maximum electricity demand take
into account the design improvements to the building envelope and the
efficiency of building services systems including air-conditioning, lighting
systems, electrical installations and equipment etc. It shall cover all the
aspects of energy use in buildings. BEAM Plus gives credit to additional
measures that address further improvement in the building energy efficiency.
Passive building design allows buildings to respond to the local climate and
reduce the reliance on active means to satisfy human comfort, and therefore
reduces energy consumption and the associated carbon dioxide emissions.
This is particularly important for residential building and BEAM Plus has
developed an alternative path to assess passive elements for residential
buildings.
Through effective planning and architectural design, it is possible to improve
building energy efficiency. As such, this section also assesses various
strategies including building orientation, layout plan and external shading
devices etc.
Both prescriptive path and performance path are developed for EU 1,
EU 2 and EU 3. Applicants can apply either path to suit the project’s specific
characteristics and externalities.
5.2 Renewable and EU 5 Renewable and Alternative Energy Systems

Alternative Energy
Generation
Background If energy consumption continues to increase at existing levels, projected
carbon dioxide emissions generated by the year 2030 are expected to grow
by more than 50% from the level in 2005. Effective use of renewable energy
will reduce Hong Kong's reliance on fossil fuels and also our greenhouse gas
emissions arising from the use of fossil fuels.
Although the large-scale application of renewable energy in buildings does
not exist in Hong Kong, its wider use should be promoted in the interest of

BEAM Plus New Buildings Version 2.0 Energy Use - EU
sustainable development. BEAM Plus credits award those meaningful

installations that provide environmental benefits. The criteria for assessment
have been set with reference to the percentage of the energy use in the
assessed building that will be replaced by renewable sources. Furthermore,
no distinction will be made on the selected means such as solar hot water
systems, building integrated photovoltaic panels or wind turbines, etc. for
substituting electricity or fuel by renewable energy. Hence, different or a
combination of systems and equipment may be incorporated into a building.
5.3 Energy Efficient EU 6 Air-Conditioning Units

Equipment EU 7 Clothes Drying Facilities
EU 8 Energy Efficient Appliances
Background BEAM Plus gives credit to the designs that enhance the performance of
equipment such as air-conditioning units. Likewise, the provisions of facilities/
equipment that improve energy performance are also encouraged. Provision
of clothes drying facilities is a good practice for the unique high- rise and
high-density urban context of Hong Kong. With the introduction of the
Energy Efficiency Labelling Scheme by EMSD, it becomes easier for the
developers to select energy efficient appliances in the market.

BEAM Plus New Buildings Version 2.0 Energy Use - EU P1
5 Energy Use 5.P Prerequisite
EU P1 Minimum Energy Performance
Objective To establish the minimum level of energy performance for the building
services systems
Credits Attenable Prerequisite
Credit Requirement Demonstrate performance improvement against the latest edition of Building
Energy Code (BEC).

Refer to the latest edition of BEC [ 1 ] to demonstrate that performance
improvement is achieved in both of the following building services systems
provided by the project owner:
1) Improve 2% of code specified minimum coefficient of performance

(COP) for air-conditioning equipment unit; and
2) Reduce 3% of code specified maximum allowable lighting power density

for lighting installation.
For Non-BEC Governing Building Types:

All Non-BEC governing building types and spaces are required to
demonstrate their compliance with the latest BEC on:
1) Air-conditioning equipment efficiency (full load COP); and
2) Lighting power density for listed space type in the code.
For building consist of BEC and non-BEC Governing Building or Space

type:
All requirements of compliance listed in this credit are required.
Assessment For BEC Governing Building Types:

1) Air-conditioning Equipment
1.1. Improve 2% for each air-conditioning equipment corresponding
minimum coefficient of performance (COP) at full load and specific
standard rating condition given in the latest BEC [1].
1.2. Improve 2% efficiency improvement for each room air-conditioners

(i.e. single package window type and wall mounted split type) by
using Energy Efficiency Grade 2 COP as the basis under the scope
of the latest edition of Mandatory Energy Efficiency Labelling
Scheme (MEELS) under Energy Efficiency (Labelling of Products)
Ordinance (Cap. 598), using cooling seasonal performance factor
(CSPF), Fcsp.
1 Electrical and Mechanical Services Department, Code of Practice for Energy Efficiency of Building Services Installation [ONLINE].
available at: http://www.beeo.emsd.gov.hk/en/mibec_beeo_codtechguidelines.html. [Accessed April 2021].

1.3. Project using district cooling system and project without any air-
conditioning installation (or not newly install an air-conditioning
system) are not assessed under this criterion.
2) Indoor Lighting System

2.1. Reduce 3% indoor lighting power density (LPD) of lighting
installation in whole building by area-weighted method# compared
with the latest edition of BEC.
∑[LPD(Area A) × Area A + LPD(Area B) × Area B + …]

# Design Case: � �
∑[Area A + Area B + …]
∑[BEC LPD(Area A) × Area A + BEC LPD(Area B) × Area B + …]

BEC Case: � �
Design case
Lighting power reduction percentage = �1 - � ×100%
BEC Case
LPD requirements for this prerequisite follows the latest edition of

BEC. Exclude the lighting installations that are outside the scope of
application of BEEO/BEC as stated in the latest edition of BEC
Technical Guideline [2].
For Non- BEC Governing Building Types:

3) Air-conditioning System
3.1. For spaces that are not governed by the latest BEC based on Cap.
610 Schedule 1 & 2, rated COP of the air conditioning equipment
should comply with the minimum efficiency requirement stipulated
in the code (For both full load and 75% load for VSD equipment).
3.2. The performance of the selected air conditioning unit types should
refer to the corresponding equipment COP tables stipulated in the
latest BEC.
3.3. Room air-conditioners (included single package window type and

wall mounted split type) under the scope of the latest edition of
Mandatory Energy Efficiency Labelling Scheme (MEELS), Energy
Efficiency (Labelling of Products) Ordinance (Cap. 598) should
achieve equipment efficiency equivalent to the Energy Efficiency
Grade 2 or above, using cooling seasonal performance factor
(CSPF), Fcsp.
3.4. Project using district cooling system and project without any air-
conditioning installation (or not newly install with any air-conditioning
system) are not assessed under these criteria.
4) Indoor Lighting Systems

4.1. For indoor areas that are not governed by the BEC based on Cap.
610 Schedule 1 & 2, LPD must comply with the maximum allowable
values of the listed space type listed in the latest BEC.
4.2. For space that without a listed space type suitable for calculation
from the BEC code, LPD must be the same as the design value.
2 Electrical and Mechanical Services Department, Technical Guidelines on Building Energy Code 2018 Edition (TG-BEC 2018)
[ONLINE]. available at: https://www.emsd.gov.hk/beeo/en/pee/BEC_2018.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].

4.3. LPD requirements for this prerequisite follows the latest edition of
BEC. Exclude the lighting installations that are outside the scope of
application of BEEO/BEC as stated in the latest edition of BEC
Technical Guideline.
For building consist of both BEC and non-BEC Governing Building

Types:
Comply with all requirements.

EU_P1_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template  
for EU P1
EU_P1_01 For Prescribed Buildings under Buildings Energy Efficiency
Ordinance,
Summary of energy performance for
air-conditioning equipment (BEC  
governing) [Appendix A1]; and/ or
Summary of energy performance for  

indoor lighting (BEC governing)
[Appendix B1]
For buildings where Buildings Energy Efficiency Ordinance

does NOT apply,
Summary of energy performance for
air-conditioning equipment (non-BEC  
governing) [Appendix A2]; and/or
Summary of energy performance for  

indoor lighting (non-BEC governing)
[Appendix B2]
EU_P1_02 Air-conditioning system equipment

schedule, air-side and water-side
schematic drawings highlighting all  
the air-conditioning equipment
EU_P1_03 Air-conditioning equipment and

lighting specifications  -
EU_P1_04 Catalogue of air-conditioning - 
equipment highlighting the COP at full
load; and
Lighting schedule with luminaire - 

EU_P1_05 E&M layout drawing highlighting the - 

space type
EU_P1_06 Space area schedule  

Electrical and Mechanical Services Department, Code of Practice on
Energy Labelling of Products. [ONLINE]. Available at:
https://www.emsd.gov.hk/energylabel/en/doc/2018%20CoP%20(English
).pdf. [Accessed April 2021].
(b) Related Credits

None

BEAM Plus New Buildings Version 2.0 Energy Use - EU 1
5 Energy Use 5.1 Energy Use Reduction and Control
Extent of Application All buildings except for Option 2 part (5)

For Option 2 part (5), buildings with normally occupied space for which
operable windows are practical to be provided
Objective Passive building design allows buildings to respond to the local climate;
reducing the reliance on active means to meet human comfort. This in turn
reduces energy consumption and its associated carbon dioxide emissions.
Credit Requirement Passive designs that can reduce building HVAC load, facilitate natural
ventilation and maximise daylight will be rewarded in this credit under
either prescriptive path or performance path.
Option 1: Prescriptive Path

4 Credits for incorporating any 4 of the passive design strategies listed
below, 1 credit for each strategy:

2) External Overhang (fix/ movable)
4) Cross Ventilation Provision (normally occupied space)
5) Cross Ventilation Provision (not normally occupied space)
6) Daylighting Provision
Option 2: Performance Path

HVAC Load Reduction
1) Built Form and orientation
1 credit for reducing building envelope load from a hypothetic case
with at least 22.5° difference in orientation with justification by
simulation.

1 credit for demonstrating consideration of optimum spatial planning
to enhance energy conservation with justification by simulation.
3) External Shading Devices

1 credit for the provision of fixed or movable external shading devices,
in the form of vertical or horizontal sun shading feature with
justification by simulation.

1 credit for the provision of vegetated building envelope with
justification by calculation.
Natural Ventilation
5) Space Layout for Natural Ventilation
1 credit for demonstrating that project space (both normally occupied
space and not normally occupied space) is designed to facilitate the
utilisation of natural ventilation with justification by simulation.

Daylight
6) Space Layout for Daylight Penetration
1 credit for demonstrating that the space is well-lit by daylight and
reduce occupants’ dependency on artificial lighting with justification by
simulation method.
Assessment Option 1: Prescriptive Path

Prepare a passive building design report with calculation, building
elevations and drawings to demonstrate the compliance of adopting four
(4) selected strategies.

Demonstrate the space planning complying with the following
requirements:
1.1 For Non-open planned design:

Demonstrate at least 20% of external wall of the building to be
occupied by non-conditioned space for buildings where the
developer/owner has direct influence over the interior fit-out work for
50% or more of the occupied space
1.2 For Open planned design

Demonstrate at least 5% of external wall of the building to be occupied
by non-conditioned space for buildings where developer/owner has
direct influence over the interior fit-out work for less than 50% of the
occupied space,
To document this strategy, the passive building design report should

include the following information:
a) Building floor layout with indication on complied area;
b) Measurement of the perimeter length of the typical floor layout;
c) Measurement of the non-conditioned space external wall length;
d) Calculation of non-conditioned space external wall area; and
e) Summary table showing the percentage calculation.
2) Fixed or Movable Overhangs

Demonstrate fixed or moveable overhangs are provided for project:
2.1 Incorporated overhangs that is >0.3 of window height on south
orientated facade
To document this strategy, the passive building design report

should include the following information:
a) Facade design drawings with highlighted overhangs
b) Drawings demonstrating that the length of overhangs from

facade zone is >0.3 of window height.


Demonstrate greenery are provided for project envelop:
3.1 Incorporate greenery for 50% roof of conditioned spaces; or
Incorporate vertical greenery for 5% of external wall area for
building conditioned spaces.
3.2 Demonstrate that the area of vegetation is at least 50% of the roof
area. Roof of non-conditioned area (e.g. mechanical plant rooms)
do not count towards the total roof area; OR
Demonstrate that the area of vegetation is at least 5% of the

facade area. Facade of non-conditioned area (e.g. mechanical
plant rooms) do not count towards the total facade area.
3.3 Only permanent planter is considered as vegetation area.

a) Drawings demonstrating the area of vegetation on the roof

area (or external wall area);
b) Drawings demonstrating the roof area of conditioned space (or

the external wall area of conditioned space);
c) Calculation demonstrating the percentage of compliance;
d) Demonstration of reduction in U-value when compare with the

project roof material (or external wall material); and
e) Maintenance contract or undertaking statement from project

owner that landscape maintenance personnel/company will be
employed for the maintenance of building envelope vegetation.
4) Cross Ventilation provision (normally occupied space)

Demonstrate each normally occupied space in project is cross
ventilated:
4.1 Provide cross ventilation for each normally occupied space of the
building with reference to the cross-ventilation requirement
stipulated in the latest edition of the Guidelines on Design and
Construction Requirements for Energy Efficiency of Residential
Buildings [1] (For 2014 edition, refer to Part 3.2 Cross Ventilation
Requirement) (for residential buildings) OR ASHRAE 62.1:2016
Section 6.4 (for non-residential buildings).

a) Drawings of typical floors (or typical spaces design sections)

showing the openable windows location and the cross-
ventilation path;
b) Drawings illustrating natural ventilation; and
1 Buildings Department, Guidelines on Design and Construction Requirements for Energy Efficiency of Residential Buildings.
[ONLINE]. Available at: https://www.bd.gov.hk/doc/en/resources/codes-and-references/code-and-design-
manuals/Guidelines_DCREERB2014e.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].

c) Calculation for demonstrating the compliance of minimum

openable window area to floor area.
5) Cross Ventilation Provision (not normally occupied space)

5.1 Provide cross ventilation for each not normally occupied space
(e.g. corridor, entrance lobby) of the building with reference to the
cross-ventilation requirement stipulated on ASHRAE 62.1:2016
section 6.4

a) Drawings of typical floors (or typical spaces design sections)

showing the opening location and the cross-ventilation path;
b) Drawings illustrating natural ventilation assessment
c) Calculation for demonstrating the compliance of minimum

openable area to space area.
6) Daylighting Provision
Demonstrate each normally occupied space is daylit:
6.1 Provide window for each normally occupied space with each
window height > 50% of the corresponding normally occupied
space depth.

a) Drawings of typical floors sections (or typical spaces design

sections);
b) Drawings highlighting the height of windows;
c) Drawings highlighting the depth of normally occupied space;

and
d) Calculation demonstrating the percentage of compliance.
Option 2: Performance Path

Prepare a passive building design report to demonstrate selected
passive design strategies achievement with numerical supporting.
1) Built Form and Orientation

1.1 Conduct a building total energy analysis to demonstrate that the
design building has incorporated a better built form and
orientation. Evaluation is carried out by rotating the design
building. The selected baseline condition (hypothetic case)
should be at least 22.5o different from the designed building in
orientation. A passive building design report should be provided
to document the analysis and result.
To document this strategy, a passive building design report should

a) A summary of simulation result;

b) Baseline case building energy consumption;
c) Design case building energy consumption;
d) Demonstration of the orientation angle difference between

hypothetic and design case;
e) Hourly data (i.e. 8,760 hours) of building energy consumption for

both the baseline case and the design case; and
f) Input and output report generated by the simulation software.
The simulation program used for energy modelling should meet the
following criteria. Compliance review for below criteria is required
except those already accepted for performance based on Building
Energy Code (BEC) by EMSD.
a) Capable to perform hourly simulation (8,760 hours per year);
b) Capable to provide hourly variations in occupancy, lighting power,

miscellaneous equipment power, thermostat setpoints, and HVAC
system operation;
c) Capable to model 10 or more thermal zones;
d) Capable to model and simulate the thermal behaviour of a building

and the interaction of its building fabric, air-conditioning, lighting
and other relevant energy consuming equipment and systems;
e) Capable to perform design load calculations to determine the

required air-conditioning equipment capacities and air and water
flow rates for both the design case and baseline case building;
f) Capable to model part-load performance curves for mechanical

equipment;
g) Capable to model capacity and efficiency correction curves for

mechanical heating and cooling equipment; and
h) Capable to model air-side economizers with integrated control

2.1 Demonstrate at least 20% of building façade irradiation is taken
up by the façade of non-conditioned space.

a) Annual solar irradiation on each building elevation;
b) Table summarizing external wall area of non-conditioned space

on each orientation of building elevation;
c) Calculation demonstrating the design case compliance in

irradiation gain reduction
∑ Façade Irradiation of Non - conditioned Façade Area

≥ 20%
Overall Façade Irradiation

d) Input and output report generated by the simulation software.
3) Fixed or Movable Horizontal / Vertical External Shading Devices

3.1 Demonstrate the provision of external shading devices in reducing
direct solar irradiation entering the building interior. Any
architectural features that shade the building surfaces from direct
sunlight are considered as shading devices.
3.2 Conduct an external solar irradiation simulation to demonstrate

that the annual solar irradiation on the facade is at least 2% lower
than the baseline (hypothetic) case without a shading device.

a) Simulation result of solar irradiation on each building elevation

for both design case and hypothetic case; and
b) Drawings illustrating the solar shading design; and
c) Input and output report generated by the simulation software.

4.1 Demonstrate that U-value of the roof area is reduced by 50% by
vegetation. Roof of non-conditioned area (e.g. mechanical plant
rooms) does not count into the total roof area; OR
4.2 Demonstrate that the area of vegetation on facade contribute 5%

reduction on the U-value of facade. Facade of non-conditioned
area (e.g. mechanical plant rooms) does not count into the total
facade area.
4.3 Only permanent plantation is considered as vegetation area.

a) Drawings that demonstrate the area of vegetation on the roof

area (or external wall area);
b) Drawings that demonstrate the roof area of conditioned space (or

the external wall area of conditioned space);
c) Calculation for demonstrating the percentage of compliance;
d) Calculation for demonstrating a reduction in U-value when

compare to the project roof material (or external wall material);
and
e) Maintenance contract or undertaking statement from project

owner that landscape maintenance personnel/ company will be
employed for the maintenance of building envelope vegetation.
5) Space Layout for Natural Ventilation

5.1 Demonstrate that at least 50% of openings and operable areas
in each normally occupied space has an average
incoming/outgoing velocity of 0.2 m/s
5.2 Demonstrate that at least 20% of normally occupied space, in

terms of floor area, has achieved a wind velocity of 0.2 m/s at
1.2m level above the finished floor.
5.3 A CFD simulation should be conducted in accordance with the

AVA methodology and assessment area of the simulation model
outlined in Technical Circular No.1/06 [2] to obtain the external

wind pressures at the centre of the opening area. Another model
that simulates the indoor flow pattern 1.2m level above the
finished floor s hall also be conducted using the external
wind pressures computed by previous CFD model.
5.4 For buildings with 3 stories above grade or more, at least 3 typical
stories (covering high, mid and low levels of buildings) with
similar interior layout should be selected and studied for multi-
storey building. For buildings with less than 3 stories, the
simulation should cover all floors.
5.5 For normally occupied space in a building with site environmental

problems identified by authorities (e.g. poor air quality, poor
acoustic condition) justification report with evidence should be
provided to substantiate the non-practicality of providing
operable windows for the identified normally occupied space.
Thus, demonstrating this credit part is not applicable for that
identified space. Only project with 100% normally occupied
space identified as non-practical for providing operable windows
is allowed to apply not applicable (N/A) in this credit part.

a) The derived incoming/ outgoing velocity at the opening under 1

out of the 3 most prevailing wind directions in summer; and
b) Calculation of the Area-Weighted Average Wind Velocity (AAWV)

for the complied space; and
c) Input data, picture of the 3D model and simulation assumptions.
6) Space Layout for Daylight

6.1 Demonstrate that 25% of normally occupied space achieves
spatial Daylight Autonomy300/25% (sDA300/25%). In other words, at
least 25% of the area can receive at least 300 lux of sunlight
for at least 25% of operating hours each year.
6.2 Compliance with the assessment criteria by demonstrating

through daylight simulation satisfying the below requirements:
a) Normally occupied spaces shall be assessed (including

normally occupied spaces without window);
b) Internal doors within a unit are assumed to be fully opened;
c) Calculation grids shall be no more than 0.6m2;
d) Assessment plane shall be placed at 0.8m above F.F.L.

horizontally;
e) Assessment area shall cover typical floors of the lowest,

topmost, middle level of each building within the site
boundary. All normally occupied spaces shall be assessed if
the project building has no typical floor;
2 Housing, Planning and Lands Bureau Technical Circular No. 1/06 [ONLINE]. Available at:
https://www.devb.gov.hk/filemanager/en/content_679/hplb-etwb-tc-01-06.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].

f) Annual sky file referencing a local climate file, such as an

EnergyPlus weather format data file (*.epw), shall be used for
sky model;
g) The assessment shall cover hours between 8a.m. to 6p.m.

local clock time, for a full calendar year, from January 1 to
December 31;
h) Overall external reflectance of an average of 0.2 for building

(include the project development, unless provide other
supporting materials) and 0.2 for ground;
i) Internal wall, floor, ceiling reflectance can make reference to

Table A1.12 in CIBSE - LG10/14 Lighting Guide 10:
Daylighting - a Guide for Designers - LG10 [3]. If the finishes
in the space is not completed, use the following default
surface reflectance: 0.8 for ceiling, 0.2 for floors, and 0.5 for
walls. The entire floor plate, except for the core is assumed to
be normally occupied space;
j) Surrounding buildings and terrain shall be included in the

model based on the GIS information from Lands Department;
k) The surrounding building and large structures should be

included in the simulation model. The surrounding area
should be at least 2H (H being the building height (m) of the
tallest building on the project site) or 200m away from the
project site boundary, whichever is larger. The building
geometry can be simplified as blocks; and
l) The terrain area shall be in a size of at least, 10H (H being the

1000m × 1000m, whichever is larger, with the project placed
in the centre. Where smaller terrain area is desired, the
Applicant should propose a terrain area with justification and
the terrain area should be surrounded by a wall with a height
same as the average height of the surrounding buildings.

a) The industrial guidance/publications for arriving the adopted

design criteria for the project;
b) Software validation report; (if the simulation software is not on the

list in Annex 4 of PNAP APP-130)
c) Simulation results of the spaces which have fulfilled the daylight

illuminance requirements;
d) Calculation for demonstrating the percentage of compliance; and
e) Input and output report generated by the simulation software.
3 CIBSE - LG10/14 Lighting Guide 10: Daylighting - a Guide for Designers - LG10

Submittals
EU_01_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template

 
for EU 1
EU_01_01 Passive building design report  
EU_01_02 Justification report with evidence to

substantiate the non-practicality of
providing operable windows for the
identified normally occupied space  
(For Option 2: Performance Path, Part
5)
None
(b) Related Credits
None

EU 2 Reduction of CO2 Emissions
Extent of Application All buildings for Option 1 and Option 2 Part (1.1), (1.2) and (2.2)
For Option 2 Part (2.1), buildings not using district cooling systems and with
newly installed air-conditioning system
For Option 2 Part (2.3), buildings with lift and/or escalator installation
Objective Reduce the consumption of non-renewable energy and the associated

carbon dioxide (CO2) emissions to the atmosphere.
Credit Requirement Select one of the compliance paths described below.
Option 1 – Performance Path (1-10 Credits + 5 additional BONUS)
Demonstrate a percentage of reduction on annual CO2 emission of the

proposed building performance compared with the baseline case
performance.
1 to 10 credits plus 5 additional BONUS credits for annual CO2 emission

reduction by the following saving percentages:
Percentage of reduction of
Credit(s)
annual CO2 emission / %
1 1%
2 3%
3 5%
4 7%
5 9%
6 11%
7 13%
8 15%
9 17%
10 19%
10 + 1B 21%
10 + 2B 23%
10 + 3B 25%
10 + 4B 27%
10 + 5B 29%
Option 2 – Prescriptive Path (1‐7 Credits)

Demonstrate a prescriptive compliance in below listed item. Residential
buildings and non-residential buildings should follow different paths.
For building consist of both residential and non-residential parts,
demonstrate the compliance for all requirements as listed below.
1) Passive Building Design Enhancement
1.1 Building Envelope
a) Residential buildings & Residents’ Recreational Facilities

(RRF)

Credit OTTV / RTTV Requirement Improvement [1]

RTTVwall Reduced by 5%
0.5 OTTVRRF,tower (if applicable) Reduced by 5%
OTTVRRF,podium (if applicable) Reduced by 20%
RTTVwall Reduced by 10%
RTTVroof Reduced by 50%
1
OTTVRRF,tower (if applicable) Reduced by 10%
OTTVRRF,podium (if applicable) Reduced by 40%
b) All non-residential buildings
Credit OTTV Requirement Improvement [2]

OTTVtower Reduced by 5%
0.5 OTTVpodium (if applicable) Reduced by 20%
OTTVtower Reduced by 10%
1
OTTVpodium (if applicable) Reduced by 40%
1.2 Natural Ventilation

a) Residential buildings
Credit Performance Improvement

20% of normally occupied space (habitable space)
1
satisfy the ventilation requirements
40% of normally occupied space (habitable space)
2
satisfy the ventilation requirements
b) All non-residential buildings and Residents’ Recreational Facilities

(RRF)

a) Net free unobstructed area of operable wall
openings directly to the outdoors which the
spaces are permanently open to is equivalent to
9.5% of the net occupied floor area.
1 b) Interior room on occupied floor without direct

openings to outdoors is ventilated through
adjoining rooms, the opening between rooms
shall be permanently unobstructed and have a
free area of not less than 8% of the area of the
interior room or less than 2.3m2.
a) Net free unobstructed area of operable wall

openings directly to the outdoors which the
spaces are permanently open to is equivalent
to 12.5% of the net occupied floor area.
2 b) Interior room on occupied floor without direct

openings to outdoors is ventilated through
adjoining rooms, the opening between rooms
shall be permanently unobstructed and have a
free area of not less than 8% of the area of the
interior room or less than 2.3m2.
1 Buildings Department - PNAP APP-156 - Design and Construction Requirements for Energy Efficiency of Residential Buildings;
Buildings Department - Guideline on Design and Construction Requirements for Energy Efficiency of Residential
Buildings 2014
2 Buildings Department - PNAP APP-67 – Energy Efficiency of Buildings, Building (Energy Efficiency) Regulation; Code of Practice
for Overall Thermal Transfer Value in Buildings 1995

2) Active System Design Improvement

Demonstrate further performance improvement as compared with the
Building Energy Codes (BEC) 2018 [3]
2.1 For each air-conditioning equipment (N/A for buildings using

district cooling system or without any air-conditioning
installation or not newly installed with any air-conditioning
system)
Performance Improvement of minimum
Credit
coefficient of performance (COP) at full load
1 3%
2 6%
2.2 Lighting System

Lighting power of lighting installation in whole building by area-
weighted method as compared with the BEC 2018 code [3]:
Credit Performance Improvement of lighting power

0.5 5%
1 10%
2.3 Lift and escalator installation (N/A for buildings with No Lift
& Escalator)

20% reduction from the maximum allowable
1
electrical power
Assessment OPTION 1 – PERFORMANCE PATH

Whole building energy simulation should be carried out in a prescribed
methodology as listed below in order to quantify the potential savings due
to energy saving measures and improvements over the relevant baseline
model.
Simulation Software
Simulation program used for energy modelling should meet the following
criteria:
1) Tested with industry standard methods: ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 140-

2017 or equivalent.
2) Capable to perform hourly analysis (i.e. 8,760 hours per year);
3) Provide hourly variations in occupancy, lighting power, miscellaneous

equipment power, thermostat setpoints, and HVAC system operation;
4) Capable to model 10 or more thermal zones;
5) Capable to simulate the thermal behaviour of a building and the

interaction of its building fabric, air-conditioning, interior lighting and
other relevant energy consuming equipment and systems;
3 Code of Practice for Energy Efficiency of Building Services Installation – Electrical and Mechanical Services Department HKSAR,
2018

6) Capable to perform design load calculations to determine the required

air-conditioning equipment capacities and air and water flow rates for
both the proposed building and baseline building;
7) Capable to model part-load performance curves for mechanical

equipment;
8) Capable to model capacity and efficiency correction curves for

mechanical heating and cooling equipment; and
9) Capable to model air-side economizers with integrated control
Baseline and Proposed Model Set-up

Develop the corresponding baseline building performance according to
modelling set up guideline in Appendix 9.2 for different building types.
Exceptional Calculation Methods (ECM)

When no simulation program can adequately model a design, materials or
device, an ECM can be used to demonstrate above-standard performance.
Its adoption is subject to the justification (submitted by the Applicant) of its
underlying principles, quantitative & qualitative techniques, assumptions
etc. in detail.
For any claim of non-regulated load saving or strategies that lead to a

difference between proposed and baseline model it is required to submit a
narrative and provide ECM calculation.
ECM is allowed to create a representation of that element. If the

methodology of approximation has not been previously published in any
technical circular or FAQ, it is the responsibility of the applicant to submit a
narrative explanation describing the simulation methodology and providing
the calculations for the energy savings if necessary.
On-site Renewable Energy

On-site renewable energy generation is included in the proposed case
calculation to further reduce the whole building CO2 emission. By providing
annual energy generation estimation details in the proposed case, the
percentage reduction of CO2 emission is accounted by the percentage of
reduction from baseline CO2 emission.
Equivalent Carbon Dioxide Emissions

Electricity: 0.7kg CO2 per kWh electricity consumed [4]
Town gas: 3.141 kg CO2 per unit of town gas consumed (1 unit of town gas
= 48 mega-joules consumed
Building Energy Report

The content should include the followings:
1) Executive summary
1.1 Energy saving measures summary
4 Environmental Protection Department. Guidelines to Account for and Report on Greenhouse Gas Emissions and Removals for
Buildings (Commercial, Residential or Institutional Purposes) in Hong Kong, 2010
https://www.climateready.gov.hk/files/pdf/Guidelines_English_2010.pdf

1.2 CO2 emission and energy consumption reduction as compared

with baseline
2) Introduction
2.1 Methodology of energy performance assessment, including the
details of the energy simulation software and ECM (if any) used
2.2 Project information
3) Description of energy saving measures
4) Modelling Parameters
4.1 Operating schedule
4.2 Input parameters summary table with reference
5) Results and discussion

5.1 Summarise the CO2 emission reduction in percentage (%)
5.2 Provide baseline and proposed case energy breakdown diagrams
6) Conclusions
6.1 Conclude the major reasons for achieving CO2 emission reduction
The report should be endorsed by a locally qualified professional who has

at least 8-year of relevant experience in building energy modelling.
OPTION 2 – PRESCRIPTIVE PATH

Prepare a summary report to demonstrate the compliance of each category
below:
1) Passive Building Design Enhancement
1.1 Building Envelope

Residential Provide RTTVwall & RTTVroof calculation and
Buildings & OTTVRRF,tower & OTTVRRF,podium calculation (if
Residents’ applicable) to demonstrate the envelope
Recreational performance improvement with reference to
Facilities (RRF) the latest statutory requirement.
All non-residential Provide OTTVtower & OTTVpodium calculation to

buildings demonstrate the envelope performance
improvement with reference to the latest
statutory requirement.
1.2 Natural Ventilation

Residential Residential Buildings
Buildings
Demonstrate the required normally occupied
space (habitable space) area in each
residential flat layout. The provided guidance
in appendix 9.3 can only be applied to single
floor. Layout of multi-floor unit should be
reviewed per each level. If a flat is designed
without internal partitions between normally

occupied space (habitable space) and other

spaces, applicant must demonstrate
compliance with typical partitions layout to
represent the intended design for occupancy
habitation.
Provide descriptions, mark-up on the

normally occupied space (habitable space)
layout plan and summary tables of total area
compliance according to the detailed credit
requirement stated in Appendix 9.3. Detailed
requirements of credit compliance are
provided in Appendix9.3.
All non-residential Provide sufficient permanent openings by

buildings & demonstrating the compliance of following
Residents’ requirements on location and size of
Recreational ventilation openings:
Facilities (RRF)
1 Net free unobstructed area of operable
wall openings directly to the outdoors
which the spaces are permanently open
to is equivalent to 9.5% or 12.5% of the
net occupied floor area.
2 Interior room on occupied floor without

direct openings to outdoors is ventilated
through adjoining rooms, the opening
between rooms shall be permanently
unobstructed (Door between rooms are
deemed as permanently opening) and
have a free area of not less than 8% of
the area of the interior room or less than
2.3m2.
Provide mark-up on layout plan highlighting

permanent openings on envelope and interior
zone. Provide calculation of required natural
ventilated openings area and the equivalent
net occupied floor area in order to
demonstrate the credit compliance.
2) Active System Design Improvement
2.1 Air-conditioning equipment:

Provide summary table of COP improvement in percentage (%)
for each air-conditioning equipment as compared with the

corresponding minimum COP at full load at specific standard rating

condition specified under Section 6.12 of BEC 2018 [5]
For room air-conditioners (i.e. single package window type and

wall mounted split type), the system performance should be
compared with the scope of the Mandatory Energy Efficiency
Labelling Scheme (MEELS) under Energy Efficiency (Labelling of
Products) Ordinance (Cap. 598).
For assessment consistency, the following table provides the

approximated equivalent COP table that converted with reference
to the Code of Practice on Energy Labelling of Products 2018 [6]
and BEC technical guidelines [7]. For assessment purpose, the
equivalent COP value will be used as the baseline for all single
packaged type and wall-mount split type equipment:
Type of air-conditioners Equivalent COP

Single Package Type
2.74
(Categories 1 - 2)
Split Type
3.43
(Categories 3 – 4)
Project using district cooling system and project without any air-
conditioning installation (or not newly install with any air-
conditioning system) are not assess under these criteria.
2.2 Lighting System:

Provide summary table of lighting power reduction in percentage
(%) for whole building lighting installation by area-weighted
method# compared with Section 5.4 of BEC 2018 [8] (i.e. including
carpark lighting system).

BEC Case: � �
Design case
BEC Case
Lighting power density (LPD) for baseline calculation should follow

BEC 2018 Section 5.4.
For spaces that are not governed by the code, LPD baseline
should be developed per Appendix 9.2, Interior General Lighting
System section, Baseline case column.
2018
6 Code of Practice on Energy Labelling of Products - Electrical and Mechanical Services Department HKSAR, 2018
7 Technical Guidelines on Code of Practice for Energy Efficiency of Building Services Installation – Electrical and Mechanical
Services Department HKSAR, 2018
2018

Exclude those lighting installations as specified in BEC TG-2018

[9] Section 5.1.2.in the calculation.
2.3 Lift and escalator installation:

If there is no lift and escalators installation within the project site,
this criterion is not applicable.
With reference to Section 8 of BEC 2018 [8], provide summary

table on the maximum allowable electrical power reduction of lift
and escalator installation.
For non-BEC Governing Building Types:
1) Air-conditioning system
For spaces that are not governed by the BEC 2018 based on Cap. 610
Schedule 1 & 2, it is required to demonstrate the COP improvement
in percentage (%) for each air-conditioning equipment compared with
the corresponding minimum coefficient of performance (COP) at full
load at specific standard rating condition given from the code
requirement under Section 6.12 of BEC 2018 [10].
For project connecting to a district cooling system, or project without

an air-conditioning system (or newly install an air-conditioning system)
is not covered in these criteria.
2) Lighting System:
Provide summary table of lighting power reduction in percentage (%)
for whole building lighting installation by area-weighted method
compared with the relevant space type as identified in Section 5.4 of
BEC 2018. (i.e. including carpark lighting system)

BEC Case: � �
Design case
BEC Case
Lighting power density (LPD) for baseline calculation should follow
BEC 2018 Section 5.4.
For spaces that are not governed by the code, LPD baseline should
be developed per Appendix 9.2, Interior General Lighting System
section, Baseline case column.
Lighting installations in BEC TG-2018 clauses 5.1.2 are excluded for

calculation.
9 Technical Guidelines on Code of Practice for Energy Efficiency of Building Services Installation – Electrical and Mechanical
Services Department HKSAR, 2018
2018

3) Lift and escalator installation:

If there is no lift and escalators installation within the project site, this
credit is not applicable.
Refer to Section 8 of BEC 2018, provide summary table on the

maximum allowable electrical power reduction of lift and escalator
installation.
The report should be endorsed by a locally qualified professional who

has at least 5-year of relevant experience in green building services
system design.

Option 1 – Performance Path
EU_02(Path1)_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template
 
for EU 2 Path 1 with
[Form S-A1 – A8]
EU_02(Path1)_01 Endorsed Building Energy
 
Performance Assessment Report
EU_02(Path1)_02 CV of the professional as per
 
EU_02(Path1)_03 Input and Output Simulation report
which is generated from simulation  
software
EU_02(Path1)_04 Supporting documents for input,
based on project development
status, including:
i. OTTV/ RTTV calculation sheet
based on the requirements of
Buildings Department [11] for
baseline and proposed case
ii. Indoor design criteria from  
project team highlighting indoor
thermal condition, occupancy
density, fresh air flow rate
requirement, internal load,
equipment load and ventilation
rate
iii. System and equipment
specifications (for PA) and
schedules (and catalogues) (PA
and FA)
a) All air-conditioning
equipment highlighting
COP, cooling/ heating
capacity, input power, flow
rate, etc., as well as energy
recovery appliance
highlighting efficiency
11 Buildings Department - Guideline on Design and Construction Requirements for Energy Efficiency of Residential Buildings 2014;
PNAP APP-156 - Design and Construction Requirements for Energy Efficiency of Residential Buildings; PNAP APP-67 – Energy
Efficiency of Buildings, Building (Energy Efficiency) Regulation; Code of Practice for Overall Thermal Transfer Value in Buildings
1995.

b) All lift and escalator

highlighting capacity,
motor power and energy
saving control system
c) All water heater (if
applicable) highlighting
installed power
d) All ventilation fans
highlighting input power
and flow rate
e) All lighting fixtures
highlighting designed
space-specified LPD
and/or input lighting power
f) Other system (e.g. on-site
renewable energy
system) highlighting the
key energy performance
parameters
iv. Pre-input calculation for
modelling (if any), including but
not limited to:
a) Simplified Fan Power
input
b) Lighting Power Density
v. Exceptional Calculation
vi. Schematics drawings for
building services systems
vii. Layout plans for building
services systems (optional for
PA)
Option 2 – Prescriptive Path

EU_02(Path2)_00 BEAM Plus NB submission
 
template for EU 2 Path 2 with
[Form S-B1 – B5]
EU_02(Path2)_01 Endorsed Prescriptive approach
 
summary report
EU_02(Path2)_02 CV of the professional as
 
per requirements in the
assessment
EU_02(Path2)_03 Supporting documents for report
calculation, based on project
development status, including:
i. RTTV / OTTV calculation  
sheet based on the
requirements of Buildings
Department [12] and the
corresponding improvement
1995.

ii. Floor layout plan showing all

(habitable spaces), elevation
drawings highlighting the
locations of openable windows,
schedules of usable floor area,
schedule of openable window
size and summary table of
usable floor area illustrating
compliance with the detailed
requirements stated in  
Appendix 9.2 (for Residential
Buildings)
iii. Floor layout plan showing the
occupied floor spaces,
elevation and section drawings
with highlight of all permanent
openings on envelope and
interior zone, schedule of net
occupied floor areas, schedule
of net free unobstructed area of
permanent openings of each
occupied space and summary
tables of net occupied floor
areas complying with the credit
requirements (for Non-
residential Buildings/
Residents' Recreational
Facilities)
iv. HVAC air-side and water-side
schematic drawings highlighting
all air-conditioning equipment
v. Air-conditioning equipment
schedules (and catalogues) (for
PA and FA) with COP at full load
vi. Lighting Power density
calculation
vii. Lighting schedule highlighting
installed luminaires types
viii. Representative Lighting Layout
drawing
ix. Lift and escalator location
markup on drawing plan
x. Lift and escalator specifications
(for PA) and schedules (and
catalogues) (for PA and FA)
None
(b) Related Credits
None

5 Energy Use 5.1 Energy Use Reduction & Control
EU 3 Peak Electricity Demand Reduction
Objective Encourage energy conservation and methods to reduce peak electricity

demand.
Credit Requirement
Option 1 – Based on EU 2 Performance Path:
1 to 3 credits for peak electricity demand reduction by the following saving
percentage:
Percentage of reduction of peak

Credit
electricity demand / %
1 5%
2 10%
3 15%
Option 2 – Based on EU 2 Prescriptive Path:

1 credit for EU 3 when 4 credit points in EU 2 (prescriptive path) is achieved.
2 credits for EU 3 when 7 credit points in EU 2 (prescriptive path) is achieved.
Assessment
Option 1 – Based on EU 2 Performance Path:
Use the same whole building energy analysis of baseline and proposed
case buildings in EU 2 Path 1 (Performance Path) and provide Building
Peak Electricity Demand report that must be certified by a locally qualified
professional with building energy modelling experience.
The Building Peak Electricity Demand report should include the following
contents:
1) Introduction
1.1 Methodology of energy performance assessment, including the

details of the energy simulation software and Exceptional
Calculation Method (if any) used
1.2 Project information
2) Description of Energy Saving Measures
3) Modelling Parameters
3.1 Operating schedule

3.2 Input parameters summary table

4) Results and discussion

4.1 Provide diagrams showing the monthly profiles of peak electricity
demand (with breakdown by end-use) of both baseline and
proposed cases
4.2 Identify the month with the highest electricity demand throughout
a year in the baseline case
4.3 Identify the month with the highest electricity demand throughout
a year the proposed case
4.4 Calculate the percentage reduction of the peak electricity demand
Proposed case peak electricity demand (kW)

�1- � ×100%
Baseline case peak electricity demand (kW)
The peak electricity demands in the baseline case and the

proposed case used for the percentage calculation do not have to
take place in the same month.
The report should be endorsed by a locally qualified professional
who has at least 8-year of relevant experience in building energy
modelling.
Option 2 – Based on EU 2 Prescriptive Path:

Demonstrate a minimum 4-credit achievement in EU 2 (prescriptive path)
and provide EU 3 achievement summary report that must be certified by a
locally qualified professional with relevant experience in green building
services system design.
The EU 3 achievement summary report should include the following
contents:
1) Introduction
2) Achievement of EU 2 Path 2
3) Credits achievement in EU3
The report should be endorsed by a locally qualified professional who has

at least 5-year of relevant experience in green building services system
design.
Submittals
Option 1 – Performance Path
EU_03(Path1)_00 BEAM Plus NB submission

 
template for EU 3
EU_03(Path1)_01 Endorsed Building Peak Electricity

 
Demand report

EU_03(Path1)_02 Input and Output Simulation report

which is generated from simulation  
software
Supporting documents for input,

EU_03(Path1)_03
based on project development
status, including:
i. OTTV/ RTTV calculation
sheet based on the
requirements of Buildings
Department [1] for baseline
and proposed case
ii. Indoor design criteria from
project team highlighting
indoor thermal condition,
occupancy density, fresh air
flow rate requirement,
internal load, equipment
load and ventilation rate
iii. System and equipment
schedules) (and
catalogues) (for PA and FA)
a) All air- conditioning
equipment highlighting
COP, cooling/ heating
 
capacity, input power,
flow rate, etc. as well as
energy recovery
appliance highlighting
efficiency
b) All lift and escalator
highlighting capacity,
motor power and energy
saving control system
c) All water heater (if
applicable) highlighting
installed power
d) All ventilation fans
highlighting input power
and flow rate
e) All lighting fixtures
highlighting designed
space-specific LPD
and/or input lighting
power
f) Other systems (e.g. on-
site renewable energy
system) highlighting the
key energy performance
parameters
iv. Pre-input calculation for
modelling (if any), including
but not limited to:
a) Simplified Fan Power
input
b) Lighting Power Density
v. Exceptional Calculation
vi. Schematic drawings for
building services systems
vii. Layout plans for building
services systems (optional
for PA)


 
Option 2 – Prescriptive Path
EU_03(Path2)_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template

 
for EU 3
EU_03(Path2)_01 Endorsed EU3 achievement

 
summary with indication of EU2
prescriptive approach achievement

 
EU_03(Path2)_03 Endorsed prescriptive approach

 
summary report in EU2
None
(b) Related Credits
1995

EU 4 Metering and Monitoring
Extent of Application EU 4a: All non-residential buildings and common area of residential
buildings
EU 4b: All non-residential buildings and common areas of residential
buildings and with tenanted areas
Objective Enable building operators to measure, monitor and develop measures to

improve the performance of the building's engineering systems
Credit Requirement (a) Fundamental Metering and Monitoring

1 credit for providing energy monitoring system for equipment and
systems in spaces.
1 BONUS credit for providing performance auditing monitoring

system for equipment and systems in spaces.
(b) Metering for Tenanted Area

1 BONUS credit for allowing monitoring provision of tenants’
energy consumption.
Assessment (a) Fundamental Metering and Monitoring

Metering Coverage
Energy monitoring provision covers the energy consumption (both
electricity and gas) of the equipment, unit in (kWh)
Performance Auditing monitoring provision covers the system
capacity ratings and operating characteristics. The corresponding
metering coverage should refer to the following requirements:
1.1 For all common area of Residential Buildings
1.1.1 Provide an energy monitoring provision for future facility

management to review occasionally the below end-use
energy consumption:
a) Each type of equipment in HVAC system
b) Lighting and small power system
c) Each Lift & Escalator
d) Each equipment in Plumbing and Drainage system
1.2 For Non-Residential Buildings, with reference to EMSD Code of

Practice for Building Energy Audit 2018 [1]:
1.2.1 Provide energy monitoring system for all following

installations in landlord’s controlled area, where present
in the project. Terminal unit is not in the assessment
scope.
1 Code of Practice for Building Energy Audit – Electrical and Mechanical Services Department HKSAR, 2018

a) Each equipment in HVAC water-side system (chiller

plant, heating plant & heat rejection plant);
b) Each equipment in HVAC air-side system (Air

handling unit);
c) Each equipment in Fresh Air system (Primary air

unit);
d) Each gas equipment in cooling or heating plant (e.g.

Absorption chiller plant, centralized boiler plant); and
e) Each equipment in plumbing and drainage system

energy consumption
1.2.2 Provide energy monitoring system for all the following

end-use in landlord‘s controlled area (Allow a minimum
one single meter for each end-use):
a) Variable refrigerant volume air-conditioner energy

consumption;
b) Car park ventilation system energy consumption;
c) Toilet ventilation system energy consumption;
d) Lift system energy consumption;
e) Escalator system energy consumption; and
f) Lighting and receptacle power energy consumption
Requirements of monitoring coverage are summarized as below:
Table EU4-1:
System (if applicable) Energy Performance

monitoring Auditing
Outdoor Condition • Air Temperature

(oC)
• N/A
• Humidity (RH)
• Daylight (Lux)
• Supply & Return
HVAC Each Equipment in
Water
System HVAC (Water Side)
temperature (oC)
- Chillers • Electricity
(kW and • Water Flow rate
- Heat kWh) (m3/s)
pumps • Water Pressure
- Pumps (Pa)
- Heat • Capacity Rating
Rejection

• Supply & Return

Water
Each Equipment in temperature (oC)
HVAC (Water Side) Water Flow rate
• Fuel (kW •
- Absorption and kWh) (m3/s)
Chiller • Water Pressure
- Boiler (Pa)
• Capacity Rating
Each Equipment in
HVAC (Air Side)
• Supply & Return
- Primary Air/ Air temperature
• Electricity
Air (oC)
(kW and
Handling
kWh) • Flow rate (m3/s)
Unit Fans
- Return Air • Pressure (Pa)
Fans
- Free
Cooling
Fans
• Electricity
VRV and Unitary
(kW and • N/A
System
kWh)
• CO / NOx
Ventilation System concentration
- Carpark level (if
Ventilation applicable)
- Toilet • Electricity
• Flow rate (m3/s)
Ventilation (kW and
(Jet Fan is
(≥2.5kW kWh)
excluded)
each)
• Pressure head
(m) (Jet Fan is
excluded)
Lighting • Electricity
Lighting and
System (kW and • N/A
receptacle system
kWh)
Plumbing
Each equipment in • Electricity
and
Plumbing and (kW and • N/A
Drainage
Drainage kWh)
System
Lift and
• Electricity
Escalators Each Lift and
(kW and • N/A
System Escalators*
kWh)
1 Credit 1 BONUS
* A single meter monitoring the entire lift/ escalator system is acceptable,

provided that the monitoring system can provide individual reading of each
lift and escalator.

Monitoring provision Requirement (Datapoint, Sensors or

Meters)
1) Electricity metering should comply with BS EN [2] accuracy class
1 or equivalent.
2) Sensors for performance sub-metering should meet the minimum

accuracy requirements in ASHRAE Standard 114 [3] or similar
equivalent.
Interval and Recording

1) Monitoring record should be at intervals of one hour or less and
capable to record the item as required.
2) For residential development, all data recorded by the sub-

metering system and monitoring system should be collected
monthly and be kept for at least 36 months.
3) For all non-residential development, all data recorded by the sub-

metering system and monitoring system should be transferred to
a Building Management System (BMS) or other data collection
system. The BMS or other data collection system should have
sufficient capacity to store for at least 36 months.
b) Metering for Tenanted Area

Demonstrate compliance by selecting one of the following paths for all
tenanted area:
Compliance Path 1: Landlord to install monitoring provision

In all tenanted areas, allows separate monitoring of electricity use by:
1) HVAC system;
2) Lighting; and
3) Small power
Compliance Path 2: Tenants to install monitoring provision

Provide contractually binding lease document signed by both the
project owner and the tenants which explicitly state the requirements
of obtaining electricity usage data from the tenant’s meters. The
tenant’s meters should separately monitor HVAC system, lighting and
small power and should also be able to provide record at intervals of
one hour or less and capable to record both electricity consumption
(in kWh) and electricity demand (in kW and kVA).
For both paths, the monitoring provision should provide record at

intervals of one hour or less and capable to record both electricity
consumption (in kWh) and electricity demand (in kW and kVA).
2 British Standard BS EN 62053-11:2003. Electricity metering equipment (a.c.). Particular requirements. Electromechanical meters
for active energy (classes 0.5, 1 and 2)
3 ASHRAE. Standard 114-1986: Energy Management Control Systems Instrumentation, American Society of Heating,
Refrigerating and Air-conditioning Engineers, Inc., USA. 1987.

All data recorded should be transferred to a Building Management

System (BMS) or other forms of data collection facilities. The BMS or
data collection facilities should have sufficient capacity to store for at
least 36 months.
OR
A contractually binding lease document, with reference to HKGBC
Green Tenancy Driver [4], is required to establish to ensure data could
be shared between project owner and tenants, which explicitly state:
1) The aim of improving the environmental performance of the
building thereof the cost reduction and indoor quality
2) The requirements of obtaining electricity usage data from the

tenant
3) Data and relevant information to be share between Landlord and

Tenants are to be kept confidential unless for the purpose of
management of the building
4) Landlord and Tenant are agreed to work collaboratively in setting

up a Green Tenancy Committee (GTC)
5) Responsibility of the GTC at minimum:

a) Sharing the building operation data
b) Review the environmental performance of the premise
c) Setting up a Green Office Tenancy Plan with annual

sustainability targets
d) Review the target and progress periodically
Submittals (a) Fundamental Metering and Monitoring
EU_04a_00 BEAM Plus NB submission

 
template for EU 4a
EU_04a_01 Electrical schematics highlighting

 
all locations of metering
EU_04a_02 Control diagrams of central chiller
 
plant monitoring system
EU_04a_03 Specifications of all metering and
measurement equipment
 -
[OR]
Catalogues of all metering and

measurement equipment - 
4 HKGBC. Green Tenancy Driver for Office Buildings. [ONLINE]. Available at:
https://www.hkgbc.org.hk/eng/engagement/guidebooks/green-tenancy-driver/index.jsp. [Accessed April 2021].

EU_04a_04 Specifications of BMS or data

collection facilities (for non-
 -
residential development only)
[OR]
Catalogues of BMS or data

collection facilities (for non- - 
EU_04a_05 Schematic drawings and point

schedule of BMS or data  
collection facilities (for non-
EU_04a_06 Operation manual (for BONUS - 

credit only)
EU_04a_07 Extract of relevant page(s) from the

GBP showing the project nature  
(substantiation for non-applicability
only)
(b) Metering for Tenanted Area
EU_04b_00 BEAM Plus NB submission

 
template for EU 4b
For Compliance Path 1, please submit the followings: PA FA
EU_04b_01 Electrical schematics highlighting

all locations of metering  
EU_04b_02 Specifications of all metering and

measurement equipment  -
[OR]
Catalogues of all metering and

measurement equipment - 
EU_04b_03 Specifications of BMS or data

collection facilities  -
[OR]
Catalogues of BMS or data

collection facilities - 
EU_04b_04 Schematic drawings and point

schedule of BMS or data  
collection facilities
EU_04b_05 Operation manual

- 

For Compliance Path 2, please submit the following: PA FA
EU_04b_06 Undertaking letter from the project

owner declaring that a contractually  -
binding lease document will be
established
For Compliance Path 1 & 2, please submit the PA FA
following:
EU_04b_07 Contractually binding lease

document - 

None
(b) Related Credits
IDCM 13 Digital Facility Management Interface
IDCM 14 Occupant Engagement Platform

While this credit assesses the electricity consumption metering and
monitoring system in the building, IDCM 13 and IDCM 14 encourages
processing the data collected to useful information for facility
managers’ and occupants’ use.

5 Energy Use 5.2 Renewable and Alternative Energy Generation
EU 5 Renewable and Alternative Energy Systems
Objective Encourage the wider application of renewable energy sources in buildings.
Credit Requirement (a) Solar Energy Feasibility Study

1 credit for evaluating the building roof’s potential for harnessing solar
energy.
(b) On-site Renewable Energy Application

1 to 5 credits plus 5 additional BOUNS for using on-site renewable
energy systems to offset annual building energy consumption.
Percentage of annual building

Credit energy consumption
1 0.2%
2 0.4%
3 0.6%
4 0.8%
5 1%
1B 1.2%
2B 1.4%
3B 1.6%
4B 1.8%
5B 2%
Assessment (a) Solar Energy Feasibility Study

Conduct a feasibility study to evaluate the potential of standalone and
building-integrated installation in harnessing solar energy including
photovoltaic and solar water heating. The feasibility study report should
include the following contents in around 10 A4 pages which should
suffice for the purpose (however, the 10 A4 pages is not a straight limit):

1) Consideration of PV, BIPV or Solar thermal potential installation

1.1 Number of potential surfaces
1.2 Potential surfaces area
1.3 Height variation between roofs
1.4 Potential shading from the surroundings including trees and
adjacent buildings
1.5 Potential shading from on-site building services equipment
1.6 Other (proposed)
2) Technical generation potential of solar energy

2.1 Expected solar peak capacity
2.2 Expected annual yield
2.3 Project building energy use intensity (Default value could be
used if EU 2 Performance path is not attempted) and the
estimated percentage of reduction
3) Economics of solar energy

3.1 Upfront installation costs
3.2 Anticipated maintenance cost
3.3 Anticipated annual electricity bills
3.4 Anticipated cost saving
3.5 Payback period
4) Conclusions
4.1 Conclude whether the harnessing of solar energy is feasible for
the project
5) Roll-out plan (if concluded to be feasible)

5.1 Propose access and safety measures if solar energy is to
be harnessed
5.2 Propose recommendations to refine the roof design to
maximise the usable roof space for M&E equipment
The feasibility should be endorsed by a locally qualified professional

who has at least 3 years of relevant experience in renewable energy.
Note that the feasibility study imposes no obligation for implementation
but encourages consideration of solar energy harnessing.
(b) Renewable Energy Application

Calculate the percentage of annual building energy consumption
obtained from all the on-site renewable energy sources with reference
to the design value calculated in EU 2 Reduction of CO2 emissions.
Annual energy generated by Onsite renewable energy systems (kWh)
Annual energy use (kWh)

The calculation of annual energy provided by the on-site renewable

energy systems should take into account of the followings:
1) Diurnal and seasonal variations in the external environmental
conditions; and
2) Energy used and lost by the renewable energy systems should

be discounted from the systems output
The annual energy use figure should be derived from the design case
as stated in EU 2 Performance Path. The tenant’s electrical loads, which
are not controlled or influenced by the applicant, should be excluded
from the annual energy use.
For systems that generate energy from on-site renewable sources, the
energy generated should count into the “annual energy generated by
on-site renewable energy systems” in the above equation.
For systems that provide services directly from on-site renewable

sources (e.g. solar hot water system), which will otherwise use fuel or
electricity to produce those services, the equivalent amount of
electricity to produce those services should count into the “annual
energy use” in the above equation.
Projects adopting EU 2 prescriptive path can pursue the credit by

providing an estimation based on the reference figure in Table EU5-1.
Examples of renewable energy systems accepted in this credit include:

1) Solar photovoltaic (PV) System
2) Solar water heating system
3) Wind power system
4) Bio-gas heating / electricity generation
5) Biofuel
Project building energy use could make reference the following default
figures if EU2 Performance path is not attempted [1],
Table EU5-1
# Building Type Total Energy use Controlled by
kWh/m2 Applicant
1 Office 222 40%
2 Enclosed and 268 50%
strip malls
3 Retail shop 180 50%
1 Commercial Buildings Energy Consumption Survey (CBECS) Building energy intensity Data

4 Educational 166 100%

5 Other 334 100%
The calculation of percentage of annual building energy consumption

obtained from all the on-site renewable energy sources shall be
endorsed by a locally qualified professional who has at least 3 years of
relevant experience in renewable energy.
Submittals (a) Solar Energy Feasibility Study

 
template for EU 5a
EU_05a_01 Endorsed Feasibility study report  *
EU_05a_02 CV of the professional as per

 *
*If the credit is achieved in PA, no further submission is required in FA
(b) Renewable Energy Application

 
template for EU 5b
EU_05b_01 Specifications of on-site renewable

energy system
 -
Catalogues of on-site
renewable energy system
- 
EU_05b_02 Elevation and layout plan

highlighting the location of each on-  
site renewable energy system
EU_05b_03 Schematic diagram of each

 
renewable energy system
EU_05b_04 Endorsed calculation of annual

yield of each on-site renewable  
energy system and assumptions
EU_05b_05 Endorsed Calculation of

percentage of annual building
 
energy consumption obtained from
on-site renewable energy sources

EU_05b_06 CV of the professional as per

 

EMSD – HK RE Net. [ONLINE]. Available at:
http://re.emsd.gov.hk/english/gen/overview/over_intro.html. [Accessed
April 2021].
EMSD – Energy Land. [ONLINE]. Available at:

http://www.energyland.emsd.gov.hk/en/energy/energy_use/application.
html. [Accessed April 2021].
EMSD – New & Renewable Energy. [ONLINE]. Available at:

http://www.emsd.gov.hk/en/energy_efficiency/new_renewable_energy.
GovHK – Renewable Energy. [ONLINE]. Available at:

https://www.gov.hk/en/residents/environment/renewable/index.htm.
HKSAR Government, Hongkong Electric Co. Ltd. and HK Electric

Investments Ltd. Scheme of Control Agreement. [ONLINE]. Available at:
http://www.enb.gov.hk/sites/default/files/en/node66/new_HKE_SCA_e
ng.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].
HKSAR Government, CLP Power Hong Kong Ltd. and Castle Peak
Power Company Ltd. Scheme of Control Agreement. [ONLINE].
Available at:
http://www.enb.gov.hk/sites/default/files/en/node66/new_CLP_SCA_en
g.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].
(b) Related Credits


BEAM Plus appreciates comprehensive energy saving measures.
Thorough consideration of passive design, active design and
renewable energy will help buildings achieve significant reduction in
energy consumption.

5 Energy Use 5.3 Energy Efficient Equipment
EU 6 Air-Conditioning Units
Extent of Application All buildings using variable refrigerant flow (VRF) units, window or split-type
air conditioners as major source of air conditioning.
Objective To ensure that the installation of air-conditioning units is able to provide
near optimum performance.
Credit Requirement (a) Compliance with Manufacturer’s Recommendation

1 credit for complying with manufacturer’s recommended installation
positions for optimal heat rejection.

1 credit for demonstrating the operating temperatures of all variable
refrigerant flow (VRF) units, window type, split-type or packaged type
air-conditioning units do not exceed manufacturer’s recommendation
for the specified COP in the manufacturer’s technical specifications
via computational simulation techniques.
Assessment (a) Compliance with Manufacturer’s Recommendation

1 For projects installing AC unit
1.1 Demonstrate that all air-conditioning units, including variable
refrigerant flow (VRF) units, window type and split type, fulfill
the manufacturer’s recommended installation positions for
optimal heat rejection (not maintenance access space
provision). The minimum separation criteria for the following
shall be met:
a. Separation from wall;
b. Separation with other units; and
c. Separation from wall at air-intake side.
1.2 Demonstrate that all installations comply with the refrigerant

equivalent pipe-length of manufacturer’s requirement for the
specified COP in the manufacturer’s technical specifications:
2 For projects providing AC platform but AC unit is not

installed
2.1 Demonstrate that all air-conditioning platforms are capable to

fulfill at least 3 manufacturers’ recommended installation
requirements for optimal heat rejection (not maintenance
access space requirement). The minimum separation criteria
for the following shall be met:
a. Separation from wall;
b. Separation with other units; and
c. Separation from wall at air-intake side.

2.2 Demonstrate that all provisional installation point (AC

platform) locations comply with at least 3 manufacturers’
refrigerant equivalent pipe-length of manufactures’
requirement for the specified COP in the manufacturers’
technical specifications:
Demonstrate, using Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD), that all air-

conditioning units do not exceed the manufacturer’s recommended
operative temperature.
For outdoor installations, make the following assumptions:

1) All wall surfaces are flat and air-tight;
2) Outdoor dry bulb temperature of 35°C;
3) No external wind effect; air is driven purely by buoyancy effect;
4) The effect of solar radiation is negligible; and
5) Air-conditioning units operate at full rated capacity.
Prepare a simulation report including the following content:

1) Objectives;
2) Building layout;
3) Information of air-conditioner installations including brand,
model, dimension, cooling capacity (kW) and installed locations;
4) Modelling methodology;
5) Modelling assumptions;
6) Screen shots of all input parameters;
7) Results including temperature of all air-conditioning units; and
8) Conclusions.
The simulation report should be endorsed by a locally qualified

professional with at least 3 years of relevant experience in CFD
simulation.

Submittals a) Compliance with Manufacturer’s Recommendation

 
template for EU 6a
EU_06a_01 Equipment schedules of VRF

 
units, window and/or split-type
air-conditioners
EU_06a_02 Schematics showing the type(s)

and locations of AC equipment  
installed
EU_06a_03 Specifications of air-conditioning
units
 -
EU_06a_04 Representing manufacturers'
information of the 3 separation - 
criteria and refrigerant equivalent
pipe-length requirements (for
projects with AC units installed by
tenants)
EU_06a_05 Scaled layout plans showing the

installation locations of VRF
units, window and/or split-type  
air- conditioners to illustrate that
the 3 separation criteria listed
and refrigerant equivalent pipe
length requirements can be met
EU_06a_06 Catalogue of air-conditioning units - 

(for projects with AC units
installed by the project owner)
EU_06a_07 Manufacturer’s installation

details for the 3 separation - 
criteria and refrigerant equivalent
pipe-length (for projects with AC
units installed by the project
owner)

b) Performance Verification

 
template for EU 6b
EU_06b_01 Simulation report  
EU_06b_02 CV of the professional as

per requirements in the  
assessment
None
(b) Related Credits
None

EU 7 Clothes Drying Facilities
Extent of Application Residential buildings
Objective Encourage wider use of natural means in lieu of gas or electricity for clothes
drying purposes.
Credit Requirement (a) Provision of clothes drying facilities

1 credit for providing permanent clothes drying facilities provision for
all residential units under suitable location conditions.

1 BONUS credit for demonstrating the effectiveness of permanent
clothes drying facilities via computational analysis.
Assessment (a) Provision of Clothes Drying Facilities

Fulfill below requirements for each permanent clothes drying facilities
provision for each dwelling unit:
1) Permanent clothes drying facilities provision that are protected
from water droplets and debris falling from higher levels; and
2) Permanent clothes drying facilities provision that are not adversely

affected by air pollutants, including smoke, fumes and pollutants
emitted from water heaters, cooking exhausts, discharges from
air-conditioning units. The facilities provision is required to be
located 0.5m horizontal distance away from air-conditioning units
and 1.5m horizontal distance away from kitchen exhausts.

Prepare a computational analysis report with the following contents:
1) Description of the surrounding environment;
2) Building orientation;
3) Locations of drying facilities;
4) Methodology of study not limited to the software tools used,
assumptions, calculation methods and screenshots of input
parameters; and
5) Demonstration of the drying facilities effectiveness by meeting
one of the below requirements.
5.1 Sunlight
1 Hours, with 5-minute reporting interval, of direct solar
exposure in winter solstice (冬至日)

5.2 Wind
Minimum wind velocity of 0.5m/s. Winter prevailing wind
with the highest wind frequency should be used.
The simulation report should be endorsed by a locally

qualified professional with 3 years of relevant experience in
computational simulation.
Submittals (a) Provision of Clothes Drying Facilities
EU_07a_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template for

 
EU 7a
EU_07a_01 Layout plans to show location of clothes
drying facilities with respect to air  
conditioning plant and kitchen vents
EU_07a_02 Section plans to demonstrate the falling

 
protections for the cloth drying facilities
EU_07a_03 Supporting documents (e.g. declaration

letter from the project owner/ developer,
tender specification, etc.) showing that  
clothes drying racks will be provided to
the occupant
EU_07a_04 Relevant page(s) of the General
Building Plan to show the development
is not a residential development or does
 
not consist of residential portion
(Substantiation for non-applicability
only)
EU_07b_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template

 
for EU 7b
EU_07b_01 CV of the professional as per

 
EU_07b_02 Endorsed computational analysis

 
report

None
(b) Related Credits
None

EU 8 Energy Efficient Appliances
Extent of Application Residential buildings and hotel.
Objective Encourage the wider use of energy efficient appliances.
Credit Requirement 1 credit when 60% of total rated power of appliances are certified energy
efficient products.
2 credit when 80% of total rated power of appliances are certified energy
efficient products.
Assessment This credit assesses only the appliances provided by the developer.
The electrical appliances covered in this credit include the following items
covered by the EMSD Energy Efficiency Labelling [per January 2017 version
[1]. In other words, only appliances which are governed by the EMSD Energy
Efficiency Labelling will be included in the denominator for percentage
calculation.
1) Refrigerating appliances
2) Washing machines
3) Dehumidifiers
4) Electric clothes dryers
5) Household Electric storage water heaters
6) Television sets
7) Electric rice-cookers
8) Electronic ballasts
9) Induction cookers
10) Microwave ovens
11) Photocopiers
12) Fax machines
13) Multifunction devices
14) Printers
15) LCD monitors
16) Computers
17) Hot / cold bottled water dispensers
18) Domestic gas instantaneous water heaters
19) Gas cookers
Provide a schedule of all electrical appliances including the location, quantity,
model and the rated power.
1 Hong Kong Voluntary Energy Efficiency Labelling Scheme (EELS) website. [ONLINE]. Available at:
http://www.emsd.gov.hk/en/energy_efficiency/voluntary_energy_efficiency_labelling_scheme/how_to_apply/index.html.

The appliances should achieve Grade 1 under the Mandatory Energy

Efficiency Labelling Scheme [2] or Grade 1 (for appliance types with ‘Grading
type’ Energy Label)/ “Recognition Type” Energy Label under the Voluntary
Energy Efficiency Labelling Scheme [3].
Submittals
EU_08_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template for  

EU 8
EU_08_01 Schedule of all electrical appliances  
EU_08_02 Specifications that demonstrated the

control of purchasing energy efficient label
for the project
 -
EU_08_03 Catalogues of all electrical appliances

highlighting the compliance Energy - 
Efficiency Labelling
EU_08_04 Extract of relevant page(s) from the GBP

to show that the development is not a
residential / hotel development or does not  
consist of residential / hotel portion

None
(b) Related Credits

None
2 Mandatory Energy Efficiency Labelling Scheme [ONLINE]. Available at:

http://www.emsd.gov.hk/en/energy_efficiency/mandatory_energy_efficiency_labelling_scheme/ [Accessed April 2021].
3 Voluntary Energy Efficiency Labelling Scheme[ONLINE]. Available at:
http://www.emsd.gov.hk/en/energy_efficiency/voluntary_energy_efficiency_labelling_scheme/ [Accessed April 2021].

BEAM Plus New Buildings Version 2.0 Water Use - WU
6 Water Use 6.P Prerequisite

6.1 Water Conservation
6.2 Effluent
6.3 Water Harvesting / Recycling
Introduction Water is known to be in scarce supply in many parts of the world. Globally,
water shortage is already a major issue. Hong Kong has been enjoying a
reliable and economic supply of most of its fresh water needs from the
Mainland.
However, with increased industrialisation of Guangdong Province there is
likely to be greater competition for water supply in the pearl river region,
meaning that water conservation may become a significant issue for Hong
Kong in the future. Hong Kong should look into ways to improve the
utilisation and conservation of water resources.
6.P Prerequisite WU P1 Minimum Water Saving Performance
Background In Hong Kong, WSD ensures that the quality of drinking water provided to
customers complies fully with the Hong Kong Drinking Water Standards,
currently being the corresponding guideline values or provisional guideline
values in the fourth edition of the World Health Organization’s Guidelines
for Drinking-water Quality published in 2011 (WHO Guidelines). Drinking
water quality, however, can be affected by the condition of a building’s
inside service. To safeguard tap water quality, property owners and
building managers are advised to carry out proper maintenance of inside
service and regular cleaning of water storage tanks. While water quality
satisfying WSD’s requirement is the mandatory requirement, water
conservation is another focus area under water category.
6.1 Water Conservation WU 1 Annual Water Use

WU 3 Water Efficient Appliances
WU 4 Water Leakage Detection
WU 5 Twin Tank System
WU 6 Cooling Tower Water
Background Despite the continued decline in industrial water consumption there is an

annual trend of rising consumption due to increasing domestic
consumption. Based on projected population growth, the domestic and
service uses, being the key components of our fresh water consumption,
are expected to increase. Industrial use, for the same period, is expected
to drop because of further decline in water intensive industries. Fresh Water
Cooling Tower Scheme (FWCT Scheme) will contribute to consumption by
the non-domestic sector.
Water from the Dongjiang River in Guangdong continues to be Hong
Kong’s main source of supply and accounting for about 70-80 percent of
Hong Kong’s needs. Hong Kong has limited options to reduce dependency
on the Mainland, where water resources are becoming increasingly limited.

BEAM Plus New Buildings Version 2.0 Water Use - WU
There is opportunity to reduce potable water use through better design,

management and user awareness.
6.2 Effluent WU 7 Effluent Discharge to Foul Sewers
Background While 80% of users in Hong Kong are supplied with seawater for flushing
purposes, there are environmental impacts associated with the treatment
and delivery of seawater, and the load imposed on municipal sewage
treatment plants. Measures taken to reduce volumes of effluent flows have
significant environmental benefits.
6.3 Water Harvesting and Recycling

Background There are opportunities to recycle used water and rain water in order to
reduce the use of potable water. Additional benefits of potable water
conservation can reduce energy use on transport and treatment of raw
water.

BEAM Plus New Buildings Version 2.0 Water Use - WU P1
6 Water Use 6.P Prerequisite
WU P1 Minimum Water Saving Performance
Objective Reduce the consumption of potable water through the application of water
saving devices with proven performance.
Credit Requirement Demonstrate that the use of water efficient flow devices leads to an
estimated annual saving of 10%.
Assessment Prepare a Potable Water Use Report which should include the following
contents:
1) Schedule including the types of fixture with the location and number
of each type of fixture
2) Calculation of potable water use following the guidance below
3) Percentage of annual potable water saving
The calculation of potable water use should be based on the following

methodology:
1) Users
Specify the number of users, male to female ratio according to the
sanitary fitment schedule in the project General Building Plan. If no
sanitary fitment schedule is available, use the assumed occupancy
(9m2/person) and male to female ratio (1:1).
For projects with accessible toilets, bathrooms and the like, it can
be assumed that the rate of users with disability is 8.1% and the
non-accessible toilets, bathrooms and the like are used by the
remaining 91.9% of the dedicated users [1]
The same number of users should be applied to both the baseline
case and the project design case.
2) Operational Days
Specify the number of operational days per annum. Alternatively,
assume full year operation (365 days).
The same operational days should be applied to both the baseline
3) Number of Uses, Product Flow Rate and Duration of Use
Establish a baseline case for water consumption by the
assumptions outlined in the following table. The calculation should
only consider the listed fixtures.
1 Hong Kong Monthly Digest of Statistics (January 2015) Feature Article – Persons with Disabilities and Chronic Diseases in
Hong Kong. [ONLINE]. Available at: http://www.statistics.gov.hk/pub/B71501FB2015XXXXB0100.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].

Number of
Operation Uses
Flow Rate
Fixture Type Time
(L/min) per Occupant
(sec)
per day
Shower
(hotel and 12 300 1
residential)
Shower
(all buildings other 12 300 0.1
than hotel and
residential)
Non-mixing
Type Water Taps
4 20 5
(bathrooms and
toilets )
Mixing
Type Water Taps
7 20 5
(bathrooms and
toilets)
Establish the project design case and identify the fixture flowrate
at 5bar:
If automatic controls such as proximity sensors are used in the
project to reduce the operation time, specification (for PA) and
product catalogues (for FA) are required to substantiate the
performance.
The same number of uses should be applied to both the baseline
4) Annual Potable Water Percentage Saving

Add up the total annual potable water use for both baseline and
design. The annual potable water percentage saving can be
calculated as follow:
Annual potable water use (design)

1− × 100%
Annual potable water use (baseline)
For non-residential buildings, any fixtures (other than commercial

kitchen fixtures) that is not considered in the calculation should
demonstrate that the water taps are rated grade 1 by the WSD
voluntary Water Efficiency Labelling Scheme.

For residential buildings, demonstrate that the water taps in kitchen

is rated grade 1 or 2 [2] by the WSD voluntary Water Efficiency
Labelling Scheme.
Submittals
WU_P1_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template

 
for WU P1
WU_P1_01 Technical Information on Water  

Fixtures and Annual Potable Water
Use Calculation [Appendix A]
WU_P1_02 General Building Plan (GBP)

highlighting the sanitary fitting
 
schedule and the male to female
ratio
[OR]
Calculation of no. of users using the
default occupancy density
(9m2/person) and male to female
ratio (1:1)
WU_P1_03 Schematic drawing(s) and plumbing

 
layout drawings (in WSD
submission standard)
WU_P1_04 Specifications of each type of fixture

counted in the calculation showing
the specified flow rate at 5 bar
 -
WU_P1_05 Catalogues of each type of fixture

counted in the calculation showing
- 
the flow rate at 5 bar
WU_P1_06 Specifications of the rated grade by

the WSD Voluntary Water Efficiency
 -
Labelling Scheme for the following
water fixtures:
- Non-residential buildings: any
fixtures (other than commercial
kitchen fixtures) that is not
considered in the calculation
- Residential buildings: water taps
in kitchen
[OR]
2 Water Supplies Department - Voluntary Water Efficiency Labelling Scheme. [ONLINE]. Available at:
https://www.wsd.gov.hk/en/plumbing-engineering/water-efficiency-labelling-scheme/index.html [Accessed April 2021].

Catalogues and evidence of the

rated grade by the WSD Voluntary
Water Efficiency Labelling Scheme
for the following water fixtures: - 
- Non-residential buildings: any
fixtures (other than commercial
kitchen fixtures) that is not
considered in the calculation
- Residential buildings: water taps
in kitchen
WU_P1_07 Specifications of automatic control of
water fixtures (if applicable)
 -
WU_P1_08 Catalogues of automatic control of

water fixtures (if applicable) - 

‘Guide to Application for Water Supply’ and Section 7.3 and 7.4 of
‘Technical Requirements for Plumbing Works in Buildings’. [ONLINE].
Available at:
https://www.wsd.gov.hk/filemanager/en/content_1805/Guide%20to%2
0Application%20for%20Water%20Supply%20-%20Nov%202020.pdf.
https://www.wsd.gov.hk/filemanager/en/content_1804/Technical%20R
equirement%20for%20Plumbing%20Works%20in%20Buildings%20(N
ovember%202020)_final.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].
(b) Related Credits
WU 1 Annual Water Use awards further achievement in potable water

saving.

BEAM Plus New Buildings Version 2.0 Water Use - WU 1
6 Water Use 6.1 Water Conservation
WU 1 Annual Water Use
Objective To reduce the consumption of potable water through the application of

water saving devices that have proven performance and reliability.
Credit Requirement (a) Further Potable Water Saving

1 to 3 credits for annual water saving by using water efficient flow
devices.
Credit(s) Estimated annual water saving / %

1 20%
2 25%
3 30%
(b) Exemplary Potable Water Saving

1 additional BONUS credit for demonstrating that the use of water
efficient flow devices leads to an estimated annual saving of 40%.
Assessment Assessment follows WU P1 Minimum Water Saving Performance.
Submittals
WU_01_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template

 
for WU 1
WU_01_01 Technical Information on Water  

Fixtures and Annual Potable Water
Use Calculation [Appendix A]
WU_01_02 General Building Plan (GBP)

highlighting the sanitary fitting
schedule and the male to female ratio
[or]  
(9m2/person) and male to female ratio
(1:1)

WU_01_03 Plumbing schematic drawing (s) and

plumbing layout drawings (in WSD  
submission standard
WU_01_04 Specifications of each type of fixture
counted in the calculation showing  -
the specified flow rate at 5 bar
WU_01_05 Catalogues of each type of fixture
counted in the calculation showing - 
the flow rate at 5 bar
WU_01_06 Specification of automation control of

 -
WU_01_07 Catalogues of automatic control of

- 
None
(b) Related Credits
None

Extent of Application All buildings with permanent greenery
Objective Reduce the reliance on potable water for irrigation.
Credit Requirement 1 to 2 credits for reducing potable water consumption for irrigation in
comparison with the baseline.
Percentage of reduction of potable

Credit(s)
water consumption for irrigation
1 25%
2 50%
2 + 1 additional BONUS 100%
Assessment Specify the area of each landscape type making up the total area of greenery
in the project. For each landscape type, calculate the annual irrigation demand
using the following formula.
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷
ET × KL × A × CE
ID = �
IE
𝐽𝐽𝐽𝐽𝐽𝐽𝐽𝐽𝐽𝐽𝐽𝐽𝐽𝐽
ID : Annual irrigation demand satisfied by using potable water (L)

ET : Monthly reference evapotranspiration (mm)
KL : Landscape coefficient of the landscape type
A: Area of the landscape type (m2)
CE : Efficiency of controller serving the landscape type
IE : Efficiency of irrigation method serving the landscape type
In theory the reference evapotranspiration is correlated to crop coefficient. For

calculation, the reference evapotranspiration can be assumed to be equivalent
to potential evapotranspiration. The potential evapotranspiration can be found
on the Hong Kong Observatory website [1].
Landscape coefficient indicates the volume of water lost via evapotranspiration

and is dependent on landscape species, planting density and microclimate
factor. For the ease of assessment, the calculation of landscape coefficient
is simplified and listed in manual for calculation reference.
Justification is needed for any proposed value.
1 Hong Kong Observatory - Monthly Sea Surface Temperature Recorded at North Point and Waglan Island and Monthly
Total Evaporation and Potential Evapotranspiration Recorded at King's Park between 1961-1990

Refer to the below table for landscape coefficient. Vertical greenery

type should refer to the same table per plant type:
Refer to the below table for irrigation method.
Landscape type Landscape coefficient (KL)
Tree 0.5
Shrubs 0.5
Groundcovers 0.5
Mixed (Trees + Shrubs +

0.6
Groundcovers)
Turfgrass 0.7
Adaptive Species (No irrigation

0
require)
Irrigation method Irrigation efficiency (IE)
Manual 0.5
Drip – Standard 0.7
Drip – Pressure compensated 0.9
Fixed Spray 0.65
Micro Spray 0.7
Rotor 0.7
Calculate the total irrigation demand that uses potable water in both baseline
and project design cases by the above formula. Sum up the calculated ID(s)
for all landscape types. The irrigation demand should cover all permanent
greenery in the project. For private garden not under the control of the
building management, irrigation demand for the design case should be
assumed the same as the baseline case.
1) Baseline
The composition of landscape type making up the permanent greenery in
the project should be the same as design case.
Assume all landscape types are irrigated manually (i.e. IE = 0.5) and no
controller is used (i.e. CE = 1).
Assume no reused or recycled water is used.

2) Design
Specify the irrigation method and controller (if used) for each landscape
type and calculate the ID correspondingly.
If controllers, including weather-based and moisture sensor-based, are

used, the CE should be supported by manufacturer’s documentation.
If harvested rainwater or recycled grey water is used to replace potable

water for irrigation, the corresponding annual amount of replaced water can
be deducted from the irrigation demand. The calculation method of the
amount of harvested rainwater and recycled grey water should be
consistent with WU 8.
Demonstrate sufficient collection tank (or retention pond) capacity:
2.1 Harvested rainwater: 10 days or more [2] of supply, considering the

month with the peak rainfall (assume 30 days in a month).
2.2 Recycled grey water: 8-10 hours of storage
The percentage reduction in annual irrigation demand that uses potable water
can be calculated as follow:
ID (design)
1− × 100%
ID (baseline)
Alternatively, if self-sustained plants are used to form all permanent greenery,

which do not require irrigation beyond their establishment period (maximum
two years), provide justification to explain why no irrigation will be required
based on local rainfall and plants’ water demands. The justification should
be endorsed by a professional landscape architect or ecologist. Two credits
can be attained.
Submittals
WU_02_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template for

 
WU 2
WU_02_01 Calculation of demand of potable water for

irrigation in both baseline and project
 
design cases and percentage reduction as
detailed in the credit assessment
2 Water Supplies Department, Technical Specifications on Grey water reuse and Rainwater Harvesting. [ONLINE]. Available at:
https://www.wsd.gov.hk/filemanager/en/content_1459/technical_spec_grey_water_reuse_rainwater_harvest.pdf. [Accessed
April 2021].

WU_02_02 Greenery plan including the total greenery

area (distinguish between communal
greenery and private garden if applicable)  
and an area break-down according to
irrigation method or controller used
WU_02_03 Calculation demonstrating sufficient tank

 
(or retention pond) storage capacity
WU_02_04 Plumbing schematic drawing (s) and

plumbing layout drawings, highlighting the
 
rainwater harvesting system and/ or the
grey water recycling system (if applicable)
WU_02_05 Specifications of controllers (if applicable)  -
WU_02_06 Catalogues of controllers (if applicable) - 
WU_02_07 Justification report for self-sustain plants

that require no irrigation beyond their
 
establishment period (Alternative
approach)
WU_02_08 CV of the professional endorsing the

 
justification report (Alternative approach)
WU_02_09 Extract of relevant page(s) from the GBP

showing no permanent greenery within the
 
Site
None
(b) Related credits
Calculation method of amount of harvested rainwater and recycled

grey water should be consistent with WU 8.

WU 3 Water Efficient Appliances
Extent of Application Residential buildings.
Objective Encourage the wider use of water efficient appliances.
Credit Requirement 1 credit for installing water efficient appliances that achieve Grade 1 under
the WSD’s Water Efficiency Labelling Scheme.
Assessment This credit assesses only those appliances provided by the developer. No
credits will be awarded if no appliances are provided by the developer.
Washing machines provided in all residential units should be of at least

Grade 1 under the WSD Water Efficiency Labelling Scheme (WELS) [1] or
other equivalent international schemes. If equivalent international scheme
is adopted, justification is required to demonstrate the appliances, certified
by a recognised standard, can achieve the same performance as the WELS
Grade 1 label.
Submittals

 
for WU 3
WU_03_01 Evidence to demonstrate the
appliances certified by a recognised
standard, can achieve the same  
performance as the WELS Grade 1
label
WU_03_02 Extract of relevant page(s) from the

GBP to show the development is not a
residential development or does not
 
consist of residential portion
only)
1 Water Supplies Department – Voluntary Water Efficiency Labelling Scheme. [ONLINE]. Available at:
https://www.wsd.gov.hk/en/plumbing-engineering/water-efficiency-labelling-scheme/index.html. [Accessed April
2021].


Water Supplies Department – Voluntary Water Efficiency Labelling
Scheme. [ONLINE]. Available at:
https://www.wsd.gov.hk/en/plumbing-engineering/water-efficiency-
labelling-scheme/index.html. [Accessed April 2021].
(b) Related Credits
None

WU 4 Water Leakage Detection
Extent of Application All buildings with potable water tank rooms.
Objective To identify water leakage once detected for the arrangement of

maintenance work.
Credit Requirement 1 credit for installing water leakage detection systems in all municipal
potable water tank rooms.
Assessment Demonstrate that water leakage detection systems are installed in all
municipal potable water tank rooms, including rooms comprising potable
water tank, irrigation tank and cleansing water tank, and flush water tank if
using fresh water for flushing.
Water tank rooms, which consists of only non-potable water tank and/ or
fire services tank, are not assessed.
Water tank rooms which have multiple water tanks should have at least one
leakage detection system.
The detection systems should have the capability to automatically alert the
operator or the security guard and identify the room with leakage when
leakage occurs.
Submittals

 
for WU 4
WU_04_01 Drawing(s) highlighting the provisions

of water leakage detection systems in
all water tank rooms OR showing that
 
there is no potable water tank rooms in
the building if this credit is deemed to
be not applicable.
WU_04_02 BMS drawings or other form of

 
supporting (e.g. catalogue,
manufacturer's information, etc.)


None
(b) Related Credits
None

WU 5 Twin Tank System
Extent of Application All buildings (including buildings with centralised/ shared tank that is outside
the assessment boundary)
Objective To reduce the water wastage during the maintenance or cleaning of the
water tanks and provide an uninterrupted potable and flush water supply to
building users.
Credit Requirement 1 credit for providing twin tank for potable water supply system and flushing
water supply system.
Assessment Twin tanks are installed for potable and flushing supply water systems for
all buildings in the assessment boundary.
Two compartment tank and two separate identical tanks are accepted as
twin tank.
Each compartment / tank of the twin-tank shall be equipped with:
1) A duplicated set of inlet, outlet and associated overflow and drainage
pipeworks;
2) A stop valve at the inlet of each tank compartment to ensure that water
will not get into the compartment when it is being cleaned; and
3) An automatic pump control switch at the downstream side of each
sump pump to protect the up-feed system particularly when the stop
valve for the tank compartment is closed.
Submittals
indicated on leftmost column

 
for WU 5
WU_05_01 Plumbing schematic drawing(s) and

plumbing layout drawings, highlighting
the provisions of the twin tank system  
for potable water and flush water
systems, and the associated
installations as stated in items (1) to
(3) in the assessment criteria


None
(b) Related Credits
None

WU 6 Cooling Tower Water
Extent of Application All buildings equipped with cooling tower using potable water as makeup
water.
Objective To reduce potable water consumption for cooling tower makeup.
Credit Requirement 1 credit for achieving 7 or more cycles of concentration with acceptable
water quality.
Assessment The ratio between the concentration of dissolved solids in the cooling tower
and the make-up water should be 7 or more. Demonstrate that the
corresponding make-up water pumps can provide sufficient flow rate and
pressure to sustain the specified cycle of concentration.
All cooling tower using potable water within the assessment boundary
should comply with this requirement.
Submit cooling tower water treatment proposal developed in accordance

with the latest EMSD Code of Practice for Fresh Water Cooling Tower
[1] to demonstrate minimum cycles of concentration of 7 or more is designed
and adopted.
Submittals
WU_06_00 BEAM Plus NB submission

 
template for WU 6
WU_06_01 Water treatment proposal

highlighting the design cycles of - 
concentration
WU_06_02 Specifications of cooling tower,

water treatment equipment and  -
make-up water pumps
WU_06_03 Catalogues of cooling tower, water

treatment equipment and make-up - 
water pumps
1 Electrical and Mechanical Services Department – Code of Practice for Fresh Water Cooling Towers CoP (FWCT). [ONLINE].
Available at: http://www.emsd.gov.hk/en/energy_efficiency/fwct_scheme/publications/index.html. [Accessed April 2021].

WU_06_04 MVAC schematic drawings

showing
the fresh water cooling tower(s)
with designation
[or]  
no fresh water cooling tower is

installed for the project
(Substantiation for non-
applicability)
None
(b) Related Credits
None

6 Water Use 6.2 Effluent
WU 7 Effluent Discharge to Foul Sewers
Objective To reduce the volumes of sewage discharged from buildings thereby

reducing burdens on municipal sewage services and treatment facilities.
Credit Requirement 1 credit for demonstrating a reduction in annual sewage volumes by 20%
or more.
Assessment Flushing water use calculation should be based on the followings:

1) Occupancy
Specify the number of users, male to female ratio according to the
sanitary fitment schedule in the project General Building Plan. If no
sanitary fitment schedule is available, use the assumed occupancy
(9m2/person) and male to female ratio (1:1).
For projects with accessible toilets, bathrooms and the like, it can be
assumed that the rate of users with disability is 8.1% and the non-
accessible toilets, bathrooms and the like are used by the remaining
91.9% of the dedicated users [1].
The same number of users should apply to both the baseline case
and the project design case.
2) Operational days
Specify the number of operational days per annum. Alternatively,
assume a full year operation (i.e. 365 days).
The same operational days should apply to both the baseline case
and the project design case.
3) Number of uses
The same number of uses should apply to both the baseline case and
the project design case.
1 Hong Kong Monthly Digest of Statistics (January 2015) Feature Article – Persons with Disabilities and Chronic Diseases in Hong
Kong. [ONLINE]. Available at: http://www.statistics.gov.hk/pub/B71501FB2015XXXXB0100.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].

Fixture type Number of uses per day
Male WC Single Flush

1
(non-residential)
Male WC Dual Flush

1 full flush volume
(non-residential)
Female WC Single Flush

5
(non-residential)
Urinal 4
Female WC Dual Flush

1 full and 4 low volume
(non-residential)
Single Flush WC
5
(Residential)
Dual Flush WC
1 full and 4 low volume
(Residential)
4) Flushing Volume
Based on the above, establish a baseline case for flushing water
consumption by the following assumptions. While dual flush WC is
used, a single flush WC baseline can be adopted.
Fixture type Flushing volume (L / flush)
Single Flush WC 6.5
Urinal 2.5
Establish the flushing water consumption for the project design

case based on the flushing volumes shown in the catalogues and
specifications. Note that no pressure calculation is required if worse
case condition is considered in reduction calculation.
5) Annual Effluent Discharge Reduction Percentage

The annual flushing water percentage saving can be calculated as
follows:
Annual flushing water use (design)

1- ×100%
Annual flushing water use (baseline)
Submittals

 
for WU 7

WU_07_01 Technical Information and  

Calculation for Effluent Discharge
[Appendix A]
WU_07_02 General Building Plan (GBP)

sanitary fitting schedule and male to  
female ratio
[or]
(9m2/person) and male to female
ration (1:1)
WU_07_03 Plumbing and/or drainage schematic

and layout drawings (in WSD  
submission standard)
WU_07_04 Specifications of each type of fixture

illustrating the flush volume per flush
 -
WU_07_05 Catalogues of each type of fixture

illustrating the flush volume per flush
- 
None
(b) Related Credits
None

6 Water Use 6.3 Water Harvesting and Recycling
Objective To encourage harvesting of rainwater and recycling of grey water in order

to reduce consumption of potable water.
Credit Requirement (a) Harvested Rainwater

1 credit for harvesting of rainwater that achieve a reduction of 5% or
more in the consumption of potable water.

1 credit for recycled grey water that achieve a reduction of 5% or more
in the consumption of potable water.

1 BONUS credit where harvested rainwater, recycled grey water or a
combination of both leads to a reduction of 10% or more in the
Assessment (a) Harvested Rainwater

1.1 Calculation of the monthly harvested rainwater yield
Accepted rainwater sources are from roofs, permeable
paving, non-permeable paving and surface runoff from grass
and landscaped areas [1]. For each source, calculate the
monthly harvested rainwater yield throughout the year using
the below formula.
Yr =Ac ×R m ×Cr
Yr is the monthly average rainwater yield (litre/month) Ac is
the collection area (m2)
Rm is the monthly mean of rainfall in Hong Kong between
1981-2010 (mm) [2]
Cr is the run-off coefficient
If an in-line filter is installed to the rainwater collection
system, a filter efficiency, Nf, should be incorporated into the
above equation, which can be assumed to be 0.9.
1 Water Supplies Department, Technical Specifications on Grey Water Reuse and Rainwater Harvesting (1st Edition) May 2015.
Mar 2021].
2 Hong Kong Observatory, Monthly Meteorological Normals for Hong Kong. [ONLINE]. Available at:
https://www.hko.gov.hk/en/cis/normal/1981_2010/normals.htm. [Accessed April 2021].

Surfaces run off coefficients are provided in manual. Provide

supplier’s product catalogue to substantiate if other values
are used.
Surfaces/ substrates Runoff

coefficients
Water bodies 1
Flat roof/ road/ hardscape with impervious 0.85

construction
Flat roof covered with pebbles 0.65
Green roof (soil depth of at least 300mm) 0.35
Earth-covered (soil depth not more than 500mm) 0.35

basement
Pervious paving and construction (maximum 0.25

slope of porous pavement surface to a gradient of
1:20; the minimum permeability coefficient under
15℃ for permeable paving / construction should
be 1.0 x 10-2cm/s)
At-grade softscape 0.15
Earth-covered (soil depth more than 500mm) 0.15

basement
Notes:
1) The above information has made reference to the design guides
for stormwater management/runoff control GB50014 and
DB11/685 of PRC.
2) Alternative runoff coefficients may be proposed and justified by

applicants which is subject to approval.
1.2 Calculation of the monthly demand for harvested

rainwater
Calculate the monthly demand for harvested rainwater
throughout the year which includes only the activities which
otherwise would need to consume potable water but is then
replaced by harvested rainwater in the project.
Accepted activities include flushing, irrigation, water features,
car washing, external cleaning, fire-fighting and industrial
processes.

1.3 Comparison of yield and demand

Compare the total yield and the total demand, month by
month, to calculate the amount of potable water replaced by
harvested rainwater.
For months when the yield exceeds the demand (i.e.
surplus), the amount of replaced potable water is equivalent
to the demand. For months when the demand exceeds the
yield (i.e. shortage), the amount of replaced potable water is
equivalent to the yield.
1.4 Calculation of the annual amount of potable water

replaced by harvested rainwater
Add up the replaced water throughout the year to show the
annual amount. This is the nominator for the calculation of
percentage reduction.
1.5 Calculation of the percentage reduction in potable water

use replaced by harvested rainwater
The denominator should at least include the annual potable
water use for irrigation and flushing (figures should be
consistent with WU 2 design case and WU 7 design case
respectively, without deducting any reused/ recycled water),
and, only if harvested rainwater is used for the activity, the
annual potable water use for water features, car washing,
external cleaning, fire-fighting and industrial processes.
1.6 Sufficient tank storage capacity

Demonstrate the collection tank(s) (or retention pond) has
sufficient capacity.
Harvested rainwater: 10 days or more [3] of supply,
considering the month with the peak rainfall (assume 30 days
in a month).
1.7 Water quality standards

Demonstrate the harvested rainwater, after treatment, meet
the recommended water quality standards prescribed in in
the WSD Technical Specifications [3].
https://www.wsd.gov.hk/filemanager/en/content_1459/technical_spec_grey_water_reuse_rainwater_harvest.pdf. [Accessed Mar
2021].


2.1 Calculation of the monthly recycled greywater yield
Accepted grey water sources are wash basins, baths,
showers, dishwashers, laundry machines, kitchen sinks,
cooling tower bleed-off water and air conditioning condense
[4].
Follow the calculation method specified in Section 3.4 in WSD
Technical Specifications On Grey Water Reuse And
Rainwater Harvesting [4]. Provide further calculation for air
conditioning condense.
2.2 Calculation of the monthly demand for recycled
greywater yield
Calculate the monthly demand for recycled grey water
throughout the year which includes only the activities which
originally would have used potable water but is then replaced
by recycled greywater in the project.
Accepted activities include flushing, irrigation, water features,
car washing, external cleaning, fire-fighting and industrial
processes.
2.3 Comparison of yield and demand

Compare the yield and the demand, month by month, to
calculate the amount of potable water replaced by recycled
greywater.
For months when the yield exceeds the demand (i.e. surplus),
the amount of replaced potable water is equivalent to the
demand. For months when the demand exceeds the yield (i.e.
shortage), the amount of replaced potable water is equivalent
to the yield.
2.4 Calculation of the annual amount of potable water

replaced by recycled greywater
Add up the replaced water throughout the year to show the
annual amount. This is the nominator for the calculation of
percentage reduction.
2.5 Calculation of the percentage reduction in potable water

use replaced by recycled greywater
The denominator should at least include the annual potable
water use for irrigation and flushing. The figures should be
consistent with: WU 2 design case and WU 7 design case
respectively, without deducting any reused / recycled water.
Only if recycled greywater is used for the activity, the annual
potable water use
April 2021].

for water features, car washing, external cleaning, fire-fighting

and industrial processes.
2.6 Sufficient tank storage capacity

Demonstrate the collection tank(s) has sufficient capacity.
Recycled grey water: 8-10 hours of storage
2.7 Water quality standards
Demonstrate the recycled grey water, after treatment, meet
the recommended water quality standards prescribed in Table
1-1 in the WSD Technical Specifications [5].

In additional to the requirements stipulated in parts (a) and (b),
demonstrate that harvested rainwater, recycled grey water or a
combination of both leads to a reduction of 10% or more in the
Mar 2021].

Submittals (a) Harvested Rainwater
WU_08a_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template

for WU 8a with:  
Calculation of Yield and Demand for

 
Harvested Rainwater [Form S-A1];
Information of Collection Tanks for

Rainwater Harvesting [Form S-A2];  
and
Water Quality Measurement for

Rainwater Harvesting System [Form - 
S-A3]
WU_08a_01 Calculation of reduction in demand of

potable water from rainwater  
harvesting system (with breakdown
of yield and demand by each end
use, as well as details of input
parameters/ assumptions)
WU_08a_02 Landscape plan including the total

landscape area (distinguish
between communal greenery and
 
private garden if applicable) and
area breakdown according to
WU_08a_03 Catchment area plan including area

break-down, type of surface and  
surface coefficient adopted
WU_08a_04 Plumbing schematic drawing(s) and

 
plumbing layout drawings
WU_08a_05 Rainwater harvesting system

 
schematic drawing(s)
WU_08a_06 Specification for provision of water  -

quality testing methodology,
measurement and report
WU_08a_07 Water quality measurement report - 
WU_08a_08 Product catalogues of surfaces/

substrates to substantiate the run-  
off coefficient (if non-default value is
used)

WU_08a_09 Product catalogue of the in-line filter

highlighting the efficiency (if non-  
default value is used)
WU_08a_10 Calculation demonstrating sufficient

tank (or retention pond) storage  
capacity for harvested rainwater
WU_08b_00 BEAM Plus NB submission

 
template for WU 8b with:
Calculation of Yield and Demand for

 
Recycled Grey Water [Form S-B1];

Recycled Grey Water [Form S-B2];  
and
Grey Water Recycling System - 
[Form S-B3]
WU_08b_01 Calculation of reduction in demand

 
of potable water from grey water
system (with breakdown of yield and
demand by each end use as well as
details of input parameters/
assumptions)
WU_08b_02 Plumbing schematic drawing(s)

and plumbing layout drawings,  
highlighting the grey water recycling
system
WU_08b_03 Specification for provision of water  -

quality testing methodology,
WU_08b_04 Water quality measurement report - 
WU_08b_05 Calculation demonstrating sufficient

tank storage capacity for recycled  
grey water

WU_08c_00 BEAM Plus NB submission  

template for WU 8c with:
Calculation of Yield and Demand
for Harvested Rainwater [Form S-  
C1] (if applicable);
Calculation of Yield and Demand

for Recycled Grey Water [Form S-  
C2] (if applicable);

Rainwater Harvesting [Form S-C3]  
(if applicable);
Recycled Grey Water [Form S-C4]  
(if applicable);

Rainwater Harvesting System - 
[Form S-C5] (if applicable); and

Grey Water Recycling System - 
[Form S-C6] (if applicable)
WU_08c_01 Calculation of reduction in demand

of potable water from rainwater  
harvesting system (with breakdown
of yield and demand by each end
use as well as details of input
parameters/ assumptions)
WU_08c_02 Landscape plan including the total

landscape area (distinguish
between communal greenery and
 
private garden if applicable) and
area breakdown according to
WU_08c_03 Catchment area plan including area
break-down, type of surface and  
surface coefficient adopted
WU_08c_04 Calculation of reduction in demand

 
of potable water from grey water
system (with breakdown of yield and
demand by each end use as well as
details of input parameters/
assumptions)

WU_08c_05 Plumbing schematic drawing (s)

and plumbing layout drawings,
highlighting the rainwater  
harvesting system and the grey
water recycling system (if
applicable)
WU_08c_06 Specification for provision of water 
quality testing methodology, -
WU_08c_07 Water quality measurement report - 
WU_08c_08 Product catalogues of surfaces/

substrates to substantiate the run-  
off coefficient (if non-default value is
used)
WU_08c_09 Product catalogue of the in-line filter

for the rainwater harvesting system  
highlighting the efficiency (if non-
default value is used)
WU_08c_10 Calculation demonstrating sufficient

tank (or retention pond) storage  
capacity for harvested rainwater (if
applicable)
WU_08c_11 Calculation demonstrating sufficient

tank storage capacity for recycled  
grey water (if applicable)
None
(b) Related Credits
Calculation method of amount of potable water should be consistent

with WU 1
Calculation method of amount of irrigation demand should be

consistent with WU 2.

BEAM Plus New Buildings Version 2.0 Health and Wellbeing - HWB
7 Health and 7.P Prerequisite

Wellbeing 7.1 Design for Green Living
7.2 Inclusive Design
7.3 Indoor Environmental Quality
Introduction This section of BEAM Plus considers the broader perspectives of

sustainable buildings as well as the building occupants’ health and
wellbeing. The broader sustainable issues include provisions of hygiene
and amenities maintenance provided in the building, which have impact on
the quality of working and living environments. Indoor environmental quality
(IEQ) includes indoor air quality and ventilation provisions that safeguard
health. Considerations of these issues, as well as thermal comfort, lighting,
acoustics and noise, impact on well-being, comfort and productivity.
7.P Prerequisite HWB P1 Minimum Ventilation Performance
Background This requirement ensures that ventilation systems of the premises have
been designed according to recognised procedures to provide a minimum
ventilation of sufficient quality and quantity.
7.1 Design for Green HWB 1 Healthy and Active Living

Living
Background Biophilic design provides users constant interaction with living things and
natural surroundings to nurture the innate human-nature connection and to
address human psychological need to be around life and life-like
processes. Design features and amenities, e.g. pedestrian amenities and
stairs promotion, can facilitate more healthy and active living.
7.2 Inclusive Design HWB 3 Inclusive Design
Background Designs that allow users to enjoy spaces safely, easily and with dignity, and
ensure efficient services to meet their needs, etc. They enhance the quality
and efficiency of built environments and thereby ensure buildings to be
more sustainable.
7.3 Indoor HWB 4 Enhanced Ventilation

Environmental
Quality
HWB 6 Acoustics and Noise
HWB 7 Indoor Vibration
HWB 8 Indoor Air Quality
HWB 9 Thermal Comfort
HWB 10 Artificial Lighting
HWB 11 Daylight
HWB 12 Biological Contamination
Given that on average people in Hong Kong spend around 85% of their time
indoors, indoor environmental conditions have a significant impact on the
quality of life. Buildings should provide safe, healthy, convenient and efficient
BEAM Plus New Buildings Version 2.0 Health and Wellbeing - HWB
indoor spaces. Poor indoor environments in commercial and institutional

buildings can impact on productivity and may pose health risks to users. The
design, management, operation and maintenance of buildings should seek
to provide a good quality indoor environment, but with optimum use of energy
and other resources.

BEAM Plus New Buildings Version 2.0 Health and Wellbeing - HWB P1
7 Health and 7.P Prerequisite

Wellbeing
HWB P1 Minimum Ventilation Performance

Application
Objective Assess the quality of on-site outdoor air and demonstrate that a minimum
quantity of outdoor air is supplied to all normally occupied spaces in the
project in order to safeguard the health and comfort of building users.
Credit Requirement (a) Measure outdoor air pollutants on-site prior to building design to
understand the site conditions.
(b) Demonstrate the project is in compliance with the minimum ventilation

quantity with respective to its designed ventilation mode.
Assessment (a) On-site Outdoor Air Quality

Engage an IAQ certified issuing body [1] to measure the quality of
outdoor air. Measurements should be taken for the following outdoor
air pollutants:
1) Carbon monoxide (CO)
2) Nitrogen dioxide (NO2)
3) Ozone (O3); and
4) Respirable suspended particulates (PM10)
Report from accredited inspection bodies for indoor air quality
inspection is acceptable.
One sample should be taken at the centre of the site. If emission
sources, which are under operation by the time the measurement is
taken, are present in the immediate surroundings of the project site,
additional samples should be taking at locations facing the sources.
The examples of emission sources can be found in the EPD’s website
[2].
Representative locations are acceptable if there is accessibility issue.
The samples should be taken when no construction activities were on-
going on the day of measurement. All parameters at one sampling
location should be taken on the same day.
Prepare a narrative to benchmark the measurement results against the
below acceptance limits. Note that the measurement results are not
required to comply with the limits and should be served as design
1 IAQ Certificate Issuing Body Accreditation [ONLINE]. Available at: https://www.iaq.gov.hk/en/iaq-certification-scheme/certificate-

issuing-body-accreditation.aspx. [Accessed April 2021].
2 Environmental Protection Department – Hong Kong Air Pollutant Emission Inventory. [ONLINE]. Available at:
http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/environmentinhk/air/data/emission_inve.html [Accessed April 2021].

information only. The measurement results should be acknowledged

receipt by the representative of the project owner.
Parameter 8-hour average acceptance limit [3]
Carbon monoxide (CO) <7,000 µg/m3 or <6.1 ppmv
<150 µg/m3 or <80 ppbv

Nitrogen dioxide (NO2)
Plus [1-hour] <200 µg/m3 or <106 ppbv
Ozone (O3) <120 µg/m3 or <61 ppbv
Respirable suspended
<100 µg/m3
particulate (PM10)
Due to site constraints, it may not be practicable to take 8-hour

continuous measurement. In these circumstances, surrogate
measurement (i.e. an intermittent measurement strategy based on the
average of half-an-hour measurements conducted at four time-slots) is
also accepted.
(b) Minimum ventilation

Prepare a schedule of all spaces present in the building. Categorise
the spaces into normally occupied, not normally occupied and
unoccupied according to the space type matrix in Appendix 9 of this
Manual.
Specify the system (mechanical or natural) used to ventilate the spaces.
Spaces with significant indoor air pollution sources such as toilets, car
park, refuse room and plant room are excluded from the assessment.
Staircases are also excluded.
Demonstrate compliance with the below criteria.
1. Mechanical Ventilation Spaces

Provide a report demonstrating compliance with the minimum
ventilation rate stipulated in ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2016 [4] in
all normally occupied spaces.
Project with Bare Shell Provision

It is observed that more developers have opted for the option in
developing new buildings with bare shell spaces (i.e. the
responsibility of providing the fresh air equipment to supply fresh
air into indoor space will rest on the future users/tenants).
3 Environmental Protection Department – IAQ Certification Scheme. [ONLINE]. Available at:

http://www.iaq.gov.hk/en/iaq-certification-scheme.aspx. [Accessed April 2021].
4 American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers – ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2016 Ventilation
for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality

To ensure projects with bare shell space meet the objective of the
credit, the project proponent shall ensure that there will be
adequate fresh air louvre(s) to draw outdoor air into the project’s
indoor space. The project proponent shall make reference to an
authoritative source, such as the criteria for louvre sizing specified
under ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook, when determining the
actual number and size of louvre(s) to be provided at the façade
of the development.
2. Natural Ventilation Spaces

Select one of the following paths. The Applicant is not limited to
adopt only one path for all the spaces.
Prescriptive Path
For residential buildings:
For normally occupied spaces, the total area of the windows /
primary openings provided in each space is not less than 7% of
the floor area of the space. Refer to Cap. 123F Building (Planning)
Regulations [5] for the requirements for windows or PNAP APP
130 [6] for the definition of primary openings.
If acoustic window is implemented, full window area could be

accounted in the calculation.
If cross ventilation is provided as per PNAP APP 130, the

aggregated size of the primary openings should not be less than
2.2% of the floor area of the room; the aggregated size of the
secondary openings should not be less than 2.2% of the floor area
of the room.
For non-residential buildings:

Provide a report demonstrating compliance with section 6.4
Natural Ventilation Procedure stipulated in ASHRAE Standard
62.1-2016 in all normally occupied spaces.
Performance Path – for project cannot achieve through

prescriptive method
For normally occupied spaces, the ventilation rate meets 1.7 ACH
under one annual prevailing wind direction with the highest wind
frequency. The annual wind rose (wind probability table) in
Building (Planning) Regulation is used.
5 Building (Planning) Regulations Cap, 123. Hong Kong e-Legislation. [ONLINE]. Available at:
https://www.elegislation.gov.hk/hk/cap123F. [Accessed April 2021].
6 Buildings Department – APP-130 Lighting and Ventilation Requirements – Performance-based Approach. [ONLINE].
Available at: https:/www.bd.gov.hk/doc/en/resources/codes-and-references/practice-notes-and-circular-
letters/pnap/APP/APP130.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].

Wind data, such as wind frequency, wind rose, wind profile should
be adopted from the appropriate and reliable sources, such as
simulated site wind data based on appropriate mathematical
models, such as RAMS from PlanD [7] or experimental site wind
data from wind tunnel test.
Ventilation performance should be demonstrated using wind

tunnel tests, computational fluid dynamics or approaches that
range from simple single zone models to elaborate multi-zone
models [8].
The below requirements should be fulfilled in the CFD simulation:
i. Surrounding buildings and terrain shall be included in the

Department, the Government of HKSAR [9];
ii. The surrounding area shall be at least, 2H (H being the

larger. The buildings within the surrounding area can be
simplified to block;
iii. The terrain area shall be in a size of at least, 10H (H being

site) or 1000m × 1000m, whichever is larger, with the
project placed in the centre; and
iv. Buoyancy and turbulence driven flows need not be

considered.
Prepare a Natural Ventilation Report including the following

contents:
1) Summary of naturally ventilated spaces highlighting
compliance
2) All assumptions made
3) Methodology
4) Results
The Natural Ventilation Report should be endorsed by a locally

qualified professional who has at least 3 years of relevant
experience in natural ventilation design and CFD modelling.
7 Site Wind Availability System. 2017. [ONLINE]. Available at:

http://www.pland.gov.hk/pland_en/info_serv/site_wind/site_wind/index.html. [Accessed April 2021].
8 American Society for Testing Materials. ASTM E 2267-03. Specifying and Evaluating Performances of Single Family Attached
and Detached Dwellings – Indoor Air Quality. 2003.
9 Lands Department - Survey and Mapping Office. [ONLINE]. Available at: https://www.landsd.gov.hk/en/survey-mapping.html.

Submittals (a) On-site Outdoor Air Quality
HWB_P1a_00 BEAM Plus NB submission  

template for HWB P1a with
Summary of On-site Outdoor Air
Quality Measurement [Form S-A]  #
HWB_P1a_01 Rectifying plan describing the

design of air purification strategies  #
if air quality is not achieved
HWB_P1a_02 HKIAS endorsed report showing

measurements of all required  #
outdoor air pollutants

(b) Minimum Ventilation
HWB_P1b_00 BEAM Plus NB submission  

template for HWB P1b
HWB_P1b_01 Summary of Ventilation  

Performance [Appendix A]
HWB_P1b_02 Schedule of all spaces present  

in the building
HWB_P1b_03 Report demonstrating

compliance with the minimum
ventilation rate stipulated in
 
ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2016
in all mechanically ventilated
HWB_P1b_04 MVAC fan schedule, air side

schematics  
HWB_P1b_05 MVAC layout plan - 

HWB_P1b_06 Technical Data - 
HWB_P1b_07 Layout Drawing showing the

location and size of the fresh air  
louvre(s); and
Fresh Air Calculation
(applicable to projects where
fresh air equipment is NOT
provided by the project
proponent)
HWB_P1b_08 Declaration Letter endorsed by

the project proponent declaring
that the project will NOT be
provided with fresh air
equipment and only louvre(s) for
fresh air intake will be provided - 
OR Tenant Guideline specifying
the recommended amount of
fresh air to be provided into the
indoor space
(applicable to projects where
fresh air equipment is NOT
provided by the project
proponent)
HWB_P1b_09 Floor plan highlighting locations

of primary openings, secondary
openings (for spaces with cross
 
ventilation) and/or openings
between rooms (for spaces in
non-residential buildings without
direct openings to the outdoors
and are ventilated through
adjoining rooms) that provided
in all naturally ventilated
normally occupied rooms
(applicable to natural ventilation
prescriptive path only)

HWB_P1b_10 Window and Opening

Schedules showing the areas of
the primary openings,
secondary openings (for spaces  
with cross ventilation) and/or
openings between rooms (for
spaces in non-residential
buildings without direct
openings to the outdoors and
are ventilated through adjoining
rooms) that provided in all
naturally ventilated normally
occupied rooms (applicable to
natural ventilation prescriptive
path only)
HWB_P1b_11 Calculation of ratio of the total

area of the primary openings  
provided in the room to the floor
area of the room (applicable to
natural ventilation prescriptive
path only)
HWB_P1b_12 Natural ventilation report

 
performance path only)
HWB_P1b_13 CV of the professional as per

 
(for performance path only)
HWB_P1b_14 Architectural Section Drawings

 
prescriptive path for non-
residential buildings)

Site Wind Availability System. 2017. [ONLINE]. Available at:
http://www.pland.gov.hk/pland_en/info_serv/site_wind/site_wind/index.
html. [Accessed April 2021].
(b) Related Credits

HWB 4 Enhanced Ventilation
The related credit awards project demonstrating enhanced ventilation
performance in normally occupied spaces and not normally occupied
spaces.

Carrying out on-site outdoor analysis provides useful information for the
selection of selecting ventilation means and ventilation system design
in order to achieve satisfactory indoor air quality. From the
measurement result, a proper design to ensure a good air quality
provision could help gaining credit points in HWB 8.

BEAM Plus New Buildings Version 2.0 Health and Wellbeing - HWB 1
7 Health and Wellbeing 7.1 Design for Green Living
HWB 1 Healthy and Active Living
Objective To encourage designing building environment for healthy and active living
by improving living and / or working experience of building users and
integrating physical activities in the design for an active lifestyle.
Credit Requirement 1 BONUS credit for scoring at least 3 items of all applicable design
measures for healthy and active living.
Assessment Provide a report demonstrating compliance of at least 3 of all relevant

applicable design measures for healthy and active living at indoor / semi-
outdoor communal areas of building development as listed below, item (1)
to (4):
Improving living and / or working experience of communal use by building
occupants
1) Integration of public art in indoor communal areas at the building main
entrance and core circulation lobbies at main access level to have at
least one artwork respectively. The public artwork should be of scale
reasonably proportional to space/ venue it locates. A narrative or
infographics of the art piece should also be available for users and
visitors.
Integrating physical activities in the design for an active lifestyle
2) Install way-finding signage and/ or info graphics at point-of-decision to

encourage stair use (at least one at the building main entrance and all
core circulation lobbies with lift provisions).
3) Install at least one (1) circulation stair in communal area meeting the
following requirements:
- Riser to be not more than 150mm and tread to be at least 300mm;
- Individual flight of stair not to exceed 1800mm nor a total of more
than 12 risers;
- Placed visually before lifts upon entering the building main
entrance;
- Connecting at least three (3) storeys; and
- Stair width to be at least 1350mm.
4) Install at least one (1) provision for physical activities in communal
areas, for example exercise stations, jogging tracks, cycling etc.
Additional or alternative design features may be included. Justification on

achievement in credit objectives should be demonstrated.

Submittals
HWB_01_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template

 
for HWB 1
HWB_01_01 Specifications of the design measures  -
HWB_01_02 Drawings showing design measures

 
and/or amenity features
HWB_01_03 Report showing justifications and

details for each design measures  
and/or amenity features provided
HWB_01_04 Catalogues/ information of design

measures provided OR Photograph
- 

None.
(b) Related Credits

The related credit promotes providing cycling facilities within the Site
and integrating with the public cycling network if a public cycling
network exists or has been planned nearby. Changing/ shower
facilities for non-residential buildings are required to achieve the credit.
The related credit encourages building developments to have
adequate amenities for its users within or in the vicinity of the Site.
When relevant amenities are counted in SS 2a, they would not be
applicable for HWB 2.

7 Health and Wellbeing 7.1 Design for Green Living
Objective To encourage building occupants to have constant interaction with living things
and natural surroundings to nurture the innate human-nature connection and to
address human psychological need to be around life and life-like processes.
Credit Requirement 1 BONUS credit for demonstrating visual connection with nature and/ or biophilic
design features at an assessment space with Visual Quality Score of 2 or above.
1 additional BONUS credit for demonstrating visual connection with nature and/
or biophilic design features at an assessment space with Visual Quality Score
of 3 or above.
Assessment 1) Visual Quality (VQ) can be described by identifying the inherent

characteristics and attributes of the surrounding environment. This
includes the identification of elements that have both positive and negative
contributions.
2) The Visual Quality Study under this credit should address the visual
connection with nature and/or biophilic design features at an assessment
space meeting the following requirements.
3) The assessment space chosen shall be a normally occupied space with
highest occupancy within the development. If biophilic design is not
practical for the normally occupied space with the highest occupancy due
to particular operational requirements, the Applicant can provide evidence
to justify the difficulty and propose the use of the normally occupied space
of the second highest occupancy for the assessment.
4) A demarcation plan of the normally occupied spaces for assessment and
the justification of the highest occupancy (or the second highest occupancy)
within the development based on relevant building codes shall be provided.
5) Images taken from the viewpoints should be analysed based on a
weighting factor of 1 to 5 to indicate the quality of the view. The weighting
factors are listed in the following table:
Table HWB 2-1

Weighting Representation Visual connection to nature and/ or biophilic
factor design features
5 Outstanding Natural terrain; waterfront; extensive outdoor

greenery with deciduous trees, seasonal
flowers and/or native plants providing local
fauna, including birds and butterflies with
appropriate food sources and habitats

4 Excellent Outdoor planting; sky
3 Good Indoor planting
2 Fair Biomorphic forms & patterns; nature

presented by digital medium, drawings or
other visual means
1 Insignificant No visual connection to the above
6) Projection Path
The Applicant shall produce images from the viewpoints by graphical
software at PA stage and produce images from single lens camera at FA
stage. The specification for camera is listed in point 7.2;
OR
7) Simulation Path
The Applicant shall produce images from the viewpoints using viewpoint
in 3D model at PA stage and single lens camera at FA stage. The
specifications for camera or 3D model are as follows:
7.1 Viewpoint in 3D Model at PA stage:
Option 1:
Vertical elevation of camera for 1,600mm above ground/
viewpoints in 3D model finished floor
Vertical upward angle 25o
Vertical downward angle 35o
Option 2:
Vertical elevation of camera for 1,600mm above ground/
viewpoints in 3D model finished floor
Equivalent lens focal length or focal 27mm
length
7.2 Single Lens Camera at FA stage:

Vertical elevation of camera 1,600mm above ground/
finished floor
Equivalent lens focal length or focal 27mm

length
Aspect Ratio 3:2

7.3 Important notes:
i. No fisheye or image distortion before or after picture taking; and
ii. No zooming or pan function shall be used.
7.4 Number and location of viewpoints:
i. A minimum of ONE viewpoint shall be placed within the

selected assessment space, and
ii. The viewpoint should be appropriately located at the centre of

the assessment space (for space of irregular shape, the space
shall be subdivided into various notional portions for respective
VQSportion calculations and the VQSportion of various portions
shall be area-weighted based on their areas to compute the
overall VQS of the assessment space).
7.5 Number of Frames:
i. A series of frames from 3 different directions at 45° interval should

be taken using landscape orientation.
7.6 Methodology:
i. For each frame, assign weighting factors from 1 to 5 to different

portions of the frame depending on the quality of the view;
ii. Calculate the Visual Quality Score of the frame using Area
Weighting Methodology;
iii. Repeat the process for each frame; and
iv. Calculate the average Visual Quality Score for the viewpoint.
7.7 Primary Tools:
i. 3D model using any appropriate 3D visualisation software at PA

stage
ii. Physical photographs taken from the site at FA stage

Submittals
Please provide softcopies with filename prefix as indicated on
the leftmost column below.
HWB_02_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template for

 
HWB 2
HWB_02_01 Visual Quality Study Report  -
HWB_02_02 Visual Quality Study Report (photographic

evidence)
- 

14 Patterns of Biophilic Design. Terrapin Bright Green. [ONLINE].
Available at: https://www.terrapinbrightgreen.com/report/14-patterns/
Biophilic Design Case Studies. Terrapin Bright Green. [ONLINE].

Available at:
https://www.terrapinbrightgreen.com/report/biophilic-design-case-
studies/ [Accessed April 2021].
Kaplan, R and Kaplan, S, 1989, “The Experience of Nature: A

Psychological Perspective”, Cambridge, University Press: Cambridge,
UK.
Kellert, S.R., Heerwagen, J., Mador, M., Eds., 2008, “Biophilic Design -
The Theory, Science, and Practice of Bringing Buildings to Life”, Wiley:
Hoboken, NJ, USA.
Wilson, E.O. 1984, “Biophilia”, Harvard University Press: Cambridge, MA,
USA.
(b) Related Credits

The related credit encourages building developments to have adequate
amenities for its users within or in the vicinity of the Site. When relevant
amenities are counted in SA 2a, they would not be applicable for HWB 2.

The related credit encourages strategies to preserve and/or enhance

The related credit encourages higher overall site coverage of greenery.
HWB 1 Healthy and Active Living

The related credit encourages urban farm as a means to improve the living
and / or working experience of building occupants.

7 Health and Wellbeing 7.2 Inclusive Design
HWB 3 Inclusive Design
Objective Encourage well integrated weather protection and user-friendliness in the

building design for outdoor or semi-outdoor communal / private space
design at various levels of a building.
Credit Requirement (a) Universal Accessibility

1 credit for providing at least ten (10) applicable enhanced provisions
as stipulated in the “Recommended Design Requirements” of BFA
2008.
(b) Weather Protection and Family Friendly Facilities

1 BONUS credit for providing prescribed weather protection and at
least two (2) family friendly facilities.
Assessment (a) Universal Accessibility

Provide a report detailing at least ten (10) applicable enhanced
provisions as stipulated in the “Recommended Design Requirements”
of BFA 2008 [1].
(b) Weather Protection & Family Friendly Facilities

Provide weather protection features against wind-driven rain for all
covered semi-outdoor communal areas within the building, allowing a
minimum width of 2 m protected zone from driving rain.
Minimum driving rain angles (MRA) from edges of rain protection

features shall be calculated based on the following equation:
MRA = tan-1 (u / 4.5 I 0.107)

Where,
u = Hourly mean wind speed affecting the rain (m/s)
I = Intensity of rainfall (mm/hr)
A default figure of 30 mm/hr is taken as the hourly rainfall intensity

under heavy rain conditions (Hong Kong Observatory defines “heavy
rain days” as days with hourly rainfall greater than 30 mm).
1 Buildings Department – Design Manual - Barrier Free Access 2008 – Codes of Practice and Design Manuals.
[ONLINE]. Available at: https://www.bd.gov.hk/doc/en/resources/codes-and-references/code-and-design-
manuals/BFA2008_e.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].

Wind speed can be determined from the wind profile diagram available
at PlanD’s Site Wind Data webpage [2]. For a semi-external communal
space facing a certain orientation, the wind profile for that orientation
at its proposed location (height above ground) shall be used.
Family Friendly Facilities:

1) At least one shaded rest area with seating for care-takers near
play equipment for children. This accounts for 1 inclusive design
feature.
2) At least one water closet for children or family in each male and
female or stand-alone toilet with seat height in the range of 310
mm to 380 mm for communal use. This accounts for 1 inclusive
design feature.
3) At least one baby-care facilities / breast feeding room in the
communal areas of the building. This accounts for 1 inclusive
design feature.
Additional or alternative inclusive design features may be included,
which achievement in credit objectives should be demonstrated.
Submittals (a) Universal Accessibility
HWB_03a_00 BEAM Plus NB submission

 
template for HWB 3a
2 Planning Department – Site Wind Availability Data. [ONLINE]. Available at:


HWB_03a_01 Summary of Enhanced Provisions

 
[Appendix A]
HWB_03a_02 Drawings showing design  

measures and/or amenity features
HWB_03a_03 Report showing justifications and
HWB_03a_04 Catalogues/ information of design

measures provided OR - 
Photograph
(b) Weather Protection & Family Friendly Facilities
HWB_03b_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template

 
for HWB 3b
HWB_03b_01 Drawings showing design

 
measures and/or amenity
features
HWB_03b_02 Report showing justifications and
HWB_03b_03 Catalogues/ information of design

measures provided OR
- 
Photograph

Chand, Bhargava, Estimation of Angle of Deflection of Rain at Driving
Rain Prone Stations in India, 2005.
Sagadashvili, Methods of Processing Meteorological Observational

Data for Assessment of Driving Rain Parameters, Proceedings of the
Symposium on Building Climatology, Moscow, 619 - 629, 1982.
Buildings Department, PNAP ADV-32, Provision of Babycare Rooms

and Lactation Rooms in Commercial Buildings. [ONLINE]. Available at:
(b) Related Credits

The related credit promotes convenient and barrier-free pedestrian
environment in site planning of the outdoor spaces.

7 Health and Wellbeing 7.3 Indoor Environmental Quality
HWB 4 Enhanced Ventilation
Objective Maintain effective ventilation and prevent exposure to concentrated indoor

pollutant sources to support occupants’ health and wellbeing.
Credit Requirement (a) Fresh Air Provision

1.1 Fresh air provision in normally occupied spaces
1 credit for demonstrating that all normally occupied spaces in the

building are provided with increased ventilation.
1.2 Fresh air provision in not normally occupied spaces
1 credit for demonstrating that all not normally occupied spaces in the
building are provided with adequate ventilation.
1 additional BONUS credit for conducting on-site measurements to

verify the ventilation performance for all normally occupied spaces.
(b) Exhaust Air

1 credit for the provision of an effective ventilation system for spaces
where significant indoor pollution sources are generated.
Assessment (a) Fresh Air Provision

Prepare a schedule of all spaces present in the building. Categorise the
spaces into normally occupied, not normally occupied and unoccupied
according to the space type matrix in Appendix 9 of this manual.
Specify the system (mechanical or natural) used to ventilate the
spaces.
Spaces with significant indoor air pollution sources such as toilets, car
park, refuse room and plant room are excluded from the assessment.
Staircases are also excluded.
1.1 Fresh air provision in normally occupied spaces

Demonstrate compliance with the below criteria.
1.1.1 Mechanically ventilated spaces
Provide a report demonstrating that the minimum
ventilation rates stipulated in ASHRAE Standard 62.1-
2016 [1] in all normally occupied spaces are exceeded by
at least 30%.
1 American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers – ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2016 Ventilation
for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality

1.1.2 Naturally ventilated spaces

Select one of the following paths. The Applicant is
not limited to adopting only one path for all the spaces.
i. Prescriptive Path
1. For residential buildings:
For normally occupied spaces, the total area of the

windows / primary openings provided in each space is
not less than 9% of the floor area of the space. Refer
to Cap. 123F Building (Planning) Regulations for the
requirements for windows or PNAP APP 130 [2] for the
definition of primary openings.
If cross ventilation is provided as per PNAP APP 130,

the aggregate size of the primary openings should not
be less than 2.5% of the floor area of the room; the
aggregate size of the secondary openings should not
be less than 2.5% of the floor area of the room.
2. For non-residential buildings:
For normally occupied spaces, the openable area

should be not less than 5.2% (exceed 4%, as
stipulated in ASHRAE 62.1 – 2016 Section 6.4.2, by
30%) of the net occupiable floor area.
ii. Performance Path
For normally occupied spaces, the ventilation rate

meets 2.2 ACH under one annual prevailing wind
direction with the highest wind frequency. The annual
wind rose (wind probability table) at 400 – 600m of the
site should be used.
Wind data, such as wind frequency, wind rose, wind
profile should be adopted from the appropriate and
reliable sources, such as simulated site wind data
based on appropriate mathematical models, such as
RAMS from PlanD [3] experimental site wind data from
wind tunnel test.
Ventilation performance should be demonstrated

using wind tunnel tests, computational fluid dynamics
or approaches that range from simple single zone
models to elaborate multi-zone models [4].
2 Buildings Department – APP-130 Lighting and Ventilation Requirements – Performance-based Approach. [ONLINE]. Available
at: https://www.bd.gov.hk/doc/en/resources/codes-and-references/practice-notes-and-circular-letters/pnap/APP/APP130.pdf.
3 Site Wind Availability System. [ONLINE]. Available at:
4 American Society for Testing Materials. ASTM E 2267-03. Specifying and Evaluating Performances of Single Family
Attached and Detached Dwellings – Indoor Air Quality. 2003.

The below requirements should be fulfilled in the CFD

simulation:
1. Surrounding buildings and terrain shall be
included in the model based on the GIS
information from Lands Department, the
Government of HKSAR;
2. The surrounding area shall be at least, 2H (H
being the building height (m) of the tallest building
on the project site) or 200m away from the project
site boundary, whichever is larger. The buildings
within the surrounding area can be simplified to
block;
3. The terrain area shall be in a size of at least, 10H
(H being the building height (m) of the tallest
building on the project site) or 1000m × 1000m,
whichever is larger, with the project placed in the
centre; and
4. Buoyancy and turbulence driven flows need not
be considered.
Prepare a Natural Ventilation Report including the

following content:
1. Summary of naturally ventilated spaces

highlighting compliance
2. All assumptions made
3. Methodology
4. Results
The Natural Ventilation Report should be endorsed by

a locally qualified professional who has at least 3 years
of relevant experience in natural ventilation design and
CFD modelling.
1.2 Fresh air provision in not normally occupied spaces

Demonstrate compliance with the minimum ventilation
rates stipulated in ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2016 in all not
normally occupied spaces.

Demonstrate the ventilation rates in all not normally
occupied spaces meets 1.7 ACH. Methodology should
follow the performance path as specified under 1.1.2 (ii)
above.


Additional BONUS credit will be granted only if the credits in part (a)
(1.1) have been achieved.
Prepare a measurement methodology which includes the proposed
measurement locations and methodology.

Demonstrate, by measurement, the required amount of
outdoor air corresponding to the design outdoor air flow
rate is provided. Accepted measurement methods
include the followings:
i. ASHRAE 111 [5]; OR
ii. Tracer gas techniques in accordance with ASTM
E741[6]
At least one sampling point should be present in each

normally occupied space usage.
If the measurement results demonstrate unmet
requirement in part (a) ( 1.1) (i.e. measurement results
showing ventilation rate of any normally occupied space
not exceeding 30% of the minimum ventilation rate), the
credit in both part (a) (1.1) and part (a) (1.3) will not be
awarded

Demonstrate, by measurement, the design ACH is
achieved. Tracer gas decay test in accordance with
ASTM E 741 or equivalent is an accepted measurement
method.
At least one sampling point should be present in
each normally occupied space type. For each normally
occupied space usage, the sampling locations should
cover all orientations and low, mid and high floors.
If the measurement results demonstrate unmet
requirement in part (a) (1.1) (i.e. measurement results
showing ventilation rate of normally occupied space not
exceeding 30% of the minimum ventilation rate), the
credit in both part (a) (1.1) and part (a) (1.3) will not be
awarded.
(b) Exhaust air

Provide design criteria that have been adopted and the details of the
ventilation system designs providing local exhaust where
concentrated pollutant sources are likely to be present. ASHARE
Standard 62.1 – 2016 and CIBSE Guide B 2016 [7] are accepted
references for this credit. Justification is needed for other references
5. American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers – ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 111-2008
Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building HVAC Systems
6. ASTM International – ASTM E471-11 Standard Test Method for Determining Air Change in a Single Zone by Means of a
Tracer Gas Dilution
7. Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineers – CIBSE Guide B Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning and Refrigeration
2016.

Submit exhaust air rate calculation demonstrating the compliance of

design criteria and equipment specifications.
Submittals (a) Fresh Air Provision
HWB_04a_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template  

for HWB 4a
HWB_04a_01 Summary of Fresh Air Provision in  

Normally Occupied Spaces
[Appendix A]
(Applicable to part 1.1)
HWB_04a_02 Summary of Fresh Air Provision in  
Not Normally Occupied Spaces
[Appendix B]
HWB_04a_03 Summary of Measurement Results - 

of Fresh Air Provision in Normally
Occupied Spaces [Appendix C]
HWB_04a_04 Schedule of all spaces present in

 
the building
HWB_04a_05 Mechanical Ventilation Report

 
(Applicable to parts 1.1 and 1.2)
HWB_04a_06 Endorsed Natural Ventilation

 
Report (Applicable to parts 1.1.2
performance path and 1.2.2)
HWB_04a_07 CV of the professional as per

requirements in the assessment  
(Applicable to parts 1.1.2
performance path and 1.2.2)
HWB_04a_08 MVAC fan schedule and air side

schematics (Applicable to parts 1.1  
and 1.2)
MVAC equipment catalogue - 

(Applicable to parts 1.1 and 1.2)
HWB_04a_09 MVAC layout plan (Applicable to - 

parts 1.1 and 1.2)

HWB_04a_10 Floor Plan highlighting locations of  

primary opening that provided in all
occupied rooms (Applicable to Part
1.1.2 Prescriptive Path only)
HWB_04a_11 Window and opening schedules  

showing the areas of the primary
openings that provided in all
occupied rooms (Applicable to Part
HWB_04a_12 Calculation of the ratio of the total  

area of the primary openings
provided in the room to the floor
area of the room (Applicable to Part
HWB_04a_13 Specification on provision of

measurement methodology,
 -
HWB_04a_14 Measurement methodology

(Applicable to part 1.3) - 
HWB_04a_15 Measurement results (Applicable to

part 1.3)
- 
(b) Exhaust Air
HWB_04b_00 BEAM Plus NB submission  

template for HWB 4b
HWB_04b_01 Summary of Exhaust Air Provision  

[Appendix D]
HWB_04b_02 Schedule of all spaces present in

 
the building
HWB_04b_03 Schedule of all spaces provided

with local exhaust, highlighting the  
exhaust rate
HWB_04b_04 Exhaust air rate calculation  
HWB_04b_05 MVAC fan schedule and air side

 
schematics; and
MVAC equipment catalogue - 
HWB_04b_06 MVAC layout plan - 


World Health Organization – Health and sustainable development –
Natural Ventilation. [ONLINE]. Available at:
https://www.who.int/teams/environment-climate-change-and-
health/air-quality-and-health/sectoral-interventions/housing/strategies.
Whole Building Design Guide, National Institute of Building Sciences.
Natural Ventilation. [ONLINE]. Available at:
https://www.wbdg.org/resources/natural-ventilation. [Accessed April
2021].
(b) Related Credits

EU 2 Reduction CO2 Emissions
Although enhanced ventilation rate may increase building energy
consumption, the Applicant is encouraged to adopt additional energy
saving strategies, for instance demand control ventilation to overcome
the compromise between indoor environmental quality and energy
consumption.

While HWB 4 governs the exhaust rate of enclose waste and recycling
facilities, HWB 5 stipulates requirements to reduce risk of odour
nuisance.

Indoor air quality can be improved via dilution resulted by maintaining
suitable ventilation rate.

Extent of Application All buildings with RS&MRC(s) and/or RS&MRR(s)
Objective To reduce nuisance caused by odour leaving enclosed waste disposal and
recycling spaces.
Credit Requirement 1 credit for installing odour sensor at all discharge points from enclosed
waste disposal and recycling spaces.
Assessment Install an odour sensor at each discharge point from all enclosed waste
disposal and recycling spaces including refuse collection points (RCP),
refuse storage and material recovery chambers (RS&MRC) and refuse
storage and material recovery rooms (RS&MRR).
The sensors should have the capability to alert the operation station or the
security station and identify the room when 5 odour units (or equivalent
concentration level in ppm or mg/m3) based on an averaging time of 20
seconds [1] is detected.
OR
Propose an alerting strategy (e.g. a sensing system) that could identify the
room smell condition while on an averaging time of 20 seconds [1] is
detected.
The proposal should be endorsed by a Hong Kong professional institution

qualified holder in mechanical or building services discipline.
The proposal should identify minimum the below:
1) Sensing system design

2) Design supporting (e.g. International references, technologies)
3) Layout and Schematic Drawings to outline the design, if applicable
including MVAC drawing layout, MVAC schematic and control
diagram
Remark: The Applicant is required to provide justification for the odourous
compound(s) to be considered for odour monitoring / identification of smell
condition in the proposal.
Submittals
HWB_05_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template  

for HWB 5
1 Environmental Protection Department – Technical Memorandum on Environmental Impact Assessment Process. Environmental
Impact Assessment Ordinance. [ONLINE]. Available at: http://www.epd.gov.hk/eia/english/legis/memorandum/annex4.html.

HWB_05_01 Drawings showing the locations of

refuse rooms (RCP, RS&MRC and  
RS&MRR).
HWB_05_02 MVAC drawings highlighting the

 
odour sensor
(for compliance by odour sensor
provision only)
HWB_05_03 Control Diagram for the sensors alert  

system
(for compliance by odour sensor
provision only)
HWB_05_04 Endorsed design proposal  

(for compliance by alerting strategy
proposal only)
HWB_05_05 CV of the professional as described  

in credit requirement
(for compliance by alerting strategy
proposal only)
HWB_05_06 Extract of tender document (e.g.

specification) for the odour sensor/  -
proposed equipment
[OR]
Catalogues of odour sensor/

- 
proposed equipment
HWB_05_07 Extract of relevant page(s) from the

GBP showing the project has no  
RS&MRC and RS&MRR
only)

None
(b) Related Credits

MW P1 Minimum Waste Handling Facilities
While MW P1 safeguards a prerequisite requirement for the size of
RS&MRC, HWB 5 stipulates requirements to reduce risk of odour
nuisance.

7 Health and 7.3 Indoor Environmental Quality

Wellbeing
HWB 6 Acoustics and Noise
Extent of All buildings with the spaces specified in the assessment criteria, with
Application spaces where speech intelligibility is important, and without rooms of a
special acoustical nature for parts (a) (1), (b) (1) and (c)
All buildings with tenanted spaces of the type(s) of premises specified in the
assessment criteria, with spaces where speech intelligibility is important,
and without rooms of a special acoustical nature for parts (a) (2)
Residential buildings for part (b) (2)
Objective Ensure the building normally occupied spaces are in comfortable

acoustic environment.
Credit Requirement (a) Room Acoustics

1) 1 credit for demonstrating that mid-frequency reverberation time
in applicable spaces of landlord’s-controlled area meets the
prescribed criteria of different types of premises.
2) 1 credit for demonstrating that mid-frequency reverberation time

in applicable rooms of non-landlord meets the prescribed criteria
of different types of premises.
(b) Noise Isolation

1) 1 credit for demonstrating airborne noise isolation between spaces
fulfills the prescribed criteria.
2) 1 BONUS credit for demonstrating impact noise isolation between

floors fulfills the prescribed criteria.
(c) Background Noise

1 credit for demonstrating background noise levels within the
prescribed criteria (including traffic noise and external building
services equipment that are within the project boundary)
Assessment (a) Room Acoustics

1) Demonstrate that mid-frequency reverberation time in applicable
rooms of landlord’s-controlled area meets the below criteria of
different types of premises.
2) Demonstrate that mid-frequency reverberation time in applicable

rooms of tenanted area meets the below criteria of different types
of premises.

Criteria
The average reverberation time for mid frequencies (500Hz, 1kHz and
2kHz) and noise assessment criterion, should be:
1) Office type premises: 0.4 to 0.6s

2) Classrooms and similar premises: 0.4 to 0.6s
3) Residential premises, hotels and apartments: 0.4 to 0.6s
4) Indoor games halls, indoor swimming pools: 1.5 to 2s
5) Common areas in shopping malls:
a) Average reverberation time for mid frequencies between 1.0 to
1.5s, or
b) Noise reduction coefficient (NRC) for ceiling ≥ 0.7
Based on the nature of the building, alternative appropriate criteria with
sufficient justification and evidence provided by the applicant will be
allowed. Approval is required for the alternative proposal.
Compliance should be demonstrated by (1) computer simulation, (2)
detailed calculations or (3) measurements (for Final Assessment only)
depending on the applicant’s preference. The acoustic simulation,
calculation or measurement report should be endorsed by:
• a Corporate Member of Hong Kong Institute of Acoustics; or
• a corporate/ certified/ full member of other international acoustic
institution; or
• a member of HKIE (Building Services Mechanical or
Environmental discipline) with relevant experience in Acoustic/
Vibration Design.
The assessment shall include at least one sample of each type of
occupied space. Spaces without design (e.g. finishes, system) should
provide endorsed acoustic calculation to support the potential
achievement in both PA and FA submission.
The reverberation time shall be assessed using Sabine’s formula [1]
or similar alternative taking into account the room details and
appropriate assumptions about the materials in the space.
Measurements during commissioning shall use the method given in
ISO 3382 [2] or equivalent. Measuring equipment shall conform to the
accuracy requirements given in IEC 61672-1 [3] Class 1 requirements,
or equivalent.
For buildings without the abovementioned spaces, with no spaces
where speech intelligibility is important, or with rooms of a special
acoustical nature, submit a schedule of spaces present in the building
and relevant justifications for this credit to become not applicable.
(b) Noise Isolation

1) Demonstrate that airborne noise isolation between spaces fulfills
the prescribed criteria.
1 I.Sharland. Woods practical guide to noise control. Colchester, England

2 International Standard Organization – ISO 3382:2009 - Acoustics -- Measurement of room acoustic parameters.
3 International Electrotechnical Commission. IEC 61672-1:2013 Electroacoustic – Sound Level meters

Criteria
Compliance should be demonstrated by computer simulation, detailed
calculations, or measurements depending on the Applicant’s
preference. The performance of the weighted Sound Reduction Index
(SRI) or Level Difference should fulfill the requirements as stated in the
blow table. The computer simulation report, acoustic calculations or
the measurement report should be endorsed by:

institution; or
Environmental Discipline) with relevant experience in Acoustic/
Vibration Design.
For measurement, measuring equipment shall conform to the accuracy
requirements given in IEC 61672-1 [4] Class 1 requirements, or
equivalent.
Type of Premises Weighted Level

SRI Difference
Between offices/ conference rooms/ Rw 44 DnT,w 38

retail shops
Between hotel rooms/ serviced Rw 52 DnT,w 46

apartments/ function rooms/ activity
rooms
Between classrooms Rw 37 DnT,w 31
Between bedrooms to living rooms Rw 46 DnT,w 40

(same unit)
Between bedroom to bedroom/ living Rw 52 DnT,w 46

room to living room (different units)
Between bedroom to bedroom (same Rw 44 DnT,w 38

unit)

allowed.
The criteria apply to partition walls which are actually provided and
potentially provided by the landlord.
4 International Electrotechnical Commission. IEC 61672-1:2013 Electroacoustic – Sound Level meters

2) Demonstrate that impact noise isolation between floors fulfills the

below criteria.
Demonstrate the following by laboratory test or measurement
depending on the Applicant’s preference.
Type of Weighted Weighted Normalised

Premises Normalised Impact Impact Sound
Sound Pressure Pressure Level
Level (On-site
(by laboratory) measurement)
Floors Ln,w 64 L’n,w 70

separating
normally
occupied
space,
For Part (1) and/or (2), submit a schedule of the spaces in the building,
the noise isolation criteria adopted, relevant partition or slab details
as they impact on noise isolation, the rooms/ premises subject to
laboratory/ field tests or for which detailed calculations or simulations
have been made, underlying assumptions, and the results of tests of
calculations or simulations demonstrating compliance with the criteria.
Laboratory Testing
Samples shall be chosen for at least one sample of each type of
normally occupied space. The laboratory testing shall follow the
methods give in ISO [5-7] or equivalent.
The laboratory testing report should be endorsed by:
institution; or
Vibration Design.
On-site Measurement
The measurements shall be undertaken in at least one sample of each
type of normally occupied space, and shall include the worst case
circumstances likely to occur. Procedures for on-site measurement
shall follow the methods given in ISO [8], ASTM [9] or equivalent.
5 International Standard Organization. ISO 10140-1, Acoustics — Laboratory measurement of sound insulation of building elements
— Part 1: Application rules for specific products
— Part 3: Measurement of impact sound insulation
— Part 5: Requirements for test facilities and equipment
8 International Standard Organization. ISO 140-7. Acoustics - Measurement of sound Insulation in buildings and of building elements.
Part 7: Field measurements of impact sound insulation of floors.
9 ASTM International. Designation: E 1007 – 97. Standard test method for field measurement of tapping machine impact sound
transmission through floor-ceiling assemblies and associated support structures.

The measurement report should be endorsed by:

institution; or
Vibration Design.

Demonstrate that the background noise levels from both external
sources and external building services equipment of project building
are within the below criteria.
Criteria
Internal noise level (NR and NC value should be consistently used in
the project):
1) Office type premises: NR/NC 40

2) Classrooms and similar premises: NR/NC 35
3) Residential premises, hotel and apartments: NR/NC 35
4) Common areas in shopping malls: NR/NC 45
5) Indoor games halls & Indoor swimming pools: NR/NC 50
allowed.
Compliance should be demonstrated by computer simulation, detailed
calculations or measurements depending on the applicant’s
preference. The acoustic simulation, calculation or measurement
report should be endorsed by:
institution; or
Vibration Design.
Internal noise computer simulation, calculations or site
measurements should include at least one sample of each type of
occupied space, taking account into the worst case condition of
exposure to noise sources external to the space, and undertaken
during periods appropriate to the usage pattern for the space.
Measuring equipment shall conform to the accuracy requirements
given in IEC 61672-1 [10] Class 1 requirements, or equivalent.
The assessment should take into account noise from building services
equipment under normal operation mode. For residential units, the
assessment should only account traffic noise and chiller/water plant
equipment (window type and outdoor unit of VRV is not considered)
10 International Electrotechnical Commission. IEC 61672-1:2013 Electroacoustic – Sound level meters.


Submittals (a) Room Acoustics
HWB_06a_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template

 
for HWB 6a
HWB_06a_01 Schedule of spaces cross-

referencing to the GBP showing the
types of premises present in the
building and demarcation of landlord-  
controlled areas and tenanted areas
(if any)
HWB_06a_02 Reverberation time computer

simulation/ calculation report at
representative locations with
supporting documents of the  
absorption coefficients for landlord-
controlled spaces (Applicable to
computer simulation/ calculation
route only)
HWB_06a_03 Endorsed report on reverberation

time measurement at representative
locations of landlord-controlled
spaces (Applicable to measurement - 
route only)
HWB_06a_04 Reverberation time computer

simulation/ calculation report at
representative locations with
 
supporting documents of the
absorption coefficients for tenanted
spaces (Applicable to computer
simulation/ calculation route only)
HWB_06a_05 Endorsed report on reverberation

time measurement at representative
locations of tenanted spaces
- 
(Applicable to measurement route
only)

 

(b) Noise Isolation
HWB_06b_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template  

for HWB 6b
HWB_06b_01 Schedule of spaces cross-

referencing to the GBP showing the  
building
HWB_06b_02 Layout plan or sectional drawings

showing the location of partition  
walls (Applicable to part (1) only)
HWB_06b_03 Construction details of the partition

walls (Applicable to part (1)  
calculation and simulation route
only).
HWB_06b_04 Airborne noise isolation computer

simulation/ calculation report  
(Applicable to part (1) calculation/
simulation route only)
HWB_06b_05 Endorsed airborne noise isolation

measurement report (Applicable to - 
measurement route for part (1) only)
HWB_06b_06 Layout plan or sectional drawings

showing the location of slabs  
(Applicable to part (2) only)
HWB_06b_07 Construction details of stabs

(Applicable to part (2) laboratory test  
route only)
HWB_06b_08 Endorsed impact noise isolation

laboratory testing report (Applicable  
to part (2) laboratory route only)
HWB_06b_09 Endorsed impact noise isolation

part (2) measurement route only)
HWB_06b_10 CV of the professional as per

 
HWB_06c_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template  

for HWB 6c

HWB_06c_01 Schedule of spaces cross-

referencing to the GBP showing the  
building
HWB_06c_02 Background noise computer

simulation/ calculation report  
(Applicable to computer simulation/
calculation route only)
HWB_06c_03 Endorsed background noise

measurement route only)
HWB_06c_04 CV of the professional as per

 
Acoustic windows or other attenuation may contribute to mitigate

background noise problem.
Environmental Protection Department - Innovative Noise Mitigation

Designs and Measures - Acoustic Window. [ONLINE]. Available at:
http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/Innovative/greeny/eng/acoustic_windo
w.html. [Accessed April 2021].
(b) Related Credits
None

HWB 7 Indoor Vibration
Extent of Application All buildings with normally occupied spaces
Objective Avoidance of excessive vibration from building services equipment and

other external sources within site boundary.
Credit Requirement 1 credit for demonstrating vibration levels not exceeding the prescribed
criteria.
Assessment Vibration generated from the building services equipment shall be in

compliance with the criteria given in ISO 2631-2:2003 [1], BS 6472-1:2008
[2], BS 6472-2:2008 [3], Department of Environment and Conservation of
NSW - Assessing Vibration: a technical guideline [4] or equivalent standard.
Calculation/Measurements should be carried out at representative normally

occupied spaces. The selection of sampling points should follow the
guidance given in ISO 2631-2:2003, BS 6472-1:2008, BS 6472-2:2008,
Department of Environment and Conservation of NSW - Assessing
Vibration: a technical guideline or equivalent standard. Vibration from
emergency generator is excluded from assessment.
The level of vibration in terms of root mean square acceleration shall be

determined by calculation or on-site measurement. Root mean square
acceleration requirement should be assessed with regards to the above
standards or equivalent.
Vibration source identified in the report should be justified. External sources

other than building service equipment that might impact a building space
may include nearby railway, underground tunnel etc.
Calculation or measurement report should be endorsed by:

institution; or
• a member of HKIE (Building Services, Mechanical or Environmental
discipline) with relevant experience in Acoustic/ Vibration Design.
1 International Standard Organisation. ISO 2631-2:2003. Evaluation of human exposure to whole-body vibration – Part 2:
Continuous and shock-induced vibration in buildings (1 to 80Hz).
2 British Standard. BS 6472-1:2008. Guide to evaluation of human exposure to vibration in buildings Part 1: Vibration sources other
than blasting
3 British Standard. BS 6472-2:2008. Guide to evaluation of human exposure to vibration in buildings Part 2: Blast-induced vibration
4 Department of Environment and Conservation of NSW, Assessing Vibration: a technical guideline or equivalent standard 2006.
[ONLINE]. Available at: https://www.environment.nsw.gov.au/resources/noise/vibrationguide0643.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].

Submittals

for HWB 7
HWB_07_01 Summary of Indoor Vibration
Assessment [Appendix A]  
HWB_07_02 Endorsed calculations on the

 
isolation efficiency
HWB_07_03 Layout drawings showing the

location(s) of sensitive receiver(s)  
and vibration source(s)
HWB_07_04 Endorsed calculation report on

 
vibration level; or
Endorsed vibration measurement

report - 
HWB_07_05 CV of the professional endorsing the  

calculation/ measurement report
HWB_07_06 Schedule of spaces cross-referencing

to the GBP showing that the project
has no normally occupied space  
only)
None
(b) Related Credits
None

Extent of Application All buildings for part (a)

All buildings with enclosed and/ or semi-enclosed car park of areas more
than 10% of Construction Floor Area for part (b).
Objective Demonstrate that airborne contaminants do not give rise to unacceptable

levels of air pollution in the building
Credit Requirement (a) Indoor Air Quality in Occupied Spaces

Demonstrate compliance in one of the following paths:
Path 1
2 credits for demonstrating compliance with the prescribed limits for
Carbon monoxide (CO), Nitrogen dioxide (NO2), Ozone (O3),
Carbon dioxide (CO2), Respirable suspended particulates (PM10),
Total volatile organic compounds (TVOCs), Formaldehyde (HCHO)
and Radon (Rn) in the sampled occupied spaces.
1 credit for demonstrating compliance with the prescribed limits for
Airborne bacteria and conduct the Mould assessment in the
sampled occupied spaces.
Path 2
3 credits for submitting a valid IAQ Certification Scheme (Good

Class) certificate issued by the Environmental Protection
Department (EPD) covering the whole building.
1 additional BONUS if Excellent Class is achieved.

1 credit for demonstrating compliance with the pollutant
concentration limits specified in ProPECC PN 2/96.

Assessment (a) Indoor Air Quality in Occupied Spaces

Path 1
Prepare a measurement protocol prepared by a IAQ Certificate
Issuing Body (CIB) [1] following guidance stated in Step 1 – Step 4 in
A Guide on Indoor Air Quality Certification Scheme for Offices and
Public Spaces [2].
Measurements should be taken in occupied spaces served by MVAC
System (including normally occupied spaces and not normally
occupied spaces) following the guidelines specified in A Guide on
Indoor Air Quality Certification Scheme for Offices and Public Spaces
[2] and the limits are specified below.
At least one sampling point should be located at each type of IAQ area
as defined by the applicant.
Parameter 8-hour average acceptance limit [2]
Carbon dioxide (CO2) <1,800 mg/m3 or <1,000 ppmv
Carbon monoxide (CO) <7,000 µg/m3 or <6.1 ppmv
Nitrogen dioxide (NO2) <150 µg/m3 or <80 ppbv

Plus [1 hour] <200 µg/m3 or <106 ppbv
Ozone (O3) <120 µg/m3 or <61 ppbv
Respirable suspended <100 µg/m3

particulate (PM10)
Total volatile organic <600 µg/m3 or <261 ppbv

compounds (TVOC)
Formaldehyde (HCHO) <100 µg/m3 or <81 ppbv

Plus [30 mins] <100 µg/m3 or <81 ppbv
Radon (Rn) <167 Bq/m3
Airborne bacteria <1,000 cfu/m3
Mould Prescriptive Checklist
Provide a CIB endorsed IAQ test report which shall include:

- Layout plan showing the locations of the air quality measurement
points
- Description of the measuring equipment used;
- Date, time and duration of measurements;
- Measurement results;
1 Indoor Air Quality Information Centre, Certificate Issuing Body Accreditation. [ONLINE]. Available at:
http://www.iaq.gov.hk/en/iaq-certification-scheme/certificate-issuing-body-accreditation.aspx. [Accessed April 2021].
2 Indoor Air Quality Management Group, A Guide on Indoor Air Quality Certification Scheme for Offices and Public Spaces
2019. [ONLINE]. Available at: https://www.iaq.gov.hk/media/65346/new-iaq-guide_eng.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].

- Calibration certificate of the measuring equipment; and

- Photos taken during measurements (at least one photo per
sampling point).
Given the floor plan of the building has not been changed, the
sampling points agreed during Provisional Assessment will remain the
same for Final Assessment. Otherwise, if the floor plan has been
undergone major change, the sampling points will be re-assessed
during Final Assessment.
Path 2
Submit a valid certificate issued by the Environmental Protection
Department (EPD) covering the whole building. The whole building
should be fully furnished.

This part is only applicable to buildings with enclosed and/or semi-
enclosed car park of areas more than 10% of Construction Floor Area.
Area of open car park, if present in the project, should not be
accounted in this percentage.
1. For mechanically ventilated car park:

Estimate the peak pollutant loading, including carbon monoxide
(CO) and nitrogen dioxide (NO2), in the car park.
Consolidate a carpark ventilation report using the below equation
to calculation the ventilation rate for both CO and NO2. The higher
ventilation rate should be adopted. Demonstrate the ACH can cater
the peak pollutant loading and the CO and NO2 concentration limits
specified in ProPECC PN 2/96 [3].
Carbon monoxide (CO)
q°CO 1×106
QF = Dpc (idling)
3600 COlim
q°CO 1×106
QF = Dtc D (traveling)
3600 COlim
Nitrogen dioxide (NO2)
q°NO2 1×106
QF= Dpc (idling)
3600 NO2 lim
q°NO2 1×106
QF = Dtc D (traveling)
3600 NO2 lim
3 Environmental Protection Department, ProPECC PN2/96 Control of Air Pollution in Car Parks. [ONLINE]. Available at:
http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/sites/default/files/epd/english/resources_pub/publications/files/pn96_2.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].

QF = required air quantity per second (m3 /s)

qoCO = basic value of CO emission per vehicle (assumed to be
120 g/hr,veh if no reference information)
qoNO2 = basic value of NO2 emission per vehicle (assumed to be
24 g/hr,veh if no reference information)
COlim = maximum permissible CO concentration (µg/m3 CO)
NO2lim = maximum permissible NO2 concentration (µg/m3 NO2)
The maximum permissible pollutant concentration is the difference

between the outdoor air pollutant concentration and the maximum
allowed concentration. The outdoor air pollutant concentration can
be found on EPD’s website [4].
Dpc = number of idling vehicles with engine running
Mtc
Dtc= number of travelling vehicles per km =
v
where Mtc = hourly traffic volume of travelling vehicles, and v =

mean driving speed of vehicles
Assume in the peak hour, the hourly traffic volume is the full
capacity of the car park. Idling time per movement is 3 minutes.
The mean driving speed is 5km/hr.
D = travelling distance (km), assumed to be the longest lane in the
car park.
Demonstrate the car park satisfy the provisions requirement for CO
monitoring and automatic control specified in ProPECC PN 2/96.
2. For naturally ventilated car park

Engage an IAQ CIB accredited by HKIAS for on-site
measurements to demonstrate the levels of CO and NO2 are in
compliance with ProPECC PN2/96. The measurement after the car
park started operation, supported by a project owner’s
acknowledgment letter.
Provide a CIB endorsed IAQ test report which shall include:
- Layout plan showing the locations of the air quality

measurement points
- Description of the measuring equipment used;

- Date, time and duration of measurements;
- Measurement results;
- Calibration certificate of the measuring equipment;
- Photos taken during measurements (at least one photo per
sampling point); and
- Project owner’s acknowledgment letter to confirm the

measurement after the car park started operation.
4 Environmental Protection Department, Air Quality in Hong Kong 2016 Statistical Summary. [ONLINE]. Available at:
http://www.aqhi.gov.hk/api_history/english/report/files/2016%20Statistical%20Summary_Final_en.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].

Submittals (a) Indoor Air Quality in Occupied Spaces
indicated on the leftmost column below..
HWB_08a_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template  

for HWB 8a with
Summary of Indoor Air Quality

Measurement [Form S-A] (for Path 1 - 
only)
HWB_08a_01 CIB endorsed checklist for Mould - 

Assessment (prescribed checklist in
Annex 3 of A Guide on Indoor Air
Quality Certification Scheme for
Offices and Public Places 2019) (for
Path 1 only)
HWB_08a_02 Specification requiring a CIB to
 -
provide an endorsed IAQ
measurement methodology, IAQ
measurement and test reports (for
Path 1& 2)
CIB endorsed IAQ measurement

methodology (for Path 1 & 2)
- 
HWB_08a_03 CIB endorsed IAQ test reports (for - 

Path 1 & 2)
HWB_08a_04 Valid certificate issued by the - 
Environmental Protection Department
(EPD) covering the whole building
(for Path 2 only)
HWB_08b_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template

 
for HWB 8b
HWB_08b_01 Layout Plan showing the area of  
enclosed and/or semi-enclosed car
park
HWB_08b_02 Summary of Air Quality in Car Park  
[Appendix A]
HWB_08b_03 Estimation of the peak pollutant

 
loading in car park
HWB_08b_04 Car park ventilation report with
pollution calculation (applicable to  
mechanically ventilated car park)

HWB_08b_05 MVAC layout plans for car park

highlighting location of CO sensors
 
(applicable to mechanically
ventilated car park)
HWB_08b_06 Schematic drawing showing the

control logic of car park ventilation  
(applicable to mechanically
ventilated car park)
HWB_08b_07 Specification requiring a CIB to

provide an endorsed air quality
measurement methodology, air
 -
quality measurement & test report
(applicable to naturally ventilated car
park)
CIB endorsed on-site car park air

quality measurement methodology - 
(applicable to naturally ventilated car
park)
HWB_08b_07 CIB endorsed test reports of air

quality in car park (applicable to - 
naturally ventilated car park)

US Environmental Protection Agency - A Brief Guide to Mold, Moisture
and Your Home. [ONLINE]. Available at:
https://www.epa.gov/mold/brief-guide-mold-moisture-and-your-home.
(b) Related Credits

By delinking the control of temperature and humidity using standalone
or integrated dehumidification system, energy reduction may be
achieved by avoiding overcooling to reach the targeted humidity.

7 Health and 7.3 Indoor Environmental Quality

Wellbeing
HWB 9 Thermal Comfort

Application
Objective Ensure that buildings and systems are tested practicable and the
specified thermal comfort conditions can be achieved under conditions of
normal occupancy and expected heat gains.
Credit Requirement (a) Thermal Comfort Analysis

2 credits for conducting thermal comfort analysis and demonstrate
that normally occupied spaces can fulfill the thermal comfort
requirements.

1 additional BONUS credit for conducting on-site measurements to
verify the thermal comfort performance.
Assessment (a) Thermal Comfort Analysis

Submit a Thermal Comfort Report demonstrating compliance with
the assessment criteria. The report should include:
1) Scaled drawing(s) depicting the building layout and studied
areas;
2) Screen capture of project building, surrounding building and
terrain of the 3D model; and
3) Simulation assumptions, results of simulations (indicating output
file and/ or images) and calculations for thermal comfort.
The reports should be endorsed by a locally qualified professional
who has at least 3 years of relevant experience.
The thermal analysis shall be undertaken using dynamic thermal
modelling software. The thermal analysis should cover all normally
occupied spaces immediately below all main roofs and flat roofs.
Spaces without design (e.g. finishes, system) should provide
endorsed calculation to support the potential achievement in both PA
and FA submission.
In addition, for each type of ventilation means (natural ventilation,
mechanical ventilation and air-conditioning, if present), indicate the
highest level normally occupied spaces using the respective
ventilation means. The thermal analysis should also cover these
spaces.

1) The modelling shall include full annual simulation using

standard Hong Kong weather data [1];
2) The modelling will include the effect of installed solar control
features, e.g. glazing, internal blind, internal or external shading
components, fabric and infiltration specifications, and site
obstructions;
3) The modelling needs not include any internal gains; and
4) Assessment can be confined to the scenarios with the highest
mean monthly temperature of the hottest month only with
reference to the weather data used.
1. Naturally ventilated spaces
The spaces with natural ventilation must be equipped with

operable windows / doors that can be readily opened and
adjusted by the occupants. Maintenance window is not
considered as operable windows. Mechanical ventilation / cooling
equipment for the space shall not be provided.
Demonstrate that daily average indoor operative temperatures in
normally occupied space meet the 80% acceptability limits for
80% of days in the hottest month. The determination of 80%
acceptability limits should refer to ASHRAE 55-2013 [2].
The analysis can be based on the following assumptions:
1.1. Surrounding buildings and terrain shall be included in the
Department, the Government of HKSAR [3];
1.2. The surrounding area shall be at less, 2H (H being the
larger;
1.3. The terrain area shall be in a size of at least, 10H (H being
site) or 1000m × 1000m, whichever is larger, with the project
placed in the centre; and
1.4. For practical reasons, the geometry can be simplified as a
simple block.
1 Standard Hong Kong weather data file from Energyplus. Weather Data by Region | EnergyPlus. [ONLINE]. Available at:
https://energyplus.net/weather-region/asia_wmo_region_2/CHN%20%20. [Accessed April 2021].
2 American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers – ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 55-2013 Thermal
Environmental Conditions for Human Occupancy.
3 Lands Department - Survey and Mapping Office. [ONLINE]. Available at: https://www.landsd.gov.hk/en/survey-
mapping.html. [Accessed April 2021].

2. Mechanically ventilated spaces
Mechanical cooling equipment for the space shall not be

provided, mechanical ventilation with unconditioned air may be
utilised.
Demonstrate that daily average indoor operative temperatures in
normally occupied space meet the 80% acceptability limits for 80%
of days in the hottest month. The determination of 80%
acceptability limits should refer to ASHRAE 55-2013.
3. Air-conditioned spaces
Demonstrate that the predicted Mean Vote (PMV) in normally

occupied space is between –1 and +1. The calculation of PMV
should refer to ASHRAE 55-2013.

BONUS credit in part (b) will be granted only if the credits in part (a)
have been achieved.
Submit a Thermal Comfort Measurement Report demonstrating
compliance with the assessment criteria.
The report should include:
1) Sampling locations;
2) Measurement methodology, on-site photos of measurement, valid
calibration certificate(s) for the measuring equipment and
measurement results;
3) Calculations for Predicted Mean Vote (PMV) (for air-conditioned
spaces); and
4) Calculations for percentage of prescribed locations meeting
thermal comfort condition.
Spaces without design (e.g. finishes, system) should provide

endorsed calculation to support the potential achievement in both PA
and FA submission.
1. Naturally ventilated spaces

10% of the number of naturally ventilated normally occupied
spaces included in the thermal comfort analysis in part (a)
should be sampled.
Record the main physical parameters including outdoor air
temperature, indoor air temperature, indoor mean radiant
temperature and indoor wind speed. The indoor mean radiant
temperature can be assumed to be indoor air temperature. The
measurement should take note on the following:
1.1 The measurement should not be taken on a rainy day;
1.2 The measurements should be represented as 8-hour

average in the daytime;

1.3 The measurement of indoor temperature; and
1.4 The sensors used in the measurement survey shall have an

accuracy that complies with ASHRAE 55-2013 [4], ISO
7726:1998 [5] or equivalent. The sensors shall have been
properly calibrated and valid calibration certificates [e.g.
accredited by Hong Kong Laboratory Accreditation Scheme
(HOKLAS) or under its Mutual Recognition Arrangement
Partners] should be provided.
Demonstrate that the naturally ventilated normally occupied

space meet the 80% acceptability limits on any one day during
selected hottest month from reference weather data file. The
results shall demonstrate compliance with the prescribed design
criteria within the prescribed limits, for a minimum of 90% of the
prescribed locations.
2. Mechanically ventilated spaces

10% of the number of mechanically ventilated normally occupied
spaces included in the thermal comfort analysis in part (a)
should be sampled.
Record the main physical parameters including outdoor air
temperature, indoor air temperature, indoor mean radiant
temperature and indoor wind speed. The indoor mean radiant

average in the daytime or surrogate measurement;
2.3 The measurement of indoor temperature; and

accuracy that complies with ASHRAE 55-2013, ISO
7726:1998 or equivalent. The sensors shall have been
Demonstrate that the mechanically ventilated normally occupied

space meet the 80% acceptability limits on any one day during
selected hottest month from reference weather data file. The
results shall demonstrate compliance with the prescribed design
criteria within the prescribed limits, for a minimum of 90% of the
4 American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers – ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 55-2013 Thermal
Environmental Conditions for Human Occupancy.
5 International Standard Organization – ISO 7726:1998 Ergonomics of the thermal environment — Instruments for measuring
physical quantities.

3. Air-conditioned spaces
10% of the number of air-conditioned normally occupied spaces
included in the thermal comfort analysis in part (a) should be
sampled.
Record the main physical parameters including indoor air
temperature, indoor mean radiant temperature, indoor relative
humidity and indoor wind speed. The indoor mean radiant

average in the daytime or surrogate measurement;
3.3 The measurement of indoor temperature and indoor relative

humidity; and

accuracy that complies with ASHRAE 55-2013, ISO
7726:1998 or equivalent. The sensors shall have been
Demonstrate that the predicted Mean Vote (PMV) in normally

occupied space is between –1 and +1. The results shall
demonstrate compliance with the prescribed design criteria
within the prescribed limits, for a minimum of 90% of the
Submittals (a) Thermal Comfort Analysis
HWB_09a_00 BEAM Plus NB submission  

template for HWB 9a
HWB_09a_01 Endorsed Thermal Comfort

 #
Analysis Report

 #
#The supporting documents are not required in FA if the credits are

achieved in PA


template for HWB 9b
HWB_09b_01 Specification requiring the provision
of thermal comfort measurement  -
and report
HWB_09b_02 Thermal Comfort Measurement

Report
- 
Indoor Air Quality Management Group – A Guide on Indoor Air

Quality Certification Scheme for Offices and Public Spaces 2019.
[ONLINE]. Available at: https://www.iaq.gov.hk/media/65346/new-
iaq-guide_eng.pdf. [Accessed April 2021].
(b) Related Credits
None

HWB 10 Artificial Lighting
Objective Promote indoor lighting design which is comfortable for occupants’ indoor
activities.
Credit Requirement (a) Artificial lighting in normally occupied spaces

1 credit for achieving the prescribed lighting performance in normally
occupied spaces.
(b) Artificial lighting in not normally occupied spaces and

unoccupied spaces
1 credit for achieving the prescribed lighting performance in not

normally occupied spaces and unoccupied spaces.
Assessment (a) Artificial lighting in normally occupied spaces

This credit only assesses indoor normally occupied spaces with
permanently installed lighting fixtures provided by the project owner.
Spaces with fixtures, which are temporarily installed for Occupation
Permit (OP) inspection purposes and out of the project owner’s fit-out
scope, are not assessed.
Demonstrate the achievement of the prescribed lighting performance
in normally occupied spaces regarding the lighting performance criteria
adopted based on The SLL Code for Lighting 2012 Section 2.2 [1] or
equivalent. If the task area is unknown by the time of design, assume
the entire space, with 0.5m from walls, is the task area.
Demonstrate compliance with the assessment criteria including
maintained illuminance, Unified Glare Rating limit and minimum
illuminance uniformity either by measurements using a standardised
measurement protocol appropriate to the parameter being assessed,
or by computer modelling.
For computer modelling, the following typical surface reflectance can
be adopted. If different values are adopted, supporting documents
(cut sheets / catalogues / laboratory reports) showing the
corresponding information are required for justification.
1 The Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE) – The SLL Code for Lighting 2012

Table HWB 10-1
Surfaces Reflectance of surfaces
Ceiling 0.6
Walls 0.3
Working planes 0.2
Floor 0.1
Submit an Artificial Lighting Performance Report, including the

following content:
1) Technical details of the installed lighting systems;

2) Design criteria for each room type; and
3) Results of measurements or simulation.

unoccupied spaces
This credit only assesses indoor not normally occupied spaces and
unoccupied spaces with permanently installed lighting fixtures provided
by the project owner. Spaces with fixtures, which are temporarily
installed for Occupation Permit (OP) inspection purposes and out of
the project owner’s fit-out scope, are not assessed.
Demonstrate the achievement of the prescribed lighting performance
in not normally occupied spaces and unoccupied spaces regarding the
lighting performance criteria adopted based on The SLL Code for
Lighting 2012 Section 2.2 or equivalent.
Demonstrate compliance with the assessment criteria including
maintained illuminance, Unified Glare Rating limit and minimum
illuminance uniformity either by measurements using a standardised
measurement protocol appropriate to the parameter being assessed,
or by computer modelling.
For computer modelling, the following typical surface reflectance can
be adopted. If different values are adopted, supporting documents (cut
sheets / catalogues / laboratory reports) showing the corresponding
information are required for justification.
Table HWB 10-2
Surfaces Reflectance of surfaces
Ceiling 0.6
Walls 0.3
Working planes 0.2
Floor 0.1

Submit an Artificial Lighting Performance Report, including the

following content:
1) Technical details of the installed lighting systems;
2) Design criteria for each room type; and
3) Results of measurements or simulation
Submittals (a) Artificial lighting in normally occupied spaces
HWB_10a_00 BEAM Plus NB submission  

template for HWB 10a
HWB_10a_01 Summary of Artificial Lighting in  

[Appendix A]
HWB_10a_02 Lighting layout plan - 
HWB_10a_03 Catalogues or other supporting

documents showing the
 
reflectance value (for computer
modelling approach and if values
other than those specified in Table
HWB 10-1 have been adopted)
HWB_10a_04 Light fitting schedule  
HWB_10a_05 Artificial Lighting Performance

 
Report

unoccupied spaces

template for HWB 10b
HWB_10b_01 Summary of Artificial Lighting in  

and Unoccupied Spaces
[Appendix B]
HWB_10b_02 Lighting layout plan - 

HWB_10b_03 Catalogues or other supporting  

documents showing the
reflectance value (for computer
modelling approach and if values
other than those specified in Table
HWB 10-2 have been adopted)
HWB_10b_04 Light fitting schedule  
HWB_10b_05 Artificial Lighting Performance

 
Report
None
(b) Related Credits

None

HWB 11 Daylight
Extent of Application Residential, office and education buildings.
Objective To achieve satisfactory daylight performance in indoor normally occupied

spaces by considering the sufficiency of daylight illuminance and the
potential risk of excessive sunlight penetration.
Credits Attainable 2 BOUNS
Credit Requirement 2 BONUS credits for demonstrating at least 55% of the total area of the
studied normally occupied spaces achieves spatial Daylight
Autonomy300/50% (sDA300/50%) and no more than 10% of the same area
receives Annual Sunlight Exposure1000,250 (ASE1000, 250).
Assessment Conduct simulations to show that at least 55% of the total area of normally
occupied spaces can receive at least 300 lux of sunlight for at least 50% of
operating hours each year and no more than 10% of the same area can
receive more than 1,000 lux for more than 250 hours each year.
Follow IES LM-83-12 Approved Method: IES Spatial Daylight Autonomy
(sDA) and Annual Sunlight Exposure (ASE). Annual sky file referencing a
local climate file, such as an EnergyPlus weather format data file (*.epw)
[1], should be used for the sky model. Surrounding buildings and terrain
included in the model should be based on the GIS information from Lands
Department [2]. The following simplifications are allowed:
1) The presence of trees can be ignored;

2) The overall external reflectance of the building can be assumed to be
0.2;
3) If furniture layout is not known by the time of design, it can be
assumed that no furniture is in the space or a typical furniture layout
can be applied;
4) Internal doors within a unit are assumed to be fully opened; and
5) The surface reflectance of ceiling, wall and floor can be assumed to be
0.6, 0.3 and 0.1 respectively (based on Table HWB 10-1).
Submit a Daylight Analysis Report demonstrating compliance with the

credit requirement. The report shall include:
1) Name of simulation software used;

2) Scaled drawing(s) depicting the building layout and locations of
studied normally occupied space;
1 Standard Hong Kong weather data file from Energyplus. Weather Data by Region | EnergyPlus. [ONLINE]. Available at:
https://energyplus.net/weather-region/asia_wmo_region_2/CHN%20%20. [Accessed April 2021].
2 Lands Department - Survey and Mapping Office. [ONLINE]. Available at: https://www.landsd.gov.hk/en/survey-
mapping.html. [Accessed April 2021].

3) Simulation assumptions, including sky model file, surface reflectance

and glass transmittance, etc.;
4) Screen captures of project building, surrounding building and terrain of
the 3D model; and
5) Simulation results and output files/ render images.
Endorsement by a locally qualified professional who has at least 3 years of

relevant experience in daylight study.
If the simulation software is not on the list in Annex 4 of PNAP APP-130, a
software validation report from the software developer should be provided
to ensure the accuracy of simulation by the software.
Submittals

for HWB 11
HWB_11_01 Daylight Analysis Report endorsed
by Hong Kong Professional institute  #
qualified engineer
HWB_11_02 CV of the professional as per

 #
HWB_11_03 Validation report of the simulation

 #
software*
# The supporting documents are not required in FA if the BONUS credits

are achieved in PA
* It is required only if the simulation software is not on the list in Annex 4
of PNAP APP-130
Remarks 1) Additional Information
Whole Building Design Guide, National Institute of Building Sciences

– Daylighting. [ONLINE]. Available at:
https://www.wbdg.org/resources/daylighting. [Accessed April 2021].
2) Related Credits
EU 1 Low carbon passive design
This credit considers health and wellbeing of occupants therefore
stipulate requirements for drawing natural light but neither too dim nor
too fierce. On the other hand, in EU 1 daylight is promoted as means
to replace artificial lighting.
SS 4 Neighborhood Daylight Access
This credit promotes building designs which allow the access to
daylight of neighboring sensitive buildings to be maintained at the
prescribed levels.

HWB 12 Biological Contamination
Objective To reduce the risk of biological contamination by adopting appropriate

design precautions of the water supply systems, HVAC systems and other
water features
Credit Requirement 1 credit for complying with the recommendations given in the Code of
Practice for Prevention of Legionnaires’ Disease 2016 Edition in respect of
Water Supply Systems, HVAC Systems and other Water Features.
Assessment Water Supply Systems

Demonstrate compliance, if relevant items are present, with the following
sections of the Code of Practice for Prevention of Legionnaires’ Disease
2016 Edition:
1) Centralised Hot Water Supply Systems – Section 4.4.1.1
2) Cold Water Supply Systems – Section 4.5.1
HVAC Systems
2016 Edition [1]:
1) Cooling Tower – Section 4.2.1;
2) Air Handling Unit / Fan Coil Unit – Section 4.3.1 Items (a) – (d);
3) Air Duct and Air Filters – Section 4.3.2 Items (a) – (c);
4) Humidifiers – Section 4.3.3 Items (a) – (c); and
5) Air Washers – Section 4.3.4 Items (a), (b) and (d).
Other Water Features

2016 Edition:
1) Architectural Foundations – Section 4.6.1; and
2) Spa Pools (Whirlpools) – Section 4.7.2.
1 Prevention of Legionnaires’ Disease Committee, Hong Kong – Code of Practice for Prevention of Legionnaires’ Disease 2016
Edition [ONLINE]. Available at: http://www.emsd.gov.hk/filemanager/en/content_645/COP-PLD_2016.pdf. [Accessed April
2021].

Submittals
HWB_12_00 BEAM Plus NB submission  

template for HWB 12
HWB_12_01 Specifications of Water Supply

Systems
 -
HWB_12_02 Schematic diagram of Water  

Supply Systems
HWB_12_03 Specifications of HVAC Systems  -

HWB_12_04 Schematic diagram of HVAC  
Systems
HWB_12_05 Specifications of Other Water

Features
 -
HWB_12_06 Schematic diagram of Other Water  

Features with mark-up narratives
HWB_12_07 Drawing of installation details - 
None
(b) Related Credits

None

BEAM Plus New Buildings Version 2.0 Innovations and Additions - IA
8 Innovations and 8.1 Innovations and Additions

Additions
Introduction BEAM Encourage innovative and/ or new techniques that are yet to find in
the mainstream application in Hong Kong addressing sustainability
objectives for new buildings.
Background Any credits gained under this heading shall be regarded as ‘BONUS’ credits,
counting towards the total credits obtained, but not towards the total credits
obtainable. BEAM encourages application of new practices, technologies
and techniques together with the associated benefits in addressing
sustainability objectives for new buildings.

BEAM Plus New Buildings Version 2.0 Innovations and Additions - IA 1
8 Innovations and 8.1 Innovations and Additions

Additions
IA 1 Innovations and Additions
Extent of Application All buildings, for innovations that have not been addressed in the respective
categories of the NB certification.
Objective Encourage innovative and/ or new techniques/ practices/ design that are
yet to find in the mainstream application in Hong Kong addressing
sustainability objectives for new buildings.
Credits Attainable Maximum 10 BONUS credits
Assessment Present evidence of the application of new practices, technologies and/ or

techniques that are (1) not described in this manual; or (2) not market
mainstream implementation; or (3) multiple aspect achievement; and the
associated benefits in addressing sustainability objectives for new
buildings:
1) Identify the sustainability objectives addressed by the proposed

innovative applications.
2) Detail the method and criteria evaluating the benefits and
effectiveness of the applications (quantifiable performance indicators
to be proposed if applicable).
3) Justify the number of BONUS credits for the proposed applications.
4) Provide evidence of the implementation of the applications.
5) Evaluate preliminary achievements and any suggestion for
improvement for the applications.
The Assessor will refer the proposal to the BSL Technical Review
Committee who will consider each application on its merits.
Submittals
IA_01_00 BEAM Plus NB submission template for  

IA 1
IA_01_01 A report on the objectives, evaluating

method and criteria, and proposed  
number of BONUS credits for the
innovative techniques
IA_01_02 A report on the evidence of

implementation and evaluation of - 
preliminary achievements / proposed
improvements for the innovative
techniques
IA_01_03 Relevant technical documents, if
 
necessary (e.g. drawings, specifications,
product catalogues, test reports, etc.)

BEAM Plus New Buildings Version 2.0 Innovations and Additions - IA 1

None
(b) Related Credits

None

BEAM Plus New Buildings Version 2.0 Appendix 9.1 - Glossary
9 Appendices 9.1 Glossary
Air Ventilation Assessment

Air Ventilation Assessment, in accordance with ETWB Technical Circular
No. 1/06, is a tool to assess the impacts of the proposal on the pedestrian
wind environment.
Albedo
The proportion of incident radiation reflected by a system. A perfect
reflector would have an albedo of 1, whereas a perfect absorber would
have an albedo of 0.
Annual Building Energy

Annual building energy refers to the total annual building energy
consumption estimated for baseline case or proposed case. Both setting
could be referred to Appendix 9 of this manual.
Biophilic Design
Designing for people as a biological organism, respecting the mind-body
systems as indicators of health and well-being in the context of what is
locally appropriate and responsive.
Bioretention Facilities
Bioretention facilities filter rainwater that becomes polluted as it flows over
hard surfaces like streets, parking lots, roofs, and driveways. The
bioretention facility retains the water and filters various pollutants.
Brownfield
Brownfield refers to previously developed land, or land that contains or
contained permanent structures and associated infrastructures.
Certificate Validity
Certificate Validity refers to the duration for which a BEAM Plus certificate
and grading remain effective and officially recognized by the HKGBC.
Charrette
Charrette, a design workshop to quickly generate a design solution while
integrating the aptitudes and interests of project team and core design
disciplines, shall be held no later than design development phase and
preferably during schematic design.
369
Commercial Building
Commercial Building means a building, or that part of the building, intended
to be used for business, trade or entertainment, for example office,
clubhouse and retail.
Computer Fluid Dynamics
Computational fluid dynamics (CFD) is a branch of fluid mechanics that

uses numerical analysis and data structures to analyse and solve problems
that involve fluid flows.
Construction Waste
It means any substance, matter or thing which is generated as a result of

construction work and abandoned whether or not it has been processed or
stockpiled before being abandoned. It is a mixture of surplus materials
arising from site clearance, excavation, construction, refurbishment,
renovation, demolition and road works.
Core Amenities
Basic services/ recreational facilities that are most vital and essential to the
subject development
Cultural Heritage
Declared monuments/ Grade 1 to Grade 3 historic buildings confirmed by

the Antiquities Advisory Board (AAB) and other sites/ historic buildings
proposed to be recorded/ graded by AAB.
Demolition Waste
It means all wastes (including recyclable waste) generated from

deconstruction of existing buildings at the demolition stage are counted as
demolition waste.
Designed for Disassembly
Materials which can be disassembled by using non-specialist tools and for

reuse, recycling or reprocessing
Educational Building
Educational Building means a building intended to be used to fulfill
educational purposes, for example kindergarten, primary school,
secondary school and universities.
Embodied Energy
Embodied energy is the energy used during the entire life cycle of a
product, including its manufacture, transportation, and disposal, as well as
the inherent energy captured within the product itself
370
Environmental Management Plan (EMP)

An Environmental management plan is a plan to address the potential
significant environmental aspects and impacts and to propose appropriate
mitigation measures for construction works.
Environmental Monitoring and Auditing Plan (EM&A)

EM&A aims to provide systemic procedures for monitoring, auditing and
minimizing environmental impacts associated with Project activities.
External Shading
External shading is a device incorporated in the building facade to limit the
internal heat gain resulting from solar radiation.
Facade Zone
The projection of the curtain wall system from the outer face of the
structural elements does not exceed 200 mm for a domestic building and
250 mm for a non-domestic building
FSC Certification
A certification system for timber products which confirms that timber has
been harvested in a sustainable manner.
Functional Program
A functional program describes the requirements which a building must
satisfy in order to support and enhance human activities. The program also
defines the character, services, scope, functions and space requirements.
Girth
Diameter of a tree trunk measured at 1.3 m above ground; or refers as
Diameter at Breast Height (DBH)
Global Warming Potential

GWP provides a measure of the potential for damage that a chemical has
relative to one unit of carbon dioxide, the primary greenhouse gas
Global Warming Potential

Global Warming Potential, GWP, provides a measure of the potential for
damage that a chemical has relative to one unit of carbon dioxide, the
primary greenhouse gas.
Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag (GGBS)

GGBS is a by-product of the iron manufacturing industry that, after the
molten iron is tapped off, the remaining molten slag (consisting of mainly
siliceous and aluminous residue) is then water-quenched rapidly, dried and
ground to the required size.
371
Height of Building
The height of a building refers to the delta mPD between street level and
the highest top roof as recorded in statutory documents
High Void
A high void is a space over 9m measured vertically by its clear height
between building structure. Any structures inside a void and the clear
vertical height between structures is over 9m, the space between structures
is regarded as a high void. For multi-building development, the calculation
of percentages of high voids to total building heights shall be considered
for individual buildings separately
Hotel Building
Hotel Building means a building intended to be used for habitation. The
entire building is under single ownership, for example hotel, service
apartment and dormitory.
Hydro-chlorofluorocarbons
HCFCs cause ozone depletion when released into the atmosphere.
Hydro-fluorocarbons
HFCs are commonly used to replace HCFC refrigerants to reduce the OPD,
however HFCs refrigerants have a high GWP.
Interior General Lighting

Interior general Lighting, lighting that provides a substantially uniform level
of illumination through an area. General lighting shall not include decorative
lighting or lighting that provides a dissimilar level of illumination to serve a
specialized application or feature within such area.
Intermediate Waste Recycling Facility

IWF means waste recycling facility located within 60m walking distance
from an external entrance of a low-rise domestic house.
Intra-Urban Heat Index

The effects of intra-urban heating can be quantified by Intra-Urban Heat
Index, which is defined as the temperature difference between urban and
reference meteorological air temperature. Higher Intra-Urban Heat Index
suggests a more severe intra-urban heating effect.
372
Local Velocity Ratio (LVR)

Corresponds to the average velocity ratio of the overall test points in the
open spaces in the assessment area.
Main Pedestrian Access Pathways

The widest pathway(s) of width not less than 2m for pedestrian circulation
from building main entrance(s) to site entrance(s) or amenities within the
Site.
Master Plan
The masterplan design that certified under BEAM Plus Neighbourhood
certification, that has a validity of 5 years and is “scheme sensitive”.
Modular Component
Materials which are manufactured with standardized dimensions, and can
be arranged or fitted together in various scenarios of design.
Multi-disciplinary Design Charrette

An intensive, multiparty workshop that brings people from different
disciplines and backgrounds together to explore, generate, and
collaboratively produce design options.
Non-renewable Resource
A resource does not renew itself at a sufficient rate for sustainable
extraction in meaningful human time-frames.

Normally occupied spaces are enclosed areas where people normally stay
more than 1 hour. Spaces which are not used daily, but will be occupied for
more than one hour when used, are considered normally occupied spaces.
Refer to Appendix 9.4 for examples of regularly occupied spaces.

Not normally occupied spaces are enclosed areas within the building where
people normally stay less than 1 hour. Refer to Appendix 9.4 for examples
of not normally occupied spaces.
Occupied Space (Habitable Space)

Enclosed space intended for human activities, excluding those spaces that
are intended primarily for other purposes, such as storage rooms and
equipment rooms, and that are only occupied occasionally and for short
373
periods of time. Occupied spaces are further classified as regularly

occupied or non-regularly occupied spaces based on the duration of the
occupancy, individual or multi-occupant based on the quantity of
occupants, and densely or non-densely occupied spaces based on the
concentration of occupants in the space.
Open Planned Design

Open plan is the design for any floor plan which makes use of large, open
spaces and minimizes the use of small, enclosed rooms such as private
offices.
Orientation
Orientation is the compass direction the facade faces.
Other Building Types

Other Building Types include, but not limited to, government building,
industrial building, data centre, pump house, hospital, library, museum and
law court.
Ozone Depleting Potential

ODP of a chemical compound is the relative amount of degradation to the
ozone layer it can cause.
Permeability Coefficient
A measure of a material's capacity to transmit water. It is defined as a
constant of proportionality relating the specific discharge of a porous
medium under a unit hydraulic gradient. Hydraulic conductivity is another
term for coefficient of permeability.
Primary Zone
The 15m vertical zone of a site along the abutting street level. The greenery
in this zone is for providing visual contacts or access from a street through
common parts of the building for enhancing the walkability of urban space
to the public, visitors or occupiers. The top level of soil or similar base for
planting should be taken as the reference level for inclusion in the Primary
Zone.
Public Realm
Public spaces within and surrounding the Site for socialization and
enjoyment by the community.
374
Pulverised Fuel Ash (PFA)

PFA is a by-product from power plant as a partial replacement for cement
in concrete.
Rapidly Renewable Materials

Planted and harvested in less than a 10-year cycle, and do not result in
significant biodiversity loss, increased erosion, or air quality impacts.
Recycle Content
With reference to ISO 14021, recycle content is defined as the proportion,
by mass, of the recycled material in a product.
Regional Materials
Materials which are extracted and manufactured within an 800km radius of
HKSAR by road transportation; within a 1,600km radius by rail
transportation; or within a 4,000km radius by sea transportation.
Residential Building
Residential Building means a building intended to be used for habitation.
The building is under multiple ownerships.
Reuse
Materials which can be used again with the same functions as their original
use.
Roll-out Plan
The Rollout Plan describes the overall plan for the attaining BEAM Plus EB
certification. The plan is an increment-based approach that includes
specific tasks, actions, milestones, and action parties.
Runoff Coefficient
A dimensionless coefficient relating the amount of runoff to the amount of
precipitation received. It is a larger value for areas with low infiltration and
high runoff (pavement, steep gradient), and lower for permeable, well
vegetated areas (forest, flat land).
“Simple Box” Environmental/ Energy Modelling

A simple energy analysis that informs the team about the building’s likely
distribution of energy consumption and is used to evaluate potential project
energy strategies. A simple box analysis uses sketches and schematic
building information. Block blush calculation is expected to demonstrate the
building operation pattern. Also refers as “building-massing modelling”.
375
Site
Site refers to the land, water, vegetation and developable area that
constitute the project application site within BEAM Plus assessment
boundary.
Site Velocity Ratio (SVR)

Corresponds to the average velocity ratio of the perimeter test points on
site boundary.
Solar Reflectance Index (SRI)

The Solar Reflectance Index (SRI) is a measure of the solar reflectance
and emissivity of materials that can be used as an indicator of how hot they
are likely to become when solar radiation is incident on their surface. The
lower the SRI, the hotter a material is likely to become in the sunshine.
South Orientated Facade

For building elevation plan that is within 15deg of true south. Building
elevation plan that partly fall into the range of 15deg of true south, the entire
elevation will be considered as south orientated facade.
Sub-structure
Substructure is the part of the structure which is below ground level or
supporting superstructure loads, such as foundation and basement.
Superstructure
Superstructure is the part of the structure which is above ground level, and
which serves the purpose of its intended use.
Sustainable Building Design (SBD) Guidelines

A guideline, promulgated by the Buildings Department, on building design
which aim to enhance the quality and sustainability of the built environment
in Hong Kong.
Sustainable Forestry Product

Timber or timber products are originally sourced from forestlands
participating in an acceptable system or program which certifies
sustainable forest management.
Tree Coverage
Area covered by crown of design trees.
376
Unoccupied Spaces
Unoccupied spaces are areas within the building where the primary
function is not intended for human activities. These spaces are occupied
by occupants for a short period of time and only occasionally. Refer to
Appendix 9.4 for examples of unoccupied spaces.
Whole-systems Thinking
A method of analysis and decision-making that looks at the
interrelationships of the constituent parts of a system rather than narrowly
focusing on the parts themselves.
Wind Tunnel
Wind tunnels are large tubes with air moving inside. The tunnels are used
to copy the potential air movement, pressure and turbulence around the
object.
377
BEAM Plus New Buildings Version 2.0 Appendix 9.2 - EU 2 Path 1 (Performance Approach)
9 Appendices 9.2 EU 2 Path 1 (Performance Approach)
Whole Building Energy Simulation is required for Path 1 compliance. Both the
baseline building model and the proposed building model must cover all
building energy components listed in this appendix. The simulation models for
calculating the baseline and proposed case building should be developed in
accordance with the modelling methodology and the requirements per
building category in the following Table-App 1 - 4.
Energy Modelling Methodology
The simulations for the proposed model and baseline model must be
calculated using:
(i) the same software
(ii) the same weather data
(iii) the same operating schedules; unless justification is provided
through Exceptional Calculation Method (ECM). Otherwise, default
operation schedule in Table-App 4 shall be used.
(iv) the same occupancy density
(v) the same building design in terms of shape
(vi) the same outdoor and indoor design conditions, and
(vii) the same internal illuminance levels (lux) for space lightings
(viii) the same thermal block based on similar internal load densities,
occupancy, lighting, thermal and space temperature schedules,
and in combination with the following guidelines:
• Separate thermal blocks should be assumed for interior and
perimeter spaces. Interior spaces should be those located
greater than 5m from an exterior wall. Perimeter spaces should
be those located within 5m of an exterior wall.
• Separate thermal blocks should be assumed for spaces adjacent
to glazed exterior walls; a separate zone should be provided for
each orientation, except that orientations that differ by less than
45 degrees may be considered to be the same orientation. Each
zone should include all floor area that is 5m or less from a glazed
perimeter wall, except that floor area within 5m of glazed
perimeter walls having more than one orientation should be
divided proportionately between zones.
• Separate thermal blocks should be assumed for spaces having
floors that are in contact with the ground or exposed to ambient
conditions from zones that do not share these features.
• Separate thermal blocks should be assumed for spaces having
exterior ceiling or roof assemblies from zones that do not share
these features
378
Exceptional Calculation Method (ECM)

When no simulation program can adequately model a design, materials or
device, an ECM can be used to demonstrate above-standard performance.
Its adoption is subject to justification (submitted by the Applicant) of its
underlying principles, quantitative & qualitative techniques, assumptions etc.
in details.
Any claim of non-regulated load saving or strategies that lead to a difference
between proposed and baseline model is required to submit a narrative and
provide with ECM calculation.
ECM is allowed to create a representation of that element. If the methodology
of approximation has not been previously published in any technical circular
or FAQ, it is the responsibility of the applicant to submit a narrative explanation
describing the calculation methodology and providing the results for energy
savings if necessary.
Documentation includes the minimum:

(i) Description of software limitation;
(ii) Scope of application;
(iii) Description of calculation methodology, theoretical and
empirical information to support the accuracy of the method; and
(iv) Demonstrate result and corresponding saving.
Necessary software being used in calculation other than that used for building
energy assessment shall provide corresponding verification
379
Table-App 1 Modeling Requirements for Calculating Proposed and Baseline Building Performance
Baseline Case Proposed Case
Building Envelope
a. Orientation: The baseline case shall be a. All components of the building envelope in the
generated by simulating the building with its proposed case shall be modelled as shown on
actual orientation and again after rotating the design documents (or as-built for existing
entire building 90, 180, and 270 degrees, then building envelopes)
averaging the results.
Exception: for multiple buildings project
applicant could consider not implement this
clause. Under this condition benefits from
orientation shall be demonstrated through
ECM.
b. External Shading: No shading projections shall
be modelled; No manual window shading
devices shall be modelled.
c. Infiltration:
Operable window: 1L/s/m2, pressure at
75Pa accordance with NFRC 400 or ASTM
E283 [1]
Curtain wall and glazed shop
front:0.3L/s/m2, pressure at 75Pa
accordance with NFRC 400 or ASTM E283
[1]
Residential Building & Residents’ Recreational Facilities (RRF)

a. Above grade Wall & Roof: Create baseline a. All components of the building envelope in the
opaque thermal properties for assessed building proposed case shall be modelled as shown on
that just meet the regulatory requirement [2] design documents (or as-built for existing
RTTVwall: 14W/m2; building envelopes). This included:
RTTVroof:: 4W/m2, AND if applicable Building geometry and window design
OTTVRRF, tower: 21W/m2; Albedo of the envelope
OTTVRRF, podium:: 50W/m2 Thermal properties for the external walls,
b. Below grade Walls: Modelled identically with the roof, floors and fenestrations (vertical
proposed case fenestration and skylight)
c. The baseline shall be developed from the SC and VLT for fenestrations
proposed building envelope design for the above b. No manual fenestration shading devices such
target with below steps: as blinds or shades shall be modelled.
Step 1: No shading projections shall be Automatically controlled fenestration shades or
modelled; No manual window shading blinds might be modelled with creditable
devices shall be modelled. documentation provided.
Step 2: Exclude roof insulation c. Permanent shading devices such as fins,
overhangs and light shelves may be modeled.
Step 3: Adjust the window-to-wall area ratio
(WWR) to achieve the targeted
RTTV/OTTV value,
Step 4: If RTTV/OTTV targeted value
cannot be achieved under 80% WWR,
relax the glazing SC value. The final SC
value shall not be greater than 0.65.
d. If there is existing building envelope, the model
shall reflect the existing conditions prior to any
revision that are part of the scope of work being
evaluated
1 ANSI/ASHRAEIES Standard 90.1-2016 – Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings
2 Buildings Department – PNAP APP-156 – Design and Construction Requirements for Energy Efficiency of Residential Buildings;
AND Buildings Department – Guideline on Design and Construction Requirements for Energy Efficiency of Residential Buildings
2014
380
Commercial Buildings, Hotel Building & All Other Building Types
a. Above grade Walls & Roof: Create a baseline a. All components of the building envelope in the
that just meet the regulatory requirement [3] proposed case shall be modelled as shown on
design documents (or as-built for existing
OTTVtower: 21W/m2;
building envelopes). This included:
OTTVpodium: 50W/m2
Building geometry and window design
b. Below grade Walls: modelled identically with the
Albedo of the envelope
proposed case
Thermal properties for the external walls,
c. The baseline shall be developed from the
roof, floors and fenestrations (vertical
proposed building envelope design for the above
fenestration and skylight)
target with below steps:
SC and VLT for fenestrations
Step 1: Exclude any external shading
device b. No manual fenestration shading devices such
as blinds or shades shall be modelled.
Step 2: Exclude roof insulation
Automatically controlled fenestration shades or
Step 3: Adjust the window-to-wall area ratio blinds might be modelled with creditable
(WWR) to achieve the targeted OTTV documentation provided.
value,
c. Permanent shading devices such as fins,
Step 4: If OTTV targeted value cannot be overhangs and light shelves may be modelled.
achieved under 80% WWR, relax the
glazing SC value. The final SC value shall
not be greater than 0.65.
d. Existing building envelopes shall reflect the
existing conditions prior to any revision that are
part of the scope of work being evaluated
3 Buildings Department - PNAP APP-67 – Energy Efficiency of Buildings, Building (Energy Efficiency) Regulation; Code of
Practice for Overall Thermal Transfer Value in Buildings 1995
381
Interior General Lighting System
Lighting that provides a substantially uniform level of illumination through an area. General lighting shall not include
decorative lighting or lighting that provides a dissimilar level of illumination to serve a specialized application or feature
within such area. All installed lighting shall be modelled in each thermal block.
1. Lighting Power shall be determined in space-by-space method with same categorization as the proposed
design.
2. Lighting system power shall include all lighting system components shown or provided for on the plans for
background lighting. Lighting system that solely use for emergency purpose is not in scope.
3. Lighting power shall include all power used by the luminaires, including lamps, ballasts, transformers and
control devices.
4. Any independently operating lighting systems in a space that are capable of being controlled to prevent
simultaneous user operation, the installed interior lighting power shall be based solely on the lighting system
with the highest wattage
5. Lighting equipment that additional to general lighting requirement for a space and is controlled by an
independent control device is not included.
6. Lighting that is integral to equipment or instrumentation and is installed by its manufacturer is not included in
this assessment methodology
7. For space that the completed fixed lighting installations in the space does not exceed 70W, baseline shall be
modelled as 70W in the space
8. Lighting installations in BEC TG-2018 ver.0 [4] clauses 5.1.2 are excluded.
9. Automatic lighting control shall be modelled in the baseline case in accordance with BEC2018 ver.0 [5] table
5.4 and clauses 5.6. Residential dwelling unit is excluded from this requirement.
Exceptions: emergency lighting that is automatically off during normal building operation; lighting that is specially
designated as required by a health or life safety statute, ordinance, or regulation
4 The lighting power density within the dwelling a. Dwelling Unit where a complete lighting system
unit shall be set equal to the below: designed (or installed) shall be consistent with
design documents (or actual equipment used).
Bedroom: 13 W/m2
b. Dwelling Unit where a lighting system neither
Living Room/ Dining Room: 15 W/m2
exists nor is specified in a space, lighting power
Kitchen: 13 W/m2 shall be modelled identically with the baseline
Bathroom: 13W/m2 case, unless a legal bounding agreement is
provided for the future users.
*For any other space type in the building,
please refer to BEC 2018 Table 5.4 c. For other spaces where a complete lighting
maximum allowable Lighting Power system designed (or installed) shall be
Density (LPD). consistent with design documents (or actual
equipment used)
5 Lighting Control shall be included to reflect the
mandatory control requirements in BEC 2018 d. For other spaces where a lighting system
for spaces other than dwelling units in a neither exists nor is specified in a space, lighting
building. power shall be modelled identically with the
baseline case.
6 Daylight responsive control shall be modelled
for the space (other than dwelling units) with e. For automatic lighting controls in addition to
fenestration area exceeding 5m2 and with those mandatory requirements in BEC 2018,
lighting electrical consumption at 150W and Exceptional Calculation Method (ECM) is
4 Technical Guidelines on Code of Practice for Energy Efficiency of Building Services Installation 2018 (Ver. 0) – Electrical and
Mechanical Services Department HKSAR
5 Code of Practice for Energy Efficiency of Building Services Installation (Ver.0) – Electrical and Mechanical Services
Department HKSAR
382

above. The control should be able to shut off or required to justify the modification of lighting
reduce the lighting zone’s lighting power schedules uses for the proposed case. Credible
automatically to 50% or less in response to the technical documentation for the modification
available daylight. shall be provided.
d. Automatic lighting control (occupancy sensor)
for space (other than dwelling unit) with lighting
electrical consumption at 150W and above. The
control should be able to shut off or reduce the
general lighting power by at least 50%
automatically of the lighting zone being
controlled.
Commercial Buildings, Hotels and Other Building Types
a. Lighting power shall be modelled with reference a. For spaces where a complete lighting system
to the maximum allowable LPD in BEC 2018 designed (or installed) shall be consistent with
Table 5.4 design documents (or actual equipment used)
b. For space that that cannot be determined from b. For spaces where a lighting system neither
the BEC 2018 Table 5.4, LPD could be advised exists nor is specified in a space, lighting power
by professional and justification shall be shall be modelled identically with the baseline
provided for advanced approval. case, unless a legally bounding document for
future use is provided to justify the input.
c. Daylight responsive control shall be modelled for
the space with fenestration area exceeding 5m2 c. For automatic lighting controls in addition to
and with lighting electrical consumption at 150W those mandatory requirements in BEC 2018,
and above. The control should be able to shut off ECM is required to justify the modification of
or reduce the lighting zone’s lighting power lighting schedules uses for the proposed case.
automatically to 50% or less in response to the Credible technical documentation for the
available daylight. modification shall be provided.
d. Automatic lighting control (occupancy sensor) for
space with lighting electrical consumption at
150W and above. The control should be able to
shut off or reduce the general lighting power by
at least 50% automatically of the lighting zone
being controlled.
383
Receptacle and Other Loads
Energy for receptacle and other loads (unregulated load) [a] shall be modelled with respect to building type. These
loads shall be input as per design information to reflect the expected energy consumption. Justification shall be provided
by the applicant through ECM. If no information could be provided, default power density shall be used for the below
space type:
Office: 25W/m2
Retail: 15W/m2
Chinese Restaurant: 20W per person [b]

Western Restaurant: 20W per person [b]
Coffee shop / Bar / Lounge: 10W/m2
Canteen / Food Plaza: 20W per person [b]
Grocery Store: 27W/m2
Residential Unit, Habitable Area in Hostel/ Dormitory: 0.25W/m2
Hotel Guest Room: 900W/room
Classroom / Lecture theatre: 10W/m2
Data Centre (Data Hall): 900W/m2
Notes:
[a] The load resulting from the consumption or release of energy consumed in support of a manufacturing, industrial
or commercial process other than conditioning spaces and maintaining comfort and amenities for the occupants of
the building (i.e. process load) could be excluded from the energy assessment. The applicant shall provide supporting
information and justification (e.g. calculation) for the portion of energy load being accounted in / discounted from the
energy assessment.
[b] 10W per person for sensible heat and 10W per person for latent heat.
384
a. Receptacle and other loads shall be estimated a. Receptacle and other loads shall be input as
based on the building type or space type design information with supporting through
category and shall be assumed to be identical ECM; if no information could be provided,
in the proposed and baseline case, unless a default value shall be used.
narrative and calculation by ECM is provided.
b. Both baseline and proposed case shall be
modelled identically, including power, schedule
and control.
c. If both cases are not identical, submission of a
narrative and calculation by ECM is required for
justification.
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous energy uses are defined as those that may be treated separately since they have little or no interaction
with the conditioned thermal blocks or the HVAC systems that serve them.
• Exterior Lighting System
• Services Hot Water System
• Lift & Escalator System
• Irrigation, plumbing and drainable, fire services
Exterior Lighting System
a. Where exterior lighting system has been a. When exterior lighting system has been specified
specified (or installed) in the proposed case, the (or installed) in the proposed case, the system
system shall be modelled identically with the shall be modelled consistent with design
proposed case. documents (or actual system information)
b. Where no exterior lighting has been specified in b. Where no exterior lighting has been specified in
proposed case, no exterior lighting shall be proposed case, no exterior lighting shall be
modelled modelled.
Services Hot Water System

For a combination of equipment and auxiliary devices (e.g. controls, accessories, interconnecting means and
terminal elements) by which energy is transformed so it heats up water for domestic or commercial purpose other
than space heating and process requirements.
a. Where service hot-water system has been a. Where a service hot-water system has been
specified (or installed) in the proposed case, the specified (or installed) in the proposed case, the
system shall be sized identical to the proposed system shall be modelled consistent with design
case, where energy source shall be electrical documents (or actual system information).
heater. Efficiency for the water heater shall be
b. Where no service hot water system has been
80%.
specified but the building will have service hot
b. Where no service hot water system has been water loads, a service water system shall be
specified but the building will have service hot- modelled identical to the baseline case
water loads, a service water system using
c. For building that will have no service hot-water
electrical heater shall be used. Efficiency for the
loads, no service hot-water heating shall be
water heater shall be 80%
modelled.
c. For buildings that will have no service hot-water
loads, no service hot-water heating shall be
modelled
d. Service hot-water energy consumption shall be
calculated explicitly based upon the volume of
service hot water required and the entering
makeup water and the leaving service hot-water
temperatures. Leaving temperature shall be
385

based upon the end-use requirements in
proposed case.
e. Service water loads and usage shall be the same

for both the baseline case and the proposed
case.
Lift and Escalator System
a. With reference to proposed design equipment a. Where lift and escalator system has been
rank, input by identifying each corresponding specified (or installed), the system shall be
maximum allowable electrical power according modelled consistent with design documents (or
to Section 8.4 in BEC 2018 ver.0. actual system information)
b. For controls in addition to those mandatory
requirements in BEC 2018, ECM is required to
justify the modification of lift schedules uses for
the proposed case. Credible technical
documentation for the modification shall be
provided.
Irrigation, Plumbing and Drainage, Fire Services
a. No system to be modelled a. No system to be modelled
On-site Power Generation
a. No on-site power generation to be modelled a. Where an on-site power generation system has
been specified (or installed) in the proposed
case, the system shall be modelled consistent
with design documents (or actual system
information)
Baseline Case Proposed case
HVAC System
1. General
- Weather conditions used in sizing runs to determine baseline equipment capacities maybe based either
on hourly historical weather files containing typical peak conditions or on design days developed using
99.6% heating design temperatures and 1% dry-bulb and 1% wet bulb cooling design temperature
- Outdoor condition to be used for both baseline and proposed case sizing shall reference to BEC 2018
Table 6.4.
- Indoor condition(s) to be used for both baseline and proposed case shall be identical. Justification shall
be provided else value in BEC 2018 Table 6.4 shall be used.
2. All conditioned spaces in the proposed design should be simulated as being both heated and cooled even if
no heating or cooling system is to be installed and temperature and humidity control set points and schedules
should be the same for proposed and baseline building designs unless justification is provided through ECM
calculation.
3. The HVAC system(s) in baseline building design shall be of the type and description specified in Table-App 2
“Baseline HVAC System Setting Summary”.
4. Equipment Efficiencies
All HVAC equipment in the baseline case shall be modelled at the minimum efficiency levels, both part load
and full load, in accordance with BEC 2018 ver.0 Table 6.12a (Part 1) and Table 6.12b.
386

All HVAC equipment in the proposed case shall be modelled consistent with design documents (or actual
installed equipment information)
In both baseline and proposed case, for package type system the descriptor shall be broken down into its
components so that supply fan energy can be modelled separately
5. Equipment Capacities
The equipment capacities for the baseline case shall be based on sizing run and shall be oversized by 15%
for cooling.
6. Minimum outdoor air ventilation rate shall be modelled identical in both baseline and proposed case.
7. Demand control is required in baseline case conditioned area when a space with design fresh air flow rate ≥
1400 L/s
8. Design airflow rates for the baseline case shall be based on a supply-air-to-room-air temperature difference
of 11oC or the required ventilation air or makeup air, whichever is greater. If return or relief fans are specified
in the proposed case, the baseline case shall also be modelled with fans serving the same functions and sized
for the baseline supply fan air quality less the minimum outdoor air, or 90% of the supply fan air quantity,
whichever is larger
9. Design chilled water temperature to be used in the baseline case shall reference to the corresponding value
in BEC 2018 Table 6.12b (7oC / 12.5oC)
10. Chilled water pump shall be modelled as 65% combined impeller and motor efficiency for baseline case
11. Performance impact due to pipe / duct loses and refrigerant pipe length are not considered in this assessment
methodology
12. Existing equipment shall be modelled identical in both baseline and proposed case. The corresponding energy
consumption shall be separately metered.
(i) Public housing: (i) Public housing:

a. Space: residential unit, common area and a. Space where complete HVAC system has been
recreational facilities area (e.g. communal area) designed (or installed), the model shall be
should be modelled with unitary (non-split type) consistent with design documents (or actual
unit. system type used).
b. Space: kitchen and toilet should be modelled b. Space where no HVAC system has been
with mechanical ventilation only. Mechanical fans designed (or installed) but AC platform is
should be 1.1W/L/s of exhaust air flow rate designed for future provision, the HVAC system
should be identical to the system modelled in
*Calculation method refers to Section 6.7.6.1 in
baseline (unitary, non-split type)
BEC 2018 ver.0.
Exception: if natural ventilation design and
provision is provided, justification is
required through ECM calculation to
demonstrate the number of non-AC hours
(with reference to ASHRAE 55-2017) that
complied with design condition for natural
ventilation.
c. Space where no HVAC system has been
designed (or installed) and no AC platform is
designed for future provision, no HVAC system
has to be modelled.
(ii) Private housing: (ii) Private housing:

a. Space: residential flat, common area and a. Space where complete HVAC system has been
recreational facilities area (e.g. club house) designed (or installed), the model shall be
should be modelled with unitary (split type) unit consistent with design documents (or actual
system type used).
b. Space: kitchen and toilet should be modelled
with mechanical ventilation only, Mechanical fans b. Space where no HVAC system has been
should be 1.1W/L/s of exhaust air flow rate designed (or installed) but AC platform is
designed for future provision, the HVAC system
387

*Calculation method refers to Section should be identical to the system modelled in
6.7.6.1 in BEC 2018 ver.0. baseline (unitary/ split-type)

provision is provided, justification is required
through ECM calculation to demonstrate the
number of non-AC hours that complied with
design condition (with reference to ASHRAE
55-2017) for natural ventilation.
has to be modelled.
Commercial, Hotels, Educational and Other Building Types
(iii) Commercial, hotels, educational and other buildings (iii) Commercial, hotels, educational and other buildings
with air-conditioned floor area < 14,000m2 with air-conditioned floor area < 14,000m2
a. Conditioned space should be modelled with a. Space where complete HVAC system has been
Unitary air-conditioner –split type unit designed (or installed), the model shall be
consistent with design documents (or actual
b. Non-conditioned space should be modelled with
system type used).
mechanical ventilation only, Mechanical fans
should be 1.1W/L/s of exhaust air flow rate b. Space where no HVAC system has been
designed (or installed) but AC platform is
BEC 2018 ver.0.
baseline (Unitary air-conditioner – non-split type
unit)
55-2017) for natural ventilation. The
corresponding design shall be equipped with
automatic change over provision.
has to be modelled.
(iv) Commercial, hotels, educational and other buildings (iv) Commercial, hotels, educational and other buildings
with air-conditioned floor area ≥ 14,000m2 with air-conditioned floor area ≥ 14,000m2
a. Conditioned space should be modelled with VAV a. Space where complete HVAC system has been
system with reheat. designed (or installed), the model shall be
consistent with design documents (or actual
b. Supply fan system shall be 2.1W/L/s
system type used).
*Calculation method based on description stated
b. Space where no HVAC system has been
in Section 6.7.3 and 6.7.5 in BEC 2018 ver.0.
designed (or installed) but AC platform is
c. Non-conditioned space should be modelled with
baseline (unitary/ split-type)
mechanical ventilation only, Mechanical fans
should be 1.1W/L/s of exhaust air flow rate Exception: if natural ventilation design and
BEC 2018 ver.0.
d. Chiller configuration shall meet the specific 55-2017) for
requirements in Table-App 3
388

natural ventilation. The corresponding
design shall be equipped with automatic
change over provision.
District Cooling System (If Applicable)
a. Set-up a virtual main plant based on building a. Based on actual efficiency performance; or
cooling load:
b. If project team cannot obtain actual performance
< 2000kW: 2 water cooled centrifugal chillers with data for main plant, it is permissible to use the
same capacity following default average performance values:
2000≤ cooling load< 9000kW: no chiller larger DCS cooling plant – COP of 4.4 for total cooling
than 1000kW & all sized equally plant average efficiency (including cooling
towers and primary pumps)
≥ 9000kW: no chiller larger than 3000kW & all
sized equally c. Seasonal Thermal distribution losses – including
minor leaks and condensate losses (but not
b. Performance of individual components refer to
pumping energy, which must be accounted for
BEC 2018 ver.0 Table 6.12b
separately where it applies): chilled water district
c. Virtual primary variable pumping system shall be cooling: 5%
included
Ventilation System
Carpark ventilation (if applicable) shall be operated with Carpark ventilation shall be consistent with design
staging of fans, provide down to 50% less of the design documents (or actual system installed)
capacity
*Calculation method based on description stated in

Section 6.10.7 in BEC 2018 ver.0.
389
Table-App 2 Baseline HVAC System Setting Summary
Residential Commercial, Hotels, Educational and Other Any Building

Building Types Types that
used District
Public Private Air-conditioned Floor Air-conditioned Floor Cooling
Housing Housing Area < 14,000m2 Area ≥ 14,000m2 System
(DCS)
Cooling Unitary air- Unitary air- Unitary air-conditioner Chiller District

Generation conditioner – conditioner – –split type Chiller plants
non-split type split type
Heating Unitary air- Unitary air- Unitary air-conditioner Electric Resistance Electric
Generation conditioner – conditioner – –split type Resistance
non-split type split type
Performance BEC 2018 BEC 2018 BEC 2018 ver.0 Table BEC 2018 ver.0 Table BEC 2018
of Individual ver.0 Table ver.0 Table 6.12a (Part 1) 6.12b ver.0 Table
Components 6.12a (Part 1) 6.12a (Part 1) 6.12b
Guideline
Terminal N/A N/A N/A VAV with reheat VAV with

Type reheat
Heat Air-cooled Air-cooled Air-cooled Water-cooled* Water-cooled

Rejection
* For projects not under Fresh Water Cooling Towers (FWCT) Scheme or when there is a strong supporting evidence to
prove inappropriate of such baseline (e.g. hygiene requirement in hospitals), air-cooled chiller is allowed in baseline
setting.
Table-App 3 - Baseline Chiller configuration
Buildings with Air-conditioned Floor Area Number and Type of Chiller(s)
< 20,000m2 2 water-cooled screw chillers sized equally
≥ 20,000m2 2 water-cooled centrifugal chillers minimum with chillers

added so that no chiller larger than 2,800kW, all sized
equally
All types Primary/ secondary systems with variable speed drives on

secondary pumping loop
390
Table-App 4 Default operation Schedule for Calculation [6]
Assembly Occupancy
Schedule for Schedule for Lighting / Schedule for HVAC Schedule for Service
Schedule for Elevator
Occupancy Receptacle System Hot Water
Hour of Day
(Time) Percent of Maximum Percent of Maximum Percent of Maximum
Percent of Maximum Load
Load Load Load
Wk Sat Sun Wk Sat Sun Wk Sat Sun Wk Sat Sun Wk Sat Sun
1 (12 - 1am) 0 0 0 5 5 5 Off Off Off 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 (1 - 2am) 0 0 0 5 5 5 Off Off Off 0 0 0 0 0 0
3 (2 - 3am) 0 0 0 5 5 5 Off Off Off 0 0 0 0 0 0
4 (3 - 4am) 0 0 0 5 5 5 Off Off Off 0 0 0 0 0 0
5 (4 - 5am) 0 0 0 5 5 5 Off Off Off 0 0 0 0 0 0
6 (5 - 6am) 0 0 0 5 5 5 Off Off Off 0 0 0 0 0 0
7 (6 - 7am) 0 0 0 35/40 5 5 On On On 0 0 0 0 0 0
8 (7 - 8am) 0 0 0 35/40 30 30 On On On 0 0 0 0 0 0
9 (8 - 9am) 20 20 10 35/40 30 30 On On On 0 0 0 0 0 0
10 (9 - 10am) 20 20 10 65/75 40/50 30 On On On 5 5 5 0 0 0
11 (10 - 11am) 20 20 10 65/75 40/50 30 On On On 5 5 5 0 0 0
12 (11 - 12pm) 80 60 10 65/75 40/50 30 On On On 35 20 10 0 0 0
13 (12 - 1pm) 80 60 10 65/75 40/50 55/65 On On On 5 0 0 0 0 0
14 (13 - 2pm) 80 60 70 65/75 40/50 55/65 On On On 5 0 0 0 0 0
15 (14 - 3pm) 80 60 70 65/75 40/50 55/65 On On On 5 0 0 0 0 0
16 (15 - 4pm) 80 60 70 65/75 40/50 55/65 On On On 5 0 0 0 0 0
17 (16 - 5pm) 80 60 70 65/75 40/50 55/65 On On On 5 0 0 0 0 0
18 (17 - 6pm) 80 60 70 65/75 40/50 55/65 On On On 0 0 0 0 0 0
19 (18 - 7pm) 20 60 70 65/75 40/50 55/65 On On On 0 0 0 0 0 0
20 (19 - 8pm) 20 60 70 65/75 40/50 55/65 On On On 0 65 65 0 0 0
21 (20 - 9pm) 20 60 70 65/75 40/50 55/65 On On On 0 30 30 0 0 0
22 (21 - 10pm) 20 80 70 65/75 40/50 55/65 On On On 0 0 0 0 0 0
23 (22 - 11pm) 10 10 20 25 40/50 5 On On On 0 0 0 0 0 0
24 (23 - 12am) 0 0 0 5 5 5 Off Off Off 0 0 0 0 0 0
Total/Day 710 750 700 1010/1155 660/800 745/845 1800 1700 1700 70 125 115 0 0 0
Total/Week 50.50 hours 64.55/74.20 hours 124 hours 5.9 hours 0 hours
Total/Year 2633 hours 3357/3869 hours 6465 hours 308 hours 0 hours
Wk = Weekday
1. Elevator schedules, except for restaurants, are from the U.S. Department of Energy Standard Evaluation
Techniques, except they have been changed to 0% when occupancy is 0%. These values may be used only if actual
schedules are not known.
2. Lighting profiles are modified to reflect the requirement for occupancy sensors in space
6 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE), ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1-
2010
391
Office Occupancy
Schedule for
Schedule for Schedule for Lighting / Schedule for HVAC Schedule for
Service Hot
Occupancy Receptacle System Elevator
Hour of Day Water
(Time) Percent of Percent of Maximum Percent of Percent of
Maximum Load Load Maximum Load Maximum Load
1 (12 - 1am) 0 0 0 5 5 5 Off Off Off 5 5 4 0 0 0
2 (1 - 2am) 0 0 0 5 5 5 Off Off Off 5 5 4 0 0 0
3 (2 - 3am) 0 0 0 5 5 5 Off Off Off 5 5 4 0 0 0
4 (3 - 4am) 0 0 0 5 5 5 Off Off Off 5 5 4 0 0 0
5 (4 - 5am) 0 0 0 5 5 5 Off Off Off 5 5 4 0 0 0
6 (5 - 6am) 0 0 0 10 5 5 Off Off Off 8 8 7 0 0 0
7 (6 - 7am) 10 10 5 10 10 5 On On Off 7 7 4 0 0 0
8 (7 - 8am) 20 10 5 30 10 5 On On Off 19 11 4 35 16 0
9 (8 - 9am) 95 30 5 65/90 30 5 On On Off 35 15 4 69 14 0
10 (9 - 10am) 95 30 5 65/90 30 5 On On Off 38 21 4 43 21 0
11 (10 - 11am) 95 30 5 65/90 30 5 On On Off 39 19 4 37 18 0
12 (11 - 12pm) 95 30 5 65/90 30 5 On On Off 47 23 6 43 25 0
13 (12 - 1pm) 50 10 5 55/80 15 5 On On Off 57 20 6 58 21 0
14 (13 - 2pm) 95 10 5 65/90 15 5 On On Off 54 19 9 48 13 0
15 (14 - 3pm) 95 10 5 65/90 15 5 On On Off 34 15 6 37 8 0
16 (15 - 4pm) 95 10 5 65/90 15 5 On On Off 33 12 4 37 4 0
17 (16 - 5pm) 95 10 5 65/90 15 5 On On Off 44 14 4 46 5 0
18 (17 - 6pm) 30 5 5 35/50 5 5 On On Off 26 7 4 62 6 0
19 (18 - 7pm) 10 5 0 30 5 5 On Off Off 21 7 4 20 0 0
20 (19 - 8pm) 10 0 0 30 5 5 On Off Off 15 7 4 12 0 0
21 (20 - 9pm) 10 0 0 20 5 5 On Off Off 17 7 4 4 0 0
22 (21 - 10pm) 10 0 0 20 5 5 On Off Off 8 9 7 4 0 0
23 (22 - 11pm) 5 0 0 10 5 5 Off Off Off 5 5 4 0 0 0
24 (23 - 12am) 5 0 0 5 5 5 Off Off Off 5 5 4 0 0 0
Total/Day 920 200 60 800/1040 280 120 1600 1200 0 537 256 113 555 151 0
Total/Week 48.60 hours 44.00/56.00 hours 124 hours 30.54 hours 29.26 hours
Wk = Weekday
2. Lighting profiles are modified to reflect the requirement for occupancy sensors in space
392
Hotel Building Occupancy

Schedule for Schedule for Lighting / Schedule for Schedule for Schedule for
Occupancy Receptacle HVAC System Service Hot Water Elevator
Hour of Day Percent of Percent of Maximum Percent of
(Time) Maximum Load Load (Blg/Guest) Maximum Load
Use Sup Htg
Wk Sat Sun Wk Sat Sun Wk Sat Sun Wk Sat Sun
% Stp Stp
1 (12 - 1am) 90 90 70 20 20 30 On On On 20 20 25 40 44 55
2 (1 - 2am) 90 90 70 15 20 30 On On On 15 15 20 33 35 55
3 (2 - 3am) 90 90 70 10 10 20 On On On 15 15 20 33 35 43
4 (3 - 4am) 90 90 70 10 10 20 On On On 15 15 20 33 35 43
5 (4 - 5am) 90 90 70 10 10 20 On On On 20 20 20 33 35 43
6 (5 - 6am) 90 90 70 20 10 20 On On On 25 25 30 33 35 43
7 (6 - 7am) 70 70 70 40 30 30 On On On 50 40 50 42 40 52
8 (7 - 8am) 40 50 70 50 30 40 On On On 60 50 50 42 32 52
9 (8 - 9am) 40 50 50 40 40 40 On On On 55 50 50 52 45 65
10 (9 - 10am) 20 30 50 40 40 30 On On On 45 50 55 52 45 65
11 (10 - 11am) 20 30 50 25 30 30 On On On 40 45 50 40 42 53
12 (11 - 12pm) 20 30 30 25 25 30 On On On 45 50 50 51 60 60
13 (12 - 1pm) 20 30 30 25 25 30 On On On 40 50 40 51 65 53
14 (13 - 2pm) 20 30 20 25 25 20 On On On 35 45 40 51 65 51
15 (14 - 3pm) 20 30 20 25 25 20 On On On 30 40 30 51 65 50
16 (15 - 4pm) 30 30 20 25 25 20 On On On 30 40 30 51 65 44
17 (16 - 5pm) 50 30 30 25 25 20 On On On 30 35 30 63 65 64
18 (17 - 6pm) 50 50 40 25 25 20 On On On 40 40 40 80 75 62
19 (18 - 7pm) 50 60 40 60 60 50 On On On 55 55 50 86 80 65
20 (19 - 8pm) 70 60 60 80 70 70 On On On 60 55 50 70 80 63
21 (20 - 9pm) 70 60 60 90 70 80 On On On 50 50 40 70 75 63
22 (21 - 10pm) 80 70 80 80 70 60 On On On 55 55 50 70 75 63
23 (22 - 11pm) 90 70 80 60 60 50 On On On 45 40 40 45 55 40
24 (23 - 12am) 90 70 80 30 30 30 On On On 25 30 20 45 55 40
Wk = Weekday
2. Lighting profiles are modified to reflect the requirement for occupancy sensors in space.
393
Residential Occupancy
Schedule for
Schedule for Schedule for HVAC Schedule for Schedule for
Lighting /
Occupancy System Service Hot Water Elevator
Receptacle
Hour of Day
Percent of Maximum Percent of Maximum Percent of
(Time)
Load Load Maximum Load
Use Sup Htg
Wk Sat Sun Wk Sat Sun Wk Sat Sun Wk Sat Sun
% Stp Stp
1 (12 - 1am) 100 100 100 7 7 7 On On On 8 43 60 0 0 0
2 (1 - 2am) 100 100 100 7 7 7 On On On 4 43 60 0 0 0
3 (2 - 3am) 100 100 100 7 7 7 On On On 1 43 60 0 0 0
4 (3 - 4am) 100 100 100 7 7 7 On On On 1 43 60 0 0 0
5 (4 - 5am) 100 100 100 19 19 19 On On On 4 43 60 0 0 0
6 (5 - 6am) 100 100 100 39 39 39 On On On 27 43 60 0 0 0
7 (6 - 7am) 100 100 100 44 44 44 On On On 94 43 60 0 0 0
8 (7 - 8am) 85 85 85 39 39 39 On On On 1 43 60 35 16 0
9 (8 - 9am) 39 39 39 17 17 17 On On On 96 43 60 69 14 0
10 (9 - 10am) 25 25 25 12 12 12 On On On 84 43 60 43 21 0
11 (10 - 11am) 25 25 25 12 12 12 On On On 76 43 60 37 18 0
12 (11 - 12pm) 25 25 25 12 12 12 On On On 61 43 60 43 25 0
13 (12 - 1pm) 25 25 25 12 12 12 On On On 53 43 60 58 21 0
14 (13 - 2pm) 25 25 25 12 12 12 On On On 47 43 60 48 13 0
15 (14 - 3pm) 25 25 25 12 12 12 On On On 41 43 60 37 8 0
16 (15 - 4pm) 25 25 25 21 21 21 On On On 47 43 60 37 4 0
17 (16 - 5pm) 30 30 30 44 44 44 On On On 55 43 60 46 5 0
18 (17 - 6pm) 52 52 52 62 62 62 On On On 73 43 60 62 6 0
19 (18 - 7pm) 87 87 87 83 83 83 On On On 86 43 60 20 0 0
20 (19 - 8pm) 87 87 87 99 99 99 On On On 82 43 60 12 0 0
21 (20 - 9pm) 87 87 87 100 100 100 On On On 75 43 60 4 0 0
22 (21 - 10pm) 100 100 100 69 69 69 On On On 61 43 60 4 0 0
23 (22 - 11pm) 100 100 100 38 38 38 On On On 53 43 60 0 0 0
24 (23 - 12am) 100 100 100 16 16 16 On On On 29 43 60 0 0 0
Wk = Weekday
Schedule is referenced to U.S. Department of Energy Commercial Reference Building Models of the National Building Stock
NREL/TP-5500-46861 February 2011 – Table B-6 Midrise Apartment Hourly Operation Schedules
394
Parking Garage Occupancy

Schedule for Schedule for Lighting / Schedule for Schedule for Schedule for
Occupancy Receptacle HVAC System Service Hot Water Elevator
Hour of Day Percent of Percent of Percent of
(Time) Percent of Maximum Load
Maximum Load Maximum Load Maximum Load
1 (12 - 1am) 50/100 50/100 50/100
2 (1 - 2am) 50/100 50/100 50/100
3 (2 - 3am) 50/100 50/100 50/100
4 (3 - 4am) 50/100 50/100 50/100
5 (4 - 5am) 50/100 50/100 50/100
6 (5 - 6am) 50/100 50/100 50/100
7 (6 - 7am) 100 100 50/100
8 (7 - 8am) 100 100 50/100
9 (8 - 9am) 100 100 50/100
10 (9 - 10am) 100 100 50/100
11 (10 - 11am) 100 100 50/100
Based on likely Included with
12 (11 - 12pm) NA 100 100 50/100 NA
use other occupancies
13 (12 - 1pm) 100 100 50/100
14 (13 - 2pm) 100 100 50/100
15 (14 - 3pm) 100 100 50/100
16 (15 - 4pm) 100 100 50/100
17 (16 - 5pm) 100 100 50/100
18 (17 - 6pm) 100 50/100 50/100
19 (18 - 7pm) 100 50/100 50/100
20 (19 - 8pm) 100 50/100 50/100
21 (20 - 9pm) 100 50/100 50/100
22 (21 - 10pm) 100 50/100 50/100
23 (22 - 11pm) 50/100 50/100 50/100
24 (23 - 12am) 50/100 50/100 50/100
2000/2 1750/ 1200/

Total/Day
400 2400 2400
Total/Week 129.50/168 hours
Total/Year 6734/8760 hours
Wk = Weekday
1. Elevator schedules, except for restaurants, are from the U.S. Department of Energy Standard Evaluation Techniques,
except they have been changed to 0% when occupancy is 0%. These values may be used only if actual schedules are
not known.
2. Lighting profiles are modified to reflect the requirement for occupancy sensors in space. For parking garage lighting,
the schedule has been revised to accompany the office schedule: the lighting in the parking garage is set to be on at
100% for all hours when the building occupancy is 10% or greater, but reduced to 50% for all hours when the building
occupancy is less than 10%. For other uses, it is acceptable to modify the parking garage schedule to parallel that use.
395
Restaurant Occupancy
Schedule for
Schedule for Schedule for Lighting / Schedule for Schedule for
Service Hot
Occupancy Receptacle HVAC System Elevator
Water
Percent of
Hour of Day Percent of Percent of
Percent of Maximum Load Maximum
(Time) Maximum Load Maximum Load
Load
1 (12 - 1am) 15 30 20 15 20 20 On On On 20 20 25 0 0 0
2 (1 - 2am) 15 25 20 15 15 15 On On On 15 15 20 0 0 0
3 (2 - 3am) 5 5 5 15 15 15 On On On 15 15 20 0 0 0
4 (3 - 4am) 0 0 0 15 15 15 Off Off Off 0 0 0 0 0 0
5 (4 - 5am) 0 0 0 15 15 15 Off Off Off 0 0 0 0 0 0
6 (5 - 6am) 0 0 0 20 15 15 Off Off Off 0 0 0 0 0 0
7 (6 - 7am) 0 0 0 35/40 30 30 Off Off Off 0 0 0 0 0 0
8 (7 - 8am) 5 0 0 35/40 30 30 On Off Off 60 0 0 0 0 0
9 (8 - 9am) 5 0 0 55/60 55/60 45/50 On Off Off 55 0 0 0 0 0
10 (9 - 10am) 5 5 0 55/60 55/60 45/50 On On Off 45 50 0 0 0 0
11 (10 - 11am) 20 20 10 85/90 75/80 65/70 On On On 40 45 50 0 0 0
12 (11 - 12pm) 50 45 20 85/90 75/80 65/70 On On On 45 50 50 0 0 0
13 (12 - 1pm) 80 50 25 85/90 75/80 65/70 On On On 40 50 40 0 0 0
14 (13 - 2pm) 70 50 25 85/90 75/80 65/70 On On On 35 45 40 0 0 0
15 (14 - 3pm) 40 35 15 85/90 75/80 65/70 On On On 30 40 30 0 0 0
16 (15 - 4pm) 20 30 20 85/90 75/80 65/70 On On On 30 40 30 0 0 0
17 (16 - 5pm) 25 30 25 85/90 75/80 55/60 On On On 30 35 30 0 0 0
18 (17 - 6pm) 50 30 35 85/90 85/90 55/60 On On On 40 40 40 0 0 0
19 (18 - 7pm) 80 70 55 85/90 85/90 55/60 On On On 55 55 50 0 0 0
20 (19 - 8pm) 80 90 65 85/90 85/90 55/60 On On On 60 55 50 0 0 0
21 (20 - 9pm) 80 70 70 85/90 85/90 55/60 On On On 50 50 40 0 0 0
22 (21 - 10pm) 50 65 35 85/90 85/90 55/60 On On On 55 55 50 0 0 0
23 (22 - 11pm) 35 55 20 45/50 45/50 45/50 On On On 45 40 40 0 0 0
24 (23 - 12am) 20 35 20 30 30 30 On On On 25 30 20 0 0 0
1370/ 1290/ 1040/ 79 73 62

Total/Day
750 740 485 1455 1365 1155 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0
Total/Week 49.75 hours 91.80/97.55 hours 135 hours 53.05 hours 0 hours
Wk = Weekday
396
Retail Occupancy
Schedule for
Schedule for Schedule for Lighting / Schedule for Schedule for
Service Hot
Occupancy Receptacle HVAC System Elevator
Water
Percent of
Hour of Day Percent of Maximum Percent of
Percent of Maximum Load Maximum
(Time) Load Maximum Load
Load
1 (12 - 1am) 0 0 0 5 5 5 Off Off Off 4 11 7 0 0 0

2 (1 - 2am) 0 0 0 5 5 5 Off Off Off 5 10 7 0 0 0
3 (2 - 3am) 0 0 0 5 5 5 Off Off Off 5 8 7 0 0 0
4 (3 - 4am) 0 0 0 5 5 5 Off Off Off 4 6 6 0 0 0
5 (4 - 5am) 0 0 0 5 5 5 Off Off Off 4 6 6 0 0 0
6 (5 - 6am) 0 0 0 5 5 5 Off Off Off 4 6 6 0 0 0
7 (6 - 7am) 0 0 0 5 5 5 On On Off 4 7 7 0 0 0
8 (7 - 8am) 10 10 0 20 10 5 On On Off 15 20 10 12 9 0
9 (8 - 9am) 20 20 0 50 30 10 On On On 23 24 12 22 21 0
10 (9 - 10am) 50 50 10 85/90 55/60 10 On On On 32 27 14 64 56 11
11 (10 - 11am) 50 60 20 85/90 85/90 40 On On On 41 42 29 74 66 13
12 (11 - 12pm) 70 80 20 85/90 85/90 40 On On On 57 54 31 68 68 35
13 (12 - 1pm) 70 80 40 85/90 85/90 55/60 On On On 62 59 36 68 68 37
14 (13 - 2pm) 70 80 40 85/90 85/90 55/60 On On On 61 60 36 71 69 37
15 (14 - 3pm) 70 80 40 85/90 85/90 55/60 On On On 50 49 34 72 70 39
16 (15 - 4pm) 80 80 40 85/90 85/90 55/60 On On On 45 48 35 72 69 41
17 (16 - 5pm) 70 80 40 85/90 85/90 55/60 On On On 46 47 37 73 66 38
18 (17 - 6pm) 50 60 20 85/90 85/90 40 On On Off 47 46 34 68 58 34
19 (18 - 7pm) 50 20 10 55/60 50 20 On On Off 42 44 25 68 47 3

20 (19 - 8pm) 30 20 0 55/60 30 5 On On Off 34 36 27 58 43 0
21 (20 - 9pm) 30 20 0 50 30 5 On On Off 33 29 21 54 43 0
22 (21 - 10pm) 0 10 0 20 10 5 Off On Off 23 22 16 0 8 0
23 (22 - 11pm) 0 0 0 5 5 5 Off Off Off 13 16 10 0 0 0
24 (23 - 12am) 0 0 0 5 5 5 Off Off Off 8 13 6 0 0 0
Total/Day 1060/ 940/ 500/

720 750 280 1115 985 525 1500 1600 900 662 690 459 844 761 288
Total/Week 46.30 hours 67.40/70.85 hours 100 hours 44.59 hours 52.69 hours
Wk = Weekday
397
School Occupancy
Schedule for Schedule for Lighting Schedule for Schedule for Schedule for
Occupancy / Receptacle HVAC System Service Hot Water Elevator
Hour of Day Percent of Percent of Maximum Percent of Percent of
(Time) Maximum Load Load Maximum Load Maximum Load
1 (12 - 1am) 0 0 0 5 5 5 Off Off Off 5 3 3 0 0 0
2 (1 - 2am) 0 0 0 5 5 5 Off Off Off 5 3 3 0 0 0
3 (2 - 3am) 0 0 0 5 5 5 Off Off Off 5 3 3 0 0 0
4 (3 - 4am) 0 0 0 5 5 5 Off Off Off 5 3 3 0 0 0
5 (4 - 5am) 0 0 0 5 5 5 Off Off Off 5 3 3 0 0 0
6 (5 - 6am) 0 0 0 5 5 5 Off Off Off 5 3 3 0 0 0
7 (6 - 7am) 0 0 0 5 5 5 Off Off Off 5 3 3 0 0 0
8 (7 - 8am) 5 0 0 30 5 5 On Off Off 10 3 3 0 0 0
9 (8 - 9am) 75 10 0 60/85 15 5 On On Off 34 3 5 30 0 0
10 (9 - 10am) 90 10 0 65/95 15 5 On On Off 60 5 5 30 0 0
11 (10 - 11am) 90 10 0 65/95 15 5 On On Off 63 5 5 30 0 0
12 (11 - 12pm) 80 10 0 65/95 15 5 On On Off 72 5 5 30 0 0
13 (12 - 1pm) 80 10 0 55/80 15 5 On On Off 79 5 5 30 0 0
14 (13 - 2pm) 80 0 0 55/80 5 5 On Off Off 83 3 5 30 0 0
15 (14 - 3pm) 80 0 0 55/80 5 5 On Off Off 61 3 3 30 0 0
16 (15 - 4pm) 45 0 0 50/70 5 5 On Off Off 65 3 3 15 0 0
17 (16 - 5pm) 15 0 0 35/50 5 5 On Off Off 10 3 3 0 0 0
18 (17 - 6pm) 5 0 0 35/50 5 5 On Off Off 10 3 3 0 0 0
19 (18 - 7pm) 15 0 0 35 5 5 On Off Off 19 3 3 0 0 0
20 (19 - 8pm) 20 0 0 35 5 5 On Off Off 25 3 3 0 0 0
21 (20 - 9pm) 20 0 0 35 5 5 On Off Off 22 3 3 0 0 0
22 (21 - 10pm) 10 0 0 30 5 5 On Off Off 22 3 3 0 0 0
23 (22 - 11pm) 0 0 0 5 5 5 Off Off Off 12 3 3 0 0 0
24 (23 - 12am) 0 0 0 5 5 5 Off Off Off 9 3 3 0 0 0
Total/Day 710 50 0 750/990 170 120 1500 500 0 691 80 84 285 0 0

Total/Week 36.00 hours 40.40/52.40 hours 80.00 hours 36.19 hours 14.25 hours
Wk = Weekday
398
BEAM Plus New Buildings Version 2.0 Appendix 9.3 – EU 2 Path 2 (Prescriptive Approach)
9 Appendices 9.3 EU 2 Path 2 (Prescriptive Approach)
When outdoor conditions are suitable, natural ventilation, as opposed to

mechanical cooling, can be used to remove heat gains and pollutants from
buildings. This reduces energy consumption.
The wind availability at a window is determined by site massing and
neighbourhood massing which are addressed elsewhere in this guidance.
It is not the intention of this credit to assess the natural ventilation potential
in a specific wind environment, simply to give designers a tool to optimise
window design and spatial to achieve good natural ventilation.
Acoustic windows calculation should be accounted with reference to APP
130 (2/2015) Section 6.
Cross Ventilation Requirements

Units can be considered to have good cross ventilation when the air flow
path between facade openings is relatively unobstructed.
Design should demonstrate cross ventilation enhancement consideration
by below design principle:
Openable windows can be located in different habitable areas, e.g. living
room and bedroom or on differently orientated facades of the same
habitable area.
The cross ventilation path between openings should be one turn only, from
the middle of one window to another; (Figure 1 & 3)
The angle of turn for the cross ventilation path at the joint of the two lines
should not be greater than 90o; (Figure 2 & 3)
Cross ventilation path shall not be more than 12m in length for each
habitable area (Figure 3)
399
In each habitable area, total physical openings area (i.e. not aerodynamic
free area) should be double of that of the statutory requirement (i.e.1/8 of
openable window area to usable floor area);
When considering a single room, the openable window size located at each
wall should be at least 1/16 of the usable floor area;
To ensure cross ventilation can affect the majority of the habitable space, it
is required to have the windows a reasonable distance apart. To assess
this, draw the smallest box possible that covers the habitable area and
divide into equal halves through the longest side. The windows shall lie in
different halves of the habitable area. (Figure 4)
Habitable
Assessment box
Half
400
For windows located within Re-entrants

Concave areas of buildings with width greater than 4.5m will typically have
similar flow characteristics to the free-stream. Hence, for the purpose of
ventilation, a re-entrant begins when a concaved area has width less than
4.5m. This can be defined graphically by a plane of 4.5m wide (referred to
as the External Plane, (ExP), extending from infinity towards a concave
area: the re-entrant begins where such a plane can no longer pass through.
A secondary opening located in the re-entrant may still achieve satisfactory
cross-ventilation performance provided that the re-entrant is sufficiently
wide and the window is located relatively close to the beginning of the re-
entrant. Such an acceptable window can be defined by connecting a plane
of 2.3m width and 4.5m length (referred to as Secondary Window Plane,
(SWP) to ExP. Windows that can be reached by SWP are considered
acceptable secondary windows.
For the purpose of this assessment, the effective area of an apartment can
be extended by the concept of a “notional” area. Such a notional area can
be defined by connecting a Notional Plane (NP) of 1.5m width from SWP to
a secondary window. The conditions for demonstrating cross ventilation
explained above now cover NOT only the actual residential unit, but also
the notional area together, i.e. the ventilation path is measured from the
primary window to the SWP, See Figure 5
401
Single Side Ventilation Requirements

Units can be considered to have good single sided ventilation when
the ventilated space is sufficiently small to allow for air exchanges
resulting from turbulent fluctuations in the wind which induce pressure
differentials across openings or stack effects. The following criteria set
out guidelines to achieve single side ventilation requirements.
The window will ventilate up to 4.5m from opening area, the area under
question shall be contained within this zone. (Figure 6)
At least two separated openable window panes should be located at same

wall or different walls for single sided ventilation; and
The total physical openings area (i.e. not aerodynamic free area) in each
habitable area shall be at least 1/5 openable window of the usable floor
area.
402
BEAM Plus New Buildings Version 2.0 Appendix 9.4 – Space Type
9 Appendices 9.4 Space type
BEAM Plus considers indoor environmental quality (IEQ) as a key to

sustain occupants’ health and wellbeing. To assist the applicant design
more thorough and satisfactory IEQ strategies, BEAM Plus imposes high
requirements for indoor environmental quality covering ventilation, air
quality, acoustics and lighting.
As the impacts of IEQ are dependent on the level of interaction between
the occupants and the indoor spaces where they spend their time in, it is
crucial for the applicant to understand and identify the level of usage of
each indoor space. To facilitate assessment, the applicant should prepare
a schedule including all spaces present within the building and their
respective location. The spaces should be categorised into the following
three space type (refer to Glossary for definitions):
• Normally occupied spaces
• Not normally occupied spaces
• Unoccupied spaces
Listed below are some example of each space type. These examples are
not exhaustive. If a space present in the applicant’s building is not included
below, the applicant should identify similar examples or categorise the
space type according to the definition. Justification is required should the
applicant believe a space cannot be categorised according to the space
type definitions.
Space Usage of normally occupied spaces
• Auditorium • Lecture hall
• Concourse • Meeting room
• Conference room • Open office
• Dining (commercial and residential) • Private office
• Food and beverage dining area • Reception
• Front desk • Residential bedroom
• Gallery area • Residential dining room
• Gymnasium
• Hospital patient rooms • Residential living room
• Hotel guest room • Retails
• Hotel entrance lobby • School classroom
• Information desk • Shipping and receiving
• Kitchens (commercial) • Lecture hall
403
BEAM Plus New Buildings Version 2.0 Appendix 9.4 – Space Type
Space Usage of not normally occupied spaces
• Break room • Main lift lobby
• Copy rooms • Lift lobby
• Corridor • Pantry
• Entrance lobby (other than hotel) • Toilet
• Staircases • Residential kitchen
Space Usage of Unoccupied spaces
• Emergency exit corridor • Store room
• Mechanical and electrical rooms • Warehouse
• Car park • Data Centre/Server room
404
BEAM Plus New Buildings Version 2.0 Appendix 9.5 – Stormwater Detention Systems
O&M Checklist
9 Appendices 9.5 Stormwater Detention Systems O&M Checklist
Operations and maintenance checklist for stormwater detention system:
DESCRIPTIONS Y/N/ NA Findings / Follow

#
Up actions
1 Monthly/after significant storm event
a No stagnant water in tank
No residual water at inlet/outlet

b
structures
c No mosquito breeding
No pest infestation within the

d
system
No clogging at inlet/outlet
e
structures/trash racks
No excessive sediment builds up

f
in tanks
Inspect, lubricate and conduct

g routine test to check reliability of
pump(s)
Check condition and conduct

function test of all pump starters
h
and their controls including level
control systems
i Standby generator load test
Structural integrity of tank and

j features are not compromised
(check for crack/leaks)
No obstruction of maintenance
k
access/openings
Access into the detention tank

system is secure (out of bounds to
l public and unauthorised
personnel)
2 Yearly/as required (before year-end monsoon season)
Desilting detention tank has been

a carried out, trash screens have
been cleaned
Inspect, service, replace, lubricate

b
and test performance of pump(s)
405
BEAM Plus New Buildings Version 2.0 Appendix 9.5 – Stormwater Detention Systems
O&M Checklist
Inspect protective devices such as

c overload, earth fault, residual
current relays
Check condition and conduct

function test of all pump starters
d and controls including level control
systems. Replace faulty and worn
out parts if required
406

BEAMPlus New Buildings v2 0 (2021edition)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BEAMPlus New Buildings v2 0 (2021edition)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BEAMPlus New Buildings v2 0 (2021edition)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

(05.

1.3 Summary of Credits 8

2. Integrated Design and Construction Management (IDCM) 34

IDCM P1 Sustainability Champions – Project 36

IDCM P2 Environmental Management Plan 39

IDCM P3 Timber Used for Temporary Works 42

IDCM 1 Sustainability Champions - Design 46

IDCM 2 Complimentary Certification 49

IDCM 3 Integrated Design Process 52

IDCM 4 Life Cycle Costing 60

IDCM 6 Sustainability Champions – Construction 66

IDCM 7 Measures to Reduce Site Emissions 69

IDCM 8 Construction and Demolition Waste Recycling 79

IDCM 9 Construction IAQ Management 84

IDCM 10 Considerate Construction 87

IDCM 11 Building Management Manuals 90

IDCM 12 Operator Training plus Chemical Storage and Mixing Room 94

IDCM 13 Digital Facility Management Interface 99

IDCM 14 Occupant Engagement Platform 102

IDCM 15 Document Management System 104

IDCM 16 BIM Integration 107

IDCM 17 Design for Engagement and Education on Green Buildings 111

Copyright © 2021 BEAM Society Limited. All rights reserved.

3. Sustainable Site (SS) 113

SS P1 Minimum Landscaping Requirements 116

SS 1 Pedestrian-oriented and Low Carbon Transport 119

SS 2 Neighbourhood Amenities 128

SS 3 Building Design for Sustainable Urbanism 133

SS 4 Neighbourhood Daylight Access 138

SS 5 Noise Control for Building Equipment 141

SS 6 Light Pollution Control 143

SS 7 Biodiversity Enhancement 147

SS 8 Urban Heat Island Mitigation 153

SS 9 Immediate Neighbourhood Wind Environment 165

SS 10 Outdoor Thermal Comfort 168

SS 11 Stormwater Management 172

SS 12 Design for Climate Change Adaptation 175

4. Materials and Waste (MW) 177

MW P1 Minimum Waste Handling Facilities 178

MW 1 Building Re-use 182

MW 2 Modular and Standardised Design 185

MW 4 Design for Durability and Resilience 190

MW 5 Sustainable Forest Products 194

MW 6 Recycled Materials 198

MW 7 Ozone Depleting Substances 201

MW 8 Regional Materials 205

MW 9 Use of Green Products 207

MW 10 Life Cycle Assessment 213

MW 11 Adaptability and Deconstruction 215

MW 12 Enhanced Waste Handling Facilities 220

Copyright © 2021 BEAM Society Limited. All rights reserved.

5. Energy Use (EU) 225

EU P1 Minimum Energy Performance 227

EU 1 Low Carbon Passive Design 231

EU 2 Reduction of CO2 Emissions 240

EU 3 Peak Electricity Demand Reduction 251

EU 4 Metering and Monitoring 255

EU 5 Renewable and Alternative Energy Systems 262

EU 6 Air-Conditioning Units 267